(J7 c_UlK™- -f^o
cr^ > vZ)P^:iir .X<3:A0^^^^J^
International Library of Psychology
Philosophy and Scientific Method ~',^^\^^ P K
The Meaning of Meaning
Internationa] Library of Psychology, Philosophy, and Scientific Method
by
GENERAL EDITOR— C. K. OGDEN, M.A. (Magdalene College, Cambridge)
Philosophical Studies
The Misuse of Mind
Conflict and Dream*
Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus
Psychological Types*
Scientific Thought*
The Meaning of Meaning
Individual Pyschology
Speculations (Preface by Jacob Epstein)
The Psychology of Reasoning*
The Philosophy of " As If "
The Nature of Intelligence .
Telepathy and Clairvoyance .
The Growth of the Mind*
The Mentality of Apes
Psychology of Religious Mysticism
The Philosophy of Music
Principles of Literary Criticism
Metaphysical Foundations of Science
Thought and the Brain*
Physique and Character*
Psychology of Emotion .
Problems of Personality
The History of Materialism .
Personality* ....
Educational Psychology*
Language and Thought of the Child*
Sex and Repression in Savage Society*
Comparative Philosophy .
Character and the Unconscious* .
Social Life in the Animal World .
How Animals Find their Way About
The Social Insects ....
Theoretical Biology
Possibility* .....
The Technique of Controversy
The Symbolic Process
Political Pluralism
History of Chinese Political Thought
Integrative Psychology*
Plato's Theory of Ethics
Historical Introduction to Modern Psychology
Creative Imagination
Colour and Colour Theories .
Biological Principles
The Trauma of Birth
The Statistical Method in Economics
The Art of Interrogation
The Growth of Reason .
Human Speech . . • . •
Foundations of Geometry and Induction
The Mental Development of the Child
EiDETic Imagery ....
The Foundations of Mathematics .
The Philosophy of the Unconscious
Outlines of Greek Philosophy
The Psychology of Children's Drawings
The Theory of Legislation
The Social Life of Monkeys .
Sciences of Man in the Making
Ethical Relativity ....
The Gestalt Theory
The Spirit of Language .
The Nature of Learning
The Individual and the Community
Crime, Law, and Social Science
Dynamic Social Research
Speech Disorders ....
The Nature of Mathematics
The Neural Basis of Thought . by G. G
Law and Social Sciences
Plato's Theory of Knowledge*
Infant Speech ....
An Examination of Logical Positivism
Logical Syntax of Language .
Ideology and Utopia
Communication .....
Charles Peirce's Empiricism* .
by C.
by G. E. Moore, Litt.D.
. by Karin Stephen
W. H. R. Rivers, F.R.S.
by L. Wittgenstein
by C. G. Jung, M.D.
by C. D. Broad, Litt.D.
Ogden and I. A. Richards
by Alfred Adler
by T. E. Hulme
by EUGENIO RiGNANO
by H. Vaihinger
. by L. L. Thurstone
by R. TiscHNER
. by K. KoFFKA
by W. KoHLER
by J. H. Leuba
. by W. Pole, F.R.S.
by I. A. Richards
by E. A. BuRTT, Ph.D.
by H. Pi6ron
by Ernest Kretschmer
by J. T. MacCurdy, M.D.
in honour of Morton Prince
by F. A. Lange
by R. G. Gordon, M.D.
by Charles Fox
. by J. PlAGET
by B. Malinowski, D.Sc.
by P. Masson-Oursel
by J. H. van der Hoop
by F. Alverdes
. by E. Rabaud
by W. Morton Wheeler
. by J. VON Uexkull
. by Scott Buchanan
by B. B. Bogoslovsky
by J. F. Markky
by K. C. HsLAO
. by Liang Chi-Chao
. by W. M. Marston
by R. C. Lodge
. by G. Murphy
by June E. Downey
by Christine Ladd-Franklin
. by J. H. WooDGER
by Otto Rank
by P. S. Florence
. by E. R. Hamilton
. by Frank Lorimer
by Sir Richard Paget
. by Jean Nicod
. by K. BuHLER
by E. R. Jaensch
by F. P. Ramsey
by E. VON Hartmann
. by E. Zeller
by Helga Eng
by Jeremy Bentham
by S. Zuckermam
by E. A. Kirkpatrick
by E. A. Westermarck
by Bruno Petermann
. by K. VossLER
by George Humphrey
by Wen Kwei Llao
by Jerome Michael and M. J. Adler
by J. J. Hader and E. C. Lindeman
by S. M. Stinch FIELD
by Max Black
Campion and Sir Grafton Elliot Smith
by Huntington Cairns
. by F. M. Corn ford
by M. M. Lewis
. by J. R. Weinberg
. by Rudolf Carnap
. by Karl Mannheim
by Karl Brixton
by Justus Buchler
Asterisks denote that other books by the same author are included in the series.
The
Meaning of Meaning
A Study of
The Influence of Language upon Thought
and of
The Science of Symbolism
BY
C. K. OGDEN and LA. RICHARDS
With Supplementary Essays by
B. MALINOWSKI and F. G. CROOKSHANK
PH.D., D.SC. M.D., F.R.C.P.
SEVENTH EDITION
NEW YORK
HARCOURT, BRACE AND COMPANY
LONDON: KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. LTD.
1945
OTHER WORKS BY THE SAME
AUTHORS
The Foundations of Esthetics. With 17 Illustrations (Allen & Unwin,
1922; 2nd Edition, 1925). A concise exposition of the theories of
Beauty outlined in Chapter VII of the present work. (In collabora-
tion with James Wood).
By C. K. OGDEN
The Meaning of Psychology (New York, Harper, 1926). A general
introduction to the scientific study of language.
The A. B.C. of Psychology (London, Kegan Paul, 1929; 3rd Edition,
1934). A revised and abbreviated version of the above, adapted
to English requirements.
Basic English (Psyche Miniatures, 1930; 4th Edition, 1935). An applica-
tion of Chapters V and VI of the present work to the problem of a
universal language.
Benthani's Theory of Fictions (International Library of Psychology, 1932).
Jeremy Bentham, 1832-2032 {Psyche Miniatures, 1932). Opposition
(Psyche Miniatures, 1932).
The Problem of the Continuation School (P. S. King, 1914). With
R. H. Best.
Fecundity versus Civilization (Allen and Unwin, 1916). With Adelyne
More.
The General Basic English Dictionary (London, Evans, 1940; New
York, Norton. 1942).
Basic by Picture Stamps (Basic English Publishing Co., 1941).
Jeremy Bentham, 1832—2032 [Psyche Miniatures, 1932).
By I. A. RICHARDS
Principles of Literary Criticism (International Library of Psychology,
1925; 5th Edition, 1934). An application of the methods of
Symbolism, as outlined in Chapters VI and X of the present work,
to the discussion of literary and aesthetic questicwis; together with
a theory of Value.
Science and Poetry {Psyche Miniatures, 1926; 2nd Edition, 1935). A
further treatment, in relation to contemporary poetry, of the
conflict between the referential and emotive functions of language
distinguished in Chapter X.
Practical Criticism (London, Kegan Paul; New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1929; 3rd Edition, 1935). A study of the process of interpretation
with a development of the theory of language- functions introduced
in Chapter X, analyses of many current general terms, and much
further evidence of the need for improved educational methods.
Mencius on the Mind (International Library of Psychology, 1932).
Coleridge on Imagination (London, Kegan Paul; New York, Harcourt
Brace, 1934).
Interpretation in Teaching (London, Kegan Paul, 1938).
How to Read a Page (London, Kegan Paul, 1943).
Basic Rules of Reason {Psyche Miniatures, 1933).
PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY LUND HUMPHRIES AND CO. LTD.
LONDON AND BRADFORD.
PREFACE
To THE First Edition
The following pages, some of which were written as
long ago as 1910, have appeared for the most part in
periodical form during 1920-22, and arise out of an
attempt to deal directly with difficulties raised by the
influence of Language upon Thought.
It is claimed that in the science of Symbolism, 1 the
study of that influence, a new avenue of approach to
traditional problems hitherto regarded as reserved for
the philosopher and the metaphysician, has been found.
And further that such an investigation of these problems
is in accordance with the methods of the special sciences
whose contributions have enabled the new study to be
1 The word Symbolism has certain historical associations through
the various dictionary meanings of 'symbol,' which are worth noting.
In addition to its constant underlying sense of a sign or token (some-
thing ' put together ') the term has already enjoyed two distinct ^oywi^s.
The first, traceable to Cyprian, applies to the Creed regarded as the
'sign ' of a Christian as distinguished from a heathen, as when Henry
VIII talks about " the three Creeds or Symbols." A mythological
perversion of the derivation (1450-1550, Myrr. our Ladye III, 312)
states that " Thys crede ys called Simbolum, that ys to say a gatherynge
of morselles, for eche of the xii. apostles put therto a morsel." Other
historical details will be found in Schlesinger's Geschichte des Symbols
(1923)-.
Secondly, there is the widespread use of the adjective Symbolist in
the nineties to characterize those French poets who were in revolt
against all forms of literal and descriptive writing, and who attached
symbolic or esoteric meanings to particular objects, words and sounds.
Similarly, art critics loosely refer to painters whose object is ' suggestion *
rather than 'representation' or 'construction,' as symbolists.
In the following pages, however, a standpoint is indicated from which
both these vague captions can be allotted their place in the system of
signs and symbols ; and stress is laid upon those aspects of symbolism
whose neglect has given rise to so many false problems, both in aesthetics
and in philosophy.
vi PREFACE
differentiated from vaguer speculations with which it
might appear to be associated.
Amongst grammarians in particular a sense of
uneasiness has prevailed. It has been felt that the
study of language as hitherto conducted by traditional
methods has failed to face fundamental issues in spite
of its central position as regards all human intercourse.
Efforts to make good the omission have been frequent
throughout the present century, but volumes by pains-
taking philologists bearing such titles as The Philosophy
of Language^ Principes de Linguistique Theorique ' and
Voraussetzungen zur Grundlegung einer Kritik der allge-
meinen Grammatik und Sprachphilosophie have, as a rule,
been devoid of fruitful suggestion. They have neither
discovered the essential problems nor, with few excep-
tions, such as Breal's Semantics y opened up interesting
though subordinate fields of investigation. ** Breadth
of vision is not conspicuous in modern linguistics,"
says so well-informed an authority as Jespersen in his
latest work ; and he attributes this narrow outlook to
**the fact that linguists have neglected all problems
connected with the valuation of language." Unfortun-
ately, Jespersen*s own recommendations for a normative
approach, the three questions which he urges philolo-
gists to consider —
What is the criterion by which one word or one
form should be preferred to another?
Are the changes that we see gradually taking place
in languages to be considered as on the whole bene-
ficial, or the opposite?
Would it be possible to construct an international
language ? —
hardly touch the central problem of meaning, or the
relations of thought and language ; nor can they be
profitably discussed by philologists without a thorough
examination of this neglected preliminary. And, as we
shall see in our ninth chapter, philosophers and psy-
PREFACE vii
chologists, who are often supposed to be occupied with
such researches, have done regrettably little to help
them.
There are some who find difficulty in considering any
matter unless they can recognize it as belonging to
what is called 'a subject* and who recognize a subject
as something in which, somewhere at least. Professors
give instruction and perhaps Examinations are under-
gone. These need only be reminded that at one time
there were no subjects and until recently only five. But
the discomfort experienced in entering the less familiar
fields of inquiry is genuine. In more frequented topics
the main roads, whether in the right places or not, are
well marked, the mental traveller is fairly well assured
of arriving at some well-known spot, whether worth
visiting or not, and will usually find himself in respect-
able and accredited company. But with a new or
border-line subject he is required to be more self-
dependent ; to decide for himself where the greater
interest and importance lies and as to the results to be
expected. He is in the position of a prospector. If
the venture here recorded should be found to assist any
others in the study of symbols, the authors will consider
it justified. Needless to say they believe it to be of
greater importance than this.
In order at least not to fail in the more modest aim of
calling attention to a neglected group of problems,
they have added as an Appendix a number of selected
passages indicative of the main features of similar
undertakings by other writers in the past.
Of their own contributions towards the foundations
of a science of Symbolism the following seem to them
to have most value :
(i) An account of interpretation in causal terms by
which the treatment of language as a system of signs
becomes capable of results, among which may be
noticed the beginning of a division between what
cannot be intelligibly talked of and what can.
viii PREFACE
(2) A division of the functions of language into
two groups, the symbolic and the emotive. Many
notorious controversies in the sciences it is believed
can be shown to derive from confusion between these
functions, the same words being used at once to make
statements and to excite attitudes. No escape from the
fictitious differences so produced is possible without an
understanding of the language functions. With this
understanding it is believed that such controversies
as those between Vitalism and Mechanism, Materialism
and Idealism, Religion and Science, etc., would lapse,
and further the conditions would be restored under
which a general revival of poetry would be possible.
(3) A dissection and ventilation of * meaning ' the
centre of obscurantism both in the theory of knowledge
and in all discussion.
(4) An examination of what are confusedly known as
* verbal questions.' Nothing is commoner in discussion
than to hear some point of difference described as
purely or largely * verbal.' Sometimes the disputants
are using the same words for different things, sometimes
different words for the same things. So far as either
is the case a freely mobilizable technique of definition
meets the difficulty. But frequently the disputants are
using the same (or different) words for nothing, and
here greater modesty due to a livelier realization of the
language situation is recommendable.
Hitherto no science has been able to deal directly
with the issue, since what is fundamentally involved
is the theory of Signs in general and their interpreta-
tion. The subject is one peculiarly suitable for colla-
boration, and in this way only-is there reasonable hope
of bringing to a practical issue an undertaking which
has been abandoned in despair by so many enterprising
but isolated inquirers, and of dispelling the suspicion
of eccentricity which the subject has so often evoked.
Historical research shows that since the lost work of
Antisthenes and Plato's Cratylus there have been seven
PREFACE ix
chief methods of attack — the Grammatical (Aristotle,
Dionysius Thrax), the Metaphysical (The Nominalists,
Meinong), the Philological (Home Tooke, Max Miiller),
the Psychological (Locke, Stout), the Logical (Leibnitz,
Russell) the Sociological (Steinthal, Wundt) and the
Terminological (Baldwin, Husserl). From all these,
as well as such independent studies as those of Lady
Welby, Marty, and C. S. Pierce, from Mauthner's Kritic
der Sprachcy Erdmann's Die Bedeutung des Wortes^ and
Taine's De V Intelligence^ the writers have derived instruc-
tion and occasionally amusement.
To Dr Malinowski the authors owe a very special
debt. His return to England as their work was passing
through the press enabled them to enjoy the advantage
of his many years of reflection as a field-worker in
Ethnology on the peculiarly difficult border-lands of
linguistics and psychology. His unique combination
of practical experience with a thorough grasp of
theoretical principles renders his agreement on so
many of the more heterodox conclusions here reached
particularly encouraging. The contribution from his
pen dealing with the study of primitive languages,
which appears as a Supplement, will, the writers feel
sure, be of value not only to ethnologists but to all who
take a living interest in words and their ways.
The practical importance of a science of Symbolism
even in its present undeveloped form needs little
emphasis. All the more elaborate forms of social and
intellectual life are affected by changes in our attitude
towards, and our use of, words. How words work is
commonly regarded as a purely theoretical matter, of
little interest to practical persons. It is true that the
investigation must at times touch upon somewhat
abstruse questions, but its disregard by practical
persons is nevertheless short-sighted. The view that
language works well enough as it is, can only be held
by those who use it mierely in such affairs as could be
conducted without it — the business of the paper-boy
X PREFACE
or the butcher, for instance, where all that needs to be
referred to can equally well be pointed at. None but
those who shut their eyes to the hasty re-adaptation
to totally new circumstances which the human race has
during the last century been blindly endeavouring to
achieve, can pretend that there is no need to examine
critically the most important of all the instruments of
civilization. New millions of participants in the control
of general affairs must now attempt to form personal
opinions upon matters which were once left to a few.
At the same time the complexity of these matters has
immensely increased. The old view that the only
access to a subject is through prolonged study of it,
has, if it be true, consequences for the immediate future
which have not yet been faced. The alternative is to
raise the level of communication through a direct
study of its conditions, its dangers and its difficulties.
The practical side of this undertaking is, if communi-
cation be taken in its widest sense. Education.
Convinced as they are of the urgency of a stricter
examination of language from a point of view which
is at present receiving no attention, the authors have
preferred to publish this essay in its present form
rather than to wait, perhaps indefinitely, until, in lives
otherwise sufficiently occupied, enough moments of
leisure had accumulated for it to be rewritten in a more
complete and more systematized form. They are, they
believe, better aware of its failings than most critics
will suppose, and especially of those due to the
peculiar difficulties which a fundamental criticism of
language inevitably raises for the expositors thereof.
For two reasons the moment seems to have arrived
when an effort to draw attention to Meaning may meet
with support. In the first place there is a growing
readiness amongst psychologists to admit the import-
ance of the problem. ** If the discovery of the psycho-
logical nature of Meaning were completely successful,"
writes Professor Pear {Remembering and Forgetting^ 1923,
PREFACE xi
p. 59), ** it might put an end to psychology altogether."
Secondly, the realization that men of learning and sin-
cerity are lamentably at the mercy of forms of speech
cannot long be delayed, when we find for instance
Lord Hugh Cecil concluding a reasoned statement
of his attitude to Divorce with the words ^^The one
thing, as it seems to me, that Christians are bound,
as Christians, to resist, is any proposal to call tliat
marriage which, according to the revelation of Christ,
is adultery'' {The Times, Jan. 2, 1923). The italics are
ours.
It is inevitable in such a work that emphasis should
be laid on what to some may appear to be obvious,
and on the other hand that terms should be employed
which will render portions of the inquiry less easy
than others, owing to the alteration of the angle from
which the subject is to be viewed. At the same time
it is hoped that even those who have no previous
acquaintance with the topics covered may, with a
little patience, be able to follow the whole discussion,
condensed though it has occasionally been in order
to keep the exposition within reasonable compass. A
full list of Contents, designed to be read as part of the
book, has therefore been provided.
A Summary, a few Appendices on special problems,
and many Cross-references have been added for the
benefit of readers who have not the opportunity of
devoting equal attention to every part of the field, or
who desire to pursue the study further.
C. K. O.
I. A. R.
Magdalene College,
Cambridge,
January 1923.
PREFACE
To THE Second Edition
The peculiar reception of the First Edition of the
present work by persons of the most diverse pre-
dilections, the fact that within two years of its publica-
tion it was officially used in a number of Universities,
including Columbia, and in particular the marked
interest which it excited in America, led the authors
to meet, in New York, in the Spring of 1926, for
purposes of discussion and revision. As a result it
has been possible to take into account the requirements
of a wider audience than that to which the book was
primarily addressed. Not only have some local
allusions been modified but various improvements in
emphasis and structure will, it is hoped, have lightened
the task of the reader.
At the same time no change in the positions
maintained has been found necessary. The authors,
however, have not been idle, and some reference to
the supplementary works for which they have been
responsible may not be out of place. Principles of
Literary Criticism (I. A. R.) endeavours to provide
for the emotive function of language the same critical
foundation as is here attempted for the symbolic.
Word Magic (C. K. O.) will present the historical and
philological apparatus by the aid of which alone can
current linguistic habits be explained — and it has been
possible to reduce the inordinate length of an original
Chapter II in view of this independent study. A
general introduction to the psychological problems
of language study will be found in The Meaning of
Psychology (C. K. O.) while Science and Poetry (I. A. R.)
discusses the place and future of literature in our
civilization.
xii
PREFACE xiii
But these additions still leave much of the new
ground opened by The Meaning of Meaning to be
explored. Chief among these desiderata are the
development of an educational technique whereby
both the child and the adult may be assisted to a
better use of language, the investigation of the general
principles of notation with its bearing on the problem
of a universal scientific language, and the analytical
task of discovering a grammar by means of which
translation from one Symbol-system to another could
be controlled. These are projects which demand an
Institute of Linguistic Research with headquarters in
Geneva, New York, and Peking.
Cambridge,
C. K. O.
June, 1926. I. A. R.
PREFACE
To THE Third Edition
The demand for a Third Edition affords us an
opportunity of correcting a number of minor errors and
discrepancies. Of the desiderata to which reference
is made above, the second and the third have been the
object of attention in Basic English (C. K. O.), a system
of English adapted to the requirements of a Universal
Language, and described in Vols. IX and X of Psyche
(1928-30); with the first, Practical Criticism (I. A. R.),
an educational application of Chapter X, is concerned,
and the experience gained by its author as Visiting
Professor at Peking (1929-30) makes the need for further
work upon all these questions appear still more urgent.
Cambridge. C K. U.
January, 1930. \^ A. R.
PREFACE
To THE Fourth Edition
In this edition we have removed a few inconsistencies
and obscurities noted during a correspondence with
Dr. Ishibashi who has translated the work into Japanese
(1936).
Since the appearance of the Third Edition, Benthams
Theory of Fictions (C. K. O.) has focussed attention on a
neglected contribution to the subject which is of more
than historical interest. Mencius on the Mind (I. A. R.)
examines the difficulties which beset the translator and
explores the technique of multiple definition, which is
further elucidated in Basic Rules of Reason (I. A. R.).
Coleridge on Imagination (I. A. R.) offers a new estimate
of Coleridge*s theory in the light of a more adequate
evaluation of emotive language. Opposition (C. K. O.)
is an analysis of an aspect of definition which is of
particular importance for linguistic simplification.
C. K. O.
Cambridge
ilav, 1936.
I. A. R.
PREFACE
To THE Sixth Edition
The curiosity aroused by references to this work
in a number of popular applications of the prin-
ciples of linguistic therapy here advocated, and by
the widespread adoption of Basic English as an
educational method, has necessitated further print-
ings. In the fifth and sixth editions we have made
a few further changes, and have expanded certain
parts of Chapters II and X in separate publications
—Psycheyo\s.XVl-^Vlll(C.K.O.),d.nA Interpre-
tation in Teaching and How to Read a Page (I. A. R.).
C. K. O.
Cambridge, tax-*
September, 1943. I. A. K.
CONTENTS
Preface to the First Edition
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fourth Edition
Preface to the Sixth Edition
PAGE
V
xii
xiii
xiv
xiv
Chapter I
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS
Meaning, the central problem of Language, neglected by the
sciences most concerned, 1. Its treatment by philosophers to
be considered in detail as the analysis proceeds, particularly in
Chapter VIII. The philological approach. — Professor Post-
gate's clear formulation, 2. The failure of Semantics ; Br6al, 2.
F. de Saussure and la langue, 4. The ethnologists ; Boas, 6.
The development of psychology makes a scientific treatment of
symbols possible, 8.
The importance of Symbols in all discussion and inquiry. —
Symbolism the study of their influence on thought, 8. The
many functions of symbols. — Their function as organizing and
communicating reference to be first considered, 9. Their emotive
functions postponed till Chapter VII. A convenient diagram of
Symbol, Reference and Referent, 10. The relation of words to
things indirect; through Interpretation, 11. The dangers of
verbal shorthand, 12. Advance in Science through its rejection. —
Relativity ; Psycho-analysis, 13.
Misinterpretation, 14. Complexities due to misdirection ;
Lying, 16. Such derivative problems of secondary importance, 19.
The necessity for a theory of Interpretation based on our
observation of others, 19. The dubiety of Introspection. —
Impossibility of a solipsistic account of communication ; Baldwin,
20. The variety and omnipresence of Sign-situations, 21. The
peculiar place of Symbols, 23.
. Chapter II
THE POWER OF WORDS
Symbols as a perennial source of wonder and illusion. The
prevalence of symbol-worship among the uneducated, 24.
Language a vehicle of the most primitive ideas and emotions of
mankind, 25. The name as soul. — Secret names, 27.
xvl CONTENTS
Verbal superstition still rife. — Reasons for its wide diffusion. —
Purely verbal constructions in modem philosophy, 29. The
alleged world of Being ; Bertrand Russell as a neo-Platonist, 30.
The Greek view of language. — Platonism as the product of
primitive word-magic, 31. Heracleitus, Pythagoras, 32. Par-
menides. — Plato's ' ideas ' developed from the Pythagorean
name-soul. — Neglect of Plato's Cratylus, 33. Aristotle's depend-
ence on words ; his logic based on grammar. — Testimony of
Whewell and Gomperz. — Linguistic tricks characteristic of
Greek dialectic, 34. Mauthner's critique of Aristotelian ver-
balism.— The De Interpretatione, 35. Verbal superstitions in
Rome, 36. Evidence that the Greeks realized the misleading
influence of language, 37. Buddhism even more explicit. — l^ut
Aenesidemus and the Sceptics alone in antiquity approached the
problem of signs scientifically, 38.
The East the true home of verbal superstitioji. — Spells : verbal
magic and verbal medicine, 39. Verbal magic still practised
freely to-day. — But in new forms. — Logicians as mystics, 40.
Rignano on the verbal carapace.— Affective resonance in meta-
physics, 42. Word-magic in modem medicine, 43.
Only by an analysis of sign and symbol situations can we
escape such influences. — The existence of the problem only
realized in recent times. — Forerunners of a scientific treatment
from WiUiam of Occam to Mauthner, 43.
The next step. A theory of signs indispensable to an analysis
of the meaning of symbols. — Light thrown on verbal magic by
this theory, 47.
Chapter III
SIGN-SITUATIONS
The theory of Meaning dependent upon the theory of Signs. —
Reference, i.e., the relation between a thought and what it is
of, not unique, 48. The alleged direct relation of acquaintance
with ' propositions ' ; Keynes, Lipps, Husserl, van Ginneken, 49.
Previous psychological accounts of Knowledge — in terms of
association, apperception and suggestion — insufficiently dynamic.
— Development in terms of mnemic causation ; Semon, 51.
Illustrations and explanations ; Lloyd Morgan's caterpillar, 52.
The defects of causal language, 54. Restatement in terms of
recurrent contexts, 55. Examples of contexts psychological and
external, 56. Definition of a Context, 58. How contexts recur. —
Generality of contexts and their probability, 59.
Defects of accounts based on imagery. — Images as luxuries of
mental life, 59. Their dangers, 61. Russell. — The context
theory of reference illustrated in the difficult case of expectation. —
The truth or falsity of a reference merely a question of the recur-
rence or non-recurrence of a context. — Extension of this view to
CONTENTS xvii
expectations whose signs are themselves beliefs, and further to
all cases of interpretation from particular to particular, 62.
Extension to general references, 63. The generahty and par-
ticularity of primitive references not the symbolic generality
and particularity of logic. — The conditions for general refer-
ences, 64. Inclusive and non-inclusive references, i.e., references
to all and some, 65. The detailed investigation of contexts a
future task of psychology, 66.
The referents of false beliefs, 66. Propositions as references,
i.e., relational characters of mental processes. ' Logical form,'
as the structure of references. — Inclusion of references in com-
pound references, 68. All complex references analysable into
simple references, i.e., ideas or concepts which are indefinite and
true, 69. Ideas and beliefs different only in complexity and in
affective- volitional characters. — Definiteness of reference obtained
only through complexity, 70. A false reference composed of
true simple reterences, 71. Illustrations of compound false
beliefs, 72.
The conformity of the contextual theory of reference with
modern scientific attitudes. — Its dependence upon some theory
of probability, 73. Suggestions towards a theory of probability,
74. Misinterpretation, relevance, emotional interference, 75.
Chapter IV
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION
The theory of interpretation applied to perception, 77. The
difficulties of the question ' What do we see ? ' due to the neglect
of the sign-situations involved ; Helmholtz, 78. And to bad
symbolic procedure, 80.
Modifications of our sense organs as the initial signs which we
interpret, 80. Direct apprehending as a happening in the
nerves. — Dismissal of the charge of materialism, 81. This view
merely a rounding off of the most comprehensive system of
verified references yet obtained. As such at present unassailable,
82. Some notorious paradoxes removed by the exhibition of
the sign-situations present, 83. Such expansion of symbols as
a general anti-metaphysical method, 85.
Chapter V
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM
The postulates of communication. — Logic as the science of
systematic symbolization, 87.
The Canon of Singularity. The symbols of mathematics
peculiar. — The nature of mathematics, 88. Wittgenstein, Rig-
XVlll
CONTENTS
nano, James Mill, 89. The sameness of references, 90. Symbol
substitution, 91.
The Canon of Definition. Identity of reference and identity of
referent.— Difficulties in discussion, 92.
The Canon of Expansion. The source of 'philosophy.'—
Levels of reference.— Expansion must show the sign-situations
involved 93. Symbolic overgrowths and contractions.— Uni-
versals '' symbolic conveniences.— The illusion of a world of
'being' 94. Russell, 96. Language as an instrument. 98.
Incorrect distinguished from false symbols.— The Universe of
discourse, 102.
The Canon of Actuality. The discovery of the referent.
Bogus referents, 103. Examples of procedure, 104.
The Canon of Compatibihty. The avoidance of nonsense and
' antinomies.' The ' Laws of Thought,' 105.
The Canon of Individuality. The 'place' of a referent.
' Place ' as a symbolic accessory, 106. Translation and expan-
sion of false propositions.— Importance of expansion in education
and controversy, 107.
Chapter VI
DEFINITION
Four difficulties confronting a theory of definition, 109. (i)
Verbal and ' real ' definitions, 110. (n Definitions and state-
ments, (iii) Definitions ad ^oc. -The universe of discourse,
(iv) Intensive and extensive definition. 111.
The technique of definition. -The selection of starting-points
with which to\onnect doubtful referents. -Types of ^ndamental
connection few in number. — Reasons for this, 113. Cntena
of starting-points, 114. The merits of gesture-language, 115.
Complex Ind indirect relations, 116. Enumeration of common
routes of definition, 117.
Application of this technique to discussion.— Fallacy of seeking
/A. d^efinition of a symbol-Systematic and <>^^f^^^^'^^^^^^ll
121. Non-symbolic, i.e.. mdefinable terms 123^ Example of
• good,' 124 Influence of purpose on vocabulary, 126. Error
of seeking common element in various uses. f^^J^' f^
habit 128. Difficulty of introducmg new terms, 180. Ihe
Me^od of Separation'; 131. Rules of ^'^^^\-J^\^i'^'^tf^
controversial tricks.— Schopenhauer's suggestion, 132 Three
subterfuges distinguished : the phonetic (Mill's case) ; the hypo-
tetic W utraluistic. 133. Further «^feg""f/Jf 'Sf.e^e,-
troversial malpractices. Dangerous words . I"'*^"*^', ^f ^ ?ql
atel, Mendicants (Matthew Arnold) Nomads (Locke), 134.
The value of a transferable technique, ld«.
CONTENTS xix
Chapter VII
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY
The perennial discussion of Beauty a suitable field in which
to test the theory of definition. — The chaos in aesthetics, 137.
Rupert Brooke ; Benedetto Croce, 140. Separation of the uses
of the word, 141. Interrelations of these uses, 144. Cognate
and allied terms, 145.
The multiple functions of language. — Frequency of apparent
nonsense in the best critics ; Longinus, Coleridge, Bradley,
Mackail, 147. The symbolic and the emotive use of words. —
Statements and appeals. — The speaker and the listener, 149.
The symbolic and emotive functions distinct. — Claim to truth
as the test. — Dangers in applying the test, 150.
Neglect of this multiplicity by grammarians ; von der
Gabelentz, Vendryes, 151. The speculative approach, 153.
Bergson, Stephen, 154. Solution of the intellect versus intuition
problem, 155. ' Virtual knowledge ' as aesthetic appreciation,
156. Repose and satisfaction in Synaesthesis. — Interferences
between language uses, 157. D. H. Lawrence and the sun, 159.
Chapter VIII
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS
Lack of attention to Meaning on the part of philosophers,
160. Summary of the 1920-21 Symposium in Mind ; Schiller,
Russell, Joachim, Sidgwick, Strong, 161. Contemporaneous dis-
cussion of aphasia in Brain. — Inability of current psychology to
assist neurologists ; Parsons, 162.
Recent American contributions. — The Critical Realists, 163.
The ubiquity of the term * meaning ' in their discussions. —
Drake, Lovejoy, Pratt, Rogers, Santayana, Sellars, Strong.
Uncritical use of the word ' meaning ' their chief bond of union,
164. Particularly reprehensible display by Miinsterberg, 169.
Appreciation of Miinsterberg ; Professor Moore, 173. Vocabulary
of the latter, 174.
Further typical examples ; Broad, Nettleship, Haldane, Royce,
177. Keynes, 178. Official psychology ; seven professors, 179.
Psycho-analysis ; Putnam. Pragmatists, 180. Historians.
Even the clearest thinkers ; G. E. Moore, 181. Artists, theo-
logians and others, 182. A crescendo of emotional asseveration,
183.
Chapter IX
THE MEANING OF MEANING
Desirability of improving on the linguistic practice of philo-
sophers.— The framing of a list of definitions as in Chapter VII,
XX CONTENTS
185. Sixteen main definitions elicited, 186. Discussion of these
seriatim. Meaning as an intrinsic property of words (I) and as
an unanalysable relation (II) dismissed. Consideration of dic-
tionary meaning (III) postponed. Connotation (IV) and Denota-
tion as logical artifacts ; Johnson. Russell, Mill, 187. Essences
(V) as connotations hypostatized, 188. Meaning as projected
activity (VI) a metaphor, Schiller. Meaning as intention (VII)
analysed ; Joseph, Gardiner, 191. Complications due to mis-
direction, 194. Affective- volitional aspects, 195. Meaning as
place in a system (VIII), 196. A vague usage. This sometimes
narrowed down to meaning as practical consequences (IX),
197. William James and the pragmatists. Or to meaning as
what is implied (X). Meaning as emotional accompaniments
(XI), 198. Urban. 199.
The doctrine of Natural Signs (XII) .—Examples, 199. The
psycho-analyst's ' meaning ' as ' cause of.' Meaning as psycho-
logical context (XIIIa) in the contextual theory of reference.
Further explanations of this theory. 201. Instances and objec-
tions. Necessity of checking the evidence of introspection, 201.
The inconclusiveness of immediate conviction, 202. Why we
must rely on symbols in abstract thinking, 203. Meaning as
referent (XIIIb) in the contextual theory of reference. Corre-
spondence theory of truth unnecessary. Speaker and listener
again, 205. Delimitation of contexts the problem for the theory
of communication. Meaning as what the speaker ought to be
referring to (XIV) ; Good Use. 206. Dictionaries as marking
overlaps between references of symbols. 207. Complications in
meaning due to symbol situations (XV and XVI), 208.
Chapter X
SYMBOL SITUATIONS
The context theory of reference applied to the use of words. —
The case of the hearer to be considered first. 209. The recogni-
tion of sounds as words a preliminary stage. This not necessarily
a conscious performance. These processes in infancy, 210.
Levels of interpretation. 211.
No strict correlation between complexity of symbols and com-
plexity of references. 211. The contexts required for the use
of proper names simpler than those for descriptive phrases. —
Reasons and illustrations, 212. The use of symbols to facilitate
abstraction. — Words acquired through other words! Metaphor
as the primitive symbolization of abstraction. 213.
The processes of symbolization in the speaker. Marked
differences between individuals in this respect, 214. Varied
degrees of dependence of reference upon symbol. 215. Great
practical importance of these differences, 216. The speaker
CONTENTS xxi
sometimes word-free, sometimes word-dependent, 217. Light
thrown upon these processes by pathology. — Aphasia, 218.
Different levels at which failure may occur. — The bearing of this
upon Grammar. — Grammar as Natural History of symbol systems.
— Good use as dependent upon Universes of discourse, 220.
The real task of Grammar as a normative science, 221. The
study of symbols apart from the referential and emotive functions
a mere pastime, 222.
The multiplicity of the language functions, (i) Strict sym-
bolization. (ii) Symbols as signs of the attitude of the Speaker
to his audience, 224. (iii) As signs of his attitude to his referent,
(iv) As instruments for the promotion of purposes, (v) As signs
of facility and difficulty in reference, 225.
These functions probably exhaustive. Sentence-form as a
compromise between symbolization and the emotive factors,
226. Illustrations of their interplay, 227. The problems of
Translation, 228. Neglect of this multiplicity by grammarians. —
Two functions sometimes recognized, 230. The alleged neglect
of the listener. Wundt's use of Ausdruck. Dittrich, von
Humboldt, de Saussure, Martinak and others on the listener,
231. Brunot's method, 232.
Illustrations of compromises between language functions, 233.
Subordination. — Poetic language the chief instance of this. —
The verbal resources of the poet. — Lafcadio Heam's description
of words, 235. Shelley and the skylark, 238. Rhythmic,
metrical and other effects of words, 239. Emotional use of
metaphor. The influence of these effects on strict symbolization,
240. Confusions due to misunderstanding of this influence,
241.
Sociological and scientific consequences of a better under-
standing of language in general. — The urgency of further investi-
gations, 241. The opportunity now open. The emergence of a
separate science. — Its scope and prospects, 242.
SUMMARY .
A T^K T^ T-* "v T T^v T yy T~^ r~y
•
•
•
PAGB
. 243
APPENDICES —
A. On Grammar
. 251
B. On Contexts
.
.
.
. 263
C. Aenesidemus' Theory of Signs
.
.
. 266
D. Some Moderns —
1. Husserl
268
4.
Gomperz
. 274
2. Russell .
273
5.
Baldwin
. 277
3. Frege
273
6.
Peirce .
. 279
E. On Negative Facts
.
.
.
. 291
xxii • CONTENTS
SUPPLEMENTS
PAGE
I. The Problem of Meaning in Primitive Languages, by
B. Malinowski, Ph.D., D.Sc, Reader in Social
Anthropology, London School of Economics . . 296
II. The Importance of a Theory of Signs and a Critique of
Language in the Study of Medicine, by F. G.
Crookshank, M.D., F.R.C.P 337
INDEX OF SUBJECTS 357
INDEX OF NAMES .361
"All life comes back to the question of our speech — the medium
through which we communicate." — Henry James.
"Error is never so difficult to he destroyed as when it has its root
in Language." — Bentham.
" We have to make use of language, which is made up necessarily
of preconceived ideas. Such ideas unconsciously held are the most
dangerous of all." — Poincar^.
"By the grammatical structure of a group of languages every-
thing runs smoothly for one kind of philosophical system, whereas
the way is as it wore barred for certain other possibilities."
— Nietzsche.
"An Englishman, a Frenchman, a German, and an Italian
cannot by any means bring themselves to think quite alike, at least
on subjects that involve any depth of sentiment : they have not the
verbal means." — Prof. J. S. Mackenzie.
" In Primitive Thought the name and object named are associated
in such wise that the one is regarded as a part of the other. The
imperfect separation of words from things characterizes Greek
speculation in general." — Herbert Spencer.
" The tendency has always been strong to believe that whatever
receives a name must be an entity or being, having an independent
existence of its own : and if no real entity answering to the name
could be found, men did not for that reason suppose that none
existed, but imagined that it was something peculiarly abstruse and
mysterious, too high to be an object of sense." — J. S. Mill.
" Nothing is more usual than for philosophers to encroach on
the province of grammarians, and to engage in disputes of words,
while they imagine they are handling controversies of the deepest
importance and concern." — Hume.
" Men content themselves with the same words as other people
use, as if the very sound necessarily carried the same meaning."
— Locke.
*' A verbal discussion may be important or unimportant, hut it
is at least desirable to know that it is verbal."
— Sir G. Cornewall Lewis.
" Scientific controversies constantly resolve themselves into differ-
ences about the meaning of words ." — Prof. A. Schuster.
THE MEANING OF MEANING
CHAPTER I
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS
Let us get nearer to the fire, so that we can see what we are saying.
— The Bubis of Fernando Po.
The influence of Language upon Thought has attracted
the attention of the wise and foolish alike, since Lao
Tse came long ago to the conclusion —
" He who knows does not speak, he who speaks does not know."
Sometimes, in fact, the wise have in this field
proved themselves the most foolish. Was it not the
great Bentley, Master of Trinity College, Cambridge,
Archdeacon of Bristol, and holder of two other livings
besides, who declared : ** We are sure, from the names
of persons and places mentioned in Scripture before
the Deluge, not to insist upon other arguments, that
Hebrew was the primitive language of mankind"?
On the opposite page are collected other remarks on
the subject of language and its Meaning, and whether
wise or foolish, they at least raise questions to which,
sooner or later, an answer is desirable. In recent years,
indeed, the existence and importance of this problem
of Meaning have been generally admitted, but by some
sad chance those who have attempted a solution have
too often been forced to relinquish their ambition —
whether through old age, like Leibnitz, or penury, like
C. S. Peirce, or both. Even the methods by which
it is to be attacked have remained in doubt. Each
science has tended to delegate the unpleasant task to
2 THE MEANING OF MEANING
another. With the errors and omissions of meta-
physicians we shall be much concerned in the sequel,
and philologists must bear their share of the guilt.
Yet it is a philologist who, of recent years, has,
perhaps, realized most clearly the necessity of a broader
treatment.
*' Throughout the whole history of the human
race," wrote the late Dr Postgate, ** there have been
no questions which have caused more heart-searchings,
tumults, and devastation than questions of the corre-
spondence of words to facts. The mere mention of
such words as * religion,* * patriotism,' and * property '
is sufficient to demonstrate this truth. Now, it is the
investigation of the nature of the correspondence
between word and fact, to use these terms in the widest
sense, which is the proper and the highest problem of
the science of meaning. That every living word is
rooted in facts of our mental consciousness and history
it would be impossible to gainsay ; but it is a very
different matter to determine what these facts may be.
The primitive conception is undoubtedly that the name
is indicative, or descriptive, of the thing. From which
it would follow at once that from the presence of the
name you could argue to the existence of the things
This is the simple conception of the savage."
In thus stressing the need for a clear analysis of the
relation between words and facts as the essential of a
theory of Meaning, Dr Postgate himself was fully aware
that at some point the philosophical and psychological
aspects of that theory cannot be avoided. When he
wrote (1896), the hope was not unreasonable that the
science of Semantics would do something to bridge
the gulf. But, although M. Breal's researches drew
attention to a number of fascinating phenomena in the
history of language, and awakened a fresh interest in
the educational possibilities of etymology, the net result
was disappointing. That such disappointment was
inevitable may be seen, if we consider the attitude to
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 3
language implied by such a passage as the following.
The use of words as though their meaning were fixed,
the constant resort to loose metaphor, the hypostatization
of leading terms, all indicate an unsuitable attitude in
which to approach the question.
" Substantives are signs attached to things : they contain ex-
actly that amount of truth which can be contained by a name, an
amount which is of necessity small in proportion to the reality of
the object. That which is most adequate to its object is the
abstract noun, since it represents a simple operation of the
mind. When I use the two words compressibility, immortality,
all that is to be found in the idea is to be found also in the
word. But if I take a real entity, an object existing in nature, it
will be impossible for language to introduce into the word all the
ideas which this entity or object awakens in the mind. Language
is therefore compelled to choose. Out of all the ideas it can
choose one only; it thus creates a name which is not long in
becoming a mere sign.
For this name to be accepted it must, no doubt, originally
possess some true and striking characteristic on one side or
another ; it must satisfy the minds of those to whom it is first
submitted. But this condition is imperative only at the outset.
Once accepted, it rids itself rapidly of its etymological significa-
tion ; otherwise this signification might become an embarrassment.
Many objects are inaccurately named, whether through the ignor-
ance of the original authors, or by some intervening change which
disturbs the harmony between the sign and the thing signified.
Nevertheless, words answer the same purpose as though they
were of faultless accuracy. No one dreams of revising them.
They are accepted by a tacit consent of which we are not even
conscious" (Br^al's Semantics, pp. 171-2).
What exactly is to be made of substantives which
** contain " truth, ** that amount of truth which can be
contained by a name"? How can **all that is found
in the idea be also found in the word " ? The con-
ception of language as ** compelled to choose an
idea," and thereby creating **a name, which is not
long in becoming a sign," is an odd one; while
* accuracy * and * harmony ' are sadly in need of elucida-
tion when applied to naming and to the relation between
sign and thing signified respectively. This is not
mere captious criticism. The locutions objected to
4 THE MEANING OF MEANING
conceal the very facts which the science of language
is concerned to elucidate. The real task before that
science cannot be successfully attempted without a far
more critical consciousness of the dangers of such loose
verbiage. It is impossible to handle a scientific matter
in such metaphorical terms, and the training of philo-
logists has not, as a rule, been such as to increase
their command of analytic and abstract language. The
logician would be far better equipped in this respect
were it not that his command of language tends to
conceal from him what he is talking about and renders
him prone to accept purely linguistic constructions,
which serve well enough for his special purposes, as
ultimates.
How great is the tyranny of language over those
who propose to inquire into its workings is well shown
in the speculations of the late F. de Saussure, a writer
regarded by perhaps a majority of French and Swiss
students as having for the first time placed linguistic
upon a scientific basis. This author begins by in-
quiring, **What is the object at once integral and
concrete of linguistic?'* He does not ask whether
it has one, he obeys blindly the primitive impulse to
infer from a word some object for which it stands, and
sets out determined to find it. But, he continues, speech
(le langage), though concrete enough, as a set of events
is not integral. Its sounds imply movements of speech,
and both, as instruments of thought, imply ideas. Ideas,
he adds, have a social as well as an individual side,
and at each instant language implies both an established
system and an evolution. **Thus, from whatever side
we approach the question, we nowhere find the integral
object of linguistic." De Saussure does not pause at
this point to ask himself what he is looking for, or
whether there is any reason why there should be such
a thing. He proceeds instead in a fashion familiar in
the beginnings of all sciences, and concocts a suitable
object — ^ la langue^' the language, as opposed to speech.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 5
** What is la langue ? For us, it is not to be confounded
with speech {le langage) ; it is only a determinate part
of this, an essential part, it is true. It is at once a social
product of the faculty, of speech, and a collection of
necessary conventions adopted by the social body to
allow the exercise of this faculty by individuals. . . .
It is a whole in itself and a principle of classification.
As soon as we give it the first place among the facts of
speech we introduce a natural order in a whole which
does not lend itself to any other classification." La
langue is further "the sum of the verbal images stored
up in all the individuals, a treasure deposited by the
practice of speaking in the members of a given com-
munity ; a grammatical system, virtually existing in
each brain, or more exactly in the brains of a body of
individuals ; for la langue is not complete in any one
of them, it exists in perfection only in the mass."^
Such an elaborate construction as la langue might,
no doubt, be arrived at by some Method of Intensive
Distraction analogous to that with which Dr Whitehead's
name is associated, but as a guiding principle for a
young science it is fantastic. Moreover, the same device
of inventing verbal entities outside the range of possible
investigation proved fatal to the theory of signs which
followed.^
1 Cours de Linguistique GSnSrale, pp. 23-31.
2 A sign for de Saussure is twofold, made up of a concept (signifi6)
and an acoustic image (signifiant), both psychical entities. Without
the concept, he says, the acoustic image would not be a sign (p. 100).
The disadvantage of this account is, as we shall see, that the process
of interpretation is included by definition in the sign !
De Saussure actually prided himself upon having " defined things
and not words." The definitions thus established " have nothing to
fear," he writes, " from certain ambiguous terms which do not coincide
in one language and another. Thus in German Spy ache means ' langue '
and ' langage.' ... In Latin sermo rather signifies langage et parole
while lingua designates ' la langue,' and so on. No word corresponds
exactly to any of the notions made precise above ; this is why every
"definition made apropos of a word is idle ; it is a bad method, to start
from words to define things " {ibid., p. 32). The view of definition
here adopted implies, as will be shown later, remarkable ignorance of
the normal procedure — the substitution, namely, of better understood
for obscure symbols. Another specimen of this naivety is found in the
rejection of the term ' symbol ' to designate the linguistic sign (p. 103).
" The symbol has the character of never being quite arbitrary. It
6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
As a philologist with an inordinate respect for
linguistic convention, de Saussure could not bear to
tamper with what he imagined to be a fixed meaning,
a part of la langue. This scrupulous regard for fictitious
* accepted ' uses of words is a frequent trait in philo-
logists. Its roots go down very deep into human nature,
as we shall see in the two chapters which follow. It
is especially regrettable that a technical equipment,
otherwise excellent, should have been so weak at this
point, for the initial recognition of a general science of
signs, * semiology,' of which linguistic would be a
branch, and the most important branch, was a very
notable attempt in the right direction. Unfortunately
this theory of signs, by neglecting entirely the things
for which signs stand, was from the beginning cut off
from any contact .with scientific methods of verification.
De Saussure, however, does not appear to have pursued
the matter far enough for this defect to become obvious.
The same neglect also renders the more recent treatise
of Professor Delacroix, Le Langage et la Pens4e^ ineffective
as a study of the influence of language upon thought.
Philosophers and philologists alike have failed in
their attempts. There remains a third group of in-
quirers with an interest in linguistic theory, the ethno-
logists, many of whom have come to their subject after
a preliminary training in psychology. An adequate
account of primitive peoples is impossible without an
insight into the essentials of their languages, which
cannot be gained through a mere transfer of current
Indo-European grammatical distinctions, a procedure
only too often positively misleading. In the circum-
stances, each field investigator might be supposed to
reconstruct the grammar of a primitive tongue from
his own observations of the behaviour of a speaker in
a given situation. Unfortunately this is rarely done,
is not empty ; there is the rudiment of a natural tie between the
signifying and the signified. The symbol for justice, the scales, could
not be replaced by something else at random, a carriage for instance."
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 7
since the difficulties are very great ; and perhaps owing
to accidents of psychological terminology, the worker
tends to neglect the concrete environment of the speaker
and to consider only the * ideas ' which are regarded
as * expressed.' Thus Dr Boas, the most suggestive
and influential of the group of ethnologists which is
dealing with the vast subject-matter provided by the
American-Indian languages, formulates as the three
points to be considered in the objective discussion of
languages —
First, the constituent phonetic elements of the
language ;
Second, the groups of ideas expressed by phonetic
groups ;
Third, the method of combining and modifying
phonetic groups.
** All speech,'' says Dr Boas explicitly, **is intended
to serve for the communication of ideas." Ideas, how-
ever, are only remotely accessible to outside inquirers,
and we need a theory which connects words with things
through the ideas, if any, which they symbolize. We
require, that is to say, separate analyses of the relations
of words to ideas and of ideas to things. Further, much
language, especially primitive language, is not primarily
concerned with ideas at all, unless under * ideas ' are
included emotions and attitudes — a procedure which
would involve terminological inconveniences. The
omission of all separate treatment of the ways in which
speech, besides conveying ideas, also expresses attitudes,
desires and intentions,^ is another point at which the
work of this active school is at present defective.
^ Not that definitions are lacking which include more than ideas.
Thus in one of the ablest and most interesting of modern linguistic
studies, that of E. Sapir, Chief of the Anthropological Section, Geological
Survey of Canada, an ethnologist closely connected with the American
school, language is defined as " a purely human and non-instinctive
method of communicating ideas, emotions and desires by means of a
system of voluntarily produced symbols " {Language, 1922, p. 7).
But so little is the emotive element considered that in a discussion of
grammatical form, as shown by the great variation of word-order in
Latin, we find it stated that the change from ' hominem femina videt '
8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
In yet another respect all these specialists fail to
realize the deficiencies of current linguistic theory. Pre-
occupied as they are — ethnologists with recording the
details of fast vanishing languages ; philologists with an
elaborate technique of phonetic laws and principles of
derivation ; philosophers with * philosophy * — all have
overlooked the pressing need for a better understanding
of what actually occurs in discussion. The analysis of
the process of communication is partly psychological,
and psychology has now reached a stage at which this
part may be successfully undertaken. Until this had
happened the science of Symbolism necessarily remained
in abeyance, but there is no longer any excuse for vague
talk about Meaning, and ignorance of the ways in which
words deceive us.
Throughout the Western world it is agreed that
people must meet frequently, and that it is not only
agreeable to talk, but that it is a matter of common
courtesy to say something even when there is hardly
anything to say. ** Every civilized man,'* continues
the late Professor Mahaffy, to whose Principles of the
Art of Conversation we owe this observation, *' feels, or
ought to feel, this duty ; it is the universal accomplish-
ment which all must practise''; those who fail are
punished by the dislike or neglect of society.
There is no doubt an Art in saying something when
to ' videt femina hominem ' makes " little or no difference beyond,
possibly, a rhetorical or a stylistic one " (p. 65). The italics are ours ;
and the same writer sums iip his discussion of the complex symbol
' The farmer kills the duckling,' with the remark : "In this short
sentence of five words there are expressed thirteen distinct concepts "
(p. 93). As will be noted at a later stage, the use of the term ' concept '
is particularly unfortunate in such an analysis, and a vocabulary so
infested with current metaphysical confusions leads unavoidably to
incompleteness of treatment.
By being forced to include under ' concepts ' both ' concrete con-
cepts ' — material objects, and ' Pure relational concepts ' (abstract
ways of referring), Sapir is unable in this work — which was unfortun-
ately never followed by his projected volume on Linguistics — to make
even the distinctions which are essential msiae. symoolic language (cf.
Chapter V., p. loi infra) ; and when we come to deal with translation
(Chapter X., p. 228) we shall find that this vocabulary has proved
equally unserviceable to him.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 9
there is nothing to be said, but it is equally certain that
there is an Art no less important of saying clearly what
one wishes to say when there is an abundance of material;
and conversation will seldom attain even the level
of an intellectual pastime if adequate methods of In-
terpretation are not also available.
Symbolism is the study of the part played in human
affairs by language and symbols of all kinds, and
especially of their influence on Thought. It singles out
for special inquiry the ways in which symbols help us
and hinder us in reflecting on things.
Symbols direct and organize, record and com-
municate. In stating what they direct and organize,
record and communicate we have to distinguish as
always between Thoughts and Things.' It is Thought
(or, as we shall usually say, reference) which is directed
and organized, and it is also Thought which is recorded
and communicated. But just as we say that the gardener
mows the lawn when we know that it is the lawn-mower
which actually does the cutting, so, though we know
that the direct relation of symbols is with thought, we
also say that symbols record events and communicate
facts.
By leaving out essential elements in the language
situation we easily raise problems and difficulties which
vanish when the whole transaction is considered in
greater detail. Words, as every one now knows,
^ mean ' nothing by themselves, although the belief
1 The word ' thing ' is unsuitable for the analysis here undertaken,
because in popular usage it is restricted to material substances — a fact
which has led philosophers to favour the terms ' entity,' ' ens ' or
' object ' as the general name for whatever is. It has seemed desirable,
therefore, to introduce a technical term to stand for whatever we
may be thinking of or referring to. ' Object,' though this is its original
use, has had an unfortunate history. The word ' referent,' therefore,
has been adopted, though its etymological form is open to question
when considered in relation to other participial derivatives, such as
agent or reagent. But even in Latin the present participle occasionally
(e.g. vehens in equo) admitted of variation in use ; and in English an
analogy with substantives, such as ' reagent,' ' extent,' and ' incident '
may be urged. Thus the fact that ' referent ' in what follows stands
for a thing and not an active person, should cause no confusion.
10 THE MEANING OF MEANING
that they did, as we shall see in the next chapter, was
once equally universal. It is only when a thinker
makes use of them that they stand for anything, or,
in one sense, have * meaning.' They are instruments.
But besides this referential use which for all reflective,
intellectual use of language should be paramount,
words have other functions which may be grouped
together as emotive. These can best be examined
when the framework of the problem of strict statement
and intellectual communication has been set up. The
importance of the emotive aspects of language is not
thereby minimized, and anyone chiefly concerned with
popular or primitive speech might well be led to reverse
this order of approach. Many difficulties, indeed,
arising through the behaviour of words in discussion,
even amongst scientists, force us at an early stage
to take into account these * non-symbolic' influences.
But for the analysis of the senses of * meaning ' with
which we are here chiefly concerned, it is desirable to
begin with the relations of thoughts, words and things
as they are found in cases of reflective speech uncom-
plicated by emotional, diplomatic, or other disturbances ;
and with regard to these, the indirectness of the
relations between words and things is the feature
which first deserves attention.
This may be simply illustrated by a diagram, in
which the three factors involved whenever any state-
ment is made, or understood, are placed at the corners
of the triangle, the relations which hold between them
being represented by the sides. The point just made
can be restated by saying that in this respect the base
of the triangle is quite different in composition from
either of the other sides.
Between a thought and a symbol causal relations
hold. When we speak, the symbolism we employ is
caused partly by the reference we are making and
partly by social and psychological factors — the purpose
for which we are making the reference, the proposed
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS ii
effect of our symbols on other persons, and our own
attitude. When we hear what is said, the symbols
both cause us to perform an act of reference and to
assume an attitude which will, according to circum-
stances, be more or less similar to the act and the
attitude of the speaker.
THOUGHT OR REFERENCE
SYMBOL
Stands for
{an imputed relation)
* TRUE
REFERENT
Between the Thought and the Referent there is also
a relation ; more or less direct (as when we think about
or attend to a coloured surface we see), or indirect (as
when we * think of or * refer to* Napoleon), in which
case there may be a very long chain of sign-situations
intervening between the act and its referent: word —
historian— contemporary record — eye-witness — referent
(Napoleon).
Between the symbol and the referent there is no
relevant relation other than the indirect one, which
consists in its being used by someone to stand for a
referent. Symbol and Referent, that is to say, are not
connected directly (and when, for grammatical reasons,
we imply such a relation, it will merely be an imputed,*
• Cf. Chapter V., pp. 101-2.
1 See Chapter VI., p. 116.
12 THE MEANING OF MEANING
as opposed to a real, relation) but only indirectly
round the two sides of the triangle.^
It may appear unnecessary to insist that there is
no direct connection between say * dog/ the word, and
certain common objects in our streets, and that the
only connection which holds is that which consists in
our using the word when we refer to the animal. We
shall find, however, that the kind of simplification
typified by this once universal theory of direct meaning
relations between words and things is the source of
almost all the difficulties which thought encounters.
As will appear at a later stage, the power to confuse
and obstruct, which such simplifications possess, is
largely due to the conditions of communication.
Language if it is to be used must be a ready instrument.
The handiness and ease of a phrase is always more
important in deciding whether it will be extensively
used than its accuracy. Thus such shorthand as the
word * means * is constantly used so as to imply a direct
simple relation between words and things, phrases and
situations. If such relations could be admitted then
there would of course be no problem as to the nature
1 An exceptional case occurs when the symbol used is more or less
directly like the referent for which it is used, as for instance, it may
be when it is an onomatopoeic word, or an image, or a gesture, or a
drawing. In this case the triangle is completed ; its base is supplied,
and a great simplification of the problem involved appears to result.
For this reason many attempts have been made to reduce the normal
language situation to this possibly more primitive form. Its greater
completeness does no doubt account for the immense superiority in
efficiency of gesture languages, within their appropriate field, to other
languages not supportable by gesture within their fields. Hence we
know far more perfectly what has occurred if a scene is well re-enacted
than if it be merely described. But in the normal situation we have
to recognize that our triangle is without its base, that between Symbol
and Referent no direct relation holds ; and, further, that it is through
this lack that most of the problems of language arise. Simulative
and non-simulative languages are entirely distinct in principle. Stand-
ing fqr and representing are different relations. It is, however, con-
venient to speak at times as though there were some direct relation
holding between Symbol and Referent. We then say, on the analogy
of the lawn-mower, that a Symbol refers to a Referent. Provided that
the telescopic nature of the phrase is not forgotten, confusion need
not arise. In Supplement I., Part V. injra, Dr Malinowski gives a
valuable account of the development of the speech situation in relation
to the above diagram.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 13
of Meaning, and the vast majority of those who have
been concerned with it would have been right in their
refusal to discuss it. But too many interesting develop-
ments have been occurring in the sciences, through the
rejection of everyday symbolizations and the endeavour
to replace them by more accurate accounts, for any
naive theory that ^meaning* is just * meaning' to be
popular at the moment. As a rule new facts in startling
disagreement with accepted explanations of other facts
are required before such critical analyses of what are
generally regarded as simple satisfactory notions are
undertaken. This has been the case with the recent
revolutions in physics. But in addition great reluctance
to postulate anything sui generis and of necessity unde-
tectable ^ was needed before the simple natural notion
of simultaneity, for instance, as a two-termed relation
came to be questioned. Yet to such questionings the
theory of Relativity was due. The same two motives,
new discrepant facts, and distaste for the use of obscure
kinds of entities in eking out explanations, have led to
disturbances in psychology, though here the required
restatements have not yet been provided. No
Copernican revolution has yet occurred, although
several are due if psychology is to be brought into line
with its fellow sciences.
It is noteworthy, however, that recent stirrings in
psychology have been mainly if not altogether con-
cerned with feeling and volition. The popular success
of Psycho-analysis has tended to divert attention from
the older problem of thinking. Yet in so far as pro-
gress here has consequences for all the other sciences
and for the whole technique of investigation in
psychology itself, this central problem of knowing or
of 'meaning' is perhaps better worth scrutiny and more
likely to promote fresh orientations than any other that
can be suggested. As the Behaviourists have also very
1 Places and instants are very typical entities of verbal origin.
14 THE MEANING OF MEANING
properly pointed out, this question is closely connected
with the use of words.
But the approach to Meaning, far more than the
approach to such problems as those of physics, requires
a thorough-going investigation of language. Every
great advance in physics has been at the expense of
some generally accepted piece of metaphysical explana-
tion which had enshrined itself in a convenient,
universally practised, symbolic shorthand. But the
confusion and obstruction due to such shorthand
expressions and to the naive theories they protect and
keep alive, is greater in psychology, and especially in
the theory of knowledge, than elsewhere ; because no
problem is so infected with so-called metaphysical
difficulties — due here, as always, to an approach to a
question through symbols without an initial investiga-
tion of their functions.
We have now to consider more closely what the
causes and effects of symbols are.* Whatever may be
the services, other than conservative and retentive, of
symboli^ation, all experience shows that there are also
disservices. The grosser forms of verbal confusion
have long been recognized ; but less attention has been
paid to those that are more subtle and more frequent.
In the following chapters many examples of these will
be given, chosen in great part from philosophical fields,
for it is here that such confusions become, with the
passage of time, most apparent The root of the trouble
will be traced to the superstition that words are in some
way parts of things or always imply things correspond-
ing to them, historical instances of this still potent
^ Wlisther symbols in some form or other are necessary to thought
itself is a difficult problem, and is discussed in The Meaning of Psychology
(Chapter XIII.) as well as in Chapter X. of the present work. But
certainly the recording and the communication of thought (telepathy
apart) require symbols. It seems that thought, so far as it is transitive
and not in the form of an internal dialogue, can dispense with symbols,
and that they only appear when thought takes on this monologue form.
In the normal case the actual development of thought is very closely
bound up with the symbolization which accompanies it.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 15
instinctive belief being given from many sources. The
fundamental and most prolific fallacy is, in other words,
that the base of the triangle given above is filled in.
The completeness of any reference varies ; it is more
or less close and clear, it * grasps * its object in greater
or less degree. Such symbolization as accompanies
it — images of all sorts, words, sentences whole and in
pieces — is in no very close observable connection with
the variation in the perfection of the reference. Since,
then, in any discussion we cannot immediately settle
from the nature of a person's remarks what his opinion
is, we need some technique to keep the parties to an
argument in contact and to clear up misunderstandings
— or, in other words, a Theory of Definition. Such a
technique can only be provided by a theory of knowing,
or of reference, which will avoid, as current theories do
not, the attribution to the knower of powers which it
may be pleasant for him to suppose himself to possess,
but which are not open to the only kind of investigation
hitherto profitably pursued, the kind generally known
as scientific investigation.
Normally, whenever we hear anything said we
spring spontaneously to an immediate conclusion,
namely, that the speaker is referring to what we should
be referring to were we speaking the words ourselves.
In some cases this interpretation may be correct ; this
will prove to be what he has referred to. But in most
discussions which attempt greater subtleties than could
be handled in a gesture language this will not be so.
To suppose otherwise is to neglect our subsidiary
gesture languages, whose accuracy within their own
limited provinces is far higher than that yet reached
by any system of spoken or written symbols, with the
exception of the quite special and peculiar case of
rnathematical, scientific and musical notations. Words,
whenever they cannot directly ally themselves with and
support themselves upon gestures, are at present a very
imperfect means of communication. Even for private
i6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
thinking thought is often ready to advance, and only
held back by the treachery of its natural symbolism ;
and for conversational purposes the latitude acquired
constantly shows itself to all those who make any
serious attempts to compare opinions.
We have not here in view the more familiar ways
in which words may be used to deceive. In a later
chapter, when the function of language as an instru-
ment for the promotion of purposes rather than as a
means of symbolizing references is fully discussed, we
shall see how the intention of the speaker may com-
plicate the situation. But the honnete homme may be
unprepared for the lengths to which verbal ingenuity
can be carried. At all times these possibilities have
been exploited to the full by interpreters of Holy Writ
who desire to enjoy the best of both worlds. Here,
for example, is a specimen of the exegetic of the late
Dr Lyman Abbott, pastor, publicist, and editor, which,
through the efforts of Mr Upton Sinclair, has now
become classic. Does Christianity condemn the
methods of twentieth-century finance? Doubtless there
are some awkward words in the Gospels, but a little
* interpretation ' is all that is necessary.
" Jesus did not say ' Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon
earth.' He said ' Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon earth
where moth and rust doth corrupt and where thieves break through
and steal.' And no sensible American does. Moth and rust do
not get at Mr Rockefeller's oil wells, and thieves do not often
break through and steal a railway. What Jesus condemned was
hoarding wealth."
Each investment, therefore, every worldly acquisi-
tion, according to one of the leading divines of the
New World, may be judged on its merits. There
is no hard and fast rule. When moth and rust have
been eliminated by science the Christian investor will
presumably have no problem, but in the meantime it
would seem that Camphorated Oil fulfils most nearly
the synoptic requirements. Burglars are not partial
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 17
to it ; it is anathema to moth ; and the risk of rust is
completely obviated.
Another variety of verbal ingenuity closely allied
to this, is the deliberate use of symbols to misdirect
the listener. Apologies for such a practice in the
case of the madman from whom we desire to conceal
the whereabouts of his razor are well known, but a
wider justification has also been attempted. In the
Christian era we hear of *^ falsifications of documents,
inventions of legends, and forgeries of every description
which made the Catholic Church a veritable seat of
lying.' ^ A play upon words in which one sense is
taken by the speaker and another sense intended by
him for the hearer was permitted.^ Indeed, three sorts
of equivocations were distinguished by Alfonso de
Liguori, who was beatified in the nineteenth century,
which might be used with good reason ;^ a good reason
being **any honest object, such as keeping our goods,
spiritual or temporal."* In the twentieth century the
intensification of militant nationalism has added further
*good reason'; for the military code includes all
transactions with hostile nations or individuals as part
of the process of keeping spiritual and temporal goods.
In war-time words become a normal part of the
mechanism of deceit, and the ethics of the situation
have been aptly summed up by Lord Wolseley : ^* We
will keep hammering along with the conviction that
* honesty is the best policy,' and that truth always
wins in the long run. These pretty sentences do
well for a child's copy-book, but the man who acts
upon them in war had better sheathe his sword for
1 Westermarck, The Origin and Development of Moral Ideas, Vol. II.,
p. 100.
2 Alagona, Compendium Manualis D. Navarri XII., 88, p. 94.
^ Alfonso di Liguori, Theologia Moralis, III., 151, Vol. I., p. 249.
* Meyrick, Moral and Devotional Theology of the Church of Rome,
Vol. I., p 3. Cf. further Westermarck, loc. cit.
^ Soldier's Pocket Book for Field Service, p. 69.
i8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The Greeks, as we shall see, were in many ways
not far from the attitude of primitive man towards
words. And it is not surprising to read that after the
Peloponnesian war the verbal machinery of peace had
got completely out of gear, and, says Thucydides,
could hot be brought back into use — **The meaning
of words had no longer the same relation to things,
but was changed by men as they thought proper."
The Greeks were powerless to cope with such a situation.
We in our wisdom seem to have created institutions
which render us more powerless still.^
On a less gigantic scale the technique of deliberate
misdirection can profitably, be studied with a view to
corrective measures. In accounting for Newman's
Grammar of Assent Dr E. A. Abbott had occasion to
describe the process of * lubrication,' the art of greas-
ing the descent from the premises to the conclusion,
which his namesake cited above so aptly employs.
In order to lubricate well, various qualifications are
necessary :
"First a nice discrimination of words, enabling you to form,
easily and naturally, a great number of finely graduated pro-
positions, shading away, as it were, from the assertion ' x is white '
to the assertion 'x is black/ Secondly an inward and absolute
contempt for logic and for words. . . . And what are words but
toys and sweetmeats for grown-up babies who call themselves
men?" 2
But even where the actual referents are not in doubt,
it is perhaps hardly realized how widespread is the
^ As the late C. E. Montague {Disenchantment, p. loi) well put it,
" the only new thing about deception in war is modern man's more
perfect means for its practice. The thing has become, in his hand,
a trumpet more efficacious than Gideon's own. . . . To match the
Lewis gun with which he now fires his solids, he has to his hand the
newspaper Press, to let fly at the enemy's head the thing which is not."
But this was a temporary use of the modern technique of misdirection,
and with the return of peace the habit is lost ? Not so, says Mr
Montague. " Any weapon you use in a war leaves some bill to be
settled in peace, and the Propaganda arm has its cost like another."
The return of the exploiters of the verbal machine. to their civil posts,
is a return in triumph, and its effects will be felt for many years in all
countries where the power of the word amongst the masses remains
paramount.
2 Philomythu^, p. 214.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 19
habit of using the power of words not only for bona fide
communications, but also as a method of misdirection ;
and in the world as it is to-day the naive interpreter
is likely on many occasions to be seriously misled if
the existence of this unpleasing trait — equally prevalent
amongst the classes and the masses without distinction
of race, creed, sex, or colour — is overlooked.
Throughout this work, however, we are treating of
bona fide communication only, except in so far as we
shall find it necessary in Chapter IX. to discuss that
derivate use of Meaning to which misdirection gives
rise. For the rest, the verbal treachery with which
we are concerned is only that involved by the use of
symbols as such. As we proceed to examine the
conditions of communication we shall see why any
symbolic apparatus which is in general use is liable to
incompleteness and defect.
But if our linguistic outfit is treacherous, it never-
theless is indispensable, nor would another complete
outfit necessarily improve matters, even if it were ten
times as complete. It is not always new words that
are needed, but a means of controlling them as symbols,
a means of readily discovering to what in the world
on any occasion they are used to refer, and this is what
an adequate theory of definition should provide.
But a theory of Definition must follow, not precede,
a theory of Signs, and it is little realized how large a
place is taken both in abstract thought and in practical
affairs by sign-situations. But if an account of sign-
situations is to be scientific it must take its observations
from the most suitable instances, and must not derive
its general principles from an exceptional case. The
person actually interpreting a sign is not well placed
for observing what is happening. We should develop
our theory of signs from observations of other people,
and only admit evidence drawn from introspection when
we know how to appraise it. The adoption of the
other method, on the ground that all our knowledge of
20 THE MEANING OF MEANING
others is inferred from knowledge of our own states,
can only lead to the impasse of solipsism from which
modern speculation has yet to recoil. Those who allow
beyond question that there are people like themselves
also interpreting signs and open to study should not
find it difficult to admit that their observation of the
behaviour of others may provide at least a framework
within which their own introspection, that special and
deceptive case, may be fitted. That this is the practice
of all the sciences need hardly be pointed out. Any
sensible doctor when stricken by disease distrusts his
own introspective diagnosis and calls in a colleague.
There are, indeed, good reasons why what is
happening in ourselves should be partially hidden
from us, and we are generally better judges of what
other people are doing than of what we are doing
ourselves. Before we looked carefully into other
people's heads it was commonly believed that an
entity called the soul resided therein, just as children
commonly believe that there is a little man inside the
skull who looks out at the eyes, the windows of the
soul, and listens at the ears. The child has the
strongest introspective evidence for this belief, which,
but for scalpels and microscopes, it would be difficult
to disturb. The tacitly solipsistic presumption that
this naive approach is in some way a necessity of
method disqualifies the majority of philosophical and
psychological discussions of Interpretation. If we
restrict the subject-matter of the inquiry to * ideas '
and words, /.^., to the left side of our triangle, and
omit all frank recognition of the world outside us, we
inevitably introduce confusion on such subjects as
knowledge in perception, verification and Meaning
itself.^
1 This tendency is particularly noticeable in such works as Baldwin's
elaborate treatise on Thoughts and Things, where a psychological
apparatus of ' controls ' and ' contents ' is hard to reconcile with
the subsequent claim to discuss communication. The twist given to
grammatical analysis by Aristotle's similar neglect of Reference is
dealt with in Appendix A.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 21
If we stand in the neighbourhood of a cross road
and observe a pedestrian confronted by a notice To
Grantchester displayed on a post, we commonly dis-
tinguish three important factors in the situation. There
is, we are sure, (i) a Sign which (2) refers to a Place
and (3) is being interpreted by a person. All situations in
which Signs are considered are similar to this. A doctor
noting that his patient has a temperature and so forth
is said to diagnose his disease as m^ViitixZix, If we talk
like this we do not make it clear that signs are here
also involved. Even when we speak of symptoms we
often do not think of these as closely related to other
groups of signs. But if we say that the doctor
interprets the temperature, etc., as a Sign of influenza,
we are at any rate on the way to an inquiry as to
whether there is anything in common between the
manner in which the pedestrian treated the object at
the cross road and that in which the doctor treated
his thermometer and the flushed countenance.
On close examination it will be found that very
many situations which we do not ordinarily regard as
Sign-situations are essentially of the same nature. The
chemist dips litmus paper in his test-tube, and interprets
the sign red or the sign blue as meaning acid or base.
A Hebrew prophet notes a small black cloud, and
remarks *^ We shall have rain." Lessing scrutinizes
the* Laocoon, and concludes that the features of Lao-
coon pere are in repose. A New Zealand school-girl
looks at certain letters on a page in her Historical
Manual for the 7ise of Lower Grades and knows that
Queen Anne is dead.
The method which recognizes the common feature
of sign-interpretation^ has its dangers, but opens the
^ In all these cases a sign has been interpreted rightly or wrongly,
i.e., something has been not only experienced or enjoyed, but under-
stood as referring to something else. Anything which can be experi-
enced can also be thus understood, i.e., can also be a sign ; and it is
important to remember that interpretation, or what happens to (or
in the mind of) an Interpreter is quite distinct both from the sign
and from that for which the sign stands or to which it refers. If then
22 THE MEANING OF MEANING
way to a fresh treatment of many widely different
topics.
As an instance of an occasion in which the theory
of signs is of special use, the subject dealt with in our
fourth chapter may be cited. If we realize that in all
perception, as distinguished from mere awareness, sign-
situations are involved, we shall have a new method
of approaching problems where a verbal deadlock seems
to have arisen. Whenever we * perceive ' what we
name *a chair,' we are interpreting a certain group
of data (modifications of the sense-organs), and treating
them as signs of a referent. Similarly, even before the
interpretation of a word, there is the almost automatic
interpretation of a group of successive noises or letters
as a word. And in addition to the external world we
can also explore with a new technique the sign-situations
involved by mental events, the * goings on ' or pro-
cesses of interpretation themselves. We need neither
confine ourselves to arbitrary generalizations from intro-
spection after the manner of classical psychology, nor
deny the existence of images and other * mental ' occur-
rences to their signs with the extreme Behaviourists.*
The Double language hypothesis, which is suggested
by the theory of signs and supported by linguistic
analysis, would absolve Dr Watson and his followers
we speak of the meaning of a sign we must not, as philosophers,
psychologists and logicians are wont to do, confuse the (imputed)
relation between a sign and that to which it refers, either with the
referent (what is referred to) or with the process of interpretation (the
' goings on ' in the mind of the interpreter). It is this sort of confusion
which has made so much previous work on the subject of signs and
their meaning unfruitful. In particular, by using the same term
' meaning ' both for the ' Goings on ' inside their heads (the images,
associations, etc., which enabled them to interpret signs) and for
the Referents (the things to which the signs refer) philosophers have
been forced to locate Grantchester, Influenza, Queen Anne, and indeed
the whole Universe equally inside their heads — or, if alarmed by the
prospect of cerebral congestion, at least ' in their minds ' in such wise
that all these objects become conveniently ' mental.' Great care,
therefore, is required in the use of the term ' meaning,' since its associa-
tions are dangerous.
1 That the mind-body problem is due to a duplication of symbolic
machinery is maintained in Chapter IV., p. 8i. Cf. also The Meaning
of Psychology, by C. K. Ogden (1926), Chapter II., where this view is
supported with reference to contemporary authorities who hold it.
THOUGHTS, WORDS AND THINGS 23
from the logical necessity of affecting general anaesthesia.
Images, etc., are often most useful signs of our present
and future behaviour — notably in the modern interpreta-
tion of dreams.^ An improved Behaviourism will have
much to say concerning the chaotic attempts at symbolic
interpretation and construction by which Psycho-analysts
discredit their valuable labours.
The problems which arise in connection with any
* sign-situation ' are of the same general form. The
relations between the elements concerned are no doubt
different, but they are of the same sort. A thorough
classification of these problems in one field, such as the
field of symbols, may be expected, therefore, to throw
light upon analogous problems in fields at first sight
of a very different order.
When we consider the various kinds of Sign-situa-
tions instanced above, we find that those signs which
men use to communicate one with another and as
instruments of thought, occupy a peculiar place. It
is convenient to group these under a distinctive name ;
and for words, arrangements of words, images, gestures,
and such representations as drawings or mimetic sounds
we use the term symbols. The influence of Symbols
upon human life and thought in numberless unexpected
ways has never been fully recognized, and to this chapter
of history we now proceed.
1 In the terminology of the present work, many of the analyst's
' symbols ' are, of course, signs only ; they are not used for purposes
of communication. But in the literature of psycho-analysis there is
much valuable insistence on the need of wider forms of interpretation,
especially in relation to emotional overcharge. Cf., for example,
Dr Jelliffe's " The Symbol as an Energy Condenser " {Journal of
Nervous and Mental Diseases, December 1919), though the metaphor,
like many other psycho-analytic locutions, must not be stretched too far
in view of what has been said above and of what is to follow (cf . pages
102-3 and 200 infra).
CHAPTER II
THE POWER OF WORDS
Le mot, qu'on le sache, est un etre vivant . . . le mot
est le verbe, et le verbe est Dieu. — Victor Hugo.
Athenians ! I observe that in all respects you are
deeply reverential towards the Gods. — Paul of Tarsus.
He who shall duly consider these matters will find that
there is a certain bewitchery or fascination in words,
which makes them operate with a force beyond what
we can naturally give account of. — South.
From the earliest times the Symbols which men have
used to aid the process of thinking and to record their
achievements have been a continuous source of wonder
and illusion. The whole human race has been so
impressed by the properties of words as instruments
for the control of objects, that in every age it has
attributed to them occult powers. Between the attitude
of the early Egyptian and that of the modern poet,
there would appear at first sight to be but little differ-
ence. ** All words are spiritual," says Walt Whitman,
** nothing is more spiritual than words. Whence are
they ? Along how many thousands and tens of thousands
of years have they come?" Unless we fully realize the
profound influence of superstitions concerning words,
we shall not understand the fixity of certain widespread
linguistic habits which still vitiate even the most careful
thinking.
With the majority, and in matters of ordinary dis-
cussion, the influence of this legacy is all-pervasive, in
language no less than in other spheres. '' If we could
open the heads and read the thoughts of two men of
THE POWER OF WORDS 25
the same generation and country, but at the opposite
ends of the intellectual scale, we should probably find
their minds as different as if the two belonged to different
species. . . . Superstitions survive because, while they
shock the views of enlightened members of the com-
munity, they are still in harmony with the thoughts
and feelings of others, who, though they are drilled by
their betters into an appearance of civilization, remain
barbarians or savages at heart. "^
Most educated people are quite unconscious of the
extent to which these relics survive at their doors, still
less do they realize how their own behaviour is moulded
by the unseen hand of the past. ''Only those whose
studies have led them to investigate the subject," adds
Dr Frazer, " are aware of the depth to which the ground
beneath our feet is thus, as it were, honeycombed by
unseen forces."
The surface of society, like that of the sea, may,
the anthropologist admits, be in perpetual motion, but
its depths, like the depths of the ocean, remain almost
unmoved. Only by plunging daily into those depths
can we come in contact with our fellow-men ; only —
in the particular case of language — by forgoing the
advantages of this or that special scientific symbol
system, by drinking of the same unpurified stream, can
we share in the life of the community. If the clouds of
accumulated verbal tradition burst above us in the
open — in the effort to communicate, in the attempt at
interpretation — few have, as yet, evolved even the
rudiments of a defence.
The power of words is the most conservative force
in our life. Only yesterday did students of anthro-
pology begin to admit the existence of those ineluctable
verbal coils by which so much of our thought is
encompassed. ''The common inherited scheme of
conception which is all around us, and comes to us as
naturally and unobjectionably as our native air, is none
1 J. G. Frazer, Psyche's Task, p. 169.
26 THE MEANING OF MEANING
the less imposed upon us, and limits our intellectual
movements in countless ways — all the more surely and
irresistibly because, being inherent in the very language
we must use to express the simplest meaning, it is
adopted and assimilated before we can so much as begin
to think for ourselves at all."^ And from the structure
of our language we can hardly even think of escaping.
Tens of thousands of years have elapsed since we shed
our tails, but we are still communicating with a medium
developed to meet the needs of arboreal man. And
as the sounds and marks of language bear witness to
its primeval origins, so the associations of those sounds
and marks, and the habits of thought which have grown
up with their use and with the structures imposed on
them by our first parents, are found to bear witness to
an equally significant continuity.
We may smile at the linguistic illusions of primitive
man, but may we forget that the verbal machinery on
which we so readily rely, and with which our meta-
physicians still profess to probe the Nature of Existence,
was set up by him, and may be responsible for other
illusions hardly less gross and not more easily eradicable?
It may suffice at this point to recall the prevalence of
sacred or secret vocabularies, and of forbidden words
of every sort. Almost any European country can still
furnish examples of the tale in which a name (Tom-Tit-
Tot, Vargaluska, Rumpelstiltskin, Finnur, Zi) has to be
discovered before some prince can be wedded, or some
ogre frustrated.* And on the contextual account of
reference which is the outcome of modern developments
of associationism, with its immense stress on the part
played by language in memory and imagination, it is
clear that in the days before psychological analysis
was possible the evidence for a special world of words
^ F. M. Cornford, From Religion to Philosophy, p. 45.
2 J. A. Macculloch, The Childhood of Fiction, pp. 26-30, is the last
to collect the references to these, and to relate them, as did Mr Clodd
in his Tom-Tit-Tot, to the general practice of Verbal Magic.
THE POWER OF WORDS 27
of power, for nomina as numina^ must have appeared
overwhelming.
In ancient Egypt precautions were taken to prevent
the extinction of the eighth or Name-soul, and to cause
its continuance along with the names of the Gods.^ In
the Pyramid texts we find mentioned a God called
Khern, i.e,^ Word : the Word having a personality like
that of a human being. The Creation of the world
was due to the interpretation in words by Thoth of the
will of the deity. The greater part of mankind must
once have believed the name to be that integral part
of a man identified with the soul, or to be so important
a portion of him that it might be substituted for the
whole, as employers speak of factory * hands.* In
Revelation we read ** There were killed in the earthquake
names of men seven thousand," and again in the letter
to the Church of Sardis, **Thou hast a few names in
Sardis which did not defile their garments." The
beast coming up out of the sea has upon his head
*' names of blasphemy." Blasphemy itself is just such
an instance ; for the god is supposed to be personally
offended by the desecration of his name : and even in
the reign of Henry VIII. a boy was put to death by
burning because of some idle words he had chanced to
hear respecting the sacrament — which he ignorantly
repeated.*
**Why askest thou after my name, seeing it is
secret " (or * ineffable ' with Prof. G. F. Moore), says the
angel of the Lord to Manoah in the book of Judges,
Nearly all primitive peoples show great dislike to their
names being mentioned ; when a New Zealand chief
was called Wai, which means water, a new name had
to be given to water ; and in Frazer's Golden Bough
numerous examples of word taboos are collected to
show the universality of the attitude. Not only chiefs
but gods, and moreover the priest in whom gods were
^ Budge, The Book of the Dead, pp. Ixxxvi-xc.
2 Pike, History of Crime in England, Vol. II., p. 56.
28 THE MEANING OF MEANING
supposed to dwell (a belief which induced the Cantonese
to apply the term ^ god-boxes ' to such favoured person-
ages), are amongst the victims of this logophobia.
We know how Herodotus (II. 132, 171) refuses to
mention the name of Osiris. The true and great name
of Allah is a secret name,^ and similarly with the gods
of Brahmanism * and the real name of Confucius.*
Orthodox Jews apparently avoid the name Jahweh
altogether.* We may compare * Thank Goodness *
* Morbleu ' — and the majority of euphemisms. Among
the Hindus if one child has been lost, it is customary
to call the next by some opprobrious name. A male
child is called Kuriya, or Dunghill— the spirit of
course knows folk as their names and will overlook the
worthless. Similarly, God knows each man by his
name — **and the Lord said unto Moses * Thou hast
found grace in my sight and I know thee by thy name.* '*
Every ancient Egyptian had two names — one for the
world, and another by which he was known to the
supernal powers. The Abyssinian Christian's second
name," given at baptism, is never to be divulged. The
guardian deity of Rome had an incommunicable name,
and in parts of ancient Greece the holy names of the
gods to ensure against profanation were engraved on
lead tablets and sunk in the sea.
Children are often similarly anxious to conceal their
names ; and just as children always demand what the
name of a thing is (never if it has a name) and regard
that name as a valuable acquisition, so we know that
the stars all have names. **He telleth the number of
the stars and calleth them all by their names." Here
we may note the delightful proverb which might appear
on the title-page of every work dealing with Symbolism:
** The Divine is rightly so called."
1 Sell, The Faith of Islam, p. 185.
* Hopkins, Religions of India, p. 184.
* Friend, Folk-Lore Record, IV., p. 76.
* Herzog-Plitt, Real-Encyclopddie, VI., p. 501. Hence the name
Adonai. read instead of the ineffable Name; from which, by insertion
of the vowels of Adonai in the tetragrammaton. we got Jehovah.
THE POWER OF WORDS 29
In some ways the twentieth century suffers more
grievously than any previous age from the ravages of
such verbal superstitions. Owing, however, to develop-
ments in the methods of.communication, and the creation
of many special symbolic systems, the form of the
disease has altered considerably ; and, apart from the
peculiar survival of religious apologetic, now takes
more insidious forms than of yore. Influences making
for its wide diffusion are the baffling complexity of the
symbolic apparatus now at our disposal ; the possession
by journalists and men of letters of an immense semi-
technical vocabulary and their lack of opportunity, or
unwillingness, to inquire into its proper use ; the success
of analytic thinkers in fields bordering on mathematics,
where the divorce between symbol and reality is most
pronounced and the tendency to hypostatization most
alluring ; the extension of a knowledge of the cruder
forms of symbolic convention (the three R's), combined
with a widening of the gulf between the public and
the scientific thought of the age ; and finally the ex-
ploitation, for political and commercial purposes, of
the printing press by the dissemination and reiteration
of cliches.
The persistence of the primitive linguistic outlook
not only throughout the whole religious world, but in
the work of the profoundest thinkers, is indeed one
of the most curious features of modern thought. The
philosophy of the nineteenth century was dominated
by an idealist tradition in which the elaboration of mon-
strous symbolic machinery (the Hegelian Dialectic^
provides a striking example) was substituted for direct
research, and occupied the centre of attention. The
twentieth opened with a subtle analysis of the mysteries
of mathematics on the basis of a * Platonism ' even
1 Jowett in comparing the Dialectic of Hegel with that of Plato
remarks: " Perhaps there is no greater defect in Hegel's system than
the want of a sound theory of language." — The Dialogues of Plato,
Vol. IV.. p. 420.
30 THE MEANING OF MEANING
more pronounced than that of certain Critical Realists
of 1921.^ Thus we read : —
*' Whatever may be an object of thought, or may occur in any
true or false proposition, or can be accounted as one, I call a term.
... A man, a moment, a number, a class, a relation, a chimera,
or anything else that can be mentioned is sure to be a term ; and
to deny that such and such a thing is a term must always be
false. ... A term is possessed of all the properties commonly
assigned to substances or substantives. . . . Every term is im-
mutable and indestructible. What a term is it is, and no change
can be conceived in it which would not destroy its identity and
make it another term. . . . Among terms it is possible to dis-
tinguish two kinds, which I shall call respectively things and
concepts." ^
With the aid of this strange verbal rapier many
palpable hits were claimed. Thus the theory of
** adjectives or attributes or ideal things in some way
less substantial, less self subsistent, less self identical,
than true substantives, appears to be wholly erroneous ";*
whole philosophical systems were excluded, for *^the
admission (involved in the mention of a man and a
chimera) of many terms destroys monism " ; * and a
modern Platonism reconstructed, whereby a world of
certain of the ^ things ' * mentioned * by means of ' terms *
the world of universals, was rehabilitated. Here the
reason builds a habitation, *^or rather finds a habitation
eternally standing, where our ideals are fully satisfied
and our best hopes are not thwarted. It is only when
we thoroughly understand the entire independence of
ourselves, which belongs to this world that reason finds,
that we can adequately realize the profound importance
of its beauty."^ For here everything is **unchange-
able, rigid, exact, delightful to the mathematician, the
logician, the builder of metaphysical systems, and all
who love perfection more than life." This world was
commended to the working man, in contrast to the
1 Cf. Chapter VIII., pp. 1641?.
2 B. Russell, The Principles oj Mathematics (1903), Vol. I., pp. 43-44.
* Ibid., p. 46.
* Ibid., p. 44.
^ Mysticism and Logic (1918), p. 69.
THE POWER OF WORDS 31
world of existence which is ** fleeting, vague, without
sharp boundaries, without any clear plan or arrange-
ment "though it *' contains all thoughts and feelings."
Both worlds are equally there, equally worth con-
templation, and *' according to our temperaments, we
shall prefer the contemplation of the one or of the
other."*
It is regrettable that modern Platonists so seldom
follow Plato in his attempts at a scientific study of
Symbolism, but it is interesting to note that they
recognize the kinship of their theory with Greek
speculation, for both have their origin in the same
linguistic habits. The ingenuity of the modern logi-
cian tends to conceal the verbal foundations of his
structure, but in Greek philosophy these foundations
are clearly revealed. The earlier writers are full of
the relics of primitive word-magic. To classify things
is to name them, and for magic the name of a thing
or group of things is its soul ; to know their names
is to have power over their souls. Nothing, whether
human or superhuman, is beyond the power of words.
Language itself is a duplicate, a shadow-soul, of the
whole structure of reality. Hence the doctrine of the
LogoSy variously conceived as this supreme reality, the
divine soul-substance, as the * Meaning' or reason of
everything, and as the * Meaning ' or essence of a name.*
The Greeks were clearly assisted in their acceptance
of an Otherworld of Being by the legacy of religious
material which earlier philosophers incorporated in
their respective systems. The nature of things, their
physis, was regarded, e.g.^ by Thales, as supersensible,
a stuff of that attenuated sort which has always been
attributed to souls and ghosts ; differing from body
1 B. Russell, The Problems of Philosophy, Home University Library,
p. 156. That portions of this world, which Mr Russell would probably
recognize to-day as having a purely linguistic basis, still adhere to the
cosmos envisaged in his Analysis of Mind. 1921, is suggested at p. 54
infra and would explain the inconsistencies which his critics claim
to detect.
* Cornford, op. cii., From Religion to Philosophy, pp. 141, 186, 248,
32 THE MEANING OF MEANING
only in being intangible and invisible. Consequently
the World of Being, in which bogus entities reside,
had at first that minimum of materiality without which
nothing could be conceived. But as logic developed
and the power of words attracted more attention, this
materiality was gradually lost, until in the Symposium^
211, and the Phaedo^ 80, Plato has evolved a realm of
pure ideality, also described as physis^ in which these
name-souls dwell, pure, divine, immortal, intelligible,
uniform, indissoluble and unchangeable.
This development has been shown to be due largely
to the influence of Pythagoreanism and the intervening
stages are of peculiar interest for the history of Symbols.
It was Heracleitus who first appealed to words as
embodying the nature of things, and his influence on
Plato is manifest in the Cratylus, Heracleitus saw in
language the most constant thing in a world of cease-
less change, an expression of that common wisdom
which is in all men ; and for him the structure of human
speech reflects the structure of the world. It is an em-
bodiment of that structure — **the Logos is contained
and in it, as one meaning may be contained in many
outwardly different symbols."^
The Pythagoreans on the other hand were chiefly
puzzled by number symbols. ** Since everything
appeared to be modelled in its entire character on
numbers," says Aristotle,^ *'and numbers to be the
ultimate things in the whole universe, they became
convinced that the elements of numbers are the elements
of everything." In fact, in its final stages, Pytha-
goreanism passed from a doctrine of the .world as a
procession of numbers out of the One, to the con-
struction of everything out of Number-souls, each
claiming an immortal and separate existence.®
1 Cornford, op. cit., p. 192.
2 Metaphysics, A. 5 ; trans. A. E. Taylor.
^ A record of Pythagoreanism and arithmosophy generally is pro-
vided by Dr R. Allendy in Le Symbolisme des N ombres, Essai d'Arith-
ynosophie, 1921. The author's object has been " to examine some
THE POWER OF WORDS 33
Parmenides, who followed, was occupied with the
functions of negative symbols. If ' Cold ' only means
the same as * not hot,' and Mark' the same as * not
light,' how can we talk about absences of things?
**Two bodies there are," he says, ^' which mortals have
decided to name, one of which they ought not to name,
and that is where they have gone wrong." They have
given names to things which simply are not, to the
not-things {juri eoV). But in addition to the problem of
Negative Facts, which involved Plato in the first
serious examination of the relations of thought and
language {^Sophist^ 261), Parmenides handed on to
Plato his own Orphic conundra about the One and
the Many, which also have their roots in language. So
that, quite apart from the difficulties raised by his Ideal
World where the Name-souls dwelt, and its relations
with the world of mud and blood (to which entities
on aesthetic grounds he hesitated to allow * ideas,'
much as theologians debated the existence of souls in
darkies), Plato had every reason to be occupied by
linguistic theory.
It is, therefore, all the more unfortunate that the
dialogue. The Cratylus, in which his views on language
are set forth, should have been so neglected in modern
times. Plato's theory of Ideas or Name-souls was
accepted from the Pythagoreans ; but as a scientist he
was constantly approaching the problem of names and
their meaning as one of the most difficult inquiries which
could be encountered. His analysis, in an age when
comparative philology, grammar, and psychology were
all unknown, is a remarkable achievement, but he fails
to distinguish consistently between symbols and the
thought symbolized.
aspects of the numerical key under which the religious and occult
philosophy of all times and of all schools has veiled its teachings. , . .
From this standpoint the study of Numbers should constitute the
foundation of all Occultism, of all Theosophy." In the preposterous
medley which results, the curious will find ample evidence that numerical
magic has been hardly less prevalent than the magic of words.
34 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The main tradition of Greek speculation remained
faithful to the verbal approach. There are two ways,
wrote Dr Whewell, of comprehending nature, **the
one by examining the words only and the thoughts
which they call up ; the other by attending to the facts
and things which bring these notions into being. . . .
The Greeks followed the former, the verbal or notional
course, and failed." And again, **The propensity to
seek for principles in the common usages of language
may be discovered at a very early period. ... In
Aristotle we have the consummation of this mode of
speculation."^ It has been generally accepted since
the time of Trendelenburg ^ that the Categories, and
similar distinctions which play a large part in Aristotle's
system, cannot be studied apart from the peculiarities
of the Greek language. ** Aristotle," says Gomperz,
** often suffers himself to be led by the forms of
language, not always from inability to free himself from
those bonds, but at least as often because the demands
of dialectic will not allow him to quit his arena. . . .
Thus a distinction is drawn between knowledge in
general and the particular sciences, based solely on the
fact that the objects of the latter are included in their
names. ... His classification of the categories is
frequently governed by considerations of linguistic
expediency, a circumstance which, it must be allowed
(sic\ ought to have restrained him from applying it to
ontological purposes."^
The practice of dialectical disputation in Aristotle's
time was based on the notion of a definite simple
meaning for every term, as we see from the Scholia of
Ammonius to the De Interpretations Thus the ques-
1 History of the Inductive Sciences, I., pp. 27, 29.
2 Kategorienlehre, p. 209, where it is contended that linguistic con-
siderations " guided, but did not decide " the classification. Already
in the first century a.d. various peripatetic eclectics had maintained
that the categories were entirely concerned with words, though as Dr
P. Rotta suggests {La Filosofia del Linguaggio nella Patristica e nella
Scholastica, p. 56), this is, perhaps, rather from the angle of the
nominalist-realist controversy.
3 T. Gomperz, Greek Thinkers, IV., pp. 40-41.
THE POWER OF WORDS 35
doner asked, *^Is Rhetoric estimable?"; and in one
form of the game, at any rate, the respondent was
expected to answer simply Yes or No. Certain words
were regarded as equivocal, chiefly as a result of
studying their * contraries,* in the current vocabulary.
Aristotle enumerates various rules with regard to equivo-
cation and other devices conceived with the object of
driving an opponent into some form of verbal incon-
sistency, in his Topics,
Mauthner, after a detailed argument to show that
the Aristotelian docrines of the Negative and the Cate-
gories **made the extant forms of speech the objects
of a superstitious cult, as though they had been actual
deities," remarks that ^'Aristotle is dead because he
was, more than perhaps any other notable writer in
the whole history of Philosophy, superstitiously devoted
to words. Even in his logic he is absolutely dependent
on the accidents of language, on the accidents of his
mother-tongue. His superstitious reverence for words
was never out of season." ^ And again : —
**For full two thousand years human thought
has lain under the influence of this man's catchwords,
an influence which has been wholly pernicious in
its results. There is no parallel instance of the
enduring potency of a system of words. "^
It is curious that in the De Interpretatione Aristotle
puts forward views which are hard to reconcile with
such a verbal approach. He there insists that words
are signs primarily of mental affections, and only
secondarily of the things of which these are likenesses.*
1 Mauthner, Aristotle, English Translation, pp. 84, 103-4. Cf. the
same author's Kritik der Sprache, Vol. III., p. 4, " If Aiistotle had
spoken Chinese or Dacotan, he would have had to adopt an entirely
different Logic, or at any rate an entirely different theory of Categories."
2 Ibid.., p. 19. See also Appendix A for a discussion of the influence
of Aristotle on Grammar.
3 De Interpretatione, 16, a. 3. It is worth noting that Andronicus of
Rhodes, who edited the first complete edition of Aristotle's works when
the Library of Theophrastus was brought to Rome from Athens as part
of Sulla's loot, marked this treatise as spurious. Maier's arguments in
its favour have, however, persuaded scholars to accept it as Aristotelian.
36 THE MEANING OF MEANING
And he elaborates a theory of the proposition which,
though incomplete and a source of endless confusion,
yet indicates a far more critical attitude to language
than his logical apparatus as a whole would suggest.
For here Aristotle finds no difficulty in settling the
main question raised by Plato in the Cratylus, All
significant speech, he says, is significant by convention
only, and not by nature or as a natural instrument —
thereby neglecting Plato's acute observations as to the
part played by onomatopoeia in verbal origins. In the
De Interpretatione various branches of significant speech
are deliberately excluded, and we are there invited to
consider only that variety known as enunciativey which,
as declaring truth or falsehood, is all that belongs to
Logic ; other modes of speech, the precative, imperative,
interrogative, etc., being more naturally regarded as
part of Rhetoric or Poetic.^
That verbal superstition would play a large part
in Greek philosophy might have been expected from
the evidence of Greek literature as a whole ; and
Farrar finds it necessary to suppose that ^schylus
and Sophocles, for example, must have believed in
Onomancy, which, as we shall see, is always bound up
with primitive word-magic. Even the practical Romans,
as he goes on to show, were the victims of such beliefs ;
and would all have echoed the language of Ausonius : —
Nam divinare est nomen componere, quod sit Fortunae,
morum, vel necis indicium.
1 In the Poetics (1456 b. Margoliouth, p. 198) Aristotle again alludes
to " the operations of which Speech is the instrument, of which the
Divisions are demonstration and refutation, the arousing of emotions,
such as pity, fear, anger, etc., exaggeration and depreciation." In
commenting on the enunciative or ' apophantic ' use of language
(jD. /. 17 a. 2), Ammonius refers to a passage in one of the lost works
of Theophrastus, where ' apophantic ' language, which is concerned
with things, is distinguished from other varieties of language, which
are concerned with the effect on the hearer and vary with the individuals
addressed. These different kinds of propositions, five in number
according to the later Peripatetics, were further elaborated by the Stoics.
Cf. Prantl {Geschichle der Logik, Vol. I., p. 441), Steinthal {Geschichte
der Sprachwissenschaft hex den Griechen und Romern, Vol. I., p. 317),
H. Maier, Psychologie des Emotionalen Denkens, pp. 9-10.
THE POWER OF WORDS 37
In their levies, Cicero informs us, they took care
'*to enrol first such names as Victor, and Felix, and
Faustus, and Secundus ; and were anxious to head the
roll of the census with a word of such happy augury
as Salvius Valerius. Caesar gave a command in Spain
to an obscure Scipio simply for the sake of the omen
which his name involved. Scipio upbraids his mutinous
soldiers with having followed an Atrius Umber, a * dux
abominandi nominis,* being, as De Quincey calls him,
a * pleonasm of darkness.' The Emperor Severus
consoled himself for the immoralities of his Empress
Julia, because she bore the same name as the profligate
daughter of Augustus " ; ^ just as Adrian VI., when he
became Pope, was persuaded by his Cardinals not to
retain his own name, on the ground that all Popes who
had done so had died in the first year of their reign. ^
When we reflect on the influences which might have
concentrated the attention of Grseco-Roman thinkers
on linguistic problems, it is at first sight surprising
that many of those whose constructions were so largely
verbal were also in certain respects fully aware of the
misleading character of their medium. The appeal of
the Heracliteans to language as evidence for the doctrine
of Change was, as we know from the Cratylus, vigorously
opposed by the Parmenidean logicians, as well as by
believers in the Ideas. And an equal readiness to
admit that the presuppositions of Language have to be
combated was manifested by Plotinus. Language, in
the Neo-Platonic view, **can only be made to express
the nature of the soul by constraining it to purposes
for which most men never even think of employing
it"; moreover, ^*the soul cannot be described at all
except by phrases which would be nonsensical if applied
to body or its qualities, or to determinations of
particular bodies."^
^ F. W. Farrar, Language and Languages, pp. 235-6.
2 Mervoyer, Etude sur V association des idies, p. 376.
3 Whittaker, The Neo-Platonists, p. 42.
38 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The rejection of misleading forms of language was
carried still further by Buddhist writers in their treatment
of the *soul.* Whether it was called satta (being), atta
(self), jiva (living principle), or puggdla (person) did
not matter :
** For these are merely names, expressions, turns
of speech, designations in common use in the world.
Of these he who has won truth makes use indeed,
but he is not led astray by them.'* ^
The Buddhists, whose attitude towards language
was exceptional, were quite ready to make use of
customary phrases for popular exposition, but it is not clear
whether any more subtle approach to fictional problems had
been developed.^
But though all the post-Aristotelian schools, and
particularly the Stoics, whose view of language had
considerable influence on Roman jurists,^ devoted some
attention to linguistic theory, nowhere in ancient times
do we find evidence of these admissions leading to a
study of symbols such as Plato and Aristotle seemed
at times to be approaching. As we shall see, this was
owing to the lack of any attempt to deal with signs as
such, and so to understand the functions of words in
relation to the more general sign-situations on which
all thought depends. Yet just before the critical spirit
was finally stamped out by Christianity, notable dis-
cussions had taken place in the Graeco-Roman world,
and the central problem was being examined with an
acuity which might have led to really scientific develop-
ment3. The religious leaders were aware of the danger,
* Digha N. I. 263 ; cf. C. A. F. Rhys Davids, Buddhist Psychology,
P- 32.
2 For an elaborate study of Eastern schools of thought and their
behaviour with words, see op. cit., Word Magic, by C. K. Ogden.
^ Lersch, Die Spruchphilosophie der Alten, Vol. III., pp. 184-6.
Aelius Gallus is cited for the definition of flumen as " aquam ipsam,
quae fluit " ; and, according to Gellius, Antistius Labeo was profoundly
interested in Grammar and Dialectic, " Latinarumque vocum origines
rationesque percalluerat, eaque praecipue scientia ad enodandos
plerosque iuris laqueos utebatur."
THE POWER OF WORDS 39
and there is even a passage in St Gregory of Nazian-
zus, where trouble is complained of, since **the Sexti
and Pyrrhoneans and the spirit of contradiction were
perniciously intruded into our churches like some evil
and malignant plague."^ In fact the whole theory of
signs was examined both by Aenesidemus, the reviver
of Pyrrhonism in Alexandria, and by a Greek doctor
named Sextus between 100 and 250 a.d. The analysis
offered is more fundamental than anything which made
its appearance until the nineteenth century.*
This brief survey of the Grasco-Roman approach to
language must suffice to represent pre-scientific specula-
tion upon the subject. Moreover, it has had a greater
influence on modern European thought than the even
more luxuriant growth of oriental theories. The atmo-
sphere of verbalism in which most Indian philosophy
developed seems to have been even more dense than
that of the scholastics or of the Greek dialecticians.
In this respect the Mimamsa-Nyaya controversy, the
Yoga philosophy, the Vijnanavada categories, the Prab-
hakara Mimamsakas^ are hardly less remarkable than
the doctrine of the Sacred Word AUM and the verbal
ecstasies of the Sufi mystics,* a part of whose technique
was revived by Dr Coue.
The history of spells, verbal magic and verbal
medicine, whether as practised by the Trobriand
magician,* by the Egyptian priest of the Pyramid
texts, or by the modern metaphysician, is a subject in
1 Cf. N. Maccoll, The Greek Sceptics (p. io8), where it is noted that
thirteen centuries later, when authority was once again challenged,
the remains of these thinkers at once attracted attention. Foucher
wrote a history of the New Academy and Sorbi^re translated the
Hypotheses of Sextus.
2 See R. D. Hicks, Stoic and Epicurean, p. 390 ff., on Aenesidemus ;
and infra, Appendix C.
3 Keith, Indian Logic, Chapter V. ; Dasgupta, History of Indian
Philosophy, Vol. I., pp. 148-9, 345-54 ; Rama Prasad, Self-culture
or the Yoga of Patanjah, pp. 88, 148, 152, 156, 215 ; Vedanta Sutras,
Sacred Books of the East. Vol. XLVIII., p. 148.
* The Science of the Sacred Word (translated by Bhagavan Das) ;
R. A. Nicholson, Studies in Islamic Mysticism, pp. 6-9.
6 Malinowski, Argonauts of the Western Pacific, pp. 408-10.
40 THE MEANING OF MEANING
itself and is dealt with at length in Word Magic, which
is designed as an expansion of the present chapter.
The extent to which primitive attitudes towards
words are still exploited by the astute is fully revealed
only when the achievements of some cynical rhetorician
are accorded the limelight of the law courts, or when
some particularly glaring absurdity is substituted for
the more patient methods of suggestion favoured by
repetitive journalism. But these same attitudes are
universal in childhood, and' are so strengthened by the
prevailing verbalism that even the most accurate
scientific training has often done little to render the
adult less subservient to his medium. Indeed, as we
have seen, the ablest logicians are precisely those who
are led to evolve the most fantastic systems by the aid
of their verbal technique. The modern logician may,
in time to come, be regarded as the true mystic, when
the rational basis of the world in which he believes is
scientifically examined.
Turning then to the more emotional aspects of
modern thought, we shall not be surprised to find a
veritable orgy of verbomania. The process whereby
the purely verbal systems so characteristic of pistic
speculation have attained such formidable dimensions,
has recently been examined by Rignano.^ Attributes
found by experience to be contradictory are gradually
dematerialized, and in their place are put '* verbal
envelopes, void of all intelligible content, so as to
eliminate the reciprocal contradiction and inhibition to
which these attributes would inevitably give rise if they
were allowed to furnish matter for the imagination in
however small a degree " ; and parallel with this de-
materialization, a formidable, dialectic edifice such as
that of scholasticism is constructed, with the object of
convincing human reason of the absence of logical
inconsistency in the greatest of absurdities.^
1 The Psychology oj Reasoning, Chap. XL. on Metaphysical Reasoning.
2 Cf. Guignebert, " Le dogme de la Trinite," Scientia, Nos. 32, 33,
37 (1913-14)-
THE POWER OF WORDS 41
In this way the idea of Divinity, for example, has
been slowly reduced to a ** conglomerate of attributes,
purely, or almost purely verbal." So that finally, as
William James puts it, *'the ensemble of the meta-
physical attributes imagined by the theologian " (God
being First Cause, possesses an existence a se ; he is
necessary and absolute, absolutely unlimited, infinitely
perfect; he is One and only, Spiritual, metaphysically
simple, immutable, eternal, omnipotent, omniscient, omni-
present, etc.) **is but a shuffling and matching of
pedantic dictionary adjectives. One feels that in
the theologians' hands they are only a set of titles
obtained by a mechanical manipulation of synonyms ;
verbality has stepped into the place of vision,
professionalism into that of life."^
Similarly, in reasoning commonly spoken of as
metaphysical, language has chiefly the function of
furnishing **a stable verbal support, so that inexact,
nebulous, and fluctuating concepts may be recalled to
the mind whenever required, without any prejudice to
the elasticity of the concepts " ; for which purpose the
phraseology adopted is **as vaporous and mysterious
as possible. Hence the so-called terms * written in
profundity,' referred to by Ribot, and dear to all
metaphysicians, just because they are so admirably
suited both to contain everything that it is desired to
have them include, and to conceal the contradictions
and absurdities of the doctrines based on the concepts
in question. . . . The function of the verbal symbol
is therefore to keep inconsistent attributes forcibly
united, though all of them could not possibly be
present to the mind at the same moment just because
they inhibit each other ; it being important that the
metaphysician should have them at his disposal in
order to deduce from the concept, from their aggre-
gate, sometimes one set of conclusions and some-
^ W. James, The Varieties of Religious Experience^ pp. 439-46.
E
43 THE MEANING OF MEANING
times another, according to the presentation of reality
desired."
Ultimately the word completely takes the place of
the thought — Denn eben wo Begriffe fehlen, da stellt
ein Wort zur rechten Zeit sich ein, as Mephistopheles
remarked. And Rignano aptly likens the process to
the shedding of the carapace by a crustacean. * * Without
this verbal carapace the disappearance of all intellectual
content would involve the disappearance of all trace
of the past existence of such content. But the carapace
preserves something which, just because it proves the
past existence of a concept which formerly had a real
life, may quite well be taken for one still existing. So
that this something, although devoid of all intellectual
content, always constitutes a valuable point of attach-
ment and support for the corresponding emotion, which
is so intense that it does not perceive that the cherished
resemblances no longer clothe the beloved object." ^
But the carapace, the verbal husk, is not merely a
valedictory point d'appui ; it also has a certain bombic
capacity, an * affective resonance ' which enables the
manipulator of symbols such as the Absolute to assure
himself that his labours are not altogether vain.
**When language is once grown familiar," says
Berkeley, **the hearing of the sounds or sight of the
characters is often immediately attended with those
passions which at first were wont to be produced by
the intervention of ideas that are now quite omitted."*
From the symbolic use of words we thus pass to the
emotive ; and with regard to words so used, as in
poetry, Ribot has well remarked that *'they no longer
act as signs but as sounds ; they are musical notations
at the service of an emotional psychology."^ So that
though at this extreme liniit ** metaphysical reasoning
^ 'Rignano, op. cit., Chap. XI.
2 Treatise, Introduction, § 20.
® La Logique des Sentiments, p. 187. Cf. Erdmann, op. cit., p. 120,
where the methods of kindling " das Strohfeuer einer wohlfeilen und
gedankenlosen Begeisterung " are considered.
THE POWER OF WORDS 43
may be intellectually quite incomprehensible ; though,
that is to say, it may actually become * vocem proferre
et nihil concipere,' it acquires by way of compensation,"
as Rignano says, ^'' an emotive signification which is
peculiar to it, i,e,^ it .is transformed into a kind of
musical language stimulative of sentiments and emo-
tions." Its success is due entirely to the harmonious
series of emotional echoes with which the naive mind
responds — et reboat regio cita Barbara bombum.
In practical affairs these influences are no less
potent and far more disastrous. We need only instance
the contention of the late Dr. Crookshank, supported by
an abundance of detailed evidence, that ** under the
influence of certain schools of thought, and certain
habits of expression, we have become accustomed to
speak and write as if a disease were a natural object'* ;
that these disastrous verbal habits must be resisted, for
** no great advance is probable in the domain of
Medicine until the belief in the real existence of diseases
is abandoned " ; and that the linguistic problem must
be faced at once, for ** no measure of useful agreement
will be achieved unless we are first in accord concerning
the principles of method and thought." ^ Coming from
one with thirty years' experience of the healing art, so
striking a confirmation of the views we have been
advancing cannot be lightly rejected ; and on another
page Dr Crookshank himself gives further reasons for
considering that its rejection could only be based on
a failure to appreciate the facts.^
Until recent times it is only here and there that
efforts have been made to penetrate the mystery by a
direct attack on the essential problem. In the four-
teenth century we have the Nominalist analysis of
William of Occam, in the seventeenth the work of Bacon
and Hobbes. The discussion rises to an apex with the
^ Influenza^ 192^, pp. 12, 61, 512.
2 Infra, Supplement II., pp. 344-5.
44 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Third Book of Locke's Essay and the interest of Leibnitz
in a Philosophical Language — a Characteristica Univer-
salis, Berkeley and Condillac kept the issue alive, and
with Home Tooke and his followers we reach the
nineteenth-century movement, . in which the work of
Bentham, Taine, and Mauthner was especially
significant.'
With the disappointing achievements of Compara-
tive Philology, on which public interest was long
centred through the efforts of Steinthal, Max Miiller, and
others, we need not here concern ourselves ; the Philo-
logical and Sociological approaches still, in fact, leave
the field- worker without guidance. To the chaos of
the Grammarians we address ourselves in Appendix A ;
and in Appendix D, in addition to the summary of the
work of C. S. Peirce, will be found examples of what
has been achieved by others who have looked to Logic
for a solution, as well as by those who appear to have
relied mainly upon Terminology. With contemporary
writers who have made use of the two remaining
avenues (of the seven chief methods of approach) the
Metaphysicians and the Psychologists y we shall be
frequently occupied in our remaining chapters. For
the rest, an endeavour has been made to give credit
where credit is due — from Ansel m's De Grammatico^
through Delgarno (1661),. Wilkins (1668), Freke (1693),
to Silberer (1917) and Cassirer's Philosophic der symbol-
ischen Formen (1923) — in the survey of man's progress
towards verbal independence published in a separate
volume. Word Magicy to which reference has already
been made.
As a result of all these efforts a Science of
Symbolism has become possible, but it is necessary
constantly to bear in mind the special forms in which
the Power of Words may make itself felt in modern
times.
^ For a detailed discussion of the linguistic achievements of Bacon.
Hobbes, and Berkeley, see Psyche, 1934, pp. 9-87. The fundamental but
neglected contribution of Jeremy Bentham, which so remarkably
anticipates contemporary developments, has been dealt with in C, K.
Ogden's Bentham's Theory of Fictions (International Library of Psy-
chology), 1932, and in his articles in Psyche, Vol. XVIII (1943)-
THE POWER OF WORDS 45
"Who hath not owned, with rapture-smitten frame
The power of grace, the magic of a name ? "
asked the simple poet a century ago ; ^ and to-day :
*' All sounds," says Yeats, '* evoke indefinable and yet
precise emotions ... or, as I prefer to think, call down
among us certain disembodied powers whose footsteps
over our hearts we call emotions."
Ancient beliefs may be dead, but the instinct, or
the hope, is strong ; —
" I do believe.
Though I have found them not, that there may be
Words which are things." 2
That which we call a rose, we flatter ourselves, **by
any other name would smell as sweet." But followers
of the late M. Coue should hesitate to regale themselves
with a rose named The Squashed Skunk. ** When I
partake," says Bergson, **of a dish that is supposed to
be exquisite, the name which it bears suggestive of
the approval given to it comes between my sensation
and consciousness ; I may believe that the flavour
pleases me when a slight effort of attention would prove
the contrary."^
And words may come between us and our objects in
countless subtle ways, if we do not realize the nature
of their power. In logic, as we have seen, they lead
to the creation of bogus entities, the universals,
properties and so forth, of which we shall have more
to say in the sequel. By concentrating attention on
themselves, words encourage the futile study of forms
which has done so much to discredit Grammar; by the
excitement which they provoke through their emotive
force, discussion is for the most part rendered sterile ;
by the various types of Verbomania and Graphomania,
the satisfaction of naming is realized, and the sense of
personal power factitiously enhanced.
1 Campbell, The Pleasures of Hope.
2 Byron, Childe Harold.
^ Time and Free- Will, p. 131.
46 THE MEANING OF MEANING
It is not surprising that a consideration of the ways
in which Language has been made to serve mankind
in the past should frequently lead to a sceptical reaction.
As an able but little-known writer has remarked : —
** Suppose someone to assert: The gostak
distims the doshes. You do not know what this
means ; nor do I. But if we assume that it is
English, we know that the doshes are distimmed by
the gostak. We know too that one distimmer of
doshes is a gostak. If, moreover, the doshes are
galloons^ we know that some galloons are distimmed
by the gostak. And so we may go on, and so we
often do go on."
And again, for what do the words we use in
everyday life stand? ^* We do not often have occasion
to speak, as of an indivisible whole, of the group of
phenomena involved or connected in the transit of a
negro over a rail-fence with a melon under his arm
while the moon is just passing behind a cloud. But if
this collocation of phenomena were of frequent occur-
rence, and if we did have occasion to speak of it often,
and if its happening were likely to affect the money
market, we should have some name as * wousin,* to
denote it by. People would in time be disputing
whether the existence of a wousin involved necessarily
a rail-fence, and whether the term could be applied
when a white man was similarly related to a stone wall."^
That it is **all a matter of words," or that ** we can
never get anywhere — you put it one way and I put it
another, and how can we ever know that we are talking
^ A. Ingraham, Swain School Lectures (1903), pp. 121-182, on " Nine
Uses of Language." The nine uses are given as follows :
(i) to dissipate superfluous and obstructive nerve-force.
(ii) for the direction of motion in others, both' men and animals.
(iii) for the communication of ideas.
(iv) as a means of expression.
(vi for purposes of record.
(vi) to set matter in motion (magic),
(vii) as an instrument of thinking,
(viii) to give delight merely as sound.
(ix) to provide an occupation for philologists.
THE POWER OF WORDS 47
about the same thing?" are conclusions to which the
study of verbal difficulties not infrequently leads those
who are confronted by them for the first time. But a
thorough understanding of the ways in which these
difficulties arise — the two cases just quoted are good
specimens — gives no ground for linguistic nihilism.
The best means of escape from such scepticism as
well as from the hypnotic influences which we have
been considering, lies in a clear realization of the way
in which symbols come to exercise such power, and
of the various senses in which they are said to have
Meaning. As an essential preliminary we are con-
fronted by the need for an account of the simplest kind
of Sign-situation, which will enable us to understand
how we come to * know ' or * think ' at all.
The contextual theory of Signs to which, then, we
first proceed, will be found to throw light on the
primitive idea that Words and Things are related by
some magic bond ; for it is actually through their
occurrence together with things, their linkage with
them in a * context' that Symbols come to play that
important part in our life which has rendered them
not only a legitimate object of wonder but the source
of all our power over the external world.
CHAPTER III
SIGN-SITUATIONS
Studiufn linguarum in nniversis, in ipsis primor-
diis triste est et ingratum ; sed primis difficultatibus
labore improbo et ardore nobili perruptis, postea
cumulatissime beamur. — Valcknaer.
Meaning, that {Divotal term of every theory of langu-
age, cannot be treated without a satisfactory theory of
signs. With some of its senses (in which ^ my meaning'
= * what I am thinking of) the question to be answered
is, in brief, ^i What happens when we judge, or believe,
or think, of something : of what kind of entities does
the something consist : and how is it related to the
mental event which is our judging, our believing, our
thinking?" The traditional approach to this question
has been through introspection and through the logical
analysis of Judgment, with the result that all the many
answers which have been given from this angle will be
found, in contrast to that which is outlined below, to
be variants of one opinion. They agree, that is, in
holding that, when we think of anything, we have to it
(or sometimes to something else) a relation of a quite
unique kind. In other words thinking is regarded as
an unparalleled happening. Thus the problems of
symbolization and reference come to be discussed in
isolation as though there were no allied fields of
inquiry.
This assumption of the uniqueness of the relation,
between the mind and its objects is the central tenet
in views which otherwise have no point of agreement.
Thus it is plausibly held by some that -when we are
believing (say) that we are alive, we are in a direct
SIGN-SITUATIONS 49
relation of a unique kind to an entity which is neither
in time nor in space, to be called the proposition * that
we are alive.' Others pretend that there is nothing of
this sort, but that instead we are then related by a
multiple relation, again of an unique kind, with a
variety of entities — among which are (perhaps) we
ourselves and certainly something to be called a * con-
cept' (or * universal ' or * property'), namely aliveness
or being alive. On both views the uniqueness in kind
of the relation between a thought as a mental event
and the things, whatever they may be, which the thought
is * of,' is too obvious to be questioned.
As a representative of the realist school which
claims to have assimilated the modern scientific
outlook, we may cite Mr Maynard Keynes who holds
that philosophically we must start from various classes
of things with which we have direct acquaintance.
**The most important classes of things with which
we have direct acquaintance are our own sensations,
which we may be said to experience^ the ideas and
meanings, about which we have thoughts and which
we may be said to understand^ and facts or character-
istics or relations of sense data or meanings, which
we may be said to perceive, . . . The objects of
knowledge and belief — as opposed to the objects of
direct acquaintance which I term sensations, meanings,
and perceptions — I shall term propositions'' As an
example of direct knowledge we are told that from
acquaintance with a sensation of yellow ** I can pass
directly to a knowledge of the proposition ^ I have a
sensation of yellow.'"^ Lest it should be supposed
that this odd, but very prevalent, doctrine is peculiar
to a school, we may refer to the justification of das
Urteil^ ** spaceless, timeless and impersonal," the
specific object of logical inquiry, elaborated by Lipps ; ^
1 A Treatise on Probability (1921), pp. 12-13.
2 Psychologische Untersuchungen, Vol. II., section i, " Zur ' Psy-
chologic ' und ' Philosophic,' " pp. 4-10.
50 THE MEANING OF MEANING
to the similar doctrine which vitiates so much of
Husserrs analysis of language;^ and to the still
more extraordinary phantasies of van Ginneken, a
subtle linguistic psychologist who, influenced doubt-
less by Meinong as well as by Theology, advances
the same view as a theory of * adhesion.' No account
of thinking in terms of verbal images and representa-
tions of things is, according to this author, sufficient.
** We find ourselves confronted by a new force : some-
thing non-sensible, transcendental ... by means of
which we understand and know in a new manner, and
a more perfect. one than we could through our animal
nature. We . . . adhere to the present reality, to
that which is really and actually there . . . and also to
the possible, the essence,^' ^ It is plain that on any such
view a scientific account of thinking is ruled out from
the very beginning.
*'What happens when we think?" is a question
which should be of interest to every thinker. The
triteness of the answer **When we think, we think,"
offered by such views may help to explain the small-
ness of the interest which is shown. In the following
pages an attempt is made to outline an account of
thinking in purely causal terms, without any introduc-
tion of unique relations invented ad hoc. It is with this
end in view, the provision of a natural as opposed to
an artificial theory of thinking, that we begin with the
consideration of signs.
Throughout almost all our life we are treating things
as signs. All experience, using the word in the widest
possible sense, is either enjoyed or interpreted (z.^.,
treated as a sign) or both, and very little of it escapes
some degree of interpretation. An account of the
process of Interpretation is thus the key to the under-
standing of the Sign-situation, and therefore the be-
1 See Appendix D, where Mr Russell's similar (1903) view will
also be found.
2 Principles de Linguistique Psychologique, pp. 52, 55, 68-9.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 51
ginning of wisdom. It is astonishing that although
the need for such an account has long been a
commonplace in psychology, those concerned with
the criticism and organization of our knowledge have
with few exceptions entirely ignored the consequences
of its neglect.
Attempts to provide this account have been given
in many different vocabularies. The doctrines of the
associationists,^ of apperception,^ of suggestion,^ have
led up to restatements in terms of process rather than
of content : * instinctive sequences'* taking the place
of * mental chemistry/ with advantage but without
essential change in the views maintained. The most
recent form in which the account appears is that
adopted by Semon, the novelty of whose vocabulary
seems to have attracted attention once more to con-
siderations which were no doubt too familiar to be
thought of any importance.
These otherwise valuable methods of approach tend
to separate the treatment of fundamental laws of mental
process from that of sign-interpretation, which is un-
fortunate for psychology. They have led not only to
the discussion in isolation of problems essentially the
same, but also to a failure to realize the extent of the
ground already covered by earlier thinkers.
Since the formulation has always been given in
causal terms, it will be convenient to use that termin-
ology. Its use is indeed almost unavoidable in the
interests of intelligibility, and need not be misleading
if the correct expansion is remembered. Thus in this
preliminary account we are merely using causal language
as an expository convenience for the sake of its brevity
and its verbs. The fuller statement which follows
avoids all mention of causes, effects, and dependence,
^ D. Hartley, Observations on Man, Prop. X.
2 G. C. Lange, Apperception, Part I, §§ i, 2.
3 I. Miller, The Psychology of Thinking, p. 154.
* C. Lloyd Morgan, Instinct and Experience, p. 194.
52 THE MEANING OF MEANING
and deals merely with observable correlations or con-
textual uniformities among events.
The effects upon the organism due to any sign,
which may be any stimulus from without, or any process
taking place within, depend upon the past history of
the organism, both generally and in a more precise
fashion. In a sense, no doubt, the whole past history
is relevant : but there will be some among the past
events in that history which more directly determine
the nature of the present agitation than .others. Thus
when we strike a match, the movements we make and
the sound of the scrape are present stimuli. But the
excitation which results is different from what it would
be had we never struck matches before. Past strikings
have left, in our organization, engrams,^ residual traces,
which help to determine what the mental process will be.
For instance, this mental process is among other things
an awareness that we are striking a match. Apart from
the effects of similar previous situations we should have
no such awareness. Suppose further that the aware-
ness is accompanied by an expectation of a flame.
This expectation again will be due to the effects of
situations in which the striking of a match has been
followed by a flame. The expectation is the excitation
of part of an engram complex, which is called up by
a stimulus (the scrape) similar to a part only of the
original stimulus-situation.
A further example will serve to make this clearer.
The most celebrated of all caterpillars, whose history
is in part recorded in the late Professor Lloyd Morgan's
Habit and Instinct^ P- 41? was striped yellow and black and
was seized by one of the professor's chickens. Being
offensive in taste to the chicken he was rejected. Thence-
forth the chicken refrained from seizing similar cater-
pillars. Why? Because the sight of such a cater-
1 Semon's terminology : Die Mneme, particularly Part II. (English
translation, p. 138 f¥.). For a critique of Semon's theory, see op. cit.,
Principles of Literary Criticism, Chapter XIV., and op. cit.^ The Meaning
of Psychology, Chapter IV.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 53
pillar, a part that is of the whole sight-seize-taste
context of the original experience, now excites the
chicken in a way sufficiently^ like that in which the
whole context did, for the seizing at least not to occur,
whether the tasting (in images) does or not.
This simple case is typical of all interpretation, the
peculiarity of interpretation being that when a context
has affected us in the past the recurrence of merely a
part of the context will cause us to react in the way
in which we reacted before.* A sign is always a
stimulus similar to some part of an original stimulus
and sufficient to call up the engram ■ formed by that
stimulus.
An engram is the residual trace of an adaptation *
made by the organism to a stimulus. The mental
process^ due to the calling up* of an engram is a
similar adaptation : so far as it is cognitive, what it is
adapted to is its referent, and is what the sign which
excites it stands for or signifies.
The term 'adapted,' though convenient, requires
expansion if this account is to be made clear — and to
this expansion the remainder of the present chapter
is devoted. Returning to our instance, we will sup-
pose that the match ignites and that we have been
expecting a flame. In this case the flame is what we
1 The degree of likeness necessary is a matter of dispute. Yellow
and black thus becomes a sign for offensiveness in taste.
2 To use the terminology of the Gestalt school, when a ' gestalt '
or ' configuration ' has been formed, a system that has been disturbed
will tend towards the ' end-state ' determined by former occurrences.
This view and terminology are discussed in op. cit., The Meaning
of Psychology, pp. 108-11, and 1 14-15 where a paragraph will be
found in which six different phrases could all be replaced by the word
gestalt, if desired (though the paragraph seems clearer as it is).
^ If the reader is doubtful about engrams he may read " to call
up an excitation similar to that caused by the original stimulus."
* This is not necessarily a right or appropriate adaptation. We are
here only considering adaptation so far as it is cognitive, and may
disregard the affective-volitional character of the process.
5 The account here given may be read as neutral in regard to psycho-
neural parallelism, interaction, and double aspect hypotheses, since
the problem of the relation of mind and body is — in so far as it is not
itself a phantom problem — a later one. Cf. Chapter IV., p. 81, and
op. cit., The Meaning of Psychology, Chapter II.
54 THE MEANING OF MEANING
are adapted to. More fully, the mental process which
is the expectation is similar to processes which have
been caused by flames in the past, and further it is
* directed to' the future. If we can discover what this
* directed to ' stands for we shall have filled in the chief
part of our account of interpretation.
Besides being * directed to ' the future our expecta-
tion is also * directed to' flame. But here * directed to*
stands for nothing more than * similar to what has been
caused by, ' A thought is directed to flame when it is similar
in certain respects to thoughts which have been caused
by flame. As has been pointed out above, we must not
allow the defects of causal language either to mislead us
here or alternatively to make us abandon the method of
approach so indicated. We shall find, if we improve
this language, both that this kind of substitute for
* directed to ' loses its strangeness, and also that the
same kind of substitution will meet the case of * direc-
tion to the future ' and will in fact explain the * direction '
or reference of thinking processes in general.
The unpurified notion of cause is especially mis-
leading in this connection since it has led even the
hardiest thinkers* to shrink from the identification of
1 Exceptions such as Mr E. B. Holt and Mr Russell, who have
independently adopted causal theories of reference, have not succeeded
in giving precision to tins view. The former, who holds {The Freudian
Wish, p. i68) that in behaviour there is " a genuine objective reference
to the environment," yet continues — " Even when one is conscious
of things that are not there, as in hallucination, one's body is adjusted
to them as if they were there," or again (p. 202), " Why does a boy go
fishing ? . . . Because the behaviour of the growing organism is so
far integrated as to respond specifically to such an environmental object
as fish in the pond. . . . The boy's thought (content) is the fish." It
will be seen that the contextual theory of reference outlined in the
present chapter provides an account of specific response which applies,
as Mr Holt's does not, to erroneous and to truly adapted behaviour
alike. Mr Russell, on the other hand, who, like Mr Holt, has now
abandoned the theory of direct knowledge relations between minds
and things, obscures the formulation of the causal account in his Analysis
of Mind by introducing considerations which arise from a quite incom-
patible treatment. " It is a very singular thing," he says (p. 235),
" that meaning which is single should generate objective reference,
which is dual, namely, true and false." When we come to the analysis
of complex references we shall see how this anomaly disappears. The
supposed distinction between ' meaning ' in this sense and objective
reference is one merely of degree of complexity accentuated by symbolic
SIGN-SITUATIONS 55
^ thinking of with * being caused by.' The suggestion
that to say * I am thinking of A ' is the same thing as
to say 'My thought is being caused by A,' will shock
every right-minded person ; and yet when for ' caused '
we substitute an expanded account, this strange sugges-
tion will be found to be the solution.
A Cause indeed, in the sense of a something which
forces another something called an effect to occur, is
so obvious a phantom that it has been rejected even
by metaphysicians. The current scientific account, on
the other hand, which reduces causation to correlation,
is awkward for purposes of exposition, since in the
absence of a 'conjugating' vocabulary constant peri-
phrasis is unavoidable. If we recognize, however, as
the basis of this account the fact that experience has
the character of recurrence, that is, comes to us in more
or less uniform contexts, we have in this all that is
required for the theory of signs and all that the old
theory of causes was entitled to maintain. Some of
these contexts are temporally and spatially closer
than others : the contexts investigated by physics for
instance narrow themselves down until differential
equations are invoked; those which psychology has
hitherto succeeded in detecting are wide, the uniformly
linked events being often far apart in time. Interpreta-
tion, however, is only possible thanks to these recurrent
contexts, a statement which is very generally admitted
conventions. It will be further noticed that Mr Russell's causal account
of meaning, especially pp. 197 ff. and 231 ff., differs from that developed
here in the importance assigned to images, meaning or reference being
defined either through the similarity of images to what they mean or
through their ' causal efficacy,' the ' appropriateness ' of their effects.
The chief objections to this view are the obscurity of ' appropriateness,'
the variation of ' causal efficacy ' with identity of meaning, and the
complexities which result in connection with the problem of Truth.
Professor Eaton in his Symbolism and Truth (1925), p. 23, adopts a view
somewhat similar to that of Mr Russell : " The simplest solution for
the purposes of the theory of knowledge is to accept as unique a meaning
activity. . . . Towards every object certain activities are appropriate."
The contention of the present chapter, on the other hand, is that it is
possible and profitable to go behind this ' appropriateness.'
Mr. Russell's less accessible exposition {The Dial, August, 1926, pp.
1 1 7-1 19) admits that images should not be introduced to explain meaning.
56 THE MEANING OF MEANING
but which if examined will be found to be far more
fundamental than has been supposed. To say, indeed,
that anything is an interpretation is to say that it is a
member of a psychological context of a certain kind.
An interpretation is itself a recurrence.
A concrete illustration may be considered at this
point. There is a well-known dog in most books upon
animal behaviour which, on hearing the dinner-bell,
runs, even from parts of the house quite out of reach of
scents and savours, into the dining-room, so as to be
well placed, should any kind thoughts towards him
arise in the diners. Such a dog interprets the sound of
the gong as a sign. How does this happen ? We shall
all agree about the answer ; that it is through the dog's
past experience. In this experience there have been so
to speak recurrent clumps of events, and one such clump
has been made up roughly as follows : Gong, savoury
odour, longing contemplation of consumption of viands
by diners, donations, gratification. Such a clump
recurring from time to time we shall call an external
context Now on a particular occasion the gong is
heard out of reach of savours. But thanks to past
experience of gong-sounds together with savours in
the interpretative dog, this present gong-sound gets into
a peculiar relation to past gongs and savours, longings,
etc., so that he acts in the sagacious manner described,
and is in evidence at the meal. Now this set of mental
events — his present hearing of the gong, his past
hearings of similar sounds, his past savourings together
with gongs, etc., and also his present mental process
owing to which he runs into the dining-room — such
a set we shall call psychological context. A context of
this sort may plainly recur as regards its more general
features. It is also clear that the members of it may
be indefinitely numerous and may be widely separated
in time, and that it is through this separateness in time
that such a psychological context is able to link together
external contexts, the recurrent clumps of experiences
SIGN-SITUATIONS 57
of the gong-savour kind above mentioned. In a similar
fashion all learning by experience will illustrate the
point that to be an act of interpretation is merely to be
a peculiar^ member of a psychological context of a
certain kind ; a psychological context being a recurrent
set of mental events peculiarly related to one another
so as to recur, as regards their main features, with partial
uniformity.
Little hesitation will be felt in granting that with-
out such recurrence or partial uniformity no prediction,
no inference, no recognition, no inductive generalization,
no knowledge or probable opinion as to what is not
immediately given, would be possible. What is more
difficult to realize is that this is so only because
these processes, recognitions, inferences or thinkings are
members of certain recurrent psychological contexts.
To say that I recognize something before me as a
strawberry and expect it to be luscious, is to say that
a present process in me belongs to a determinative
psychological context together with certain past pro-
cesses (past perceptions and consumptions of straw-
berries). These psychological contexts recur whenever
we recognize or infer. Usually they link up with (or
form wider contexts with) external ^ contexts in a peculiar
fashion.^ When they do not, we are said to have been
mistaken.
The simplest terminology in which this kind of
linkage can be stated is that of signs. Behind all
interpretation we have the fact that when part of an
external context recurs in experience this part is, through
its linkage with a member of some psychological context
(/.^., of a causally connected group of mental events often
widely separated in time) sometimes a sign of the rest
of the external context.
Two points require elucidation if this outline is to
1 A further analysis of the peculiarity appears in Appendix B.
2 If we never discussed psychology ' external ' might be read as
' physical.'
3 Cf. p. 62 infra, and Appendix B.
58 THE MEANING OF MEANING
be filled in. The first concerns Contexts ; ^ the second
the sense in which they are Uniform.
(i) A context is a set of entities [things or events^ related
in a certain way ; these entities have each a character such
that other sets of entities occur having the same characters
and related by the same relation ; and these occur ' ntarly
uniformly,'* In our instance of the match-scrape event
and the flame event the uniting relation evidently in-
cludes proximity in time and space — a scrape in America
and a flame in China would not constitute such a
context — but it is important to realize that no restriction
need be initially imposed as to the kind of relation which
may occur as the uniting relation in a context, since
which relations actually occur will be discovered only
by experience. Contexts, moreover, may have any
number of members ; dual contexts containing only two
members seem to be rare, though for purposes of
exposition it is convenient to suppose them to occur.
The constitutive characters involved present a certain
difficulty. In our instance of the match-scrape event
and .the flame event they may be written * being a
scrape' and * being a flame,' but these are plainly
shorthand names for very elaborate sets of properties.
It is not all scrapes from which we expect flames,
and we would be surprised if our match flamed like
magnesium ribbon.
^ Throughout the present volume the term context is used in the
strictly technical sense defined below, which dififers from the ordinary
use. A literary context is a group of words, incidents, ideas, etc.,
which on a given occasion accompanies or surrounds whatever is said
to ha^ve the context, whereas a determinative context is a group of this
kind which both recurs and is such that one at least of its members
is determined, given the others. A somewhat similar but vaguer use
appears to have been adopted by Professor Baldwin {Thought and
Things, Vol. I., p. 48), though it becomes clear as his exposition pro-
ceeds (cf. also Appendix D) that the resemblance is illusory, since,
e.g., an image (Vol. I., p. 81) can be " convertible into a context," and
we read of " the development within a content itself of the enlarged
context of predicated and implicated meanings." (Vol. II., p. 246.)
Such uses have more in common with that of Professor Titchener,
who after the second passage which we quote in Chapter VIII., says,
" I understand by context simply the mental process or complex of
mental processes which accrues to the original idea through the situation
in which the organism finds itself."
SIGN-SITUATIONS 59
(2) The difficulty here suggested in choosing con-
stitutive characters is connected with the problem * In
what sense do contexts occur nearly uniformly ?' It is
plain that if sufficiently general characters are taken
and sufficiently general uniting relations, contexts not
^nearly' but perfectly uniform can easily be found.
For instance, the context constituted by two entities
having each the character of * being an event ' and
related by the relation of * succession.'^ On the other
hand if we make the constitutive characters and uniting
relation too specific, recurrence becomes uncertain. For
this reason our account has to be in terms of probability.
In our instance, to say that the context of which * scrape *
and ' flame ' are constitutive characters recurs (or is a
context) is to say : —
either that whenever there is a scrape there will probably
be a flame having the required relation to the
scrape ;
or that whenever there is a flame there was probably
a scrape having the converse relation to the flame ;
or both these statements.
In the first case the context is said to be determina-
tive in respect of the character flame ; in the second in
respect of the character scrape ; in the third in respect
of both characters.
A dual context is here taken for the sake of simplicity,
a fact which tends to make the account appear artificial.
Multiple contexts of three or more terms involve no
further problems. They must be determinative in
respect of one constitutive character, and may be so in
respect of any number.
In this account we have carefully avoided all mention
1 It should be noted that it is riot necessary for the characters in
respect of wnich a sign is interpreted to be ' given,' i.e., for us to know
that they belong to it. This circumstance is of importance in consider-
ing the processes of interpretation by which we arrive at knowledge
of other entities than sensations. It should be further observed that
a constitutive character may be of the form ' being either A or B
or C, etc'
6o THE MEANING OF MEANING
of images — those revivals or copies of sensory experi-
ence which figure so prominently in most accounts of
thinking. There are good reasons why attempts to
build a theory of interpretation upon images must be
hazardous. One of these is the grave doubt whether
in some minds they ever occur or ever have occurred.
Another is that in very many interpretations where
words play no recognizable part, introspection, unless
excessively subtle and therefore of doubtful value as
evidence, fails to show that imagery is present. A third
and stronger reason is that images seem to a great
extent to be mental luxuries. Before the appearance
of an image, say, of an afanc, something can be observed
to occur which is often misleadingly described as *an
intention of imagining' an afanc. But that this is not
merely an intention becomes plain upon reflection.
When we speak of an intention in this way we are
speaking of affective- volitional characters, those, roughly
Sf)eaking, on account of which a state of mind changes
from a relatively inchoate to a relatively organized and
articulate condition. An intention by itself is as im-
possible as an excitement. There has to be something
which is excited, and there has to be something for
the intention to belong to. Now what is this in such
cases as we are examining?
Whatever it is it has that peculiar character of being
directed towards one thing rather than another, which
we here call reference. This reference may be uncertain
and vague, but seems to be the same in kind as that
which occurs in more articulate and clear-cut cases of
thinking, where symbols in the form of images or words
have been provided. In the initial stages of such
references it is hard to suppose that images are playing
any essential part. Any image which does arise is at
once accepted or rejected as it accords or disaccords
with the reference, and this accordance is not a question
of matching between images or of similarity in any
intrinsic characters. If images of any sort are involved
SIGN-SITUATIONS 6i
in these states of beginning to think of things, it is
certain that they are not always involved qua images,
/>., as copying or representing the things to which
the reference points, but in a looser capacity as mere
signs and not in their capacity as mimetic or simulative
signs.
Indeed, it may be questioned whether mimetic
imagery is not really a late, sporadic product in mental
development. We are so accustomed to beginning
psychology with images that we tend to think that
minds must have begun with them too. But there is
no good reason to suppose that the mind could not
work equally well without them. They have certain
oddly limited uses as economizing effort in certain
restricted fields. The artist, the chess-player, the mathe-
matician find them convenient. But these are hardly
primitive mental occupations. Hunger rarely excites
taste images, the salivary flow occurs without them.
Route-finding in pathless wilds or Metropolitan suburbs
is best done by sense of direction and perception alone.
On the whole, a mimetic sign is not the kind of thing
that a primitive mind would be able to make much use
of. Other signs would serve equally well for most
purposes, and the few advantages of images would be
more than counterbalanced by 'the risk of danger* to
which their users expose themselves. An inaccurate
or irrelevant image is worse than no image at all.
Such arguments as there are in favour of images as
very primitive and fundamental products, the argument
from dreams, for example, or the alleged prevalence of
images among children and primitive peoples, are
obviously difficult to estimate. Imagery may be
prevalent without necessarily serving any important
function ; in day-dreaming, for instance, the gratifications
which it affords are no proof that the references con-
cerned could not occur without it. Similarly those who
naturally produce exhaustive images of their breakfast-
table can often know all about it without a glimmer of
62 THE MEANING OF MEANING
an image, unless too much indulgence in images has
impaired their natural ability.
For these reasons, any theory of interpretation which
can refrain from making images a corner-stone has clear
advantages over those which cannot. It is mainly on
this point that the view here developed differs from Mr
Russeirs account^ of meaning, which should, however,
be consulted by those who desire a more simple dis-
cussion of the part played by Mnemonic causation in
knowledge than our brief outline provides.
Suppose now that we have struck our match and
have expected a flame. We need some means of
deciding whether our expectation has been true or false.
Actually we look to see whether there was a flame or
not, but the question we have to answer is, how do we
pick out, amongst all the other possible events which
we might have selected, this particular flame as the
event on which the truth or falsity of our expectation
depended.^ We pick it out by means of certain external
contexts to which it belongs : namely, it is that event,
if any, wnich completes the context whose other member
in this case is the scrape, and thus comes to be linked
to the expectation through the psychological context
made up of that expectation and past experiences of
scrapes and flames.
If now there be an event which completes the external
context in question, the reference is true and the event
is its referent. If there be no such event, the reference
IS falsey and the expectation is disappointed.
The above account covers beliefs of the form * a
flame will follow this scrape' prompted by a present
1 See The Analysis of Mind, especially pp. 207-210. One point in
this treatment is of extreme importance. " Generality and par-
ticularity," according to Mr Russell, " are a matter of degree " (p. 209).
For a causal theory of reference no other conclusion appears possible.
Absolute particulars and absolute universals ought therefore to be out
of court and beneath discussion.
2 A more formal and elaborate account of this crucial step in the
theory of interpretation will be found in Appendix B, to which those
who appreciate the complexity of the subject are directed.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 63
sensation. Instead of a present sensation a belief may
itself be a sign for a further belief which will then be
an interpretation of this belief. The only cases of this
which appear to occur are introspective beliefs of the
form * I believe that I am believing, etc' which may,
it is important to recognize, be false as often as, or
more often than, other beliefs. As a rule a belief not
prompted by a sensation requires a number of beliefs
simultaneous or successive for its signs. The beliefs,
* There will be a flame ' and ^ I am in a powder factory,*
will, for most believers, be signs together interpreted
by the belief * The end is at hand.' Such is one of
the psychological contexts determinative in respect of
the character of this last belief.^ Whether the belief
in question is true or not will depend upon whether
there is or is not some entity forming together with
the referents of the two sign beliefs, in virtue of its
characters and their characters and a multiple relation,
a context determinative in respect of their characters.
In other words — upon whether the place does blow up.
In this way the account given can be extended to
all cases of particular expectations. Further, since the
uniting relations of contexts are not restricted to suc-
cessions it will also apply to all cases of inference or
interpretation from particular to particular. The next
step, therefore, is to inquire what kind of account can
be given of general references.
The abstract language which it is necessary to
employ raises certain difficulties. In a later chapter
arguments will be brought in favour of regarding such
apparent symbols as * character,' * relation,' * property;'
1 The additional assumption required here is that the effects of a
belief are often similar, in respect of derivative beliefs, to the effects
of the verifying sensation. Few people will deny that the belief that
an unseen man in a bush is shooting at me will have effects (in respect
of such derivative beliefs as that it would be better for me to be else-
where) similar to those which would be occasioned by the sight of the
man so shooting. Such contexts, in which a belief in the occurrence
of A and A's occurrence itself are alternative signs for interpretations
the same in these respects, are as well established as any in psychology.
64 THE MEANING OF MEANING
* concept,' etc., as standing for nothing beyond (in-
directly) the individuals to which the alleged character
would be applicable. The most important of these
arguments is the natural incredibility of there being
such universal denizens of a world of being. As we
shall see, these apparent symbols are indispensable as
machinery, and thus for some purposes such credulity
is harmless. But for other purposes these baseless (or
purely symbolically based) beliefs are dangerous im-
pediments. Thus a chief source of opposition to an
extension of the account here outlined to general
references, is phantom difficulties deriving from faith
in this other world.
Such references may be formulated in a variety
of ways:— ^ All S is P' and ' {x) : <p (x)') yfr (x) ' are
favourites. What we have to discover is what happens
when we have a belief which can be symbolized in
these ways. Let us take as an instance the belief
* All match-scrapes are followed by flames.' There is
good reason to suppose that such beliefs are a later
psychological development than beliefs of the form
which we have been considering. It is plausible to
suppose that some animals and infants have particular
expectations but not any general beliefs. General beliefs,
it is said, arise by reflection upon particular beliefs.
Thus we may expect to find that general beliefs arise
in some way out of particular beliefs. But the gener-
ality and particularity to be attributed to simple or
primordial references are certainly not those which
logical formulation endeavours to introduce. Nor
should it be supposed that genetically a stage or era
of particular reference precedes general thinking. It
is rather the case that in all thought processes two
tendencies are present, one towards greater definiteness
or precision, the other towards wider scope and range.
It is the conditions under which this second tendency
takes effect that we are here considering.
Following this clue let us try to set down some of the
SIGN-SITUATIONS 65
conditions under which a general belief might develop
from such particular references as we have been con-
sidering. To begin with we may suppose
(i) that a number of true and verified interpreta-
tions of match-scrapes have occurred in the
same organism, and
(2) that no interpretation which has been shown
to be false, by the absence in the related
sensation of the expected flame character, is
concerned in the genesis of the general belief.
The second of these conditions is plainly more
important than the first. We often seem to pass to
general beliefs from single experiences and not to
require a plurality, but (exceptionally powerful thinkers
apart) we do not base general beliefs upon directly
contradictory evidence. We may therefore retain the
second condition, but must revise the first. In some
cases, no doubt, repeated verified expectations do
condition the general expectation, but they condition
its degree rather than its reference. On the other hand
some experience of repetition would seem to be required.
A primordial mind's first thought could hardly be a
general thought in the sense here considered. It seems
justifiable to assume that some series of similar verified
interpretations should be included in the context of a
general belief, though how closely this need be con-
nected with the particular interpretation which is being
generalized must at present be left uncertain.
Another condition which can only be put rather
vaguely concerns the inclusiveness of a general
reference. The togetherness involved in such a refer-
ence does not seem to require any properties in a
*mind' beyond those already assumed and stated, but
the inclusiveness might be thought to raise an addi-
tional problem. The kind of experience required,
however, is not difficult to discover. On many occasions
so far as the verifying stimuli are concerned it is
66 THE MEANING OF MEANING
indifferent whether we think of all of a given set of
objects or of each of them in turn. The child who finds
all his fingers sticky might equally well have found
each of them sticky. On other occasions his smallest
fingers will not need to be washed. Thus the difference
between inclusive and non-inclusive sets of objects
as referents, the difference between * some ' and * all *
references, will early develop appropriate signs.
Individuals can be found who throughout their lives
* think ' of these differences by means of such images,
/.^., use such images as adjunct-signs in their inter-
pretations. In other cases no such imagery nor even
the use of the words * all ' or * some,' or any equivalents,
is discoverable. Yet even in these cases some linger-
ing trace of the engraphic action due to situations of
this sort may reasonably be supposed as conditioning
interpretations which * employ these notions.' In
attempting therefore to set out the kind of psychological
context of which a general reference consists, terms
representing them would require inclusion.
Such in very tentative outline is the account which
the causal theory of reference would give of general
beliefs. The detailed investigation of such contexts is
a task to which sooner or later psychology must address
itself, but the methods required are of a kind for which
the science has only recently begun to seek. Much
may be expected when the theory of the conditioned
reflex, due to Pavlov, has been further developed.^
It remains to discuss in what sense, if any. a false
belief, particular or general, has a referent. From the
definitions given it will be plain that the sense in which
a false belief may be said to have a referent must be
quite other than that in which a true belief has a
referent. Thus the arguments now to be given for
a more extended use of the term in no way affect what
has been said ; and it will also be purely as a matter
^ For an account of this method and its applications see op. cit., The
Meaning of Psychology, Chapter IV.
SIGN-SITUATIONS ' 67
of convenience that we shall use the term in connection
with false beliefs.
In the first place it is clear that true and false
references alike agree in a respect in which processes
such as sensing, breathing, contracting muscles,
secreting, desiring, etc., do not agree with them. It
is convenient to have a term, such as reference, to stand
for this respect in which they agree. The term ^ belief
which might at first appear most suitable is less con-
venient, both because of its association with doctrines
such as those above discussed' which postulate an
unique relation ^ thinking of,' and because it is becom-
ing more and more often used with special reference
to the affective-volitional characters of the process. A
second and stronger reason derives from what may be
called the analysis of references. If we compare, say,
the references symbolized by ^ There will be a flash
soon,' and ^ There will be a noise soon,' it is at least
plausible to suppose that they are compounds contain-
ing some similar and some dissimilar parts. The
parts symbolized by ^ flash ' and ^ noise' we may
suppose to be dissimilar, and the remaining parts to
be similar in the two cases. The question then arises :
**What are these parts from which it would seem
references can be compounded? "
The answer which we shall give will be that they
are themselves references, that every compound
reference is composed wholly of simple references
united in such a way as will give the required structure
to the compound reference they compose. But in
attempting to carry out this analysis a special difficulty
has to be guarded against. We must not suppose that
the structure of the symbol by which we symbolize the
reference to be analysed does in any regular fashion
reflect its structure. Thus in speaking of the parts
symbolized by ^ flash ' and ^ noise' above we are
running a risk. Illegitimate analyses of symbols are
the source of nearly all the difficulties in these subjects.
68 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Another point which must first be made clear con-
cerns the sense in whch references may be compounded.
To speak of a reference is to speak of the contexts
psychological and external by which a sign is linked to
its referent. Thus a discussion of the compounding of
references is a discussion of the relations of contexts
to one another.
What are usually called the Mogical forms' of
propositions, and what we may call the forms of
references, are, for the view here maintained, forms or
structures of the determinative contexts of interpreta-
tions. They are at present approached by logicians
mainly through the study of symbolic procedure. A
more direct approach appears however to be possible,
though, as yet, difficult. Thus the remaining portions
of the complete contextual theory of reference, namely
the accounts of references of the forms * p or q,' < p and
q,' 'not p,' and of the difference between 'all S' and
' some S,' regarded as concerned with the interweaving
of contexts, are, if still conjectural, plainly not beyond
conjecture.
With this proviso, we may resume the consideration
of the referents of false and of the analysis of compound
beliefs.
We have seen that true and false beliefs are members
of the same kinds of psychological contexts, and that
they differ only in respect of external contexts.^ Let
1 A complex of things as united in a context may be called a ' fact '
There need be no harm in this, but as a rule the verbal habits thus
incited overpower the sense of actuality even in the best philosophers.
Out of facts sprmg negative facts ' ; ' that no flame occurs ' becomes
a negative fact with which our expectation fails to correspond when
we are in error. It is then natural to suppose that there are two modes
of reference, towards a fact for a true reference, away from it for a false
^"^^^^^x^"^^?" *^® ^theory of reference can be made very complicated
and difficult, as for instance by Mr Russell in his Analysis of Mind
pp 271-78. As regards negative facts, Mr Russell has allowed his
earlier theories to remain undisturbed by his recent study of Meaning
The general question of ' negative facts ' is discussed in Appendix E '
and we shall find, when we come to distinguish the various senses of
meaning, that to raise the question of the correspondence of belief
with fact IS for a causal theory of reference to attempt to solve the
problem twice over. When the problem of reference is settled that of
truth is found to be solved as well.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 69
us consider this difference again, taking for the sake
of simplicity the case of particular beliefs. Suppose
that of two possible beliefs, * There will be something
green here in a moment,' * There will be something red
here in a moment,' the first is true and the second false.
But the second, if it can be regarded, as having
contained or included the belief, * There will be some-
thing here in a moment,' will have included a belief
which is true and similar to a belief included in the
first belief. Reverting now to our definition of a
context let us see in what sense this belief is included
and how it can be true.
In such a case the external context may consist of
two entities, say s (a sign) and g- (something green),
having the characters Sy 6', and related by space and
time relations which may be taken together. But it is
clear that both s and g- will have other characters
besides 5 and G, For instance, s has succeeded other
entities and may be interpreted in respect of this
character as well as in respect of 5, so^ interpreted it
gives rise to the belief, * There will be something here
in a moment ' ; interpreted also in the further respect
of 5 it gives rise to the complex belief, ^ There will be
something green here in a moment,' or to the complex
belief, * There will be something red here in a moment,'
true and false interpretation of s in this further respect
as the case may be. In either case, however, the
contained belief, * There will be something here in a
moment,' will be true if there is something (say g)
which forms with s, in virtue of s's character of being a
successor (or other temporal characters) and ^s tem-
poral characters, a context determinative of this
character of s. Thanks to the generality of these
characters such contexts never fail to recur, a fact which
accounts for the ease with which true predictions of
this unspecific kind can be made.
^ Whether this is a sufficient character for the interpretation need
not be considered in this brief outline of the theory.
70 THE MEANING OF MEANING
It appears then that a belief may contain other less
specific beliefs, and that a compound definite belief is
composed of simpler, less specific beliefs, united by
such relations as will yield the required structure.^
One objection to such a view derives from language.
It is usual to restrict the term belief to such processes
as are naturally symbolized by propositions and further
to those among such processes as have certain affective-
volitional characters in addition to their characters as
cognitions. The simple references which would be
required if the analysis suggested were adopted would
rarely lend themselves to' propositional formulation and
would be lacking as a rule in accompanying belief,
feelings and promptings to action. Thus the terms
* idea * and ^ conception ' would often be more suitable
for such processes. To extend a metaphor which is
becoming familiar, these might be regarded as
* electronic ' references. But the ideas or conception
with which we are here concerned would have to be
clearly distinguished from the * concepts ' of those
metaphysicians who believe in a world of universals.
We shall deal at greater length with the question in
Chapter V.
Let us consider the idea or conception of green.
It arises in the reader in this case through the occur-
rence of the word * green.' On many occasions this
word has been accompanied by presentations of green
things. Thus the occurrence of the word causes in him
a certain process which we may call the idea of green.
But this process is not the idea of any one green thing ;
such an idea would be more complex and would require
a sign (or symbol in this case) with further characters
for him to interpret — only so will his idea be specific.
1 The important and intricate problems raised by these relations
are to be approached in the same fashion as the problem of the generality
of references, which is in fact an instance. The great question * What
is* logical form ? ' left at present to logicians whose only method is the
superstitious rite ' direct inspection/ must in time be made amenable
to investigation.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 7^
The psychological context to which it belongs is not of
a form to link any one green thing with the sign rather
than any other. If now we write instead, * a green
thing/ the same process occurs— unless the reader is a
logician or philosopher with special theories (/>., pecu-
liar linguistic contexts). In both cases the idea can
be said to be *of* any sensation similar to certain
sensations which have accompanied in the past the
occurrence of the sensation taken as a sign. Compare
now the indefinite belief symbolized by ^ There are
green things.' Here any one of the same set of
sensations that the idea was said to be ^of ' will verify
the belief For if there be one or more entities similar
to certain entities which are members of its psycho-
logical context, it will be true; otherwise it will be
false. We may therefore extend the term ' referent ' to
cover these entities, if there be any such, without the
usage leading to confusion.
It will be noticed that strictly simple indefinite
beliefs (illustrated by, * There are green things ' as
opposed to * There are green things now*) only require
for their truth a condition which is present among
their psychological contexts. This happy state of
things has its parallel in the fact that strictly simple
ideas raise no problem as to whether they are ideas
*of' anything or not But complex ideas, such as
glass mountains, phoenixes, round squares, and
virtuous triangles may be made to bristle with such
problems. The distinction between an idea and a belief
is, however, one of degree, although through symbolic
conventions it can sometimes appear insuperable.
We can now define the usage of the term * referent '
for false beliefs. All beliefs whether true or false are
theoretically analysable into compounds whose con-
stituents are simple references, either definite or in-
definite, united by the relations which give its * logical
form * to the reference.
Definite simple references are not very common.
72 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Sometimes when we say ' this ! ' * there ! ' ' now ! ' we
seem to have them. But usually, even when our refer-
ence is such that it can have but one referent, it can
be analysed. Even references for which we use simple
symbols (names), ^.^., Dostoevski, are perhaps always
compound, distinct contexts being involved severally
determinative of distinct characters of the referent.^
What is more important is to understand the peculiar
dispersion which occurs in false reference. Illustrations
perhaps make this clearer than do arguments.
Thus, if we say, * This is a book ' and are in error,
our reference will be composed of a simple indefinite
reference to any book, another to anything'now, another
to anything which may be here,^and so on. These
constituents will all be true, but the whole reference to
this book which they together make up (by cancelling
out, as it were, all but the one referent which can be
a book and here and now) will be false, if we are in
error and what is there is actually a box or something
which fails to complete the three contexts, book, here,
and now. To take a slightly more intricate case, a
golfer may exclaim, *' Nicely over!" and it may be
obvious to the onlooker that his reference is to a divot
and its flight, to his stroke, to. a bunker, and to a ball.
Yet the ball remains stationary, and these constituent
or component references, each adequate in itself, are
combined in his complex reference otherwise than are
their separate referents in actual fact. There is clearly
no case for a non-occurrent flight of a golf-ball as an
object of his belief ; though he may have been referring
to the feel of his stroke, or to an image of a travelling
ball. In these last cases we should have to suppose
him to be shortening his own interpretative chain
instead of breaking loose and venturing a step too far
^ This sentence like all sentences containing words such as ' character,'
is redundant and should rather read ..." distinct contexts being
involved severally, indefinitely, determinative of the referent." But
this pruning of its redundancies would lead to failure in its communi-
active function. Cf. p. 96 infra.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 73
by what may be called saltatory interpretation. His
language (cf. also Canon IV., page 103 infra) does not
bind us to either alternative. Thus we see in outline
how compound false beliefs may be analysed.
The referent of a compound false belief will be the
set of the scattered referents of the true simple beliefs
which it contains. We shall, in what follows, speak of
beliefs, and interpretations, whether true or false, and
of ideas, as references, implying that in the senses
above defined they have referents.
We thus see how the contextual theory of reference
can be extended to cover all beliefs, ideas, conceptions
and * thinkings of.' The details of its application to
special cases remain to be worked out. Logicians will
no doubt be able to propound many puzzles,^ the
solving of which will provide healthy exercise for
psychologists. The general hypothesis that thinking
or reference is reducible to causal relations ought how-
ever to commend itself more and more to those who
take up (at least sometimes) a scientific attitude to the
world. Subject to the proviso that some satisfactory
account of probability can be given, * meaning ' in the
sense of reference becomes according to this theory a
matter open to experimental methods.
A satisfactory account of probability, however,
though very desirable, does not seem likely to be
forthcoming by current methods. Evidently a change
in the line of attack is required. Mr Keynes* Treatise
starting as it does with an unanalysable logical relation,
called probability, which holds between equally mysteri-
ous and unapproachable entities, called propositions,
is too mediaeval in its outlook to be fruitful; and it remains
to be seen whether scientists will be able to profit by
Reichenbach's more empirical Wahrscheinlichkeitslehre.
It seems possible on the contextual theory of refer-
^ As, for instance, whether in the example taken above, if one or
both of the sign beliefs were false, and yet the room we were in did
blow up through other causes, our belie"f could be true ? This problem
is easily solved if we notice that although the belief symbolized in the
speaker would be false, a belief incited in a hearer might be true.
74 THE MEANING OF MEANING
ence to suggest an expansion of this kind of obscure
shorthand and so come nearer the formulation of the
yet undiscovered central question of probability. What
are talked about by logicians as propositions are,
according to this theory, relational characters of acts of
referring — those relational characters for which the term
* references ' is used. Thus to believe, or entertain, or
think of, a proposition, is on this view simply to refer,
and the proposition as a separate entity is to be regarded
as nothing but a linguistic fiction foisted upon us by
the utraquistic subterfuge.* Two * thinkings of* the
same * proposition ' are two thinkings with the same
reference, the same relational property, namely * being
contextually linked in the same way with the same
referent.' It will be noted that on this account of
propositions the logical relations of propositions to one
another must be dealt with far less summarily and
formally than has hitherto been the case.
With propositions so understood there occurs a sense
in which a single proposition by itself without relation
to other propositions, can intelligibly be said to be
probable. Probability here has still a relational aspect,
and it is only because propositions {i,e,, references) are
relational that they can be said to be probable. This
very fundamental sense is that in which the uniformity
of the context upon which the truth of a reference depends
is probable.
We have seen that by taking very general consti-
tutive characters and uniting relation, we obtain contexts
of the highest probability. Similarly by taking too
specific characters and relation the probability of the
context dwindles until we should no longer call it a
context. In this way, whether a context is probable
can be seen to be a question about the degree of
generality of its constitutive characters and uniting
relation ; about the number of its members, the other
contexts to which they belong and so on ... a question
1 Cf. Chapter VI., p. 134.
SIGN-SITUATIONS 75
not about one feature of the context but about many.
We can always for instance raise the probability of
a context by adding suitable members. But this last
though a natural remark suffers from the linguistic
redundance to which the difficulties of the problem are
chiefly due. * Probability ' in the fundamental sense
in which a context is probable is a shorthand symbol
for all those of its features upon which the degree of
its uniformity depends.
In considering conscious and critical processes of
interpretation we must not fail to realize that all such
activity, e.g,^ of the kind discussed in the theory of
induction, rests upon * instinctive ' interpretations. If
we recognize how essential * instinctive ' interpretation
is throughout, we shall be able to pursue our investiga-
tions undisturbed by the doubts, of causal purists or
the delay of the mathematicians in bringing their
differential equations into action. For the working
of a differential equation itself, that most rational
process of interpretation, will break down unless many
* instinctive * interpretations, which are not at present
capable of any mathematical treatment, are successfully
performed.
It is sometimes very easy by experimental methods
to discover what a thought process is referring to. If
for instance we ask a subject to * think of* magenta
we shall, by showing various colours to him, as often
as not find that he is thinking of some other colour. It
is this kind of consideraton which makes the phrase
* adapted to ' so convenient an equivalent for * referring
to,' and if we bear in mind that * being adapted to *
something is only a shorthand symbol for being linked
with it in the manner described, through external and
psychological contexts, we may be able to use the
term without its purposive and biological associations
leading to misunderstanding.
We have still to give an account of misinterpreta-
tion, and to explain how unfounded beliefs can arise. To
76 THE MEANING OF MEANING
begin with the first, a person is often said to have
introduced irrelevant^ or to have omitted relevant, con-
siderations or notions when he has misinterpreted some
sign. The notion of relevance is of great importance
in the theory of meaning. A consideration (notion,
idea) or an experience, we shall say, is relevant to an
interpretation when it forms part of the psychological
context which links other contexts together in th€
peculiar fashion in which interpretation so links them.*
An irrelevant consideration is a non-linking member of
a psychological context. The fact that * baseless '
convictions occur might be thought to be an objection
to the view of thinking here maintained. The explana-
tion is however to be found in the fact that mental
processes are not determined purely psychologically
but, for example, by blood pressure also. If our in-
terpretation depended only upon purely psychological
contexts it might be that we should always be justified
in our beliefs, true or false. We misinterpret typically
when we are asleep or tired. Misinterpretaton there-
fore is due to interference with psychological contexts,
to * mistakes.' Whether an interpretation is true or
false on the other hand does not depend only upon
psychological contexts — unless we are discussing psy-
chology. We may have had every reason to expect
a flame when we struck our match, but this, alas ! will
not have made the flame certain to occur. That depends
upon a physical not a psychological context.
^ other psychological linkings of external contexts are not essentially
different from interpretation, but we are only here concerned with
the cognitive aspect of mental process. The same sense of relevance
would be appropriate in discussing conation. The context method of
analysis is capable of throwing much light upon the problems of desire
and motive.
CHAPTER IV
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION
La Nature est un temple ou de vivants piliers
Laissent parfois sortir de confuses paroles ;
L'homme y passe k travers des forets de symboles
Qui robsetvent avec des regards familiers. —
Baudelaire.
Though with the growth of knowledge we have become
much less certain than our ancestors about what chairs
and tables are, physicists and philosophers have not
yet succeeded in putting the question entirely beyond
discussion. Every one agrees that chairs and tables
are perfectly good things — they are there and can be
touched — but all competent to form an opinion are
equally agreed that whatever we see is certainly not
them. What shall we do about it?
Why scientists and others are now agreed that what
we see is not chairs and tables will be at once obvious
if we consider what we do see when we look at such
objects. On the other hand, the accounts given of
what we do see have not taken the matter further, owing
to bad habits, which we form in tender years, of mis-
naming things which interest us. The following, for
example, is a common method of procedure illustrating
the way in which these habits arise : —
** I remember on one occasion wanting the word
for Table. There were five or six boys standing
round, and, tapping the table with my forefinger,
I asked, * What is this?* One boy said it was a
dodela^ another that it was an etanda^ a third stated
that it was bokaliy a fourth that it was elamba^ and
78 THE MEANING OF MEANING
the fifth said it was ineza. These various words
we wrote in our note-book, and congratulated our-
selves that w€ were working among a people who
possessed so rich a language that they had five
words for one article/'^
The assumption of the reverend gentleman is that,
having asked a definite question, he was entitled to a
definite answer. Very little study of what he actually
saw or tapped might have saved him the trouble of
discovering at a later stage that ** one lad had thought
we wanted the word for tapping ; another understood
we were seeking the word for the material of which the
table was made ; another had an idea that we required
the word for hardness ; another thought we wished for
a name for that which covered the table ; and the last,
not being able, perhaps, to think of anything else^
gave us the word mezuy table — the very word we were
seeking.*'
A similar discovery awaits the experts, and it may
not be inapposite to indicate the main features of this
imminent advance in knowledge. It is at first sight
surprising that modern investigators should have been
so long in taking up the analysis of sign-situations as
begun by Aenesidemus and Occam. But their un-
easiness in matters which they supposed to fall within
the domain of *the metaphysicians/ seems to have
been sufficient to inhibit their curiosity as to the prin-
ciples of interpretation involved at every stage of their
work. Moreover, so long as controversy with specialists
in other fields was avoided, a great deal could be
achieved without the realization that perception can
only be treated scientifically when its character as a
sign-situation is analysed.
The isolated utterance of Helmholtz is therefore all
the more significant, for not only was Helmholtz one
of the profoundest scientific thinkers of modern times,
1 Among Congo Cannibals, by J. H. Weeks, p. 51.
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION 79
but, as we know from his correspondence, he took
throughout his life a lively interest in philosophic con-
troversies. In 1856 we even find him referring to
the problem of the way in which we pass from simple
sensations to judgments of perception as one to which
no modern philosopher had devoted serious attention.
He was much influenced by Kant, who, in spite of
his disconcerting technique, seems constantly on the
verge of approaching the central issues of interpretation,
and who has been claimed as the most convinced
Nominalist of modern times :^ but there is nothing
particularly Kantian about the theory of signs which
can be found in various parts of Helmholtz' writings. ^
Our knowledge, he contended, takes the form of signs,
and those signs we interpret as signifying the unknown
relation of things in the external world. The sensations
which lie at the basis of all perceptions are subjective
signs of external objects.* The qualities of sensations
are not the qualities of objects. Signs are not pictures
of reality.
^^ A sign need have no kind of similarity whatever
with what it signifies. The relation consists simply
in the fact that the same object acting under similar
circumstances arouses the same sign, so that different
signs correspond always to different sensations." *
In discussing the way in which we interpret sensa-
tions in terms of an external world, Helmholtz has
occasion to point out that the multiplicity of the optical
signs which we use is such that we need not be sur-
prised at the variety and complexity of the news which
they give us. The elementary signs of language are
only 26 letters. If out of these 26 letters, we can
get the whole of literature and science, the 250,000
optic nerve fibres can be relied on for an even richer
and more finely graded knowledge.
1 H. V/olfif, Neue Kritik der reinen Vernunft, p. 17.
2 Collated by Kuhtmann, op. cit., p. 66.
3 Vortrdge und Reden, I., 393.
* Die Tatsachen in der Wahrnehmung, p. 39-
8o THE MEANING OF MEANING
What do we see when we look at a table? First
and foremost, a lighted region containing some air,
lit by rays coming partly from the direction of the table,
partly from other sources ; then the further boundaries
of this region, surfaces of objects, including part of the
surface of the table. If now we point at what we see
and name it This^ we are in danger, if our attention is
concentrated on the table, of saying: This, is a Table.
So that we must be careful. And where is colour
according to this scheme? Somewhere in the eye, as
anyone who cares to strike his eye will discover.
What we have described is not the Table, though
part of what we have described is part of the table.
Anything which we say under these circumstances which
involves the Table must also involve Interpretation, We
interpret a sign, some part of what is given, ^ as signifying
something other than itself, in this case the table.
But this is not the whole of the story, and here it
seems possible to say something quite new. It would
be strange to suggest that we see anything which is
not in front of the eye, or which does not, like a musca
volitans^ throw images on the retina. Thus purists will
have to maintain that we never see colours. Yet it is
colours and such directly apprehended entities that are
the initial signs on which all interpretation, all inference,
all knowledge is based. And what is it that by in-
terpretation we come to know? It is what is present —
a whole which, as we learn in course of time, is com-
1 It has long been recognized that there is something amiss with
the term Datum. The ' given ' is often of all things the most difficult
to accept.
(i) A thing can be a ' Datum,' given in the sense that it is what
is actually present with all its characters, whether we know what
they are or not, and whether we cognize it rightly or not.
(ii) In a narrower sense, only those entities which are directly appre-
hended, i.e., are actually modifications of our sense-organs, are said to be
given — the ' Datum datissimum ' ; and their alleged possessor, or remote
cause, the tables, atoms, etc., is only a datum as being present, or part
of which is present in sense (i).
Thus a datum, in sense (i), can be said to have ' an appearance '
which is a datum in sense (ii). A ' total visible cone ' is a datum in
sense (i), and ' something elliptical ' a datum in sense (ii).
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION 8i
posed of the lighted region, the air, etc., to which
we allude above, but in which we only distinguish
these namable components after a long process of
interpretation conducted on experimental methods—
<* The infant learns first, etc., etc."
What then is this direct apprehending to which so
important a role is assigned ? The correct answer is
usually rejected without hesitation, so contrary is it
to some of our favourite verbal habits. To be directly
apprehended is to cause certain happenings in the
nerves, as to which at present neurologists go no
further than to assert that they occur. Thus what is
directly apprehended is a modification of a sense organ,
and its apprehension is a further modification of the
nervous system, about which we may expect information
at some future date.^
But this is mere materialism? Suitably misunder-
stood, it is. In itself, however, it is no more than a highly
probable step in the most plausible systematic account
of ^knowing' which can be given. On all other
accounts yet suggested, at least one indefinable idea
has at some point to be introduced, at least one
ultimately and irredeemably mysterious extra entity
has to be postulated— some relation of immediate
knowing' and further inexplicables in its train. Mean-
while it is generally granted that much is known. There
are the sciences ; and it is here urged that we already
have the material for an account of knowing itself—
provided, that is, certain symbolic entanglements are
first penetrated or swept aside.
1 As a direct objection to this it is often argued that a ' sense-datum '
seems very unlike a modification of the retina, but so is passmg through
a station in an express very unlike what the station-master sees. Here
there is only one event, the passage of the tram; ^ut the signs are
very different. Similarly with the ' sense-datum. ^e should expect
the greatest difference between the references involved— the referents,
being the same-since one, direct apprehension, is as simple as possible,
aTst order reference, and the other, reference to a sense organ modi-
fication, IS immensely complicated and arrived at only after a ong cham
of interpretations. It is another order of reference. This all-important
problem of orders or levels of references and of signs is further discussed
in the following chapter (pp. 93-4)-
82 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The chief of these rest upon misunderstanding as
to the nature of statement. To make a statement is to
symbolize a reference. What a reference is we have
seen in the preceding chapter. However much we
may try, we cannot go beyond reference in the way
of knowledge. True reference is reference to a set of
referents as they hang together. False reference is
reference to them as being in some other arrangement
than that in which they actually hang together. The
advance in knowledge is the increase in our power of
referring to referents as they actually hang together.
This is all we can do. By no manner of make-believe
can we discover the what of referents. We can only
discover the how. This is, of course, ojd and familiar
doctrine but it needs to be reaffirmed whenever the
metaphysician intervenes, whether he comes as a
materialist^ spiritualist, dualist, realist or with any other
answer to an impossible question. Unfortunately in
our present ignorance of the mechanism of language,
he has a good opportunity of setting up apparently
impenetrable barriers. The only way by which these
may be avoided is to set out from the known facts as
to how we acquire knowledge. Then with an account
of interpretation, such as that which is here sketched,
the way is open to the systematization of all that is
known and further of all that will ever come to be
known. ^
To resume our outline sketch of a systematic account
of perception. Directly apprehended retinal modifica-
tions such as colours, are therefore initial signs of
* objects ' and * events ^(or however we agree to symbolize
^ A certain sense of chill or disappointment is not uncommon in
those who entertain such a view for the first time. The renunciations
which seem to be involved by the restriction of knowledge to reference,
diminish, however, when due attention is paid to those other ' non-
symbolic ' uses of language which are discussed in Chapter X. It
has often been said that Metaphysics is a hybrid of science and poetry.
It has many of the marks of the hybrid ; it is sterile, for example. The
proper separation of these ill-assorted mates is one of the most important
consequences of the investigation into symbolism.
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION 83
referents) ; characters of things which we discover by
interpretation, such as shapes of cones or tables, are
signs of second or third order respectively. On the
other hand shapes of initial signs, e,g. retinal modi-
fications, are first order signs.
Place a new nickel florin on the palm of the hand
with the arm extended horizontally, and note that a
truthful person would describe its shape as elliptical.
Now look at it vertically from above and agree that it
is round. Is the florin circular or elliptical? What an
insoluble problem !
If we say that it is the surface of the florin which is
given us in both cases, then it seems to be both circular
and elliptical. Which is absurd — since we *know,'
and every physicist stoutly maintains,^ that it has not
measurably changed, and is actually circular. We
have, therefore, the option on the one hand of
opining with the Metaphysicians that the Universe
is very paradoxical, with the polite Essayists that it is
very odd, or with the Bishops that it is very wonderful ;
or, on the other, of saying that it is not the surface
which is given in either sense.
Anyone who watched our procedure with the florin,
if appealed to for assistance at this point, would say
that what was present in each case was a whole con-
taining as parts, cones ^ whose apices are in the eye,
and whose bases are the limits of our vision, or, where
objects such as florins are about, their surfaces. Here
there are two cones with the circular surface of the
florin for base. In the first case the cone is elliptical
^ As Rougier says [Paralogismes, p. 408), the theory of primary and
secondary qualities, which seemed to have been disposed of by Berkeley's
arguments, is once more receiving serious attention. " Nous n'avons
aucun motif s6rieux pour penser que les sensations de forme g6om6trique
ne soient pas objectives." But it is hardly sufficient to dismiss the
matter with the remark that the paradox of the bent stick, " n'existe
que pour celui qui ne connait pas les lois de la refraction de la lumi^re."
Apart from an adequate Theory of Signs the laws of refraction make
a poor show against the ingenuity of the ontologist.
* The word ' cone ' is used here merely to fill in a linguistic gap and
by metaphor. It is shorthand for ' region intervening between surface
and retina,* which in most cases is conical or pyramidal in shape.
84 THE MEANING OF MEANING
in cross-section, and the surface of the florin is an
oblique section ; in the second case the cone is circular,
and the surface of the florin a cross-section, also circular.
What here is taken as the apparent shape of the florin
is most plausibly said to be the cross-section of the
cone. This is the sign which we interpret as the
surface, and in no case is that surface a * datum datis-
simum ' — directly given. This simple application of
the Theory of Signs frees us from the paradox, the
oddness, and the wonder, restores our faith in the
physicist, and enables us to get on with our business,
viz., a proper account of perception of the Nature
of Things.
The method by which this ancient scandal is re-
moved may be applied with equal success to all the
other * fundamental problems.' Whenever the in-
genious mind discovers a self-contradiction (**This
same florin that I see is both round and elliptical," or
**This same stick which I see in the water is both
straight and bent") bad symbolization is indicated, and
we must expand the peccant symbol ^ until wg discover
the ambiguous sign-situation which caused the trouble.
We then note this ambiguity, and improve our sym-
bolism so as to avoid the nonsense to which we shall
otherwise be led. Thus in the case of the florin we
say : *^The base of this cone that is my sign is oblique
and circular, and is the surface of the florin that I see ;
but a normal section of this cone is elliptical. I can
equally be said to see the florin or to see any section
of the cone, but no one of these is directly given. Even
the whole cone of which they are parts is picked out
from the wider cone which includes besides the florin
cone the cones of all that I am seeing, the total datum
which is my field of view."
This selection of partial cones out of the total cone
1 In the case of the florin, to " This cone that I see, whose base is
the florin, is both round and elliptical." Here the sign, namely, the
cone, may be interpreted as signifying either an elliptical cross-section,
i.e., normal section, or a circular oblique section.
SIGNS IN PERCEPTION 85
which is the visual field is, in normal circumstances,
effected without mistake. It might, in fact, never have
been suspected that even here interpretation is at work,
were it not for the case of * double images.' For each
eye there is a separate total cone, but we learn normally
to identify certain partial cones within these as having
the same base. If the retinal correspondence through
which we do this is upset (as when we push the eyeball
a little, or look past a near at a distant object) we fail
to make the right identification, and say we see two
florins (double-images). Here once again we let our
language trick us. What is present is, as always in
binocular vision, two cones with a common base.
Thanks to the retinal shift, the normal, automatic
method of identification breaks down, and we * see *
one florin as though it were in two places ; we interpret
two cones with a common base as though they were
cones with separate bases. Reflection and refraction —
the whole of the theory of vision is full of such
* puzzles,' to be solved by the above Theory of Signs.^
Through this Theory of Signs then we can not only
remove the standard pre-scientific paradoxes, but pro-
vide a new basis for Physics. It is commonly assumed
that contrasted with what we see are the things we
imagine, which are in some sense unreal. This dis-
tinction between Vision and Imagination is misleading,
and of those things which we rightly claim to see the
parts we do not see are as real as those we do. The
^ In connection with sign-situations, a few words are required with
regard to the most resolute attempt to deal with data in terms of
signs since Reid's Inquiry — that developed at p. 24 fi. of Professor John
Laird's Studies in Realism. " The visual sense-datum," says Professor
Laird, " is as much a sign as a fact, and it is always apprehended so.-"
He goes on to state that we always perceive Significance (the relation
in virtue of which a sign signifies), we always perceive sign-facts, not
data devoid of significance. Thus, when he adds that " meaning is
directly perceptible just like colour or sound," if we understand ' mean-
ing ' in the sense of ' significance,' this assertion is not so paradoxical
as it would be if ' meaning ' were confused with ' what is meant.'
Cf. Hoernl6, Mind, 1907, p. 86 — " I regard the consciousness of meaning
as primary and fundamental, and the distinction between sign and
meaning as a product of reflection." What kind of ' meaning ' this is
may perhaps be gathered from Chapter VIII.
86 THE MEANING OF MEANING
other side of the moon, which we never see, is as real
as the side which vision perceives. The atoms, whose
paths are photographed, the electrons which we do not
* see ', are, if this interpretative effort of the physicist
be sustained, as real as the signs given to perception
from which he starts. When we look at our chairs
and tables we * see ' a datum datissimum, then cones,
then surfaces, chair, legs-seat-back, wood, bamboo,
fibres, cells, molecules, atoms, electrons . . . the many-
senses of * see ' proceeding in an ordered hierarchy as
the sign-situations change. And as the point of view,
interest, scientific technique or purpose of investigation
alters, so will the levels represented by these references
change in their turn.
CHAPTER V
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM
A happy nomenclature has sometimes been more
powerful than rigorous logic in allowing a new train
of thought to be quickly and generally accepted. —
Prof. A. Schuster.
For the rest I should not be displeased, sir, did you
enter a little farther into the details of the turns of
mind which appear marvellous in the use of the
particles. — Leibnitz.
At the basis of all communication are certain postulates
or pre-requisites — regulative presumptions without
which no system of symbols, no science, not even
logic, could develop. Their neglect by logicians is
not surprising, since it has hitherto been nobody's
business to discuss them. Logic, which may be
regarded as the science of the systematization of
symbols, has been preoccupied either with judgments
which are psychological, or with * propositions,* which
were treated as objects of thought, distinct from
symbols and not psychological. Modern mathemati-
cians, who have done so much for the formal develop-
ment of symbolic method, either tacitly assume these
Canons, or when confronted by difficulties due to their
neglect, introduce additional ad hoc complexities ^ into
their systems. Actually they are as essential to all
discourse as chemistry to physiology, dynamics to
ballistics, or psychology to aesthetics. In any logic
which is not purely formal, in the sense of being
^ For instance, the Theory of Types — to deal with Epimenides and
the alleged mendacity of Cretans ; or Subsistence Theories in the
interpretation of " PhcEnixes exist."
87
88 THE MEANING OF MEANING
devoted to some elaboration of the possibilities of
symbol-manipulation/ the study of these Canons is a
first essential, and their strict observance would render
otiose whole tracts of the traditional treatment.
It will be convenient to state some of these Canons
in terms of Symbols and Referents. The triangle of
Reference given on p. 1 1 should be consulted. The
First Canon of Symbolism, the Canon of Singularity,
is as follows : —
I. — One Symbol stands for one and only one Referent,
This one referent may be, and in most cases is,
complex. * All Mongolian Imbeciles,' for instance, is
a symbol which has one referent. Similarly (x or y^
has one referent. The symbols of mathematics, how-
ever, are peculiar in that they are symbols either of
other symbols or of operations with symbols. This
peculiarity is what is often expressed by saying that
pure mathematics is abstract, or formal, or that it does
not mention anything at all. Symbols may contain
necessary parts, e,g.^ the negative, and words like * the '
and * which,' which themselves have no specific referents.
The study of such non-symbolic structural elements of
symbols is the business of grammar.
These indications of structure appear in ordinary
language in a bewildering variety of forms. The
inflexions, the conjunctions, distributives, auxiliary verbs,
some of the prepositions, the main use of the copula, etc.,
all have this function. In mathematics, owing to the
simplicity of its outlook, these structural elements are
reduced to the minimum ; otherwise such symbols for
counting operations as two and three, or such symbols
of symbols as algebraic expressions could never be
handled systematically. Recent views on mathematics
show a refreshing reaction from the logical mysticism or
1 In op. cit., Symbolism and Truth (pp. 92 and 224 ff.) Professor
R. M. Eaton deals interestingly with the rules of a logical syntax
from a semi-orthodox standpoint.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 89
arithmosophy of Frege, Couturat and others, prevalent
at the beginning of the century. It is clearly felt that
an account which does not invoke supersensible entities
must be given of what mathematicians do.
Some, like Wittgenstein, have been able to persuade
themselves that **The propositions of mathematics are
equations, and therefore pseudo-propositions," and that
**the method by which mathematics arrives at its equa-
tions is the method of substitution. For equations
express the substitutability of two expressions, and we
proceed from a number of equations to new equations,
replacing expressions by others in accordance with the
equations."^ Such a view can be presented without the
background and curtain of mysticism which this author
introduces. Those parts of mathematics, the Theory
of Sets of Points, for instance, which do not seem to be
merely concerned with equations then remain to be
accounted for.
Others maintain with Rignano^ that mathematics
throughout is merely the performance of imagined
physical experiments, recorded and represented in
symbols. This amplification of the view of James Mill^
and Taine, though it fits some parts of mathematics
well enough, is less plausible for others. As Rignano
develops it, too little importance is assigned to symbols ;
hightly systematized sets of symbols such as those of
mathematics are something more than a mere means of
representing our mental performances. They become,
as it were capable of performing on their own account.
They become thinking machines which, suitably manipu-
^ Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus , 6.2 and 6.24.
2 The Psychology of Reasoning, Chapters VII. and VIII.
^ The Analysis of the Human Mind, Vol. II., p. 9. " Numbers
therefore, are not names of objects. They are names of a certain
process ; the process of addition. . . , One is the name of this once
performed, or of the aggregation begun ; two, the name of it once
more performed." Mill fils in his editorial notes on this passage holds
th^t " numbers are, in the strictest propriety, names of objects. Two
is surely a name of the things which are two, two fingers, etc. The
process of adding one to one which forms two is connoted, not denoted,
by the name two." An obscure remark, since this is not even J. S.
Mill's ordinary use of ' connote.'
H
96 THE MEANING OF MEANING
lated, yield results which cannot be foreseen by any
process of imagining physical experiments.
A third school would present mathematics not as a
thinking machine, but as a set of directions for the use
of such a machine, the machine in question being the
mind. For this school mathematics would contain no
statement but only commands or directions. The
problem then becomes what exactly mathematicians
are told to do.
It is probable that the answer to this vexed question
as to the nature of mathematics will be found to consist
of a combination of these varied doctrines. There is
no good reason for supposing that mathematics is
fundamentally homogeneous, although its possession of
a single symbol system makes it appear so. The known
readiness with which not only single symbols but whole
systems of symbols may acquire supernumerary uses
should make us ready to allow this possibility. It is
plain that some parts of mathematics are concerned in a
special way with the discussion of other parts. ** It may
be that when logic is wholly emancipated from meta-
physics, logicians will devise a grammar of logistic
language. Perhaps they will then call it the grammar
of logic, and logistic language will be called logic. All
that is valuable in the so-called logic will remain as
component elements of a grammar — a grammar of the
science of reasoning with language."^
Returning from this excursus, it is important to
remember that a reference, as described above at page
62, is a set of external and psychological contexts
linking a mental process to a referent. Thus it is
extremely unlikely that any two references will ever be
strictly similar. In asking, therefore, whether two
symbols are used by the same reference — especially
when the users thereof are two persons with their
different histories — we are raising a question of degree.
1 J. W. Powell, Twentieth Annual Report of the Bureau of American
Ethnology (1903)* P- clxx.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 91
It is better to ask whether two references have sufficient
similarity to allow profitable discussion. When such
discussion is possible the references are said to be * the
same.' No means are at present available for directly
comparing references. We have to judge by indirect
evidence derived mainly from observing the further
behaviour of the parties concerned. We notice whether
doubt and certainty arise at the same points, whether
both admit alternatives at the same points, and so
on. But for many important questions in the theory
of Grammar, especially when discussing the degree to
which the emotive functions of language interfere with
the referential, there is urgent need for some more
easily applicable test. The only hope is in further
analysis of the contexts operative, in reference, with a
view to selecting from the many contextual factors
those which are determinative ; and meanwhile a clear
realization of the complexities involved may prevent
unnecessary dogmatism.
When a symbol seems to stand for two or more
referents we must regard it as two or more symbols,
which are to be dififerentiated. This Canon guards
against the most obvious kind of ambiguity, that of
top (mountain), and top (spinning), for instance. We
differentiate these symbols by the aid of a Second Canon
which concerns what is usually called Definition, and is
also of the utmost importance.
When we encounter a symbol which we do not com-
prehend we take steps, if interested, to have another
symbol, which we can interpret, provided, whose
referent is the same. Then we can say ** I know what
symbol A means; it means the same as symbol B."
(When scholars say * chien ' means *dog,' they should
say that *chien* and Mog ' both mean the same.)
Similarly if a symbol is long or awkward to use, or
likely to be misunderstood, we take a new convenient
symbol and use it instead. In both cases the same
process, Definition, is occurring. The details of the
92 THE MEANING OF MEANING
technique of definition, as required constantly in dis-
cussion, call for special study and will be dealt with in
Chapter VI. below. A foundation-stone is laid in the
Second Canon of Symbolism, the Canon of Definition : —
II. — Symbols which can be substituted one for
another symbolize the same reference.
By means of this Canon we substitute for the
ambiguous symbol * top * the synonym * mountain top *
or * spinning top,' and the ambiguity is removed. But
this is not the only use which we make of the Canon.
Its importance is belied by its modest simplicity. It
is the guarantor of mathematics. The systematization
of our symbols (for which we may substitute the phrase
**the organization of our thought") is achieved by its
application. It is plain for instance that the two
symbols * The King of England ' and * the owner of
Buckingham Palace ' have the same referent. They
do not however symbolize the same reference, quite
different psychological contexts being involved in the
two cases. Accordingly they are not substitutes one
for another in the sense required in this Canon.
Symbols which are substitutes and so can be used to
* define ' ^ one another not only have the same referent
but symbolize the same reference. Such symbols are
usually said to have the same * connotation,' a mis-
leading and dangerous term, under cover of which the
quite distinct questions of application of reference and
correctness of symbolization {cf, p. 102 below) are
unwittingly confused. Connotation will be further
discussed in Chapter IX.
But there are more dangerous booby-traps in
language than the plain equivoque, and ** certain it is,"
as Bacon has it, **that words like a Tartar's bow do
1 As we shall see in the following chapter, this rigorous form of
definition is chiefly of service in the construction of deductive symbol
systems. The freer forms of definition, in which it is sufficient if the
referents alone of the two symbols are identical; are indispensable in
general discussion.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 93
shoot back upon the understanding and mightily
entangle and pervert the judgment." Those complex
symbols, known as propositions, which * place ' re-
ferents (cf. Canon VI infra) can be either Contracted
or Expanded. *^ Hamlet was mad" is a contracted
symbol, needing to be expanded before it can be
discussed. ** Hamlet was mad on the stage" or **in
my interpretation of the play" may be expanded
symbols for what is referred to. The question is of
the greatest importance because of its bearing on the
distinction between true and false. It leads to the
Third Canon of Symbolism, the Canon of Expansion : —
I Hi — The referent of a contracted symbol is the referent
of that symbol expanded.
The consequences of infringing this Canon are
sometimes called Philosophy, as little by little we
shall proceed to show.
It is an obvious result of this Canon that the first
thing to do when a disputed symbol is encountered is
to expand it, if possible, to its full form — to such a form,
that is, as will indicate the sign - situations behind
the reference it symbolizes. Instances of this expansion
occur continually in all scientific discussion. In the
last chapter we had occasion to expand * table * and
* see ' and later on we shall endeavour to expand
* meaning' in all possible directions. Unfortunately in
the absence of any systematic theory of interpretation,
no definite ordering of the levels at which we refer has
hitherto been made. The idea even of a level of
reference remains vague. Yet when we refer to * that
animal,' and then later, after further study of its foot-
prints perhaps, to * that lynx,' ^ our reference will be to
the same referent but at different levels of interpretation
^ For certain sciences, zoology, geology, botany, etc., at certain
stages, the technique of genus and species arrangement serves this
purpose excellently. But this technique is not of great service at earlier
or later stages, or outside such sciences.
94 THE MEANING OF MEANING
in a definite sense involving the number of applications
of interpretative processes and the complexity of these
processes. In such relatively simple cases matters are
easy to set straight ; in more complicated cases — if we
speak of government, credit, patriotism, faith, beauty,
emotion, etc. — it is not so. All our usual discussion of
subjects of general interest suffers from the uncertainty,
difficult even to state, as to the level of interpretation, of
reference, at which we are symbolizing. All those
engaged in education know what * levels of reference '
stand for. The fuller analysis of the question is of
great urgency. Something towards it was attempted
in Chapter IV. It is a pity, however, that those very
persons who by their analytic ability would be most
likely to succeed, should be so reluctant to take up
problems until they have been elaborately formulated.
Meanwhile such is the chaos of symbolic apparatus
in general that, instead of expansions, mere symbolic
overgrowths are most usually what are provided by way
of elucidation of doubtful, symbols, thus leading to
greater confusion than would the contractions which
they replace. Instances are given in the following
paragraph. Both contractions and pseudo-expansions
have the same result — the peopling of the universe
with spurious entities, the mistaking of symbolic
machinery for referents. . The only permanent cure is
the discovery of the appropriate expansion by inquiry
into the sign-situation leading to the reference which
is doubtfully symbolized.^
It can in fact be recognized without difficulty that
until this is done it is idle to raise such further questions
as its truth or its relations to other symbols ; for
a contracted symbol does not make plain the * place '
of its referent, and so cannot be investigated. The
distinction between true and false symbols is a matter
^ In simple but loose words, we only know for certain what is said
when we know why it is said, though we must not include motives
in the ' why/
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 95
which cannot be discussed profitably in general terms,
/.^., by means of contractions or linguistic shorthand.
It must be left in each case to the specialist, who being
familiar with the actual sign-situations involved can
decide within his particular field of reference which
symbols are true and which not. It is owing to such a
discussion in contracted symbols that what is known
as the Problem of Truth has arisen. Instead of treat-
ing each case of adequacy on its own merits, epistemo-
logists will have it that because they can use one word
as a convenient shorthand sign to refer to all true
symbols, there must be something for them to inves-
tigate apart from true and false propositions. No
problem arises over any true proposition when recog-
nized as such, and to raise a bogus problem here is
quite as unnecessary as to assume a universal * redness '
because red things are every one of them red. Classes
are now recognized as symbolic fictions, and logisticians
will only be logical when they admit that universals
are an analogous convenience. The World of Pure
Being will then be definitively denuded of its quondam
denizens, for which the theory of Universals was an
attempted explanation. It should be noted that our
symbolic machinery (similarity, etc.), becomes both
more valuable and more comprehensible when these
desiccated archetypes have faded away.
By way of explanation of these symbolic con-
veniences a few considerations may be added. Modi-
fications of our sense organs, and * things ' as we come
to know them through the interpretation of these signs,
are always complex or parts of a complex. Even the
tiny speck which, in virtue of a certain disturbance
in the colour apparatus of an eye, we call a barely visible
star is surrounded by a dark field. All that there is
in such a sign for us to talk about is this complex, and
we can talk about it in various ways. We can say
**the speck is in the field" or ** surrounded by the
field" or '^part of the field " or *< related to the field
96 THE MEANING OF MEANING
by the relation of being enclosed by " ; or we can say
**this which has the property of being a speck is
related to that which has the property of being a field
by the relation of inclusion." These are alternative
locutions, Equally true. * Speck in field ' is a name,
and so is * speck/ On other occasions, however, we
wish to symbolize references under circumstances in
which the same names are correctly reapplied. W€
have to economize in our symbolic material ; we have to
use it over and over again, and in a systematic fashion,
under pain of failure to communicate. Now if instead
of the name * this speck ' we use the more luxuriant
symbolic growth, * this which has the property of being
a speck,' we shall be tempted to suppose that the
* thises ' on different occasions stand for different referents
but that * the property of being a speck ' stands for one
and the same.
In this way universal Equalities' arise, phantoms
due to the refractive power of the linguistic medium ;
these must not be treated as part of the furniture of
the universe, but are useful as symbolic accessories
enabling us to economize our speech material. Uni-
versal ' relations ' arise in a precisely similar fashion,
and offer a similar temptation. They may be regarded
in the same way as symbolic conveniences. The claims
of * similarity ' and * dissimilarity ' which on account of
purely symbolic arguments {c/, Russell, Some Problems
of Philosophy^ p. 150) are often supposed to be peculiar
are in no way different.
In all cases, even in this case of similarity, the
invention of non-existent entities in order to account
for the systematic use of symbols is an illegitimate
procedure. Were there other evidence for them not
deriving merely from symbolic necessities^ it would be
1 Grammatical exigencies. It must be remembered, disconcerting
though the fact iiiay be, that so far from a grammar — the structure
• of a symbol system — being a reflection of the structure of the world,
any supposed structure of the world is more probably a reflection of the
grammar used. There are many possible grammars and their differences
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 97
a different matter. As it is they stand on the same
footing as the * faculty* of knowing in psychology.
The occurrence of similars does not compel us to
recognize * similarity,' a universal, any more than the
occurrence of knowledge forces us to recognize a faculty
of knowing. It merely compels tfs to recognize that
similars do occur. That things are similar is natural
knowledge. To make it, by exploiting the economy
of symbolisms, into a basis of metaphysical knowledge
— into a proof of another world of pure being where
entities * subsist' but do not exist — is unwarrantable.
No argument about the world is valid if based merely
upon the way a symbol system behaves.^ Such argu-
are fundamental. Their several developments appear to reflect, if they
reflect anything, the features of the early experiences of the races in
which they occur, their dominant interests, their effective organizations
and perhaps the structure of their central nervous systems. Although
it is true that a grammar may mirror the needs and the outlook of
a given race, and that owing to the similarity of these needs there
may even be a common structure in all primitive and demotic language,
it does not follow (though it is, of course, possible) that the finely-
meshed language most adequate to serve the needs of science would
retain anything of this structure, or would itself directly correspond in
structure to the structure of the world. To suppose that this must be so
is to forget the indirectness, through reference, of the relations of
thoughts to things. These questions are further considered in Appendix
A, on Grammar.
^ It is interesting to compare with this argument against ' universals '
the view taken by the late Mr. F. P. Ramsey of King's College, Cambridge
{Mind, October, 1925, pp. 404-5) : " In ' Socrates is wise,' Socrates
is the subject, wisdom the predicate. But suppose we turn the pro-
position round and say, ' Wisdom is a characteristic of Socrates,' then
wisdom formerly the predicate is now the subject. Now it seems to me
as clear as anything can be in philosophy, that the two sentences
' Socrates is wise/ ' Wisdom is a characteristic of Socrates ' assert the
same fact. . . . They are not, of course, the same sentence, but they
have the same meaning, just as two sentences in two different languages
can have the same meaning. Which sentence we use is a matter either
of literary style or of the point of view from which we approach the
fact . . . and has nothing to do with the logical nature of Socrates
or wisdom, but is a matter entirely for grammarians."
Mr Ramsey claims that *' the above argument throws doubt upon
the whole basis of the distinction between particular and jiniversal " ;
and he proceeds to " argue that nearly all philosophers, including
Mr Russell, have been misled by language in a far more far-reaching
way " than that of supposing that all prepositions must be of the
subject-predicate form, and " that the whole theory of particulars is
due to mistaking for a fundamental characteristic of reality, what
is merely a characteristic of language." Yet some eighteen months
previously, as a believer in universals, he wrote in the same Journal
{Mind, January, 1924, p. 109) of the present work that the authors
" fail to see the existence of logical problems, and propose to replace
98 THE MEANING OF MEANING
merits can give knowledge only about the symbol system
in question. This knowledge is often of great value.
All methods of distinguishing symbols proper, z.^.,
names, from symbolic accessories are important.
We have spoken above of reflection and refraction
by the linguistic medium. These metaphors if carefully
considered will not mislead. But language, though
often spoken of as a medium of communication, is best
regarded as an instrument ; and all instruments are
extensions, or refinements, of our sense-organs. The
telescope, the telephone, the microscope, the microphone,
and the galvanometer are, like the monocle or the eye
itself, capable of distorting, that is, of introducing new
relevant members into the contexts of our signs. And
as receptive instruments extend our organs, §o do
manipulative instruments extend the scope of the motor
activities. When we cannot actually point to the bears
we have dispatched we tell our friends about them or
draw them ; or if a slightly better instrument than
language is at our command we produce a photograph.
The same analogy holds for the emotive uses of
language : words can be used as bludgeons or bodkins.
But in photography it is not uncommon for effects due
to the processes of manipulation to be mistaken by
amateurs for features of the objects depicted. Some of
these effects have been exploited by experts so as greatly
to exercise the late Sir Arthur Conan Doyle and his
friends.^ In a similar fashion language is full of elements
with no representative or symbolic function, due solely to
its manipulation ; these are similarly misinterpreted or
exploited by metaphysicians and their friends so as
greatly to exercise one another — and such of the laity
as are prepared to listen to them.
The fictitious entities thus introduced by language
philosophy by ' the science of symbolism ' and psychology." The
relegation of problems to the grammarian, however, is not the same
thing as failure to see their existence.
1 Cf. The Case against Spirit Photographs, by W. Whately Smith
and C. V. Patrick, pp. 33-36.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 99
form a special variety of what are called fictions. But,
as Vaihinger's own use shows, this term is very vague
and so-called fictions are often indistinguishable from
hypotheses, which are simply unverified references.
Certain abstractions, like the * economic man,' are of
this nature, though, being purely methodological, they
are not believed in ; on the other hand, many idealiza-
tions and imaginative creations, such as Don Juan and
the Ubermensch, may some day find their referents.
Hamlet and Goethe's [/r^i'er appear not to be hypotheses,
since they are dated and placed where history has no
room for them ; they are fictitious in the sense that
Shakespeare or Goethe's thought had no single referent.
We, of course, may refer to these thoughts ; more
usually we attempt only to reproduce them. But all
fictions of this kind must be clearly^distinguished from
those due to manipulations of language itself. Vai-
hinger has not sufficiently emphasized this distinction ;
owing perhaps to an incomplete analysis of the relations
of language and thought — shown by his use of the
terms *Begriff' and * begreifen ' in the discussion of
abstractions and knowledge.^ Linguistic fictions occur
in two ways, either through a misunderstanding of the
function of symbolic accessories such as * liberty ' or
* redness,' so that in making a reference to ffee actions
or red things the user supposes himself to be referring
to something not in time and space ; or through hypos-
tatization of such connective structural machinery as
*or,' * if,' * not,' etc., to which only logicians are prone.
The use of the term * concept ' is particularly mis-
leading in linguistic analysis. There is a group of
words, such as * conception,' * perception,' * excitation,'
which have been a perpetual source of controversy
since the distinction between happenings inside and
happenings outside the skin was first explicitly recog-
nized. Processes of perceiving caused in an interpreter
by the action on him of external objects have been
1 Philosophie des Ah Oh (1920), pp. 51, 393.
100 THE MEANING OF MEANING
commonly Called ^perceptions,' and so, too, by a very
intelligible confusion, discussed in our next chapter as
the * utraquistic fallacy,' have those objects themselves.
Other processes, more abstract or less obviously caused
references, have similarly been called * conceptions.'
But whereas the double sense of the term * perception '
involves merely a confusion between two possible
referents or sets of referents, the one inside the head
and the other outside, the term ^ concept ' when thus
duplicated has been a special inducement to the creation
of bogus entities. It has often been assumed that the
referents of these more abstract processes, since they
appeared to be simple, were quite different from those
of the mental processes which occurred when the refer-
ents were * given ' in perception. A transcendental
world of * concepts ' has therefore been envisaged by
philosophers ; while evpn psychologists who elected
to call themselves * conceptualists ' in recognition of
the fact that concepts are mental — as opposed to the
transcendental (scholastic * realist ') or the non-psycho-
logical (nominalist) account — have frequently been led
by their terminology to take an inaccurate view of
symbol situations.
In discussions of method or of mental processes,
* concepts ' or abstract references may, of course, be
themselves talked about ; and in this special case words
will properly be said to stand for ideas. But it is not
true ta say that in ordinary communication we are thus
referring to our own mental machinery rather than to
the referents which we talk * about ' by means of that
machinery. Words, as we have seen, always symbolize
(cf. p. 1 1) thoughts, and the conceptualist is apt to imply
that the very special case of the construct or concept im-
agined for the purpose of an attempted scientific refer-
ence or classification, and then itself examined, can be
generalized. He then states that the word is not a
mere word as the nominalist holds, but stands for a
conceptual symbol. In opposition to the believer in
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM loi
a single discoverable entity for which words symbolizing
general references stand, he is right ; but by those who
do not admit that they are talking * about* nothing
when they appear to have referred to unjustifiable
entities, his vocabulary is likely to be misunderstood.^
Such linguistic accessories may be used without
danger, provided they are recognized for what they are.
They are conveniences in description, not necessities
in the structure of things. This is shown by the fact
that various alternatives are open to us in describing
any referent. We can either use a grammar of * sub-
stantives' and * attributes ' ^ (nouns and adjectives),
or one of < Events' and * Objects,'* or of < Place' and
* Referent,'* according as we favour an Aristotelian
outlook, or that of Modern Physics, or a pictorial ex-
position of the views here advocated. To discuss such
questions in any other spirit than that in which we
decide between the merits of different Weed killers is
to waste all our own time and possibly that of other
people.
In a similar way, from the question, What is Truth?
an apparently insoluble problem has arisen. In
Chapter III. however the problem was seen to be
soluble as part of the theory of Interpretation. It will
* Crookshank, for example, Influenza (1922), p. 3, in his statement
that Influenza is " a universal and nothing more," has been supposed
to be denying the occurrence of illness, though in the sequel he makes
the implications of his attack on the medical ' realists ' quite plain.
Cf. also Supplement II.
Except in combating the very crudest transcendentalism, such a
terminology is as injudicious as that which obliges Sapir {Language,
p. 106; cf. supra, Chapter I., p. 7), to speak of Concrete, Derivational,
Concrete Relational and True Relational Concepts, when an account in
terms of names, linguistic accessories and referents would enable the
fundamental distinction between thoughts, words and things to be
preserved.
2 Johnson, Logic, Part i, p. 100.
' Whitehead, The Concept of Nature, pp. 77, 169.
* P. 105, infra. It is interesting in this connection to note that
Indian schools of philosophy, such as the Vai9esika, at various periods
developed logical machinery as unlike most of these Western grammars
as they are unlike one another. Pra^astapada, for instance, propounded
a theory of particularity as an independent reality residing in eternal
substances and distinguishing them from one another. Other divisions
hardly reproducible in intelligible terms may readily be found.
102 THE MEANING OF MEANING
be convenient here to define a true Symbol as dis-
tinguished from a true Reference. The definition is
as follows : — A true symbol = one which correctly records
an adequate ^ reference. It is usually a set of words
in the form of a proposition or sentence. It correctly
records an adequate reference when it will cause a
similar reference to occur in a suitable interpreter.
It is false when it records an inadequate reference.
It is often of great importance to distinguish between
false and incorrect propositions. An incorrect symbol
is one which in a given universe of discourse ^ causes
in a suitable interpreter a reference different from that
symbolized in the speaker. Thus if we say,** Charles I.
died in his bed, making witty remarks," our symbol
is more likely to be incorrect than our reference false, for
it is no rash suggestion that the referent is Charles II.'s
death in his bed. But in many cases such an audacious
exegetic is unwarranted, and it will then be a more
difficult matter to decide which is occurring. In the
opposite case when, e,g.^ we say, **The sun is trying
to come out," or ** The mountain rises," we may clearly
be making no different references than if we were to
give a scientific description of the situation, but we may
mean these assertions to be taken * literally.' By taking
an assertion literally is meant interpreting our symbols
as primary symbols, /.^., as names used with a reference
fixed by a given universe of discourse. When for any
reason, such as poverty of language, no symbol is
at hand we can choose a symbol whose referent is
1 It is useful in English to have a term such as ' adequacy ' by
which to distinguish the sense in which a symbol may be true from
that in which a reference is true. In such sentences as " What he said
was untrue," the ambiguities are obvious ; we are left uncertain whether
his symbol or his reference was false. In more subtle cases, where
the word ' proposition ' is casually introduced confusions often arise
which without this distinction are hard to disentangle. The term
' adequacy ' has the advantage of suggesting the difficult question
whether and in what sense reference is capable of degree.
2 A Universe of discourse is a collection of occasions on which we
communicate by means of symbols. For different universes of dis-
course differing degrees of accuracy are sufficient, and (cf. Chapter VI.,
p. Ill) new definitions may be required.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 103
analogous to our referent and transfer this symbol.
Then if the speaker fails to see that such symbols are
metaphorical or approximative only, />., takes them
literally, falsity arises, namely the correct symboliza-
tion of a false reference by which the interpreter could
be misled. If on the other hand the speaker makes
a true reference, but uses symbols such that a. suitable
interpreter^ rightly interpreting, makes a false reference,
then the symbol is incorrect.
Incorrectness may plainly have degrees, for if, when
my pipe is out, I say, **My pipe is alight," then this
symbol, ** My pipe is alight," is sufficiently correct to
characterize its referent but not to place it. In other
words, it is good enough for the investigator to be able
to look for its referent among events, and to exclude it
on the ground that the place it claims is filled by the
referent of ** My pipe is out." It may also be good
enough, according to the actual context, for him to go
and look for it among other likely orders of referents,
gustatory, olfactory and thermal sensations, images and
so forth. If he can find it he may be able to expand
the incorrect symbol, possibly changing every word in
the process. Similarly, once convinced that my pipe is
out, I may be able myself to expand my symbol to ** My
pipe feels as though it were alight."
A group of questions arise out of this instance,
which require a Fourth Canon, the Canon of Actuality,
to clarify the situation : —
IV. — A symbol refers to what it is actually used to
refer to; not necessarily to what it ought in
good usagCy or is intended by an interpretery or
is intended by the user to refer to
The assertion considered above may or may not have
referred to a referent like that for which it would be
correctly used. I may admit or deny that my referent
was some feeling and not burning tobacco. Accord-
ingly, by Canon I., we have here a group of symbols
104 THE MEANING OF MEANING
appearing to be one symbol, and we must select that
which is actually being used. When we cannot so
select, nothing more can be done beyond framing a
collection of unambiguous symbols for future use in
analogous cases.^ But suppose that we were led to
state, after the manner of formal logicians, that a
referent such as * non-existent combustion of tobacco *
is involved, we should appear to be confronted by a
problem as to how we can refer to what is not there
to be referred to. This problem, which is of no in-
terest in itself, is mentioned here because it is typical
of the difficulties which arise through treating an in-
complete system of defective symbols as though it were
a complete system of perfect symbols. Within a minor
system of symbols which has been wrought into a high
degree of complexity, such contradictions, if they ensue
from a legitimate manipulation of symbols, are a helpful
indication of some imperfection still remaining. Mathe-
matics is a case in point. Faced with such a contradiction,
the mathematician proceeds to improve his symbolism,
and we should follow his example rather than suppose
that we have proved some curious eccentricity in the
universe.
Two other questions arise which deserve an answer.
The first is ** How do we know that ^ pipe alight now '
claims the same place as * pipe out now,' while * pipe
foul now ' does not?" The answer is, in the words of
the old tale, ^*By experience." We possess in familiar
fields vast accumulations of such knowledge. We
know, for instance, that * x is green ' and * x is red '
and * X is blue ' all claim the same place for their
referents; as do * x is dark' and *x is light.' We
also know that ^ x is green ' and * x is dark ' and ' x is
vivid ' do not make conflicting claims. In fields with
which we are unfamiliar the main difficulty is pre-
1 To the technique required for this operation Chapters VI. and
VII. are devoted, and in Chapter IX. the methods developed are applied
to the arch-ambiguity, Meaning.
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 105
cisely in gaining such knowledge. We need this know-
ledge in order to perfect our symbols, just as we need
perfected symbols in order to advance our knowledge.
The other question is, ** Why not say that since no
referent for * My pipe is out' was to be found where
we were led to look for it, there was no referent?'*
But there was a reference — though not to the referent
suggested at first sight. The problem of finding the
actual referent is here, as always, that of tracing out the
causal connections or contexts involved, in the manner
indicated in Chapter III.
One special difficulty with regard to complex symbols
calls for a Canon whose functions may not be evident
at first sight, though it is necessary for the avoidance
of nonsense in our discourse. It concerns the build-
ing up of complex symbols from those which are simple
or less complex. It is plain that if we incorporate in
one symbol signs which claim the same place, whether
e.g,,, colour (red — yellow) or shape (round — square), our
proposed symbol is void. This Fifth Canon is called
the Canon of Compatibility : —
V. — No complex symbol may contain constituent
symbols which claim the same ^ place,'*
It is therefore important at once to make clear what
is done when a symbol * places ' a referent. Since the
days of Aristotle, three formulae, traditionally known
as the Laws of Thought, have received much attention,
civil and uncivil, from logicians. They have been
variously interpreted as laws which the mind obeys but
which things need not, as laws which things obey but
which the mind need not, as laws which all things (the
mind included) obey, or as laws which nothing need
obey but which logic finds strangely useful. For
Symbolism they become a triad of minor Canons which
help to keep the Cathedral of Symbolism in due order.
First comes the Law of identity — quaintly formulated
as * A is A ' ; a symbol is what it is ; i,e,j Every symbol
io6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
has a referent. The second is the Law of Contradic-
tion— ^ A is not not-A ' ; no symbol refers to what it does
not refer to; /.^., No referent has more than one place
in the whole order of referents. The third is the Law
of Excluded Middle — * A is either B or not B'; a svm-
bol must have a given referent or some other; i,e,y
Every referent has a fixed place in the whole order of
referents. For this triad, by Canon IL we may sub-
stitute the following formula, which is then the Sixth
Canon of Symbolism : The Canon of Individuality —
VI. — All possible referents together form an order ^
such that every referent has one place only in that order.
One difficulty with regard to * place ' may be usefully
commented on. It is rather a symbolic accessory (cf.
p. 94 above) than an actual symbol. In any false
assertion, we have implied, two things must be clearly
distinguished (i) the referent to which we are actually
referring (2) an alleged referent to which we believe
ourselves to be referring. Only the first of these has a
* place ' in the whole order of referents.
We can, using alternative language, say either that
in a false assertion we are believing a referent to be in
a * place ' in which it is not, or that we are believing
ourselves to be referring to a different referent from
that to which we are actually referring. We can for
instance either say that in two contradictory assertions
we are referring to the same referent but assigning to it
different * places,' or we can say that we are referring to
two different referents and assigning them to the same
* place.' These alternative locutions involve subtle
shifts in the references using both * referent ' and * place,'
and accentuate the important consideration that the
distinction between the reference of these terms is
merely artificial. There is no difference between a
referent and its place. There can be no referent out
of a place, and no place lacking a referent. When a
referent is known its place also is known, and a place
THE CANONS OF SYMBOLISM 107
can only be identified by the referent which fills it.
* Place,* that is, is merely a symbol introduced as a
convenience for describing those imperfections in
reference which constitute falsity.
We have shown that for all references, between the
referent and the act there are always intervening sign-
situations. In the simplest case, that of the true direct
judgment of perception, there may be only one such sign-
situation (discussed in Chapter III.). In a false propo-
sition there will be a similar sign chain with the
difference that some misinterpretation occurs. It is not
however always necessary in order to translate a, false
proposition into a true one to discover where the mis-
interpretation occurred ; a new sign chain abutting on
the same referent may be substituted. In expansion^
however, such discovery is necessary, and the difficulty
explains our preference for Translation over Expansion.
In education and controversy the discovery of the
misinterpretation is usually the more essential step.
In these six Canons, Singularity, Expansion, Defini-
tion, Actuality, Compatibility, and Individuality, we
have the fundamental axioms, which determine the
right use of Words in Reasoning. We have now a
compass by the aid of which we may explore new
fields with some prospect of avoiding circular motion.
We may begin to order the symbolic levels and in-
vestigate the process of interpretation, the * goings-
on ' in the minds of interpreters. In particular it will
be possible now, though not always easy, to show
when a symbol is merely an abbreviation ; and to
specify the various kinds of definition suitable on dif-
ferent occasions. It might not seem unreasonable in
the meantime to call a halt in such discussions as would
be affected by these discoveries —
" Seal up the mouth of outrage for a while
Till we can clear these ambiguities,
And know their spring, their head, their true descent.'*
io8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
These Canons control the System of Symbols known
as Prose. If by themselves they do not prove sufficient
to keep our speech from betraying us, any others which
may be required will be of the same nature. A set of
symbols will only be well organized, or form a good
prose style, when it respects these Canons. Only such
a set will allow us to perform with safety those trans-
formations and substitutions of symbols by which
scientific language endeavours to reflect and record its
distinctions and conclusions — those operations which,
as we have seen, appeared to primitive man to partake
of the nature of magic. Moreover, only such a set
will enable the philosopher to discuss more important
matters than his own or his colleagues' peculiarities of
expression.
CHAPTER VI
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION
The first cause of absurd conclusions I ascribe to
the want of method ; in that they begin not their
ratiocination from definitions. — Hobbes.
" Do, as a concession to my poor wits, Lord
Darlington, just explain to me what you really
mean." — " I think I had better not. Duchess.
Nowadays to be intelligible is to be found out." —
Lady Windermere's Fan.
There is at present no theory 'of Definition capable
of practical application under normal circumstances.
The traditional theory, in so far as it has not been lost
in the barren subtleties of Genus and Differentia, and in
the confusion due to the tierm * Connotation,* has made
little progress — chiefly on account of the barbarous
superstitions ^ about language which have gathered on
^ The Magic of Names is often potent where we should least expect
it, and the distress of Sachs on the discovery of Uranus, which found
expression in his query — " What guarantee have we that the planet
regarded by astronomers as Uranus is really Uranus ? " — is only one
degree more primitive than Herbert Spencer's contention that " By
comparing its meanings in different connections, and observing what
they have in common, we learn the essential meaning of a word ... let
us thus ascertain the meaning of the words ' good,' " etc.
The italics are ours, and no one who does not believe with Nansen's
Greenland Eskimos " that there is a spiritual affinity between two
people of the same name," can fail to see the futility of such attempts
to define by Essence. The doctrine derives from the view already
referred to that words are in some way parts of things (a charge which
Spencer himself, curiously enough, brings elsewhere against Greek
speculation in general). If, as was supposed everything has its proper
name, the existence of a name enables us to look with confidence for
the thing or ' idea ' to which it belongs, and, in general, things possessing
the same name will have something in common which the process of
definition must endeavour to find. The search for the quiddity of
things, the hcscceitas, as Duns Scotus called it, probably has its origin
in the same attitude to Words, though it is unfair to attribute to Aristotle
the linguistic absurdities of his followers. Some of the most curious
implications of these traditions, both in the history of philosophy
109
no THE MEANING OF MEANING
the confines of logic from the earliest times. Four
difficulties have stood in the way and must first be
removed.
Firstly, do we define things or words? To decide
this point we have only to notice that if we speak about
defining words we refer to something very different from
what is referred to, meant, by * defining things.' When
we define words we take another set of words which may
be used with the same referent as the first, i,e,^ we sub-
stitute a symbol which will be better understood in a
given situation. With things^ on the other hand, no
such substitution is involved. A so-called definition of
a horse as opposed to the definition of the word * horse,'
is a statement about it enumerating properties by means
of which it may be compared with and distinguished
from other things. There is thus no rivalry between
* verbal ' and * real ' definitions.^
The words by means of which these properties are
enumerated do, of course, give us a substitute symbol —
either a complete analysis, or as abbreviated by classi-
ficatory methods (the usual * genus and differentia ' type)
— with the same referent (the horses) as the original
symbol ; but rather by way of corollary than as the
main purpose of the analysis. Moreover, this process
is only possible with complex objects which have been
long studied by some science. With simple objects, or
those which for lack of investigation are not known to
be analysable, as well as with everything to which
classificatory methods have not yet been applied, such
a method is clearly not available, and here other symbols
must be found as the substitutes which symbol-definition
seeks to provide. Such, in outline, is the solution of
the long-standing dispute between the advocates of real
and symbolic definitions.
^nd in the most recent developments of logic, are admirably treated
by Professor L. Rougier in his Paralogismes du Rationalisme , pp. 146 S..,
368 ff., 386 ff.
1 See Leibnitz, New Essays concerning Human Understanding, 1916,
pp. 316-7, for an example of the way in which the distinction has been
envisaged.
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION iii
The second difficulty is closely related to the above.
Though definition be symbol-substitution, definitions
have usually, for grammatical reasons, to be stated in
a form which makes them appear to be about things.
This is because we are in the habit of abbreviating such
symbols as *^the word * fire' refers to the same referent
as the words * what burns ' " to ** fire is what burns " ;
and of saying ** Cki'en means * dog,' " when we ought to
say **the word c/izen and the word *dog' both mean the
same animal."^
Thirdly, all definitions are essentially ad hoc. They
are relevant to soma purpose or situation, and con-
sequently are applicable only over a restricted field or
* universe of discourse.' For some definitions, those of
physics, for instance, this universe is very wide. Thus
for the physicist * energy ' is a wider term than for the
schoolmaster, since the pupil whose report is marked
^* without energy" is known to the physicist as possessing
it in a variety of forms. Whenever a term is thus taken
outside the universe of discourse for which it has been
defined, it becomes a metaphor, and may be in need
of fresh definition. Though there is more in metaphor
than this, we have here. an essential feature of symbolic
metaphorical language. The distinction between this
and emotive metaphorical language is discussed later at
pages 239-40.
Fourthly there is the problem of * intensive' as
opposed to * extensive ' definition which comes to a head
with the use of the terms denote 'and * connote.' In
Chapter IX. the artificiality of these distinctions will be
urged. Here it is only necessary to point out that two
symbols may be said to have the same connotation when
1 It may be noted that when we say " Fire burns " we appear to
be conveying information about fire and not about symbols, whereas
with such a combination of synonyms as " Chien is ' dog ' " we seem
unable to advance the knowledge of anyone. This is because in saying
" Fire burns," * fire ' and ' burns ' are used with differing definitions.
If we defined chien as " domestic wolf-like animal " and ' dog ' as
" barking quadruped " we could say " Chien is ' dog ' " (=" Dogs
bark "), which would convey information.
112 THE MEANING OF MEANING
they symbolize the same reference. An intensive or
connotative definition will be one which involves no
change in those characters of a referent in virtue of
which it forms a context with its original sign. In an
extensive definition there may be such change. In other
words when we define intensively we keep to the same
sign-situation for definiendum and definiens, when we
define extensively this may be changed.
We are now in a position to grapple with the
difference between definitions and ordinary assertions.
** Gorillas are animals" and *' Gorillas are affable "are
unlike one another in the respeqt that the first appears
to be certainly true as soon as we understand it, while
the second may be doubted. From ** This is a gorilla"
it follows directly that *^This is an animal," but not
that it is an affable one. If we look for a distinction in
essential connection between animality and gorillarity
on the one hand, and gorillarity and affability on the
other we shall make but indifferent use of our leisure.
But if the difference be sought in its proper place, that
is, between or in ^ the references, it will be found that
the definition actually used in the first case includes
animal, so that in speaking of a gorilla we have spoken
of an animal, and are therefore able to refer again with-
out diffidence to what we have already referred to ; while
affability was not so included. The relevant definition,
in fact, is the one actually used.^
1 As a typical bogus question we might ask : Where does difference
Reside ?
2 This point has its bearing upon the controversy as to whether
relations, all or some, are internal or external. An Internal relation
would seem to be a defining relation, and any relation used as such
to be internal. ' Internal ' and ' defining ' are thus synonyms, e.g.,
the relation of whole to part, since a whole is automatically defined
as containing its parts, is internal ; and similarly if a part be defined
as contained in a whole, the relation of part to whole. An External
relation is any relation other than a defining relation. If Prof. G. E.
Moore's relation ' entails ' {Philosophical Studies, p. 291) were a relation
of substitution, partial or complete, between symbols, based upon
identity of reference, then this account of internal relations would
not differ greatly from that given by Prof. Moore. It is, however,
exceptionally difficult to discover what the several parties to this
controversy are asserting ; and indeed each is apt to lament his inability
to understand the others.
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 113
To attempt now a fresh attack upon the essential
problem of how we define, or attain the substitute
symbols required in any discussion. We know* that
* A symbol refers to what it has actually been used to
refer to.' We shall cease then to assume that people are
referring to what they * ought ' to have referred to, and
consider only what they actually do refer to. The point
to be met in every discussion is the point actually
advanced, which must be first understood. We have,
that is, in all cases to find the referent. How can this
best be done ?
The answer is simple and obvious. Find first, it
runs, a set of referents which is certainly common to
all concerned, about which agreement can be secured,
and locate the required referent through its connection
with these.
It is fortunate that the types of fundamental con-
nections with which discussions are concerned are few
in number, though we are apt to believe, such is the
multifarious complexity of our talk, that things are
connected in any number of ways. Whether this
poverty is due to the trammelling influence of language,
a larger number of connections being quite, not merely
partially, unmanageable by naive talkers, whether it
is due to the structure of the brain, or whether it is due
to an actual simplicity in the universe, need not here
be considered. For practical purposes the fundamental
connections which can be used in definition are limited
to those which the normal mind can think of when
directly named. Let us consider, for instance, the
growth of the abstraction which we name a spatial
relation. In all our references to spatial objects certain
common elements or strands are active. Originally to
think of space as opposed to spatial objects we had to
think in rapid succession of a variety of spatial objects
in order that the common elements in the references
should stand out. In time we became able to use these
1 By Canon IV.— Chapter V.
114 THE MEANING OF MEANING
common, i.e.^ general references independently without
requiring them to be built up anew on each occasion.
We are now able to use them merely upon the vicarious
stimulus of the symbol * spatial relation.' A normal
mind, however, except in the few cases in which such
abstractions have universal value, still requires the aid
of instances, analogies and metaphors. The fewness
of these abstractions saves the linguistic situation. If
we employed, say, a hundred radically different types
of connections (still a small number) the task of limit-
ing the misunderstandings due to the variety in our
references would have proved impossible.
The fundamental connections being thus so few,
the task of a theory of definition narrows itself down to
the framing of a list. All possible referents are con-
nected in one or other, or several, of these fundamental
ways with referents which we can all succeed in identify-
ing. We must not assume in referring to any given
fixed point of agreement from which we find we are
able to start that we do more than agree in identifying
this. We must be careful to introduce our starting-
points in such a way that they do not raise fresh problems
on their own account. That is to say, we must select
them with reference to the particular universe of dis-
course in which our definienda fall. Thus, if we wish
to indicate what we are referring to when we use the
word * Beauty ' we should proceed by picking out certain
starting-points, such as nature, pleasure, emotion, or
truth, and then saying that what we refer to by
' Beauty' is anything lying in a certain relation [imitating
nature, causing pleasure or emotion, revealing truth) to
these points. How this may be done is shown in detail
in the following chapter.
When someone asks where Cambridge Circus is, we
say, *^You know where the British Museum is, and
you know the way down Shaftesbury Avenue. If you
go down Shaftesbury Avenue you will come to it."
We may note —
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 115
(i) The starting-point xnust be familiar, and this
can in practice only be guaranteed when it is either
something with which we are directly, not symbolically
acquainted (we do not merely know its name), or some-
thing with a wide and vague extension involving no
ambiguity in the context in which it is used. Thus
anyone in Kensington Gardens with a quarter of an
hour to spare and a desire to view Cambridge Circus,
if told that the said Circus is beyond Leicester Square,
will postpone his visit as readily as if he were told
(equally vaguely for another purpose) that it is in Soho.
(2) For the stricter purposes we shall almost always
require starting-points taken outside the speech situation;
things, that is, which we can point to or experience.
In this way we can utilize in our symbols the advantages
of gesture languages mentioned above. Thus it is
easier to point to an Antimacassar, when one of these
safeguards is present, than to describe it.
The importance of starting-points having thus been
indicated, namely, to act as signs by which the required
referents may be reached, we may now enumerate some
of the main routes which are useful in finding our way
about the field of reference. The sign-situations here
involved, we must not forget, arise only through and
upon many other simpler interpretations of the kind
discussed in the preceding chapters. It is easy
symbolically to make the situation whiah arises when
we define appear simple, but if we realize the delicacy
of the processes and adaptations required we shall not
place overmuch trust in face-value comparisons of
symbols (the usual method), but will attempt instead
to consider what actually is happening.
When in a discussion we are asked, * Can you
define your terms?' or complain *I do not understand
what you mean by the words you use,' we endeavour
to discover some route by which understanding, /.^.,
identification of referents, may be secured.
A person thoroughly acquainted with his subject
ii6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
and with the technique of Definition should, be able,
like the man up aloft in a maze, to direct travellers
from all quarters to any desired point ; and it may be
added that to go up the ladder and overlook the maze
is by far the best method of mastering a subject.
Although in no case, as we have already seen, are
relations to be regarded as part of the stuff of nature,
and although when we appear to speak of them we are
merely using them as tools, which does not involve
actual referents corresponding to them, yet when they
are so used there are various distinctions which it is
desirable to make as a matter of convenience. At the
beginning of our inquiry we described the relation
which could be said to hold between symbol and
referent as an imputed relation. To have described it
simply as an indirect relation would have omitted the
important difference between indirect relations recog-
nized as such, and those wrongly treated as direct.
Thus the relation between grandfather and grandson
is much more indirect than that between father and son,
and can be analysed into two paternal relations — ^ being
the father of the father (or mother) of.* Few people
would suppose tnat a direct relation was here involved,
since all family relations are highly indirect. But love,
hate, friendship, sympathy, etc., are very commonly
spoken of and regarded as direct, though on examina-
tion their indirectness is at once discovered. The whole
of social psychology is, however, infested with imputed
relations of this type, for an explanation of which such
hypotheses as that of group-consciousness are often
invoked.
The distinction between simple and complex rela-
tions on the other hand is somewhat different. In-
directness is only one kind of complexity, and direct
relations need not be simple. For instance, the relation
of * being a benevolent uncle to ' is complex ; it is a
blend of the two relations ^ well disposed towards '
and ^avuncularity.' The similarity between one pea
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 117
and another is complex, being a blend of similarities
in respect of greenness, hardness, edibility, etc. These
considerations, elementary though they may appear,
are of use whenever we have to treat of relations.
The routes, then, which we seek in our endeavour
to reach a desired referent are the obvious relations
in which that referent stands to some known referent.
The number of possible relations is indefinitely large,
but those which are of practical use fortunately fall,
as we have already explained, into a small number of
groups. So that as a preliminary classification^ we get
such a list as this : —
I. Symbolization
This is the simplest, most fundamental way of
defining. If we are asked what ^orange' refers to,
we may take some object which is orange and say
** * Orange' is a symbol which stands for This." Here
the relation which we use in defining is the relation
discussed in Chapter I. as constituting the base of our
triangle. It is, as we mentioned, an imputed relation
reducible to a relation between symbol and act of
reference and a relation between act of reference and
referent. Our starting-point is the word * orange,*
our route of identification is this relation. The required
referent is This. What we are doing in fact here is
directly naming.
But, it will be said. This merely tells us that
* orange' is applicable in one case; what we wish to
know is how it is applicable in general ; we wish to
have the definition extended so as to cover all the
referents for which ' orange ' is a suitable symbol.
This generalization may be performed for all types
of definitions in the same manner by the use of
similarity relations. We may say ** * Orange' applies
to this and to all things similar in respect of colour to
this." In practice the discrimination of one similarity
relation from others generally requires the use of
» Of. further Psyche, Vol. X, No. 3, January, 1930, pp. 9 and 29.
ii8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
parallel instances, analogies in fact, of the simplest
order.
2. Similarity
Thus similarity itself may be used as a defining
relation. Our required referent is like a chosen referent.
If we are asked what the symbol * orange ' refers to,
we may define this symbol by taking something which
is orange and saying ** To anything which is like this
thing in respect of colour the symbol * orange ' is
applicable." Here we have substituted for * orange*
Mike this in respect of colour,' and the referents of
both symbols are the same. Our starting-point is
This and the relation is Likeness, and anyone who
knows what * This ' stands for (i,e,^ is not blind) and
knows what ^ Likeness ' stands for will get there.
3. Spatial Relations
In, On, Above, Between, Beside, To the right of,
Near, Bigger than, Part of, are obvious examples.
*^* Orange' is a symbol for the colour of the region
between red and yellow in a spectrum (and of any
colour like this)." It will be noted that the naming
relation is involved in this as in every definition, and
that the definition is always extendable by a similarity
relation. It is curious that some of these symbols for
spatial relations are unsymmetrical. Thus we have
* on '=* above and in contact with,' but no abbreviation
for * under and in contact with,' except such ambiguous
words as * supporting.' We may further note that
most of the common uses of * on ' are so strangely
metaphorical that it has even been doubted whether
there is not some simple unanalysable relation which has
not yet been noticed. The right approach to problems
of metaphorical extension will be considered later in
this chapter.
4. Temporal Relations
* Yesterday ' is the day before to-day ; * Sunday '
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 119
is the first day of the week ; * The end of the war *
is X months after event y ; * Lighting-up time ' is x
minutes after sunset.
5. Causation : Physical
* Thunder' is what is caused (not by two clouds
bumping but) by certain electrical disturbances. * Saw-
dust ' is what is produced, etc.
6. Causation : Psychological
* The Unconscious ' is what causes dreams, fugues,
psychoses, humour and the rest. * Pleasure ' is * the
conscious accompaniment of successful psychic activity.*
7. Causation : Psycho-physical
In addition to the examples given in the following
chapter in connection with Beauty, we may define
* A perception of orange ' as * the effect in consciousness
of certain vibrations falling on the retina.*
Causal relations are probably the routes of identi-
fication most commonly employed in general discussion,
as well as in science. Thus a view of great historical
consequence defines the Deity as the Cause of the
Universe, while the importance of Embryology in
zoological classification is due to the causal defining
relations which are thereby provided.
8. Being the Object of a Mental State
The right-hand side of our triangle. Referring, is
one of these ; so are Desiring, Willing, Feeling, etc.
Thus * Piteous things * may be defined as those towards
which we feel pity, and * Good things ' are those which
we approve of approving.
9. Common Complex Relations
Some definitions are most conveniently formulated
in complex form. While capable of being analysed
out into sets of simple relations falling under one or
other of the above headings, they are more readily
applicable as popularly symbolized.
120 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Examples are * utility ' (analysable into Nos. 7 and
8), * Imitation ' (2 and 7), * Implication * (i and 8).
10. Le£-a/ Relations
These are so frequently employed and implied,
though often disguised, that it seems worth while to
give them a separate heading ; moreover, they are
subject to an arbitrary test — satisfying the judge.
Examples: * Belonging to* (when = * owned by'),
* Subject of,' * Liable to,' * Evidence of.' All legal
definitions are highly complex, though none the less
serviceable.
The above relations are those which considerable
experience has shown to be commonly employed in
definitions. Any other relations which might be re-
quired for special purposes equally deserve to be
included in a complete list — Shape, Function, Purpose*, or
Opposition, for example. It is therefore neither claimed
that the first eight groups exhaust the relevant elementary
relations, nor that those complex relations which we
have cited can be reduced without remainder to relations
of these types. The whole classification is on a prag-
matic basis, and merely on the level of the most usual
universes of discourse.
It has also proved unnecessary to discuss whether
and in what sense all relations may be logically
reducible to one or more ultimate kinds, ^ for any such
reduction would make no difference to the value of the
definitions we have been considering in their appro-
priate field. Even definitions of considerable com-
plexity, involving a variety of theories, can be reduced
without difficulty to discussable morsels, and their
validity as substitutes the better examined. This further
illustrates the fact that definitions often go by stages,
as when our inquirer for Cambridge Circus is not
1 Thus, on Mr Alexander's hypothesis, for instance {Space, Time
and Deity, I., p. 239), " in the end all relation is reducible to spatio-
temporal terms."
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 121
familiar with the British Museum and requires first
to be directed thither via the Tube from the Marble
Arch.
The question of multiple relations raises no diffi-
culty in this connection. A multiple relation holds
between a number of terms greater than two. Thus,
Perceiving, as Dr Whitehead has recently insisted,
is a multiple relation holding between a percipient,
an object, and the conditions ; and Giving is a multiple
relation holding between a philanthropist, a donation,
and a beneficiary. In defining any of these terms, or
in taking any of them as a starting-point for a route
of definition, we proceed in exactly the same fashion
as with dual relations — except that bearings must be
taken from more than one landmark, when the universe
of discourse demands special accuracy. Otherwise
the Definiendum is not reached. Thus, in defining
some object as what so-and-so saw, it may on some
occasions be necessary to state the conditions — as in
a seance we need to know the strictness of the test ;
or in identifying a passing train as an Express we have
to consider the speed of our own train. But much
discussion can be profitably undertaken without such
complex situations arising.
The practical aspect of the above list of routes of
definition deserves to be insisted upon. The reason
for using definitions at all is practical. We use them
to make discussion more profitable, to bring different
thinkers into open agreement or disagreement with
one another. There is, it is true, a more recondite
use of definition derived from this simple primitive
use. Definitions are of great importance in the
construction of deductive, scientific systems, those
automatic thinking-machines for which logic and
mathematics are, as it were, the rules or instructions.
In such a deductive system as mechanics, for example,
it is through the definitions employed that the parts
of the symbolic system are linked together, so that a
K
122 THE MEANING OF MEANING
given manipulation of the symbolism will yield com-
parable results even when their precise nature is not
foreseen by the manipulator. Thus, for such systems
there comes to be something which is regarded as the
definition of a particular symbol. Given the system,
there will be one and only one definition of a symbol
which is the right or proper definition, in the sense that
the working of the system depends upon the employ-
ment of this definition.
Specialists who are much concerned with such
systems naturally tend to regard all definitions in
the same manner. Yet for many of the most in-
teresting topics of discussion a quite different atti-
tude and habit of mind as regards definitions is not
only desirable, but, in fact, necessary, if fruitful
discussion is to be possible. In aesthetics, politics,
psychology, sociology, and so forth, the stage of
systematic symbolization with its fixed and unalter-
able definitions has not been reached. Such studies
as these are not far enough advanced for anyone yet
to decide which system is most advantageous and
least likely to exclude important aspects. The most
highly systematized sciences are those which deal
with the simplest aspects of nature. The more diffi-
cult and to many people, naturally, the more attractive
subjects are still in a stage in which it is an open
question which symbolization is most desirable. At
this stage what has chiefly to be avoided is the veiled
and hidden strife between rival systems in their early
forms, which more than anything else prevents mutual
understanding even between those who may be in
agreement. Many terms used in discussions where
* faith,' * beautiful,' * freedom,' * good,' ^ belief,' 'energy,'
* justice,' 'the State' constantly occur are used with
no distinct reference, the speaker being guided merely
by his linguistic habits and a simple faith in the
widespread possession of these habits. Hence the
common sight of anger aroused by the hearer's apparent
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 123
obtuseness and wrong-headedness *^ where the matter
is surely self-evident."
But even in those rarer discussions in which the
speakers are capable of greater explicitness, the curious
instinctive tendency to believe that a word has its own
true or proper use, which we have seen has its roots
in magic, too often prevents this ability to produce
definitions from taking effect. No doubt other factors
are inyolved. Lack of practice, literary fetishes con-
cerning elegance of diction, reluctance to appear
pedantic, defensive mimicry and other protective uses
of language all contribute. But far more important
than these is the instinctive attitude to words as natural
containers of power, which has, as we have shown, from
the dawn of language been assumed by mankind, and
is still supported and encouraged by all the earlier
stages of education.
The correction for this persistent tendency is a
greater familiarity with the more common routes of
definition, and a lively sense, which might easily be
awakened as a part of education, that our use of any
given word to stand for our referent on any occasion
is not due to any particular fitness of the word for that
particular referent, but is determined by all sorts of odd
accidents of our own history. We ought to regard
communication as a difficult matter, and close corre-
spondence of reference for different thinkers as a
comparatively rare event. It is never safe to assume
that it has been secured unless both the starting-points
and the routes of definition, whereby the referents of
at least a majority of the symbols employed have been
reached, are known.
In this chapter we are, for the sake of simplicity,
confining our attention to reference alone. In actual
discussion terms are used at least as much for the sake
of their suasory and emotive effects as for their strictly
symbolic value. Any substitute for * beautiful,' for
example, inevitably falls so flatly and heavily that
124 THE MEANING OF MEANING
many people prefer to use the term with all its dangers
rather than the psychological jargon which they may
agree is more satisfactory from a scientific as opposed
to an emotive point of view.
It is often, indeed, impossible to decide, whether a
particular use of symbols is primarily symbolic or
emotive. This is especially the case with certain kinds
of metaphor. When the Psalmist cries of his enemies,
** They have sharpened their tongues like a serpent;
adders* poison is under their lips," it is hard to
determine whether an elusive similarity between the
reptile and the persons he is describing is enabling him
metaphorically to state something about them, or
whether the sole function of his utterance is not to
express his abhorrence of them and to promote similar
attitudes towards them in his hearers. Most terms of
abuse and endearment raise this problem, which, as a
rule, it is, fortunately, not important to settle. The
distinction which is important is that between utterances
in which the symbolic function is subordinate to the
emotive act and those of which the reverse is true. In
the first case, however precise and however elaborate
the references communicated may be, they can be seen
to be present in an essentially instrumental capacity,
as means to emotive effects. In the second case, how-
ever strong the emotive effects, these can be seen to
be by-products not essentially involved in the speech
transaction. The peculiarity of scientific statement,
that recent new development of linguistic activity, is
its restriction to the symbolic function.
If this restriction is to be maintained, and if scientific
methods of statement are to be extended to fields such
as those traditionally tended by philosophers, certain
very subtle dangers must be provided for. Amongst
these is the occurrence, in hitherto quite unsuspected
numbers, of words which have been erroneously
regarded without question as symbolic in function.
The word * good * may be taken as an example. It
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 125
seems probable that this word is essentially a collection
of homonyms, such that the set of things, roughly,
those in connection with which we heard it pronounced
in early years (a good bed, a good kick, a good baby,
a good God) have no common characteristic. But
another use of the word is often asserted to occur, of
which some at least of those which we have cited are
supposed to be degenerations, where * good ' is alleged
to stand for a unique, unanalysable concept. This
concept, it is said, is the subject-matter of Ethics.^
This peculiar ethical use of * good * is, we suggest, a
purely emotive use. When so used the word stands
for nothing whatever, and has no symbolic function.
Thus, when we so use it in the sentence, ^This is good,*
we merely refer to this^ and the addition of * is good '
makes no difference whatever to our reference. When
on the other hand, we say ^This is red,* the addition
of * is red * to * this ' does symbolize an extension of our
reference, namely, to some other red thing. But * is
good ' has no comparable symbolic function ; it serves
only as an emotive sign expressing our attitude to this^
and perhaps evoking similar attitudes in other persons,
or inciting them to actions of one kind or another.
The recognition that many of the most popular
subjects of discussion are infested with symbolically
blank but emotively active words of this kind is a
necessary preliminary to the extension of scientific
method to these questions. Another is some technique
by which to ascertain which words are of this nature
and on what occasions. Whether experimental and
physiological methods can at present yield any result
may be doubted, but the ultimate settlement of the
matter can hardly be expected until tests in some
^ Cf. G. E. Moore, Principia Ethica, Chap. I. Of course, if we
define ' the good ' as ' that of which we approve of approving,' or
give any such definition when wc say " This is good," we shall be
making an assertion. It is only the indefinable ' good ' which we
suggest to be a purely emotive sign. The ' something more ' or ' some-
thing else ' which, it is alleged, is not covered by any definition of
' good ' is the emotional aura of the word.
126 THE MEANING OF MEANING
way independent of the opinion of the speaker are
obtained.
In all discussions we shall find that what is said is
only in part determined by the things to which the
speaker is referring. Often without a clear conscious-
ness of the fact, people have preoccupations which
determine their use of words. Unless we are aware of
their purposes and interests at the moment, we shall
not know what they are talking about and whether their
referents are the same as ours or not.
Purpose affects vocabulary in two ways. Sometimes
without affecting reference it dictates the choice of
symbols specially suited to an occasion. Thus> the
language of a teacher in describing his spectroscope to
a child may differ from that in which he describes it to
his colleague or to his fiancee without there being any
difference in his reference. Or an elegant writer will
ring the changes on a series of synonyms ^ without
changing his reference. On the other hand, a physicist
uses different language from that employed by his guide
in order to discuss the Spectre of the Brocken ; their
different purposes affect their language in this case
through altering their references.
It is plain that cases of the first kind are much
simpler than those of the second ; only the latter are
likely to lead to vain controversies. Thus, if one dis-
putant talks of public opinion he may be referring to
what others would call the views of certain newspaper
owners, in which case an argument as to whether the
Press influences public opinion would tend to be incon-
clusi\'e in the absence of some third party familiar with
the technique of definition. Such arguments are of
constant occurrence even in the most intelligent circles,
although when examined in the clear light of criticism
they usually appear too foolish to be possible.
But how should a discussion whose aim is the
1 Complete synonyms, i.e., words alike in all their functions, probably
do not occur. But partial synonyms which are used for the same
reference are not uncommon.
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 127
removal of uncertainty as to whether the parties to it
are referring to the same things or not be conducted?
The first necessity is to remember that since the
past histories of individuals differ except in certain very
simple respects, it is probable that their reactions to
and employment of any general word will vary. There
will be some to whom a word is merely a stimulus to
the utterance of other words without the occurrence of
any reference— the psittacists, that is to say, who
respond to words, much as they might respond to the
first notes of a tune which they proceed almost auto-
matically to complete. At the other extreme there will
be some for whom every word used symbolizes a definite
and completely articulated reference. With the first we
are not here concerned, but as regards the others, unless
we have good evidence to the contrary we should assume
that, clear though their ideas may be, they will probably
not be ideas of the same things. It is plain that we can
only identify referents through the references made to
them. Different references then, may be to the same
referent, sufficiently similar ones must be ; and it is
only by ensuring similarity of reference that we can
secure identity in our referents. For this it is desirable
to symbolize references by means of the simple routes
of definition discussed above. We must choose as
starting-points either things to which we can point, or
which occur freely in ordinary experience. The routes
by which we link these starting-points to our desired
referents must be thoroughly familiar, which in practice
confines us to four main routes and combinations of
these. They are those which we must know and
unerringly recognize if we are to survive— Similarity,
Causation, Space and Time. In practice, however, it
is often sufficient to start from less primitive initial
points and follow more complicated and dangerous
routes. Thus ' razor ' = ' instrument used for shaving'
unambiguously, without it being necessary to reduce
' used for ' any further by analysis.
128 THE MEANING OF MEANING
At what point our de^nitions are thorough enough
must be left for the occasion to decide. In viva voce
discussion, unless unduly prolonged and pertinacious,
little can be hoped for except stimulus and hints which
will be of use in more serious endeavours. But where
there is reason to suppose that a slippery term is being
employed, it is a wise policy to collect as wide a range
of uses as possible without at this stage seeking for a
common element. A good dictionary attempts this for
certain words, but usually from an historical standpoint
and on no theoretical principle. The next step is to
order these uses with a view to discovering which main
routes of identification have been adopted for the
referents concerned. It is not necessary that the
separate definitions so formulated should be mutually
exclusive ; very often they will cover the same referents
but with different references. In such cases we may
be confronted by the problem of levels of reference above
alluded to. ^ Animal ' in current speech, and * mammal *
in zoology stand for almost the same referents ; but the
references differ very greatly in the definiteness and
complexity of the sign-chains involved. These differ-
ences should, if possible, be indicated in the formulation
of the definitions. What is required is that each defini-
tion should unmistakably mark out a certain range
of referents. If two definitions mark out the same range
no harm is done, the essential consideration being that
each range should be clearly separated from the others
so as to be capable of treatment on its own merits.
The natural tendency of those accustomed to tradi-
tional procedure is to expect that since what appears
to be one word is being defined, the alternative substitute
symbols will stand for referents with some common
character of a more or less recondite nature. This may
sometimes occur, but the inquiry as to whether there
is such a common character should be postponed to a
much later stage. The slightest study of the way in
which words in ordinary speech gain occasional de-
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 129
rivative and supernumerary uses through metaphorical
shifts of all degrees of subtlety, and through what can
be ca-lled linguistic accidents, is enough to show that
for a common element of any interest or importance to
run through all the respectable uses of a word is most
unlikely. Each single metaphorical shift does, of
course, depend upon some common element which is
shared by the original reference and by the reference
which borrows the symbol. Some part of the two
contexts of the references must be the same. But the
possible overlaps between contexts are innumerable,
and there is no reason to expect that any word at all
rich in context will always be borrowed on the strength
of the same similarity or overlap. Thus, Beautiful^
and Beautiful^ may symbolize references with something
in common; so may BeautifuPand Beautiful*', but it
by no means follows that these common elements will be
the same or that the three symbols will stand for referents
which share anything whatever of interest. Yet few
writers who concern themselves with such wandering
words resist the temptation to begin their inquiry with
a search for essential or irreducible meanings.
The temptation has been greatly increased by the
tendency of dictionaries to isolate an arbitrary nucleus
of uses in the interests of conciseness^ and to treat as
* dead ' or * accidental * just those senses which are likely
to prove most troublesome in discussion. In some cases
historical changes as well as phonetic modifications in
the symbol itself are readily distinguishable. Thus
with persona— person— parson the shifts can be seen at a
glance in the following scheme : ^ —
1. A
2. A+B ..
3. B ..
4. B+C
5. c ..
6. C + D
7 D
Mask.
Character indicated by a mask.
Character or role in a play.
One who represents a character.
Representative in general.
Representative of church in parish.
Parson.
1 Greenough and Kittredge, Words and their Ways in English Speech,
p. 268.
130 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The whole of this development took place in Latin,
but when in English the word was borrowed in the
form persouuy which Chaucer uses, a transference and
fading out of the metaphor in B produces Bi, the shift
to * personage ' ; 3.nd parson is a phonetic spelling of this
older form. In this manner about a dozen uses of a
word may often be found ; and where the historical or
phonetic separation is not clearly defined confusion
is inevitable unless the objects referred to are so readily
distinguishable as to encourage the punster.
If we wish to mediate between rival views it is far
better to assume that the disputants are terminologically
independent than to assume that they must in all respects
use their words alike. With the first procedure, if there
actually is a common element involved, we shall be in
a good position to discover it. With the second we
shall inevitably tend to misrepresent all the views con-
cerned and to overlook most of their really valuable and
peculiar features. The synthesis of diverse opinions,
if it is attempted at all, should be postponed until each
view has been examined as completely as possible in
isolation. Premature efforts, to which all our natural
attitudes to symbols conspire to tempt us, are an
unfailing source of confusion.
For those whose approach to symbols is unreflective
it is often difficult to believe that such convenient words
as * beauty,' * meaning,' or * truth ' are actually not
single words at all, but sets of superficially indistin-
guishable yet utterly discrepant symbols. The reasons
why this is so are, however, not hard to point out.
Language, which has developed chiefly to satisfy the
exigencies of everyday practical intercourse, presents
a remarkable unevenness in the density of distribution
of its units when we regard it from the standpoint of
our theoretical needs. Thus it constantly happens
that one word has to serve functions for which a hundred
would not be too many. Why language is often so
recalcitrant to growth at these points is a puzzling
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 131
problem. Shortage of terms in the established sciences
is met without difficulty by the introduction of new
terms. But with sciences in their initial stages, before
they have developed into affairs for specialists, and
while they are still public concerns, the resistance to
new terms is very great. Probably the explanation
of this is to be found in the lack of emotive power which
is a peculiarity of all technicalities.
The result of this scarcity of terms is that any
reference whatever made to these symbolically starved
topics is forced to make use of the few words which are
available, no matter how distinct its referents may be
from those of other references which also use the same
words. Thus any reference to human activities which
arejieither theoretical nor practical tends to be sym-
bolized by the word ' aesthetic ' ; and derivatively any-
thing which we are not merely concerned either to
know or to change tends to be described as beautiful.
And this, no matter how many fundamentally different
attitudes to things we may come to distinguish. We
have here a cause for the extravagant ambiguity of all
the more important words used in general discussion ;
one which supplements and reinforces the processes of
metaphorical shift just considered.
At the beginning, then, of any serious examination
of these subjects we should provide ourselves with as
complete a list as possible of different uses of the
principal words. The reason for making this list as
complete as possible, subject, of course, to common
sense and ordinary discretion, is important. It is
extraordinarily difficult in such fields to retain con-
sistently what may be called a * sense of position.*
The process of investigation consists very largely of
what, to the investigator, appear to be flashes of
insight, sudden glimpses of connections between
things and sudden awareness of distinctions and dif-
ferences. These, in order to be retained, have to be
symbolized, if, indeed, they do not, as is most often
132 THE MEANING OF MEANING
the case, originally occur in an already symbolized
state.
Without such a map of the separable fields covered
by the investigation any constatation geniale is liable to be
confused with another, to their common detriment, or
to yield an apparent contradiction of purely verbal
origin. If, however, we are able at once to locate the
idea in its proper province, the accident that we have
to use the same words as totally distinct symbols is
deprived of its power to disturb our orientation. The
mere ad hoc distinction between two or perhaps three
senses of a word made in response to particular exi-
gencies of controversy is insufficient. We can never
foretell on what part of the total field light will next be
vouchsafed, and unless we know in outline what» the
possibilities are we are likely to remain ignorant of
what it is into which we have had insight.
Not all words are worth so much trouble. It might
be supposed that it is rather certain subjects which do
not merit attention, but closer scrutiny suggests that
these subjects, of which Theology appears to be a good
example, are themselves merely word systems. But
even the most barren fields have their psychological
interest, and those who approach a discussion armed
with a symbolic technique and able to apply suCh
principles as the Canons dealt with in the last chapter
may hope every day and in every way to find them-
selves better and better.
Something, however, can be achieved even by those
who shrink from the severities of the Six Canons. In
his Art of Controversy ^ of which he remarked *M am
not aware that anything has been done in this direc-
tion although I have made inquiries far and wide,"
Schopenhauer says, *^ It would be a very good thing
if every trick could receive some short and obviously
appropriate name, so that when a man used this or
that particular trick, he could be at once reproached for
it." This suggestion is supported by Professor Dewey's
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 133
characterization of the verbal sign as a fence ; a label ;
and a vehicle : that is to say it selects and detaches
meanings from out of the void, and makes what was
dim and vague stand out as a clear-cut entity —
secondly, it conserves the meaning thus fixed for
future use, and, thirdly, enables it to be applied and
transported to a new context and a new situation. Or
in less metaphysical language, a symbol assists us in
separating one reference from another, in repeating a
reference we have already made, and in making partially
analogous references in other contexts. In all these ways
a notation of the devices of the controversiahst would
be very desirable.
1 hree such tricks may thus be readily stigmatized.
The first, the Phonetic subterfuge, would be considered
too simple to be dangerous if history bore no testimony
to its effects. It consists in treating words which sound
alike as though their expansions must be analogous.
The most famous case is Mill's use of * desirable * as
though it must expand in the same way as * visible * or
*knowable.' The subterfuge is to be charged against
language rather than against Mill, and is plainly verbal.
* Desirable,' in the sense equivalent to * ought to be
desired,' may be reducible to *can be desired by a mind
of a certain organization,'^ but is not on all fours as a
symbol with 'visible' in the sense of *able to be seen
by somebody.'
The second subterfuge, the Hypostatic, is more
difficult to discourage because it is a misuse of an
indispensable linguistic convenience. We must, if
we are ever to finish making any general remark,
contract and condense our language, but we need not
hypostatize our contractions. The point has been
referred to in connection with Universals, but how
popular and how influential is this practice may be
^ This theory of value is developed in op. cit., Principles of Literary
Criticism, where arguments against it as a ' naturalistic fallacy ' are
disposed of.
134 THE MEANING OF MEANING
shown by such a list of terms as the following : — Virtue,
Liberty, Democracy, Peace, Germany, Religion, Glory.
All invaluable words, indispensable even, but able
to confuse the clearest issues, unless controlled by
Canon III.
The third, the Utraquistic subterfuge, has probably
made more bad argument plausible than any other
controversial device which can be practised upon
trustful humanity. It has long been recognized that
the term * perception * may have either a physical or a
mental referent. Does it refer to what is perceived, or
to the perceiving of this? Similarly, * knowledge ' may
refer to what is known or to the knowing of it. The
Utraquistic subterfuge consists in the use of such terms
for both at once of the diverse referents in question.
We have it typically when the term * beauty ' is em-
ployed, reference being made confusedly both to
qualities of the beautiful object and to emotional effects
of these qualities on the beholder.
Sometimes two or more of these subterfuges may be
located in the same word. Thus * Beauty ' on most
occasions is a double offender, both hypostatic and
utraquistic.
In addition to this labelling of controversial tricks,
a further set of Rules of Thumb may be laid down for
practical guidance in conformity with the six Canons.
In a recent Symposium of the Aristotelian Society on
Mental Activity, carried on for the most part in in-
verted commas, it was not surprising to find Professor
Carveth Read remarking once more that ''the com-
monest cause of misunderstanding has long been recog-
nized to lie in the ambiguity of terms, and yet we make
very little progress in ag'reeing upon definitions. Even
if we sometimes seem to be agreed upon the use of an
important word, presently a new interest awakens or an
old interest acquires new life ; and then, if its adherents
think it would be strengthened by using that word in
another sense they make no scruple about altering it."
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 135
Over two years later at the tenth annual meeting
of the American Philosophical Association we find
Professor Lovejoy breaking in on a similar series of
misunderstandings with the remark, ^^ More adherence
to definitions is required if we are to come to an
understanding. Appoint a committee to define the
fundamental terms which are to be used in the dis-
cussion."
When we consider the amount of time we spend
to-day in such discussion and the number of words we
utter in the course of a single day— it is calculated
that when vocal we emit between 150 and 250 words
per minute— it is of some importance to recognize
certain classes of these words which are liable to mislead
in controversy.
^^In Psychology what seems *is'" it has been
happily said. Is what ' seems' Real? '' Everything,"
replies Bosanquet, '' is Real so long as we do not take
it for what it is not." '' I somewhat uncautiously speak
of mind as a Thing," confessed Professor Alexander—
and still more regretfully '' I have used the unfortunate
word Phenomenon. I have made up my mind that I
shall never use the word Phenomenon again without
carefully defining its meaning. How Mr Stout can
say I describe the mind as if it were not a Phenomenon
passes my comprehension. I meant by the word
Almost Nothing at all." This is reminiscent of Croce's
dictum with regard to the Sublime: ^^the Sublime is
everything that is or will be so called by those who
have employed or shall employ the name." The chief
function of such terms in general discussion is to act
as Irritants, evoking emotions irrelevant to the deter-
mination of the referent. This is an abuse of the
poetical function of language to which we shall return.
There is much scope for what may be called the
Eugenics of Language, no less than for the Ethics of
Terminology.
Foreshadowing the conscious process of Linguistic
136 THE MEANING OF MEANING
elimination Mr Alfred Sidgwick has drawn attention
under the title ** Spoilt Words" to terms ambiguous
beyond remedy. But having thus stated the problem,
he leaves it. Language, as we know, was made be-
fore people learned to think : in the phraseology of
Mill, by the * vulgar' ; and it is still being so made in
the form in which we use it in conversation, however
much we may regret the fact. It is very questionable
how far we do but add to the existing confusion by
endeavouring to restrict the meaning of these Unfor-
tunates. When we remember that it is not round words
only that emotional and other associations gather,
but that Victor Hugo, for instance (as Ribot has
pointed out), saw in each letter, even, a symbolic repre-
sentation of some essential aspect of human know-
ledge,^ it is somewhat optimistic to put trust in the
efficacy of restriction of meaning in discussion. ** I be-
lieve," said Max Miiller, **that it would really be of the
greatest benefit to mental science if all such terms as
impressions, sensations — soul, spirit, and the rest,
could, for a time, be banished, and not be readmitted
till they had undergone a thorough purification."
And in his remarkable analysis of the Economics of
Fatigue and Unrest (1924) Dr Sargant Florence has
successfully employed this method by eliminating
altogether the terms * fatigue ' and * unrest ' in the earlier
stages (Chapters V.-XI.) of his argument.
** Never change native names, for there are Names
in every nation God-given, of unexplained power in
the mysteries." So says a Chaldean Oracle with true
insight. But in prose discussions which aim at the
avoidance of mysteries, both Irritants and Degenerates
must be ruthlessly rejected — Irritants because of their
power to evoke disturbing emotions, and Degenerates
because of the multiplicity of their associated referents.
^ The importance of calligraphy in Chinese writing is an instance
of aesthetic intrusion in a system of prose signs — even where the pictorial
appeal of the signs themselves has vanished.
THE THEORY OF DEFINITION 137
It is not necessary here to compile the Index Ex-
purgatorius from * Appearance * to * Reality,' or as
near Z as possible.
There is another class of words which may profitably
be placed beyond the range of legitimate dispute.
Matthew Arnold speaks of ** terms thrown out, so to
speak, at a not fully grasped object of the speaker's
consciousness." So long as the true function of these
Mendicants, as they might be designated, is recog-
nized, they will cause little trouble. They must never
receive harsh treatment; decasualization is the remedy.
To be distinguished from Mendicants, which may be
assumed to possess the homing instinct, are Nomads,
whose mode of life was first described by Locke.
*' Men having been accustomed from their cradle to learn
words which are easily got and retained, before they knew or had
framed the complete ideas which they express, they usually con-
tinue to do so all their lives ; and without taking the pains
necessary to settle in their minds determined ideas, they use their
words for such unsteady and confused notions as they have;
contenting themselves with the same words as other people use,
as if the very sound necessarily carried with it the same meaning.
This (although men make a shift with it in ordinary occurrences
of life, yet when they come to reason concerning their Tfenets) it
manifestly fills their discourse with abundance of empty noise
and jargon — especially in moral matters where the bare sound
of the words are often only thought on, or at least very un-
certain and obscure notions annexed to them.
Men take the words they find in use amongst their neighbours,
and that they may not seem ignorant what they stand for use
them confidently without much troubling their heads about a
certain fixed meaning, whereby besides the ease of it they obtain
this advantage that as in such discourse they are seldom in the
right so they are seldom to be convinced they are in the wrong,
it being all one to draw these men out of their mistakes, who have
no settled notions, as to dispossess a Vagrant of his habitation,
who has no settled abode. This I guess to be so ; and every one
may observe in himself or others whether it be so or not."
We can still agree to-day that there is little doubt
as to whether it be so or not ; and if we were able more
readily to recognize these Nomads, we should spend
138 THE MEANING OF MEANING
less time in the frenzied rifling of Cenotaphs which is
at present so much in favour.
When we enter the Enchanted Wood of Words, our
Rules of Thumb may enable us to deal not only with
such evil genii as the Phonetic, the Hypostatic and the
Utraquistic subterfuges, but also with other disturbing
apparitions of which Irritants, Mendicants and Nomads
are examples ; such Rules, however, derive their virtue
from the more refined Canons, whose powers we have
already indicated.
It may, however, be asked. What is the use of
knowing the nature of definition, for does not the
difficulty consist in hitting upon the precise definition
which would be useful ? There are two answers to this.
In the first place, the ability to frame definitions comes
for most people only with practice, like surgery, diag-
nosis or cookery, but, as in these arts, a knowledge
of principles is of great assistance. Secondly, such a
knowledge of general principles renders any skill
acquired in the course of special study of one field
available at once when we come to deal with other
but similar fields. In all the main topics of discussion
— Esthetics, Ethics, Religion, Politics, Economics,
Psychology, Sociology, History — the same types of
defining relations occur, and thus a theoretical mastery
of any one of them gives confidence in the attack upon
the others.
CHAPTER VII
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY
This I have here mentioned by the bye to show of what
Consequence it is for Men to define their Words when
there is Occasion. And it must be a great want of Inge-
nuity (to say no more of it) to refuse to do it : Since a
Definition is the only way, whereby the precise Meaning
of moral Words can be known. — Locke.
" Disputes are multiplied, as if everything was uncer-
tain, and these disputes are managed with the greatest
warmth, as if everything was certain. Amidst all this
bustle 'tis not reason which gains the prize, but elo-
quence ; and no man need ever despair of gaining pro-
selytes to the most extravagant hypothesis, who has art
enough to represent it in any favourable colours. The
victory is not gained by the men at arms, who manage the
pike and sword ; but by the trumpeters, drummers, and
musicians of the army." — Hume.
In order to test the value of the account of Definition
given in the previous chapter, we may best select a
subject which has hitherto proved notoriously refractory
to definitive methods. Many intelligent people indeed
have given up aesthetic speculation and take no interest
in discussions about the nature or object of Art, because
they feel that there is little likelihood of arriving at
any definite conclusion. Authorities appear to differ
so widely in their judgments as to which things are
beautiful, and when they do agree there is no means
of knowing w/iat they are agreeing about.
What in fact do they mean by Beauty? Prof.
Bosanquet and Dr Santayana, Signor Croce and
Clive Bell, not to mention Ruskin and Tolstoi, each
in his own way dogmatic, enthusiastic and voluminous,
each leaves his conclusions equally uncorrelated with
140 THE MEANING OF MEANING
those of his predecessors. And the judgments of ex-
perts on one another are no less at variance. But if
there is no reason to suppose that people are talking
about the same thing, a lack of correlation in their
remarks need not cause surprise. We assume too
readily that similar language involves similar thoughts
and similar things thought of. Yet why should there
be only one subject of investigation which has been
called Esthetics? Why not several fields to be separ-
ately investigated, whether they are found to be con-
nected or not? Even a Man of Letters, given time,
should see that if we say with the poet :
** ' Beauty is Truth; Truth Beauty ' — that is all
Ye know on earth, and all ye need to know,"
we need not be talking about the same thing as the
author who says :
*♦ The hide of the rhinoceros may be admired for its fitness ;
but as it scarcely indicates vitality, it is deemed less beautiful
than a skin which exhibits mutable effects of muscular elcisticity."
What reason is there to suppose that one aesthetic
doctrine can be framed to include all the valuable kinds
of what is called Literature.
Yet, surprising though it may seem, the only author
who appears to have expressly admitted this difficulty
and recognized its importance is Rupert Brooke. '^One
of the perils attending on those who ask * What is Art? '
is," he says,** tha't they tend, as all men do, to find what
they are looking for: a common quality in Art. . . .
People who start in this way are apt to be a most
intolerable nuisance both to critics and to artists. . . .
Of the wrong ways of approaching the subject of ' Art,*
or even of any one art, this is the worst because it is
the most harmful." He proceeds to point out how
**Croce rather naively begins by noting that * aesthetic'
has been used both for questions of Art and for per-
ception. So he sets out to discover what meaning it
can really have to apply to both. He takes it for the
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 141
one necessary condition a true answer about 'Esthetics'
must satisfy, that it shall explain how Art and Percep-
tion are both included. Having found such an ex-
planation, he is satisfied." The same lively awareness
of linguistic pitfalls which enabled Rupert Brooke
wisely to neglect Croce also allowed him to detect the
chink in Professor G. E. Moore's panoply, and so to
resist the inexorable logic of the Cambridge Realists,
then at the height of their power. *' Psychologically,"
he says, '*they seem to me non-starters. In the first
place I do not admit the claims of anyone who says
* There is such a thing as Beauty, because when a
man says, '* This is beautiful," he does not mean '* This
is lovely."' ... I am not concerned with what men
may mean. They frequently mean, and have meant,
the most astounding things. It is, possibly, true that
when men say, * This is beautiful ' they do not mean
*This is lovely.' They may mean that the aesthetic
emotion exists. My only comments are that it does
not follow that the aesthetic emotion does exist ; and
that, as a matter of fact, they are wrong. "^
His own sympathies, at least as they appear in the
volume from which we quote, were with views of type
XI. in the list given below, though he does not seem
to have considered the matter very deeply, and had no
opportunity of following up the promise of his admirable
approach.
Whenever we have any experience which might be
called 'aesthetic,' that is whenever we are enjoying,
contemplating, admiring or appreciating an object,
there are plainly different parts of the situation on
which emphasis can be laid. As we select one or other
of these so we shall develop one or other of the main
aesthetic doctrines. In this choice we shall, in fact, be
^ John Webster and the Elizabethan Drama, pp. 1-7.
Rupert Brooke clearly did not understand that the argument here
being refuted professed to supply a proof not of existence but of sub-
sistence. Common sense, however, sometimes succeeds where logical
acumen overreaches itself.
142 THE MEANING OF MEANING
deciding which of the main Types of Definition we are
employing. Thus we may begin with the object itself ;
or with other things such as Nature, Genius, Perfection,
The Ideal, or Truth, to which it is related ; or with its
effects upon us. We may begin where we please, the
important thing being that we should know and make
clear which of these approaches it is that we are taking,
for the objects with which we come to deal, the referents
to which we refer, if we enter one field will not as a rule
be the same ^s those in another. Few persons will be
equally interested in all, but some acquaintance with
them will at least make the interests of other people
more intelligible, and discussion more profitable.
Differences of opinion and differences of interest in these
matters are closely interconnected, but any attempt at a
general synthesis, premature perhaps at present, must
begin by disentangling them.
We have then to make plain the method of Defini-
tion which we are employing. The range of useful
methods is shown in the following table of definitions,
most of which represent traditional doctrines, while
others, not before emphasized, render the treatment
approximately complete. It should be remarked that
the uses of * beautiful ' here tabulated are not by any
means fully stated. Any definition is sufficiently explicit
if it enables an intelligent reader to identify the reference
concerned. A full formulation in each of these cases
would occupy much space and would show that the
field of the beautiful is for some of them more extensive
than that of works of art, while certain restrictions,
such as those which would exclude the Police from
No. VI 1 1., for example, will readily occur to the
reader.
I A ny thing is beautiful — which possesses the simple
quality of beauty,
II Anything is beautiful — which has a specified
Form,
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 143
III Anything is beautiful— which is an imitation of
Nature.
IV Anything is beautiful — which results from suc-
cessful exploitation of a Medium..
V Anything is beautiful — which is the work of
Genius,
B VI Anything is beautiful — which reveals {i) Truths
(2) the Spirit of Nature^ (3)' the Ideal, (4)
the Universal^ (5) the Typical.
VII Anything is beautiful — which produces Illusion.
VIII Anything is beautiful — which leads to desirable
Social effects.
IX A7iy thing is beautiful — which is an Expression.
* X Anything is beautiful — which causes Pleasure.
XI Anything is beautiful — which excites Emotions.
XII Anything is beautiful — which promotes a Specific
emotion.
XIII Anything is beautiful — which involves the pro-
cesses of Empathy.
XIV Anything is beautiful — which heightens Vitality,
XV Anything is beautiful — which brings us into
touch with exceptional Personalities.
XVI Anything is beautiful — which induces Synces-
thesis.^
It will be noticed that each of these definitions
illustrates one or more of the fundamental defining
relations discussed in the last chapter. Thus, the
definitions in Group C, Definitions X,-XVL, are all
in terms of the effects of things upon consciousness
and so are cases of type VII. Of the two definitions in
Group A, the first is a case of simple naming, type I.
We postulate a quality Beauty, name it, and trust the
identification of this mythological referent to the
magical efficacy of our name. The discussion of the
* A detailed discussion of the views defined in these ways is provided
in The Foundations of Msthetics by the authors and Mr James Wood
(1921, Second Edition, 1926) ; and a survey of the most recent work
in the light of the above classification will be found in the Encyclopedia
Bntannica, Thirteenth Edition, New Volumes {iq2()),siib. "yEsthetics."
144 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Beautiful in terms of an intrinsic quality Beauty is in
fact an excellent example of the survival of primitive
word-superstitions, and of the risks run by any discus-
sion which is symbolically uncritical. The second
Definition (II.)) by Form, is either Spatial or Temporal
according to the Art to which it is applied. If any
others than these relations seem to be involved on any
occasion, we shall find on examination that the defini-
tion has had its starting-point surreptitiously changed
and has become actually psychological, a change which
can easily occur in this field, without any immediately
apparent change in the symbolism. As a glariiig
instance the use of the word 'great' in literary and
artistic criticism shows this process, the transition,
without symbolic indication, from the ' objective' to the
* subjective ' as they used to be called.
The Definitions in Group B are all more or less
complex.
Both Imitation (III.)) and Exploitation (IV.), the
definition by reference to the capacities of the medium,
are evidently compounded of Causation, Similarity,
Cognizing and Willing Relations ; Exploitation being
in fact as fine an instance as can be found of a complex
definition easy to understand in its condensed short-
hand form and difficult or impossible to analyse. Few
people, however, will suffer any temptation to postulate
a special property of being an exploitation, though
such devices are the penalty we usually have to pay for
convenient short cuts in our symbolization.
The other definitions of Group B offer similar
problems in analysis. The degree to which routes of
type VIII., mental attitudes of believing (VI. and VII.)
or approving (VIII.), appear is an interesting feature,
which again helps to account for the tendency of such
views to become psychological (Group C). Thus
definition XVI. tends to absorb and replace VI. ; and
XV. in a refined and explicit form often supersedes V.
These variations in reference, even for definitions of
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 145
symbols specially provided to control such inconstancy,
serve to remind us of the paramount importance of
Canon IV. for all discussion. The use of a symbolic
theory of definition lies not in any guarantee which it
can offer against ambiguity, but in the insight which it
can give as to what, since we are using symbols, will
be happening ; and in the means provided of detecting
and correcting those involuntary wanderings of the
reference which are certain in all discourse to occur.
In the case of the above definitions our * starting-
points,' synaesthesis, specific emotion, desirable social
effects, etc., are plainly themselves arrived at by
intricate processes of definition. For the particular
purposes for which definitions of ^ beautiful ' are likely
to be drawn up these starting-points can be assumed to
be agreed upon, and the methods by which such
agreement can be secured are the same for * emotion '
or * pleasure,' as for ^ beautiful ' itself.
Equally we can proceed from these definitions or
from any one of them, to terms cognate (Ugliness,
Prettiness, Sublimity) or otherwise related (Art,
Esthetic Decoration), and to define these in their turn
we may take as starting-points either some one of the
now demarcated fields of the beautiful and say : —
Esthetics is the study of the Beautiful, or : — Art is
the professed attempt to produce Beauty, or we may
return to our starting-point for the definition of Beauty
and box the compass about it.
The fields indicated by the above definitions may in
some cases be co-extensive, e.g,y V. and XV.; or they
may partially overlap, e,g,^ X. and XIII. ; or they may
be mutually exclusive, a condition not realized here
or indeed in any probable discussion. The question
whether two such fields do co-extend, do overlap or do
exclude, is one to be decided by detailed investigation
of the referents included in the fields. The ranges of
overlap between fields, in fact, give rise to the special
empirical problems of the sciences. Thus, for instance,
146 THE MEANING OF MEANING
we find that beautiful things defined as Imitations of
Nature (HI.) only coincide with beautiful things defined
as producers of Illusion (VII.) under certain strict
conditions among which is to be found the condition
that neither shall be included in the range defined by
IV. The investigation of such correlations and the
conditions to which they are subject is the business of
Esthetic as a science.
The advantage of a grammatically extensional form
for the definitions is that, so put, the symbols we use
are least likely to obscure the issues raised, by making
questions which are about matters of fact into puzzling
conundra concerning the interlinking of locutions.
The fields reached by these various approaches can
all be cultivated and most of theni are associated with
well-known names in the Philosophy of Art.
Let us, then, suppose that we have selected one
of these fields and cultivated it to the best of our
ability ; for what reasons was it selected rather than
some other? For if we approach the subject in the
spirit of a visitor to the Zoo, who, knowing that all
the creatures in a certain enclosure are * reptiles,' seeks
for the common property which distinguishes them as
a group from the fish in the Aquarium, mistakes may
be made. We enter, for example, Burlington House,
and, assuming that all the objects there collected are
beautiful, attempt similarly to establish some common
property. A little consideration of how they came there
might have raised serious doubts ; but if, after the
manner of many sestheticians, we persist, we may even
make our discovery of some relevant common property
appear plausible.
We have seen (pp. 124-5) how widely such a re-
spected word as ' good ' may wander ; and there are good
reasons for supposing that * beauty ' will not be more
faithful to one particular kernel of reference. In dis-
cussion we must in fact always bear in mind that there
is an indefinitely large number of ways in which any
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 147
symbol may acquire derivative uses ; any similarity,
any analogy may provide a sufficient reason for an
extension of * meaning,' or semantic shift. It no more
follows that the two or more symbols which it then
becomes (cf. p. 91) will stand for referents with some
relevant common property, than it would follow from
the common name of a man's step-mother and his
daughter-in-law that they share his gout or his passion
for the turf.
If, therefore, terms such as Beauty are used in dis-
cussion for the sake of their emotive value, as is usually
the case, confusion will inevitably result unless it is
constantly realized that words so used are indefinable,
i,e.^ admit of no substitution, there being no other
equally effective stimulus-word. Such indefinable uses
are no doubt what have often led to the assumption of
a simple quality of Beauty (Definition I.) to account for
verbal difficulties ; as was also suggested above in the
case of Good (p. 125). If, on the other hand, the term
Beauty be retained as a short-hand substitute, for some
one among the many definitions which we have elicited,
this practice can only be justified as a means of indicat-
ing by a Word of Power that the experience selected
is regarded as of outstanding importance ; or as a
useful low-level shorthand.
In addition to providing a test case for any general
technique of definition a consideration of the problem
of Beauty is perhaps the best introduction to the ques-
tion of the diverse functions of language. As is well
known, those whose concern with the arts is most direct
often tend to deprecate a scientific approach as being
likely to impair appreciation. This opinion if carefully
examined will be found to be a typical symptom of
a confusion as to the uses of language so constantly
present in all discussions that its general recognition
would be one of the most important results which a
science of symbolism could yield.
If we compare a body of criticism relating to any
148 THE MEANING OF MEANING
of the arts with an equally accredited body of remarks
dealing with, let us say, physics or physiology, we
shall be struck by the frequency, even in the best
critics, of sentences which it is impossible to understand
in the same way as we endeavour to understand those
of physiologists. ** Beautiful words are the very and
peculiar light of the mind," said Longinus. According
to Coleridge **the artist must imitate that which is
within the thing, that which is active through form
and figure, and discourses to us by symbols — the Natur-
geist, or spirit of nature." ** Poetry," Dr Bradley
writes, ^*is a spirit. It comes we know not whence.
It will not speak at our bidding, nor answer in our
language. It is not our servant; it is our master."*
And Dr Mackail is even more rhapsodic : *' Essentially
a continuous substance or energy, poetry is historically
a connected movement, a series of successive integral
manifestations. Each poet, from Homer to our own
day, has been to some extent and at some point, the
voice of the movement and energy of poetry ; in him
poetry has for the moment become visible, audible,
incarnate, and his extant poems are the record left of
that partial and transitory incarnation. . . . The
progress of poetry . . . is immortal." ^
No one who was not resolved to waste his time
would for long try to interpret these remarks in the
same way as he would, let us say, an account of the
circulation of the blood. And yet it would be a mistake
to regard them as not worth attention. It is clear that
they require a different mode of approach. Whether
their authors were aware of the fact or not, the use of
words of which these are examples is totally distinct
from the scientific use. The point would be made still
more plain, if sentences from poetry were used for the
experiment. What is certain is that there is a common
and important use of words which is different from the
1 Oxford Lectures on Poetry, p. 27.
2 Lectures on Poetry ^ pp. xi., xiii.
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 149
scientific or, as we shall call it, the strict symbolic use
of words.
In ordinary everyday speech each phrase has not
one but a number of functions. We shall in our final
chapter classify these under five headings ; but here a
twofold division is more convenient, the division
between the symbolic use of words and the emotive use.
The symbolic use of words is statement ; the recording,
the support, the organization and the communication of
references. The emotive use of words is a more simple
matter, it is the use of words to express or excite feel-
ings and attitudes. It is probably more primitive. If
we say *' The height of the Eiffel Tower is 900 feet" we
are making a statement, we are using symbols in order
to record or communicate a reference, and our symbol
is true or false in a strict sense and is theoretically
verifiable. But if we say *^ Hurrah!" or *^ Poetry is
a spirit" or *' Man is a worm," we may not be making
statements, not even false statements ; we are most
probably using words merely to evoke certain attitudes.
Each of these contrasted functions has, it will be
seen, two sides, that of the speaker and that of the
listener. Under the symbolic function are included
both the symbolization of reference and its communica-
tion to the listener, i,e,^ the causing in the listener of
a similar reference. Under the emotive function are
included both the expression of emotions, attitudes,
moods, intentions, etc., in the speaker, and their com-
munication, i,e.^ their evocation in the listener. As
there is no convenient verb to cover both expression
and evocation, we shall in what follows often use the
term * evoke ' to cover both sides of the emotive function,
there being no risk of misunderstanding. In many
cases, moreover, emotive language is used by the
speaker not because he already has an emotion which
he desires to express, but solely because he is seeking
a word which will evoke an emotion which he desires
to have ; nor, of course, is it necessary for the speaker
150 THE MEANING OF MEANING
himself to experience the emotion which he attempts
to evoke.
It is true that some element of reference probably
enters, for all civilized adults^ at least, into almost all
use of words, and it is always possible to import a
reference, if it be only a reference to things in general.
The two functions under consideration usually occur
together but none the less they are in principle distinct.
So far as words are used emotively no question as to
their truth in the strict sense can directly arise. In-
directly, no doubt, truth in this strict sense is often
involved. Very much poetry consist of statements,
symbolic arrangements capable of truth or falsity,
which are used not for the sake of their truth or falsity
but for the sake of the attitudes which their acceptance
will evoke. For this purpose it fortunately happens,
or rather it is part of the poet's business to make it
happen, that the truth or falsity matters not at all to
the acceptance. Provided that the attitude or feeling
is evoked the most important function of such language
is fulfilled, and any symbolic function that the words
may have is instrumental only and subsidiary to the
evocative function.
This subtle interweaving of the two functions is
the main reason why recognition of their difference is
not universal. The best test of whether our use of
words is essentially symbolic or emotive is the
question — ** Is this true or false in the ordinary strict
scientific sense?" If this question is relevant then
the use is symbolic, if it is clearly irrelevant then we
have an emotive utterance.
But in applying this test we must beware of two
1 It is desirable to make the reservation, if only for educational
purposes, for according to some authorities " ninety-nine per cent,
of the words used in talking to a little child have no meaning for him,
except that, as the expression of attention to him, they please him."
Moreover, before the age of six or seven children " cannot hold a meaning
before their minds without experiencing it in perceptual symbols,
whether words or otherwise. . . . Hence the natural desire of the child
to talk or be talked to, if he is asked even for a few minutes to sit
still." — (W. E. Urwick, The Child's Mind, pp. 95. 102.)
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 151
dangers. There is a certain type of mind which
although it uses evocative language itself cannot on
reflection admit such a thing, and will regard the
question as relevant upon all occasions. For a larger
body of readers than is generally supposed poetry is
unreadable for this reason. The other danger is more
important. Corresponding in some degree to the strict
sense of true and false for symbolic statements (True^),
there are senses which apply to emotive utterances
(True^). Critics often use True^ of works of art, where
alternative symbols would be * convincing * in some
cases, * sincere ' in others, ^ beautiful ' in others, and so
on. And this is commonly done without any awareness
that True® and True^ are different symbols. Further
there is a purely evocative use of True — its use to
excite attitudes of acceptance or admiration ; and a
purely evocative use of False — to excite attitudes of
distrust or disapprobation. When so used these
words, since they are evocative, cannot, except by
accident, be replaced by others ; a fact which explains
the common reluctance to relinquish their employment
even when the inconvenience of having symbols so
alike superficially as True^ and True® in use together
is fully recognized. In general that affection for a
word even when it is admitted to be ambiguous,
which is such a common feature of discussion, is very
often due to its emotive efficiency rather than to any
real difficulty in finding alternative symbols which will
support the same reference. It is, however, not always
the sole reason, as we shall see when we come in our
final chapter to consider the condition of word-
dependence.
This disparity of function between words as
supports or vehicles of reference and words as expres-
sions or stimulants of attitudes has, in recent years,
begun to receive some attention, for the most part from
a purely grammatical standpoint. That neglect of
the effects of our linguistic procedure upon all our
152 THE MEANING OF MEANING
other activities which is so characteristic of linguists
has, however, deprived such studies as have been made
of most of their value. G. von der Gabelentz for
instance, though he declares that ^' Language serves a
man not only to express something but also to express
himself," seems in no way to have considered what
extreme consequence this intermingling of functions
has for the theory as well as for the form of language.
And to take the most recent work upon the subject,
Vendryes, in his chapter upon Affective Language,
keeps equally strictly to the grammarian's standpoint.
**The logical element and the affective element," he
says, ** mingle constantly in language. Except for
technical languages, notably the scientific languages,
which are by definition outside life, the expression of
an idea is never exempt from a nuance of sentiment."
** These sentiments have no interest for the linguist
unless they are expressed by linguistic means. But
they generally remain outside language ; they are like
a light vapour which floats above the expression of the
thought without altering its grammatical form," etc.
The two chief ways in which the affective side of
language concerns the linguist he finds, first in its
effect upon the order of words and secondly as deter-
mining the vocabulary. Many words are dropped or
retained, for affective reasons. **It is by the action of
affectivity that the instability of grammars is to a great
extent to be explained. The logical ideal for a
grammar would be to have an expression for each
function and only one function for each expression.
This ideal supposes for its realization that the language
is fixed like an algebra, where a formula once estab-
lished remains without change in all the operations
in which it is used. But phrases are not algebraic
formulas. Affectivity always envelops and colours the
logical expression of the thought. We never repeat
the same phrase twice ; we never use the same word
twice with the same value ; there are never two abso-
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 153
lutely identical linguistic facts. This is due to the
circumstances which ceaselessly modify the conditions
of our affectivity. " ^
It is perhaps unfair to ask from grammarians some
consideration of the wider aspects of language. They
have their own difficult and laborious subject to occupy
aH their attention. Yet from a book the promise of
which was the cause of the abandonment by Couturat
of his projected ^* Manual of the logic of languag'e "
a more searching inquiry might be expected. It still
remains true that linguists, of whom M. Vendryes is
• one of the most distinguished, abound, but investigators
into the theory of language are curiously lacking.^
From the philosophical side also, the speculative
approach to this duality of the symbolic and evocative
functions has been made recently under various dis-
guises. All such terms as Intuition, Intellect, Emotion,
Freedom, Logic, Immediacy, are already famous for
their power to confuse and frustrate discussion.
In general, any term or phrase, *elan vital,* * purely
logical analysis* ... which is capable of being
used either as a banner ^ or as a bludgeon, or as
both, needs, if it is to be handled without disaster, a
constant and conscious understanding of these, two
functions of language. It is useless to try to sterilize
our instruments without studying the habits of the
bacteria. Not even mathematics is free as a whole
from emotive complications ; parts of it seem to be,
but the ease with which mathematicians turn into
mystics (**Even were there no things at all, there
would still be the property of being divisible by 107 '*)
1 L& Langage (1922), pp. 163, 165, 182. E. T., Language (1924),
Part II., Chd,pter IV.
2 An exception might be made of Professor Delacroix, who in his
{op, cit.) Le Langage et la Pensie (1924) devotes considerable space to
the subject, but treats the emotive function in a purely academic
spirit without more regard for its far-reaching effects upon discussion
than the Logical Positivists (cf. Camap, The Logical Syntax of
Language, 1937).
^ Ci. Nietzsche's dictum : " Words relating to vames are merely
banners planted on those spots where a new blessedness was discovered
— a new feeling."
154 THE MEANING OF MEANING
when they consider its foundations, shows what the
true situation is.
One of the best known of these disguised discussions
of the emotive function of language centres about the
teaching of Bergson on the nature of knowledge. To
quote from a recent exposition: *^The business of
philosophy, according to Bergson, is not to explain
reality, but to know it. For this a different kind of
mental effort is required. Analysis and classification,
instead of increasing our direct knowledge, tend rather
to diminish it.'*^ As Bergson himself says: **From
the infinitely vast field of our virtual knowledge we
have selected, to turn into actual knowledge, whatever
concerns our action upon things ; the rest we have
neglected."^ And as his expositor continues: ^^ The
attitude of mind required for explaining the facts
conflicts with that which is required for knowing them.
From the point of view simply of knowing, the facts
are all equally important and we cannot afford to
discriminate, but for explanation some facts are very
much more important than others. When we want to
explain, therefore, rather than simply to know, we tend
to concentrate our attention upon these practically
important facts and pass over the rest." ®
The processes of explanation as described" by
Bergson bear a close resemblance to what we have
called reference when this is supported by symbolism.
Owing to his peculiar view of memory, however, he is
unable to make the use of mnemic phenomena which,
as we have seen, is essential if mysticism, even as
regards this kind of ^ knowledge ' is to be avoided.
The other kind of knowledge, * virtual knowledge,*
the knowledge which is * creative duration,' the only
kind of knowledge of * really real reality ' Bergsonians
will allow, is, as he presents it, unavoidably mystical.
^ K. Stephen, The Misuse of Mind, p. 19.
2 Bergson, La Perception du Changement, p. 12.
3 K. Stephen, op. cit., p. 22.
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 155
Not only because any description of it must involve
the expositor in self-contradiction — as we have seen
any repudiation of orthodox symbolic machinery has
this consequence^ — but also because it requires an
initial act of faith in the existence of a vast world of
* virtual knowledge ' which is actually unknown. None
the less, those who have no such faith, and merely
follow the advice of Bergsonians to neglect the actual
terms in the descriptions given and to perform instead
an *act of synthesis,' can easily become persuaded that
they understand what * virtual knowledge ' is, and even
that they can possess it.
We have above (p. 81) insisted that knowledge in
the sense of reference is a highly indirect affair, and
hinted that though we often feel an objection to admit-
ting that our mental contact with the world is neither
close nor full, but on the contrary distant and schematic,
our reluctance might be diminished by a consideration
of our non-cognitive contacts. These, too, are for the
most part indirect, but they are capable of much greater
fullness. The more clear and discriminating reference
becomes, the slighter, relatively to similar but cruder
reference, is our link with what we are referring to —
the more specialized and exquisite the context involved.
With all that Bergson has to say about the tendency
for precise, discriminating, analytic attention to whittle
down our connection with what we are attending to, we
can agree. Bergson, moreover, has well emphasized
the part played by language in reinforcing and ex-
aggerating this tendency. Thinking casually of conies,
the context involved may be of immense complexity,
since a large part of our past experience with these
animals is operative. Thinking discriminatingly of
the same objects as * small deer,' our context becomes
specialized, and only those features of conies need be
involved which they share with their co-members of the
^ Mrs Stephen writes with great lucidity upon this question. Cf.
especially pp. 57-61.
156 THE MEANING OF MEANING
class in question. The others need not be lost, but we
can agree that there is a strong tendency for them to
disappear, and in any really difficult feats of discrimina-
tion they will certainly be best omitted.
At. the extreme of consciousness most removed from
analytic and abstract attention we have not one but a
variety of possible states, according to the kind and
extent of the contexts, to which the experience in
question belongs. The state may be comparatively
simple, as when we are engaged in some ordinary
perceptual activity, such as throwing dice ; or it may
be predominantly emotional ; or leaping for our lives
from the onrush of motor cyclists we may again
experience simple throbs of pure unsophisticated ex-
perience. But certain of these concrete, immediate,
unintellectualized phases of life have in their own
right a complexity and richness which no intellectual
activities can equal. Amongst these aesthetic experi-
ences figure prominently. Many to whom Bergson's
recommendation of immediacy, and his insistence upon
the treasures awaiting those who regain it, make their
appeal will admit that this is because he seems to them
to be describing what happens when they are most
successful in artistic contemplation. We cannot enter
here into the details of what, from the standpoint of
more or less conventional psychology, may be supposed
to happen in these states of synaesthesis.^ What,
however, from this standpoint is indisputable is that
the more important of them derive their value from
the peculiar fashion in which impulses formed by and
representing the past experience of the contemplator
are set working.
Thus in a quite precise sense, though one which
can only be somewhat elaborately formulated, the states
of aesthetic contemplation owe their fullness and rich-
ness to the action of memory; not memory narrowed
^ Those who desire to pursue the matter may be referred to The
Foundations of Esthetics, cited above.
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 157
down and specialized as is required in reference, but
memory operating in a freer fashion to widen and
amplify sensitiveness. In such conditions we are open
to a more diffused and more heterogeneous stimulation,
because the inhibitions which normally canalize our
responses are removed.
Partly because of certain of the felt characters of
the states we have been describing, a sense of repose
and satisfaction not unlike the repose which follows
a successful intellectual effort, though due to quite
different causes — partly for other reasons, it is not
surprising that these states should have been often
described as states of knowledge. The temptation to
a philosopher when concerned with a subject in which
he feels a passionate interest, to use all the words which
are most likely to attract attention and excite belief in
the importance of the subject is almost irresistible.
Thus, any state of mind in which anyone takes a great
interest is very likely to be called * knowledge,* because
no other word in psychology has such evocative virtue.
If this state of mind is very unlike those usually so
called, the new "knowledge" will be set in opposition to
the old and praised as of a superior, more real, and more
essential nature. These periodic raids upon aesthetics
have been common in the history of philosophy. The
crowning instance of Kant, and the attempted annexa-
tion of aesthetics by Idealism are recent examples.
The suggestion is reasonable, therefore, that when
the pseudo-problems due to cross vocabularies are
removed and the illusory promise of a new heaven
and a new earth, which Bergsonians somewhat weakly
hold out, has been dismissed, the point at issue in the
intuitionist-intellectualist controversy will be found to
be removable by an understanding of the dual function,
symbolic as well as emotive, of the word * knowledge.*
To deny that * virtual knowledge ' is in the symbolic
sense knowledge is in no way derogatory to the state
(according to the view here maintained, a state, or set
158 THE MEANING OF MEANING
of states, of specially free response to stimulation)
called by that name. It is merely to apply a rule which
all those who are aware of the functions of language
will support, namely, that in discussion, where
symbolic considerations are supposed to be prior to all
others, the evocative advantages of terms are only to
be exploited when it is certain that symbolically no
disadvantage can result.
But a more general consciousness of the nature of
the two functions is necessary if they are to be kept
from interfering with one another ; and especially all
the verbal disguises, by which each at times endeavours
to pass itself off as the other, need to be exposed. It
ought to be impossible to pretend that any scientific
statement can give a more inspiring or a more profound
* vision of reality ' than another. It can be more
general or more useful, and that is all. On the other
hand it ought to be impossible to talk about poetry
or religion as though they were capable of giving
* knowledge,* especially since * knowledge * as a term
has been so overworked from both sides that it is
no longer of much service. A poem — or a religion,
though religions have so definitely exploited the con-
fusion of function which we are now considering, and
are so dependent upon it, as to be unmistakably patho-
logical growths— has no concern with limited and
directed reference. It tells us, or should tell us, nothing.
It has a different, though an equally important and a
far more vital function — to use an evocative term in
connection with an evocative matter. What it does,
or should do, is to induce a fitting * attitude to experi-
^ Instead of ' fitting * we might have said ' valuable.' But since
the value of an attitude depends in part upon the other attitudes
which are possible and in part upon the degree to which it leaves open
the possibility of other attitudes for other circumstances, we use the
term ' fitting ' ; not. however, to imply any narrow code of the proper
attitudes to be adopted upon all occasions. The term ' attitude '
should throughout this discussion be understood in a wide sense, as
covering all the ways in which impulses may be set ready for action ;
including those peculiar settings froni which no overt action results,
often spoken of as the ' aesthetic moods ' or ' aesthetic emotions.'
THE MEANING OF BEAUTY 159
ence. But such words as 'fitting,* * suitable' or
* appropriate ' are chilly, having little or no evocative
power. Therefore those who care most for poetry and
who best understand its central and crucial value, tend
to resent such language as unworthy of its subject.
From the evocative standpoint they are justified. But
once the proper separation of these functions is made
it will be plain that the purpose for which such terms
are used, namely to give a strictly symbolic description
of the function of poetry, for many reasons^ the
supreme form of emotive language, cannot conflict
with the poetic or evocative appraisal of poetry, with
which poets as poets are concerned.
Further, the exercise of one function need not, if
the functions are not confused^ in any way interfere with
the exercise of the other. The sight of persons irritated
with science because they care for poetry {** Whatever
the sun may be, it is certainly not a ball of flaming gas,"
cries D. H. Lawrence), or of scientists totally immune
from the influences of civilization, becomes still more
regrettable when we realize how unnecessary it is.
As science frees itself from the emotional outlook, and
modern physics is becoming something in connection
with which attitudes seem rather de trop^ so poetry
seems about to return to the conditions of its greatness,
by abandoning the obsesiSion of knowledge and sym-
bolic truth. It is not necessary to know what things
are in order to take up fitting attitudes towards them,
and the peculiarity of the greatest attitudes which art
can evoke is their extraordinary width. The descrip-
tion and ordering of such attitudes is the business of
aesthetics. The evaluation of them, needless to say,
must rest ultimately upon the opinions of those best
qualified to be judges by the range and delicacy of
their experience and their freedom from irrelevant
preoccupations.
^ Cf. Chapter X., pp. 239-240 injra ; also Principles of Literary Critic
cism, Chapters XXIII.-XXXV.
CHAPTER VIII
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS
What do you read, my lord ? — Polonius.
Words, words, words. — Hamlet.
" O wondrous power of words, by simple faith
Licensed to take the meaning that we love."
Thus the poet ; and observation does not invalidate
the perspicacious remark. It might, however, have
been supposed that logicians and psychologists would
have devoted special attention to meaning, since it is
so vital for all the issues with which they are concerned.
But that this is not the case will be evident^ to anyone
who studies the Symposium in Mind (October 1920 and
following numbers) on *^The Meaning of ^Meaning.'**
It is perhaps unnecessary to point out that such
brief extracts from lengthy philosophical disquisitions
as the limits of this chapter allow, cannot fairly represent
any given author's views upon that, whatever it may
be, if anything, for which he uses the word * meaning.'
Some quotations, however, do tell their own tale ; but
even where no actual absurdity transpires, the resort
^ The following passage in Nuces Philosophies, by one Edward
Johnson, published in 1842, is worth recalling :
" A. I confess I am surprised that all this time you have never
yet once asked me what I mean by the word meaning.
" B. What then do you mean by the word meaning ?
" C. Be patient. You can only learn the meaning of the word
meaning from the consideration of the nature of ideas,
and their connection with things."
Half a century later. Lady Welby quoted from this author in Mind
(1896), and complained that " Sense in the meaning sense has never
yet been taken as a centre to work out from : attention, perception,
memory, judgment, etc., have never been cross-examined from the
direction of their common relation to a ' meaning.' " And after the
lapse of a further twenty-five years we find Mr Russell admitting
(" On Propositions : What they are and how they mean." Proc.
Arist. Soc. 1919) with the approval of Dr Schiller in the symposium
" that logicians have done very little towards explaining the relation
called ' meaning.' "
160
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS i6i
to such a term in serious argument, as though it had
some accepted use, or as though the author's use were
at once obvious, is a practice to be discredited.
Dr Schiller began by announcing that the Greek
language is '*so defective that it can hardly be said
to have a vocabulary for the notion " of meaning at all ;
and in proceeding to state his own view that '* meaning
is essentially personal .... what anything means
depends on who means it,'' he found it necessary to
traverse Mr Russell's dictum that *^ the problem of the
meaning of words is reduced to the problem of the
MEANING of images." Mr Russell replied by en-
deavouring *^to give more precision to the definition
of MEANING by introducing the notion of ' mnemic
causation ' " and succeeded thereby in evolving an
instructive description of metaphysics. *^ A word," he
explained, *' which aims at complete generality, such
as 'entity,' for example, will have to be devoid of
mnemic effects, and therefore of meaning. In practice,
this is not the case : such words have verbal associa-
tions, the learning of which constitutes the study of
metaphysics." Mr Joachim, who elected to stand aside
from the discussion, professed to find Mr Russell
*' asserting that nobody can possibly thuik,'" and con-
fined himself to an analysis of the function of images,
drawing attention in a foot-note to the fact that for
Mr Russell meaning appeared (amongst other things)
as 'a relation,' that ''a relation * constitutes ' meaning,
and that a word not only *has' meaning, but is related
' to its meaning.' "
This whole episode was characterized by Dr Schiller
six months later (April, 192 1, p. 185) as presenting '' the
usual features of a philosophic discussion. That is to
say, it reads like a triangular duel, in which each
participant aims at something different, and according
to the other misses it, and hits a phantom." In dealing
with details he quotes Mr Russell's remark that ''all
the words in which Dr Schiller endeavours to describe
i62 THE MEANING OF MEANING
his unobservable entities imply that after all he can
observe them," as a typical case of **the overriding of
actual MEANING by verbal, which could hardly be
surpassed from the writings of Mr Bradley."
In July Mr Alfred Sidgwick explained (p. 285) that
** MEANING depends on consequences, and truth depends
on MEANING ; " and Professor Strong intervened (p. 313)
as a ^ critical realist ' to meet Dr Schiller's objections
to Mr Russell and to render the latter's theory intelli-
gible to Mr Joachim. He illustrated his rendering by
imagining an explosion. When we hear what we call
an explosion, ** the sound has not so much acquired,
as become converted into a meaning. . . . What is
non-concrete and non-sensuous is always a meaning,
a sense of that unfathomed beyond which we cannot
contemplate but only intend. . . . To mean something
is to conceive or rather treat it as not wholly revealed
to the mind at the moment."
To this Dr Schiller rejoins that Dr Strong always
confines his attention to the case ^* in which an ^ object'
is said to ^ mean so-and-so.'" This, he thinks, "im-
poses on him the duties of deriving the personal mean-
ing, and of explaining the relativity of ^ the ' meaning
of an object to various cognitive purposes and personal
meanings" (p. 445). He concludes (p. 447) that "the
existence of personal meaning remains a pitfall in the
path of all intellectualism." The controversy is pre-
sumably still in progress.
Contemporaneously with the Symposium on Meaning
which appeared in Mind^ an inquiry into the nature of
Aphasia was appearing in Brain ^ and during the dis-
cussion of Dr Head's views the question of meaning
came to the front. A special memorandum suggested
by the treatment of * semantic aphasia,' was handed in
by Dr J. Herbert Parsons,^ and it throws interesting
1 1920. Vol. XLIIL, Parts II. and IV.
2 " The Psychology of ' Meaning ' in its Relation to Aphasia."
Ihid., p. 441.
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 163
light on the degree of assistance which neurologists
can be expected to derive from the work of philosophers
in this field. According to Dr Parsons, at the lowest
biological level **it would be unwise to deny the
presence of a plus or minus affective tone — and this is
the primitive germ of * meaning.' " At the perceptual
level, however, **the relatively undifferentiated psycho-
plasm is differentiated into specialized affective and
cognitive elements, which are reintegrated, thus under-
going a synthesis which is the * meaning ' of the given
experience. Perceptual * meaning ' suffused with affec-
tive tone, issues in instinctive conative activity." Thus
at the end of the completed reaction ^*the * meaning '
has become enriched and complicated. . . . This altered
* meaning ' is stored up, and, though depressed below
the threshold of consciousness, is capable of being
revived. . . . The integration and synthesis of the
already more plastic psychoplasm results in a higher,
more complex type of * meaning/ " Later the influence
of social environment makes itself felt, and in the com-
plicated process of social intercourse ^*the ultimate
results are equivalent to an interaction of old and new
* meanings,' resulting in an infinity of still newer, richer
and more refined * meanings.'" At this stage *^the
creative activities assume a synergy at a higher level,"
and ^*show a projicience hitherto absent." The child's
** gestures are no longer merely passive signs of his
mind's activities, but active indications of his feelings
and desires. This is the dawn of language."
A detailed analysis of the Mind Symposium might
have been instructive as a preliminary to the framing
of a set of definitions, but its technique was unusually
disappointing,^ and since in any case the metaphysical
arena of the Old World inevitably suggests to many
an atmosphere of barren logomachy, we may more
1 Owing largely to the temperamental incompatibility of the sym-
posiasts. Mr Russell, moreover, has now superseded his contribution
by the relevant chapters of his Analysis of Mind, to which reference
has already been made (p. 54).
i64 THE MEANING OF MEANING
profitably deal with the confusions which arise as
occasion allows and cite here the procedure of the
latest co-operative product of the New. The Essays in
Critical Realism^ which made their appearance in 1920,
are the work of seven American Professors who have
revised and redrafted their language until it met the
approval of all the other essayists. They are the fruits
of a decade of controversy in a limited controversial
field, where ^* our familiarity with one another's mean-
ing has enabled us to understand methods of expression
from which at first we were inclined to dissent." The
main issues of the controversy had already been elabor-
ated, as the result of conferences begun in 1908-9, in a
similar co-operative volume by six Neo-realists. The
final outcome may be regarded as the clarification of
the life's work of a dozen specialists, all of whom have
been continuously improving their mutual terminology
in the full view of the public for over a decade.
With the earlier volume we need not here concern
ourselves except to note that in the Introduction, where
a scrupulous use of words and the importance of clear
definitions are insisted on, there occur the following
remarks : —
" In exact discourse the meaning of every term must be
reviewed."
" If we cannot express our meaning in exact terms, let us at
least cultivate literature."
" Idealism has meant nothing to the actual psychologist."
— while in the final essay we find Professor Pitkin
objecting at a crucial point that Alexander and Nunn
** treat only the stuff of hallucinatory objects as real,
leaving the erroneous meanings more or less products
of a construing mind."
Since that date, 191 2, the word * meaning ' has not
ceased to play a decisive part in every dispute, and as
the Critical Realists have had such ample opportunity
of avoiding any ambiguities into which the Neo-
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 165
Realists may have fallen, we may, as far as Realism is
concerned, confine ourselves to their efforts.
First comes Professor Drake, of Vassar : —
"The very meaning of ' existence ' involves a definite locus "
(p. 16).
"The very meaning of the term 'relation' includes refer-
ence to something related " (p. 19).
These two statements are used to lead up to the view
that perceptual data ** cannot be the same existents as
their causes,'* and that we **get back somewhere to
qualities."
It would be a large undertaking, continues Professor
Lovejoy, to ** analyse the meanings" of the formula-
tions of Pragmatism, which ** began as a theory con-
cerning the conditions under which concepts and
propositions may be said to possess meaning, and
concerning the nature of that in which all meanings
must consist." The pragmatist, he holds, ignores the
patent fact that ** many pf our meanings are retro-
spective. . . . No logical hocus-pocus can transub-
stantiate the MEANING * yesterday' into the meaning
* to-morrow* .... It is, in very truth, a meaning
intrinsically incapable of directly-experienced fulfil-
ment. . . . Without ever actually experiencing the
fulfilment of these meanings, we nevertheless have an
irresistible propensity to believe that some of them are
in fact valid meanings. ... A judgment is its own
master in deciding what it means, though not in
deciding as to the fulfilment of its meanings."
According to Professor Pratt, the Neo-Realists
'* performed a most fruitful piece of analysis in insist-
ing that the data presented to our thought consist of
meanings or natures," but they did not distinguish
** between these meanings and the sensational part of
our mental states on the one hand and the existential
physical objects to which the meanings are attributed
on the other." A number of people might describe
their conception of anything differently though all
i66 THE MEANING OF MEANING
** MEANT, or thought of, the same thing." He pro-
ceeds to distinguish (p. 90) between the meaning which
one entertains in conception **and images which are
the ' vehicle ' of our meaning. This meaning is that
which we find directly given to our thought," and he
holds **this meaning or datum is often capable of
exact definition, i,e,^ it has, or rather is^ a definable
nature." Perception, equally with conception, ** con-
tains not merely sensuous and revived images but a
large element of meaning as well." Usually, '* All the
j^«j^^ qualities are included within those meant,'' As
regards outer reference (p. 92) *^this may be regarded
as part of the datum or meaning of perception, but it
is an easily distinguishable part." Thanks to past
reactions, the quality-group ** of which one is aware,
directly means more than it is. As a result of all
one's past experience it has come to stand for an
active entity." This quality-group ^' means, or im-
mediately implies to the individual the presence and,
to a considerable extent, the nature of some active
entity of which it is well for him to be aware. It is
in short the means of his perceiving the object,''' In con-
clusion he maintains that though Critical Realists
"do not pretend to an exhaustive knowledge of the
inner nature of physical entities, we have defined them
sufficiently to know what we mean by them, and to
make that meaning perfectly plain to every one but
the perversely blind."
Professor Rogers of Yale, who deals with Error,
complains that Bosanquet failed to understand the
question of ** degrees of truth " because of his "annoy-
ing refusal to keep sharply separate the varying mean-
ings of terms. It is not a question whether the same
form of words means the same thing to different people.
It is a question whether any given meaning singly,
whatever it may be, is successful in corresponding to
the fact" (p. 123). Of Mr Joachim's account of things
in terms of systems, he remarks that "If we insist on
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 167
defining the meaning of a fact in terms of its place in
a system, naturally it will cease to have that meaning
outside the system *' (p. 125).
As regards identity ** we naturally make a clear
distinction between the characters of things as em-
bodied in MEANINGS which we attribute to them, and
the real existence of these characters in the things
themselves. . . . The * identity of indiscernibles ' ap-
plies to abstract logical meanings, not to existents.
Meanings we may call the same — provided we can
detect no difference in them — just because their * char-
acter ' is all there is to them ; but things are not
necessarily the same when they are alike" (p. 131).
Professor Holt's analysis is, he thinks, an ^^approxim-
ately correct account of what the critical realist intends
to refer to under the head of essences, or human mean-
ings. But for him the problem of knowledge consists,
not merely in the presence of these meanings or data,
but in their reference to the actual object" (p. 133).
Professor Perry's difficulties as regards error vanish
if we grant the distinction *^ between the something
as an existent about which I have a belief, and the some-
thing (as an intellectual content or meaning or essence)
which I believe about it." When in error, we have a
** MEANING before the mind," and wrongly suppose that
it characterizes a real object.
Dr Santayana urges that though without our Animal
bodies ** appearance would lose its seat and its focus,
and without an external object would lose its signifi-
cance," we can yet take appearance absolutely and
*^ inhibit all reaction and understanding"; but since
even the passive and immediate data of appearance,
**its bare signals and language when stupidly gazed
at" have aesthetic reality, *^the special and insidious
kind of reality opposed to appearance must mean an
underlying reality, a substance: and it had better be
called by that name." And he introduces to us
Essences = U niversals = I ntuited aesthetic data — * * sym-
i68 THE MEANING OF MEANING
bols of sense or thought*' (p. 165), which may be
identical with the essences embodied in the substance
though **the intention and the embodiment remain
different in existence, origin, date, place, substance,
function and duration."
That the individual's field of experience '*has a
certain structure, and is shot through with meanings
and affirmations," seems to Professor Sellars of Michi-
gan *'a matter of undeniable fact." The chief error
of much contemporary thought is the refusal to recog-
nize **that thinghood and perception go together" ; in
other words, in the percipient, **we have the content
of perception, and over against it in a qualifying way,
the motor complex of adjustment combined with the
realistic meanings and expectations which are char-
acteristic of perception." What is needed is, he holds,
**a patient and persistent analysis which is able to go
forward step by step while doing justice to the structure
and MEANINGS of the individual's experience" (p. 197).
And as regards knowledge of the past, **we can mean
a reality which no longer exists equally with a reality
which exists at the time of the intention " (p. 215).
Professor Sellars makes the following distinction :
" Knowledge of other concurrences is different from know-
ledge of the physical world. It is a knowledge through asserted
identity of content, whereas knowledge of the physical world
is information about data. Thus when I interpret an expression
on the face of my friend as meaning amusement I use the ex-
pression as a symbol of an experience which I regard as in its
essentials the same for him as for me " (p. 217).
Finally Professor Strong who examines the nature
of the Matum,' which he replaces by Santayana's
* essence ' (which, as we have seen, is regarded by
Critical Realism as also equivalent to * meaning'), con-
cludes that data are in their nature "not existences
but universals, the bare natures of the objects, in such
wise that the essence embodied and the essence given
may be the same."
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 169
** What is given to us in sense-perception," we learn
(p. 235), **is the sensation as a meaning, or to speak
more correctly what is given is the meaning and not
the sensation .... That this significance, or meaning,
or essence is not an existence and not in time and space,
but, like the meaning when we think of a universal,
a purely logical entity, is quite credible"; moreover,
the datum ** is not properly a sensible fact. We cannot
actually find it as a feeling, we can only tend towards
it or mean it. . . . A meaning here is not to be
understood as a peculiar kind of feeling, but as a
function which the feeling discharges " (p. 237).
We need not here attempt to correlate these different
uses of the term in what claims to be the last achieve-
ment of co-ordinated symbolization. As might have
been expected this statement with its challenge to Neo-
Realists, Pragmatists, and Idealists aroused abundant
controversy, but the one inevitable source of mis-
understanding and disagreement, the omnipresence of
the term Meaning, was allowed to pass unchallenged.
It seems to have been accepted without question into
the vocabulary of American philosophy, for use on all
occasions of uncertainty,^ though to the English reader
it still happily sounds strange in most of its typical
contexts.
But lest the uninitiated should suppose that Meta-
physicians and Critical Realists are peculiar in their
method, we may turn to the use made of the word by a
psychologist. For over twenty years the writings of
Professor Hugo Miinsterberg exercised a powerful in-
fluence on thought in England and in Germany, no less
than in America. His Eternal Values (1909) appeared
first in German and then in an improved and revised
form in English. It claims to be carefully and system-
1 The treatment of the term ' meaning ' by Professor Sellars in his
independent volumes, Critical Realism (1916) and Evolutionary
Naturalism (192 1), is exemplified by the following dictum in the former
(p. 282) : " As a MEANING, knowledge precedes truth, which is a re-
flective deepening of the sense of knowledge in the light of an awakened
doubt."
170 THE MEANING OF MEANING
atically written, a protest against the impressionistic
American style of philosophizing, much of which **has
become antagonistic to the real character of philosophy."
Already in his Preface he assures us that sincere con-
viction gave the real aim and meaning to his work.
On his first page his way of admitting that tastes may
differ is to say that **the beauties of one school may
MEAN ugliness to another " ; on his second the words
**To profess idealism never means to prove it right"
indicate that asseveration and proof are not the same ;
on his third he informs us that **the world longs for a
new expression of the meaning of life and reality."
On page 4 we read that for the sciences to urge criticism
of their foundations ^* means that they ask about the real
value of truth" ; that in practical affairs **the meaning
of life is in danger" ; that we need **a new philosophy
which may give meaning to life and reality." Page 5 —
"The MEANING of what is valuable must decide our view of
the world."
"Philosophy needs to understand what the fundamental
MEANING of any valuation is."
"The philosopher keeps for his own inquiry what the real
MEANING of special facts may be, and what it means to have
knowledge of the world at all."
Part I is entitled *The Meaning of Values* and on
the six pages 74-79 which reveal **the deciding fact"
the term * meaning' appears no less than sixteen times.
The deciding fact is that we demand that things recur.
** We demand that there be a world ; that means that
our experience be more than just passing experience.
Here is the original deed which gives eternal meaning
to our reality " ( p. 75 ). The world becomes a world
by its identical recurrence, and this identity means
fulfilment, means satisfaction, means value" (p. 79).
In passing it may be noted that identity does not
exclude change, for it is postulated that whatever
changes **must still present an identity in its changes
by showing that the change belongs to its own
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 171
MEANING." Indeed **our question as to the validity
of pure values can have no other meaning except in
reference to this true world," the world **of our experi-
ences in so far as they assert themselves;" and *Mt
would be MEANINGLESS to deny the question.
To complete the argument with this accommodating
linguistic material, it would seem that since its identical
recurrence presumably is the * meaning* of anything,
and since the * meaning ' of anything is presumably its
value, the statement above that *' identical recurrence
means value " might equally well have appeared in the
form MEANING MEANS MEANING.
So stated it may lose in force what it gains in
clarity, but so stated it suggests that we may pass
rapidly to the final chapter in which the celebrated
psychologist sums up his ultimate theory of value,
merely noting from the intervening pages such dicta as
the following : —
"The will of Napoleon, if we want to understand it in its
historical meaning, does not come to us as an object. The act
is completely grasped when it is understood in the meaning of
its attitude. If Napoleon's will is completely understood in its
MEANING, there remains nothing to be understood by other
inquiries " (p. 144),
which explains the meaning of History.
**The world in its over-personal meaning is absolutely
valuable by the fact that the glow of happiness illuminates
human souls " (p. 202),
which explains the meaning of Happiness.
"The real has its meaning in the expectation which it
awakens,"
which explains the meaning of Reality.
"The inner agreement of our desires finally gives to our life
its perfect meaning. . . . The tones to which our life gives
meaning express a will which asserts itself " (p. 253),
which explains the meaning both of Life and Music.
Finally then we proceed to the message of the final
chapter which deals with the values of Absoluteness.
In this chapter, covering forty-six pages, the word
172 THE MEANING OF MEANING
'meaning' occurs no less than fifty-eight times. As
the climax approaches (** We now stand before a new
ultimate value, the absolute of philosophy, the funda-
mentally absolute which bears all reality in itself," p. 39),
the key-word stands out in almost every sentence.
At page 400 **we can already take a wide outlook."
If our will towards identification is satisfied ** it cannot
have any possible meaning to ask further as to the
value of the world."
" Our whole experience now gains its unity, its rest, its final
MEANING. . . . The MEANING of the value enters into connection
with the over-experience of the over-self. . . . Here for the last
time we might separate outer-world, fellow-world, and inner-
world, and examine for each realm how it enlarges its meaning
in the relation to the over-reality. ... An inquiry into the
' stuff ' of the world can have a meaning only when there are
sufficient stuffs which can be discriminated. When everything is
equally will it cannot have any meaning to find out what this
will really is. . . . To reach a goal means that the will maintains
its object in a new form. . . . The meaning of the world is an
aiming towards a greater abundance of aiming whicli yet remains
identical with itself. ... In the deed itself the not-yet and the
no-longer are one. Their temporal, mutual relation gives unity
and meaning to the deed."
Ten pages later (p. 416) it is still going on : —
" Only when we view mankind in this metaphysical connection
do we recognize the ultimate meaning of its inexhaustible activity.
. . . When the meaning of the social work towards values be-
comes metaphysically deepened, at the same time the counter-will
which foolishly destroys values must be sliarpened in its contrast.
The world- will which gives meaning to reality is a principle
annulled by the conscious denial of values ; suddenly everything
has become meaningless. . . . Each of us is a member of man-
kind, and the meaning of our single self then lies in the part
which we take in tlie upbuilding of the values. . . . We will
indicate once more the purest meaning of our view of the world.
We have come to understand how the world and mankind and
the self are embedded in the deed of the over-self for eternity.
For eternity ! We have reached the highest point from which the
meaning of eternity unveils itself. ... In the deed therefore
past and future are one and that alone is the meaning of eternity.
. . . Every new stage realizes the ultimate meaning of the pre-
c<?clin,i; stages. But just that meant to us progress. . . . Deed
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 173
MEANS fulfilment and completion. . . . From here we understand
the task and the meaning of our individual selfhood. . . . Our
life has meaning and purpose. Banished is the anxiety that the
over-reality may be meaningless. ... It would be meaning-
less to hope for more from life than such a fulfilment of the
over-will. . . . The mere desire for pleasure cannot possibly be
the goal of our life if it is to maintain meaning and value at all.
... A mere skipping and a mere sudden transition from one
state to another would never have meaning. ... To unfold
his own will means for every one to help the up-building of the
same common world."
And so, on the next page (430), the last of the book,
we conclude with the assurance that ^*To progress in
the sense of the self-assertion of the will in will-
enhancement remains for mankind, too, the ultimate
MEANING of duty.'*
A study of these extracts in the German version of
Miiiisterberg's work is an interesting exercise in com-
parative linguistic, and the contribution of the term
* meaning' to the cogency of the argument is consider-
able. There may be those who find it hard to believe
that any writer responsible for such a verbal exploit
could also enjoy a reputation as a thinker of the first
rank. There is, however, another ambitious modern
attempt by an American theorist to deal specifically
with the fundamentals of psychology ; and in the
preface to this work ^ we find a reference to Munster-
berg's ** illuminating work on the great problems of
philosophy and of natural and mental science.^ . . .
It may be truthfully said that in his death America has
lost its one great theoretical psychologist." Professor
Moore has no occasion to quote largely from the par-
ticular work selected above, but his extracts (pp. loy-
iio) from Miinsterberg's Psychology General and Applied y
and Psychotherapy are equally bespattered with the term.
And as might be expected Professor Moore's own
treatment is also vitiated at its most crucial points by
his too hospitable attitude to this plausible nomad.
^ The Foundations of Psychology, by Jared Sparks Moore, 1921.
174 THE MEANING OF MEANING
To understand the nature of psychology as a science
we must, he holds, carefully distinguish Science from
Metaphysics, and '*the key-word of the problem of
metaphysics is Interpretation, To interpret anything is
to determine its meaning. If the fundamental pre-
supposition of all science is that every fact has a cause ;
the fundamental presupposition of metaphysics is that
every fact has a meaning" (p. 97). In other words, in
philosophy as opposed to science, '^each fact is treated
not as the effect of some antecedent cause, but as the
expression of a Meaning." Science must precede
metaphysics — ** We cannot know what facts mean until
we know what the facts are, we cannot interpret the
facts until we have described them."
But, objects the critic (p. 100), ''is it not true that
the very essence of a mental process is its meaning?"
No. Titchener has given six good reasons why mental
processes are '*not intrinsically meaningful" (p. loi).
But, the critic insists (p. 102), Do not all our experiences
*' in their inmost nature mean something. Do we ever
experience a 'meaningless' sensation?" We have
no reason, the reply runs, to believe that the mind
** began with meaningless sensations, and progressed
to MEANINGFUL perceptions. On the contrary we must
suppose that the mind was meaningful from the very
outset."
And here we pause at the very pertinent question :
** What then from the psychological point of view is
this meaning?" The answer is given without hesita-
tion and in italics — "From the psychological point of
view, MEANING is context y To explain : In every per-
ception, or group of sensations and images, "the
associated images form as it were a context or ' fringe'
which binds together the whole and gives it a definite
MEANING," and it is this "fringe of meaning that
makes the sensations not ' mere ' sensations but
symbols of a physical object." So when we see an
orange it is the contextual images of smell and taste
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 175
** which enable us to * recognize' the object — i,e,^ give
a MEANING to the sensations " of colour and brightness.
Similarly (p. 103) ** every idea has a core or nucleus of
images, and a fringe of associated images . . . which
give MEANING to the nuclear images."
To sum up :
**In all these cases, the meaning of the perception
or idea is * carried ' by the contextual images or sensa-
tions, and it is context which gives meaning to every
experience, and yet it would be inaccurate to say that
the MEANING of a sensation or symbolic image is
through and through nothing but its associated images
or sensations, for this would be a violation of the
principle that psychology is not concerned with
MEANINGS. All that is implied is that the meanings of
our experiences are represented in the realm of mental
processes by * the fringe of related processes . that
gathers about the central group of sensations or
images.* Psychologically meaning is context, but
logically and metaphysically meaning is much more
than psychological context ; or, to put it the other way
round, whatever meaning may be, psychology is
concerned with it only so far as it can be represented
in terms of contextual imagery " (p. 103).
It is a curious approach to. the problems of sign-
interpretation, this account of Meaning which (psycho-
logically) /^ context, which is carried by context, which
is much more than context^ which is expressed by facts^
with which psychology is not concerned — and yet is con-
cernedy so far as it can be represented by contextual
imagery. 1
1 In a letter printed by Mind (April 1924), but unfortunately marred
by four lapsus calami (' nuclear image ' for nuclear images, ' 102 ' for
103. ' 193 ' for 293, and ' 541 ' for 544) Professor Moore, after drawing
attention to three tjrpist's errors in the above (now corrected) complains
that this paragraph " makes chaos of my whole position by ridiculing
my account " of Meaning. Says he : " My whole point is that Meaning
is ' much more than context ' though ' carried ' or ' represented ' in
the mind by context ; and that for this reason, ' psychology is not
concerned with Meaning, but only with its representatives in the mind.' "
He adds : " I nowhere say that Meaning ' is context,' or that psychology
176 THE MEANING OF MEANING
But there are stranger things to follow, for here
True Meaning makes its appearance — in connection
with a bell. ''The true meaning of the percept of the
bell is its reference to the real objective bell," and this
reference is represented in the mind by contextual
images which ''constitute its meaning 'translated into
the language of psychology. So the true meaning of
an idea lies in its logical reference to an objective
system of ideas" (p. 104) ; and a little later (p. iii) we
find that "all experiences are expressions of the inner
meanings of the self."
It is hard to believe that Professor Moore would
have been satisfied with such a vocabulary had he
attempted to investigate the psychology of signs and
symbols ; and this investigation could not but have
shown him how much of his present work had its
origin in an unfortunate choice of, and attitude towards,
symbols. As it is, the constant appeal to an esoteric
Doctrine of Meaning is reminiscent of the dialectical
devices of mediaeval theologians, and we may conclude
by noting that the Doctrine is specifically invoked in
relation to Religion.
*' Psychology may discuss as freely the mental processes in-
volved in religious experience as it does those concerned in our
experience of physical things, but in neither case can its decisions
affect the question of the meaning ... of those experiences.
The question of the nature of the processes undergone by the
human mind in any spheres of activity is a question of fact,
calling for analytical description and explanation in causal terms :
the problem of the validity or truth- value of these processes is a
question of meaning, calling for interpretation " (p. 122).
For those who regard interpretation as a purely
causal process, and consider that when the meaning of
anything is interpreted it is but explained in causal
terms (while at the same time recognizing a totally
' is concerned ' with Meaning itself." Our whole point is that Professor
Moore constantly shifts his uses of meaning without elucidating any
of them. We were not concerned to discuss his view but to exhibit his
linguistic technique, and we are glad to notice that the sentences quoted
from his letter supplement the exhibit.
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 177
distinct sense of meaning in which the * meaning' of a
poem or a religion would be the emotion or attitude
evoked through it), the extent to which this symbol
can change places with its other selves should provide
material for reflection.
Our object here, however, is rather to provide
instances of its use in current constructive and contro-
versial literature, and it remains only to group together
a few further typical examples.
'^Strictly," says Dr C. D. Broad, **a thing has
MEANING when acquaintance with or knowledge about
it either enables one to infer or causes one by associa-
tion to think of something else."^ But so * strict * an
account has not always found favour with philosophical
writers. **We may, for convenience sake," explains
Professor Nettleship,^ ** mentally hold apart a certain
fraction of the fact, for instance, the minimum of
MEANING which justifies us in using the word triangu-
larity"— while Lord Haldane* can write, **The per-
cipient is an object in his universe, but it is still the
universe including himself that there is for him, and
for its MEANING it implies the presence of mind." And
here are some of the propositions advanced by so
influential a thinker as Professor Royce : * —
"The melody sung, the artist's idea, the thought of your
absent friends : all these not merely have their obvious internal
MEANING as meeting a conscious purpose by their very presence,
but also they at least appear to have that other sort of meaning,
^ Perception, Physics and Reality, 1914, p. 97. In reviewing J, Ellis
McTaggart's " The Nature of Existence " in The Hibbert Journal
(1921, p. 173) Dr Broad notes that " McTaggart seems to have taken
over without question from Russell's Principles of Mathematics, the
doctrine that an infinite regress is vicious when, and only when, it
concerns the ' meaning ' of some concept." According to Russell
{Mind, 1920, p. 401), " MEANING is an observable property of observable
entities." Professor John Laird goes further than this, and in his
opinion " meaning is directly perceptible just like sound and colour.
. . . Continuants are conveyed to us through the intrinsic meaning
of what we perceive intermittently. . . . The meaning directly
perceived in the filling of space and time has the seeds of causality
in it." {A Study of Realism, pp. 27, 29, 98.)
2 R. L. Nettleship, Philosophical Remains, I., p. 220.
^ The Reign of Relativity, 1921, p. 181.
* The World and the Individual, pp. 36, 176.
178 THE MEANING OF MEANING
that reference beyond themselves to objects. . . . This external
MEANING^ I say, appears to be very different from the internal
MEANING, and wholly to transcend the latter.
" Just what the internal meaning of an idea already imperfectly
but consciously is, namely, purpose relatively fulfilled, just that
and nothing else the apparently external meaning when truly
comprehended also proves to be, namely, the entire expression of
the very Will that is fragmentarily embodied in the life of the
flying conscious idea. ... To be means simply to express to
embody the complete internal meaning of a certain absolute
system of ideas, a system, moreover, which is genuinely implied
in the true internal meaning of every finite idea, however
fragmentary.
" The mystic knows only Internal meanings, precisely as the
realist considers only External meanings."
'*We have direct acquaintance with the ideas or
MEANINGS about which we have thoughts and which
we may be said to understand^'''' writes Mr J. M.
Keynes ; and again, ** We are able to pass from direct
acquaintance with things to a knowledge of proposi-
tions about the things of which we have sensations
or understand the meaning."^ So helpful a term is
equally in demand as a carminative in ecclesiastical
controversy,^ as a vade mecum in musical criticism,^
as an indication of the precise point where doctors
differ,* and as a lubricant for the spinning-wheel of
the absolute relativist/ *^If education cannot be
1 J. M. Keynes, A Treatise on Probability, Part I., Fundamental
Ideas, pp. 12, 13.
2 " This House recognizes the gain which arises from inquiry into
the MEANING and expression of the Faith." — The Upper House of
Convocation, May 2nd, 1922.
3 " Miss A's programme last night became stimulating in virtue
of the abounding health and freshness of her outlook, conveyed through
an admirable technique. Probably Beethoven's Sonata in A, Op. loi,
will reveal a deeper meaning to her in full maturity, but her present
reading was eloquently truthful." — The Morning Post, June 24th, 1922.
* " The importance of symptoms is so imperfectly realized that
a description of the meaning, mechanism and significance of symptotns
is nowhere to be found, and this constitutes a great defect in medical
knowledge." — Sir James Mackenzie, op. cit., p. 2.
^ " The concrete universal means that reality in the full meaning
of the word is of the nature of the concept. . . . UniverFality means
that the whole is present in every part. ... If there be nothing
absolute in our objective universe, it follows that the absolute is within
us. It is not within, however, in any abstract meaning, any meaning
which would isolate the subject of experience from its object. . . . Also
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 179
identified with mere instruction, what is it? What
does the term mean?" asks the educationist. ^^l
answer, it must mean a gradual adjustment to the
spiritual possession of the race."^ Meaning is there-
fore just the sort of word with which we may attempt
to probe the obscure depths of the souls of fishes.
** Let us fix attention on the state of the mind of the
goldfish. . . . Suddenly comes a new element Into
consciousness — the conscious counterpart of the stimuli
of the eye caused by the bread falling into the water. . . .
The food is an object in space and time for the fish and
has its MEANING, but when the food is eaten both per-
cept and MEANING disappear. . . . This is an instance
of percept and meaning tied." ^
Turning now to official Psychology, we have six
current Professorial utterances which invite com-
parison : —
"The Object of simple apprehension is whatever the mind
MEANS or intends to refer to.
" The sight of the word sugar means its sweetness.
•* The only general word which is at all appropriate for express-
ing this kind of consciousness is the word meaning." ^
** All that is intended is never given in the mental state. The
mental content merely means what we are thinking about; it
does not reproduce it or constitute it*" *
*' Perceptions have meaning. No sensation means, a sensa-
tion simply goes on in various attributive ways : intensely,
clearly, spatially, and so forth. All perceptions mean : they go
on, also, in various attributive ways ; but they go on mean-
ingly." *' An idea means another idea, is psychologically the
meaning of that other idea, if it is that ideas context." ^
"The affective- volitional meaning, or worth, of an object
becomes explicit only on the cognitive level. It is the actualiza-
tion of the dispositional tendency, either in feeling or desire,
there is pre-established harmony of the monads, if we impart to this new
term the old meaning." — H. Wildon Carr, A Theory of Monads
(1922), pp. 299-300, 318.
^ Nicholas Murray Butler, What is Education ? (1906), p. 17.
2 W. E. Urwick, The Child's Mind (1907), p. 68.
^ Stout, Manual of Psychology, pp. 104, 180, 183.
* Pillsbury, Fundamentals of Psychology, p. 269.
5 Titchener, A Text-book of Psychology, p. 367 ; and Experimental
Psychology of the Thought-Processes, p. 175.
i8o THE MEANING OF MEANING
through these cognitive acts, which gives to' the feeUng or desire
that MEANING described as worth. . . . What are the possible
MEANINGS of reaUty as employed in reflective valuation, or what
is the common logical cue of all these meanings."*
*' Meaning may be something meant, or it may be — well, just
MEANING. ... If, then, meaning, in my interpretation, is just
part of a process itself, why does it so persistently elude our most
patient search for it among the juxtaposed or compounded
products of mental process ? "^
*' Meaning is the essential part of a thought or a conscious-
ness of an object . . . meaning has no immediate physiological
correlate in the brain that could serve as its substitute and dis-
charge its functions."*
As a specimen of the language of Psycho-analysts,
on the other hand, the following by the late Professor
J. J. Putnam * of Harvard may be considered : —
" It seems, and is, a small matter to walk in the country
without one's coat, but a similar insufficiency of costume, if
occurring in a dream, may be a circumstance of far wider mean-
ing. ... It will be obvious from the foregoing that the term
' sexual ' as defined in the psycho-analytic vocabulary, is of far
wider MEANING than is ordinarily conceived. . . . The next point
has reference to 'sublimation.' This outcome of individual
evolution, as defined by Freud, has a strictly social meaning. . . .
The logical end of a psycho-analytic treatment is the re-
covery of a full sense of the bearings and meanings of one's life.
A man's sense of pride of his family may be a symptom of
narcistic self-adulation; but like all other signs and symbols,
this is a case where two opposing meanings meet. . . ."
The Pragmatists made a bold attempt to simplify
the issue. **That which is suggested is meaning,"
wrote Professor Miller,'^ and Professor Bawden • is
equally simple — "Feeling is the vague appreciation
of the value of a situation, while cognition is a clear
and distinct perception of its meaning." The trouble
begins, however, with the first attempts at elaboration.
1 Urban, Valuation, pp. 95, 387.
2 Lloyd Morgan, Instinct and Experience, pp. 277, 278.
8 W. McDougall, Body and Mind, pp. 304, 311.
* Addresses on Psycho-analysis, 1921, pp. 146, 151, 306.
6 I. Miller, The Psychology of Thinking, 1909, p. 154.
• H. Heath Bawden, The Principles of Pragmatism, p. 151.
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS i8i
"An experience is cognitionaly' says Professor Dewey*
*< which is contemporaneously aware of meaning some-
thing beyond itself. Both the meaning and the thing
MEANT are elements in the same situation. . . . One
is present as not-present-in-the-same-way-in-which-the-
other-is. . . . We may say that the smell of a rose,
when involving conscious meaning or intention, is
mental."
Historians, of philosophy^ and childhood, ^ Re-
formers, social ^ and grammatical,^ — all have their own
uses of the word, obvious yet undefined. Even the
clearest thinkers refrain from further analysis. Through-
out Professor G. E. Moore's writings ^meaning*
plays a conspicuous part, and in Principia Ethica we
may read : —
"Our question 'What is good?' may have still another
MEANING. We may, in the third place, mean to ask not what
thing or things are good, but how ' good ' is to be defined. . . .
That which is meant by * good ' is, in fact, except its converse
^ J. Dewey, The Influence of Darwin upon Philosophy, 1910, pp. 88,
104.
2 " Ideas, we may say generally, are symbols, as serving to express
some actual moment or phase of experience and guiding towards
fuller actualization of what is, or seems to be, involved in its existence
or MEANING. . . . That no idea is ever wholly adequate means that
the suggestiveness of experience is inexhaustible." Forsyth, English
Philosophy, 1910, pp. 180, 183.
3 " Babies learn to speak words partly by adopting sounds of their
own and giving them a meaning, partly by pure imitation. . . .
Whether the baby invents both sounds and meaning seems doubtful.
. . . Certainly they change the meaning of words." E. L. Cabot,
Seven Ages of Childhood, 1921, pp. 22, 23, 24.
* " The MEANING of Marriage ! How really simple it is for you
and me to ascertain its precise meaning, and yet what desperate
and disappointing efforts have been made to discover it. . . . If
our children knew all about them they would yet have missed the
essential meaning of human marriage. A knowledge of life outside
humanity would not enlighten us as to what marriage meant for men
and women. . . . Manifestly, if we desire to know the meaning
of marriage, we ought to search out homes where the conditions are
favourable. . . . We may ungrudgingly pay a well-deserved tribute to
the mother cat. Motherhood means already much in the animal
world ! " G. Spiller, The Meaning of Marriage, 1914, pp. 1-3.
^ Strictly speaking, the image is often both a part of the meaning
and a symbol of the rest of it. As part it gives one of the meaning's
details. Part of the meaning of an idea is its fixed reference to some
objective identity. . . . Meaning alone passes between mind and
mind. A. D. Sheffield, Grammar and Thinking, pp. 3-4.
i82 THE MEANING OF MEANING
'bad/ the only simple object of thought which is peculiar to
Ethics.
It would be absolutely meaningless to say that oranges
were yellow, unless yellow did in the end mean just ' yellow ' . . .
We should not get very far with our science if we were bound to
hold that everything which was yellow meant exactly the same
thing as yellow.
In general, however, ethical philosophers have attempted to
define good without recognizing what such an attempt must
MEAN." 1
Nor is it only in Ethics that important philosophical
positions are based on this arbitrary foundation.
*^ Things, as we know, are largely constructions," says
one modern metaphysician* — **a synthesis of sense
elements and meanings. . . . The concept is no mere
word, because it has meaning. ... A universal, as
the object of a meaning, is not a mental act." It is
impossible, urges another,* who also speaks of ^* analys-
ing the MEANING of a process of change from a con-
ceptual point of view," to imagine **that we ourselves
can be analysed into sense-data, for sense-data are
* given * or * presented * by the very meaning of the
term." And again, ** It is doubtless true that *body*
and * mind ' are used with more than one meaning to
which a reasonable significance may be attached."*
Meanings to which significance is attached have also
the authority of Lotze,* who held that ^* historical
persons and events, in spite of all the significance
attached to their meaning, are often very insignificant
1 Pp. 5, 14. 15.
We may compare Professor Perry's method of approach :
" What can the realization of goodness mean if not that what is
natural and necessary, actual and real shall also be good ?
" If it be essential to the meaning of Philosophy that it should issue
from life, it is equally essential that it should return to life. But
this connection of philosophy with life does not mean its reduction
to the terms of life as conceived in the market-place.
'* The present age is made insensible to the meaning of life through
preoccupation with its very achievements." R. B. Perry, The
Approach to Philosophy, pp. 422, 426, 427.
2 D. H. Parker, The Self and Nature, 1917, pp. 158, 190.
* C. A. Richardson, Spiritual Pluralism, 1920, pp. 10, 40.
* Ibid., p. 184.
« Outlines of /Esthetics, in the English translation by Professor
G. T. Ladd of Yale, p. 86.
THE MEANING OF PHILOSOPHERS 183
in ,the external form of their appearance," and who
also informs us that in Moorish architecture *^the
soaring pointed bow of horse-shoe shape has no
properly constructive meaning, but rather recalls the
mighty opening of a cleft" (p. 66), while a landscape
in pictorial composition ** has a meaning only as a part
of the actual world " (p. 82).
Esthetics, however, has always flourished on loose
usage, and non-philosophic writers have here been
more than usually persistent in their invocation of the
word at all critical points. ^* Colour as colour," writes
Van Gogh, ** means something; this should not be
ignored, but rather turned to account." ^ The poet, too,
we read, **said what he meant, but his meaning seems
to beckon away beyond itself, or rather to expand into
something boundless which is only focussed in it."^
And so on in a crescendo of reiteration as the
emotions of the cosmologist soar through the
Empyrean : —
" Thought transformed the whole status of life and gave a
new MEANING to reality. . . . Our age is great in opportunity to
those who would wrest from life a meaning and a value." ^
*' All reasoning as to the meaning of life leads us back to the
instincts. ... As soon as we deny sensation any other signifi-
cance beyond that which belongs to it as a regulator of activity,
the various values of life that have been promulgated since the
dawn of civilization become quite meaningless." ^
" Just as the artist finds his own meaning in the successful
struggle to express it, so, from our point of view, God realizes
His own intention in the process of effecting it. . . . In the
world, novelty is part of its meaning, and this is particularly
true of an experience such as we found the Divine experience
must be, where the Future is the dominant element of Time."^
" God is both fact and ideal ; not merely in the common way
of a value attaching to a fact or truth, as utility attaches to my
inkstand, but in the peculiar way in which a meaning attaches
1 "Letters of a Post-Impressionist, p. 29.
' A. C. Bradley, Oxford Lectures on Poetry, 1901, p. 26.
" R. Eucken, The Meaning and Value of Life, 1909, pp. 38, 147.
* I. Harris, The Significance of Existence, 191 1, p. 319.
^ W. Temple, The Nature of Personality, 191 1, p. 107.
i84 THE MEANING OF MEANING
to that which symbohzes it. . . . The objective symbol or
emblem is attributed or assigned to this meaning, to represent it
vicariously. . . .
"Reality in the last analysis is what we mean by reality.
Reality apart from all meaning for experience is an absurdity
or a mere word."^
"The actual side of every moment of consciousness only
possesses value or meaning as a token of the vast potentiality
beyond itself. . . .
"Cosmological theories of world-process often halt and be-
come meaningless through a refusal to introduce the notion of
infinity." 2
" In order to have a clearer view of these consequences, we
should consider the scope of these meanings more clearly ; ex-
amine whether they can, like the meanings of words, be taken
away ... As by the meaning of a word I know, or as it were
see, into another man's thought, so by the meaning of my spirit
I see into that Being which I call God. . . . By God is meant
an Eternal or Infinite Spirit." ^
^ J. M. Baldwin, Genetic Theory of Reality, 1915, pp. 108, 227.
2 E. Belfort Bax, The Real, the Rational, and the A logical, 1920,
pp. 233, 243.
® Professor K. J. Spalding, Desire and Reason, 1922, p. 8.
CHAPTER IX
THE MEANING OF MEANING
Father ! these are terrible words, but I have no time
now but for Meanings. — Melmoth the Wanderer.
A STUDY of the utterances of Philosophers suggests
that they are not to be trusted in their dealings with
Meaning. With the material which they have provided
before us, let us see whether more creditable results can
be achieved by the technique which we have already
elaborated.
To begin with it is not difficult to frame two defini-
tions corresponding to those of Group A in the case of
Beautiful. In two ways it has been easy and natural
for philosophers to hypostatize their definiendum ;
either by inventing a peculiar stuff, an intrinsic
property, and then saying let everything which
possesses this be said to possess meaning, or by
inventing a special unanalysable relation, and saying
let everything related by this relation to something
else be said to have a meaning.
With the second of these two definitions a gram-
matical alternative is opened up which reappears in
all the other suggested definitions and tends very
greatly to confuse! the discussion. We may either take
Meaning as standing for the relation between A and B,
when A means B, or as standing for B. In the first
case the meaning of A will be its relation to B, in the
second it will be B. This ambiguity once it is under-
stood gives rise to little difficulty, but the avoidance of
it by the symbols * reference' and * referent' is one of
the distinct advantages of that vocabulary.
186
{.'.
i86 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The other definitions show again a similarity with
those of Beautiful in that they are preponderantly
psychological definitions. It should not however, be
concluded from these two examples that all definition
problems develop into psychology. If we were attempt-
ing to define * bathing* or * absorption,* let us say,
we should find the emphasis upon quite different
defining routes. * Meaning* evidently is a symbol
some of whose elucidations must rest upon psychology,
and the example of Beauty was chosen because that
symbol, too, lies though less deeply in the same
predicament.
The following is a representative list of the main
definitions which reputable students of Meaning have
favoured. Meaning is —
I An Intrinsic property.
A unique unanalysable Relation to other things.
/Ill The other words annexed to a word in the
Dictionary.
IV The Connotation of a word.
V An Essence.
VI An activity Projected into an object.
yil (a) An event Intended.
B (b) A Volition.
VIII The Place of anything in a system.
IX The Practical Consequences of a thing in our
future experience.
X The Theoretical consequences involved in or
implied by a statement.
V XI Emotion aroused by anything.
/ XII That which is Actually related to a sign by
a chosen relation.
XIII (a) The Mnemic effects of a stimulus.' Asso-
C I ciations acquired.
(b) Some other occurrence to which the
mnemic effects of any occurrence are
Appropriate.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 187
(c) That which a sign is Interpreted as
being of.
(d) What anything Suggests.
In the case of Symbols.
That to which the User of a Symbol
actually refers.
Q) XIV That to which the user of a symbol Ought
to be referring.
XV That to which the user of a symbol Believes
himself to be referring.
XVI That to which the Interpreter of a symbol
(a) Refers.
(b) Believes himself to be referring.
(c) Believes the User to be referring.
With Group A we need be no further concerned.
Let us consider Group B. The first (III) Dictionary
meaning, or the philologist's signification, is, in spite
of its comical appearance as formulated above, very
widely used ; and in the domain of philology it has
undoubted value, as will be shown when we come to
discuss, in the light of definition XIV, the kindred
questions of Good Use and Communication.
Connotation (IV) the ' meaning' of traditional logic,
and Essence (V) the ' meaning' of the Critical Realists
who follow Dr Santayana as quoted above, may be
considered together, for ' Essences ' by those who do
not let their realism overpower their criticism may
best be regarded as Connotation hypostatized.
The term Connotation has been adopted by those
logicians who follow Mill in the practice of discussing
as though they were primary and paramount two senses
in which a symbol may be said to mean : (i) It means
the set of things to which it can be correctly applied ;
and the members of this set are said to be denoted
or indicated by the word, or to be its denotation. (2) It
means the properties used in determining the application
of a symbol, the properties in virtue of which anything
i88 THE MEANING OF MEANING
is a member of the set which is the denotation ; these
properties are said to be the connotation of a symbol,
or sometimes simply its meaning. The relation of
denotation to connotation has been conveniently summed
up as follows : The connotation of a word determines
its denotation which in turn determines its compre-
hension, />., the properties common to the things to
which it can be applied. The term connotation is,
however, often used with the same sense as compre-
hension.
It will be plain to all who consider how words are
used that this account is highly artificial. Neither
denoting nor connoting can be used as if it were either
a simple or a fundamental relation. To take denota-
tion first, no word has any denotation apart from some
reference which it symbolizes. The relations between
a word and the things for which it stands are indirect
(cf. diagram. Chapter I., p. ii), and, we have urged,
causal. When we add the further complications intro-
duced by correct usage, we get a result so artificial
that the attempt to use ^ denoting * as the name of a
simple logical relation becomes ludicrous. The case
is still worse with * connoting.' The connotation is
a selection of properties or adjectives ; but properties
are not to be found by themselves an3rvvhere; they are
fictitious or nominal entities which we are led to feign
through the influence of the bad analogy by which
we treat certain parts of our symbols as though they
were self-complete symbols. We have no justification,
beyond this bad analogy, for treating adjectives as
though they were nouns. The sole entities in the
real world are propertied things which are only
symbolically distinguishable into properties and things.
This does not, of course, make symbolization, which
proceeds as though properties and things were separ-
able, any less desirable upon occasion. No convenient
symbolic device is objectionable so long as we know
that it is a device and do not suppose it to be an addition
THE MEANING OF MEANING 189
to our knowledge. To let a convenience turn into an
argument, and decide for us as to the nature of the
universe in the fashion of Dr Santayana's * Essences *
is a gratuitous tactic. On the other hand as linguistic
machinery there is no harm and much service in
universals. For instance, in expounding the causal
or contextual theory of reference we made free use of
the terms * character ' and * relation ' as though these
might stand for independent and respectable elements
in the real world. There is a linguistic necessity for
such procedure but to exalt this into a logical necessity
for the * subsistence ' of such elements is to forget what
the world is like.
Thus, to begin with, the connotation of a word is
a set of nominal entities, but we have still to decide
which these shall be. One method would be by linguistic
usage ; **a knowledge of the usage of language alone
is sufficient to know what a phrase means," says Mr
Johnson (Logic^ p. 92). According to this method, if
strictly followed, the connotation of a word would be-
come indistinguishable from its meaning in the sense
of *^the other words annexed to a word in the dic-
tionary'* (III). But another method is possible, the
consideration of which will show more plainly still the
artificiality of connotation and the little reliance which
can be placed in it for logical purposes ; for instance,
•in definition. We can in part translate the convenient
formula given above as follows : The reference employ-
ing (or symbolized by) a word determines its referents
{i,e,, denotation) which in turn determine what different
references may be made to them. Two symbols would
then have the same connotation when they symbolize
similar references. But in our account of reference
anything becomes a referent for a given process or
act of referring only in virtue of certain characters
through which it becomes a completing member of the
context including the sign for the process. Thus the
connotation of a reference (and derivatively of the words
I90 THE MEANING OF MEANING
symbolizing it) would be those characters of its referent
in virtue of which this is what is referred to. Bearing
in mind that these characters are but nominal entities
we can now see how easy it has been for logicians
through the formidable shorthand of * denotation * and
* connotation ' as applied to words to overlook the
causal nature of the relations they were unwittingly
discussing. It is not surprising that the attempt to
explain the relation of meaning to denotation for phrases
like * The King of France ' by such shorthand methods
should have been found difficult.^
One further point amusingly shows the artificiality
of the traditional account, namely, the impossibility of
applying it to namesy which without undue rashness
may be regarded as the simplest symbols out of which
all our other symbolic machinery has developed. Mill
concluded that proper names are non-con notative.
Mr Johnson in agreeing with him (and **all the best
logicians ") makes a reservation : ^ —
**This does not amount to saying that the proper
name is non-significant or has no meaning ; rather we
find, negatively, that the proper name does not mean
the same as anything that could be meant by a
descriptive or connotative phrase ; and positively, that
it does precisely mean what could be indicated by some
appropriate descriptive phrase." Further shifts '^ are
^ As for instance by Russell " On Denoting," Mind, 1905. " Thus
it would seem that ' C ' and C are different entities such that ' C '
denotes C ; but this cannot be an explanation, because the relation
of ' C ' to C remains wholly mysterious ; and where are we to find
the denoting complex ' C ' which is to denote C ? Moreover, when
C occurs in a proposition, it is not only the denotation that occurs ;
yet on the view in question C is only the denotation, the meaning
being wholly relegated to ' C This is an inextricable tangle, and
seems to prove that the whole distinction of meaning and denotation
has been wrongly conceived." The fresh conceptions, however, de-
signed to save the situation have only led to further intricacies which
logicians are once more endeavouring to unravel.
2 Logic, Vol. I., 1921, p. 96.
3 " The word ' courage ' or the phrase ' not shrinking from danger '
is of such a nature that there is no distinction between what it means
and what it indicates or denotes. It is only phrases prefixed by an
article or similar term for which the distinction between meaning
and indication arises." — Ibid., p. 92.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 191
then necessary, but serve only to destroy * meaning ' as
a useful symbol.
VI, though it appeals to Empathists, G«)ceans and
Solipsists, is most charitably regarded as a metaphor,
in which case it is a strange and striking way of
phrasing views closely similar to XIII. Dr Schiller's
way of putting it, ** Meaning is an activity taken up
towards objects and energetically projected into them
like an a particle," obscures his actual agreement with
the mnemic causation which he is combating ; since
when he speaks of ** a demand we make upon our
experience" as ** selecting the objects of attention," he
appears to be describing in activist language the very
processes (cf. XIII (a) infra) which he is so unwilling
to admit. The dispute between ^ act ' and * process ' as
fundamental psychological terms is obviously sub-
sequent to a full discussion of the problem of Meaning.
As is also indicated by Professor Strong's contribution *
we presumably have here an instance of a common
controversial predicament, the use for the same referents
of symbols taken out of different, but to a large extent
translatable, symbol systems.
We pass to VII, which arises from the study of such
remarks as
They meant no harm.
He means well.
I m,eant to go.
What I meant was what I said.
A mechanistic universe is without meaning.
If, as is usually the case when these phrases are
used, we can substitute the word * intend ' for * mean '
it will be clear that we have a quite different kind of
* meaning ' from any involved when * intention ' cannot
^ " The enlargement of the sensationalist-behaviourist theory which
appears necessary is, then, to recognize that the sound as a meaning
is distinct from the sound as a sensuous state, and that distinct from
both is the thing meant, without the existence of which this meaning
would have no meaning." — Mind, July, 1921.
192 THE MEANING OF MEANING
be so substituted.* My 'meaning* or * intention,' as
that which I endeavour to promote, is something wished,
as distinguished from something known or referred to
(intended,' or * tended towards,' in the terminology of
certain American writers). Thus between this sense
and that with which we have to deal in such sentences
as ***Chien' and * Dog,' both mean the same thing,"
there is no contradiction. There is, however, a pun,
and thanks to the practice of disputants who compound
the sense of reference with the sense of intention in the
phrase ** What I meant was" ( = '* What I intended to
refer to was " or ** what I intended you to refer to was ")
— we have a dangerous source of confusion. The
difficulty of making a close examination of the matter
under discussion is greatly increased, for what I
intended to refer to may be quite other than what I did
refer to, a fact which it is important to remember if it
is hoped to reach mutual comprehension, and eventually
agreement or disagreement.
The intention of the speaker may very naturally be
used in conjunction^ with reference in order to provide
complex definitions of meaning for special purposes.
To quote from a recent article: **Is the meaning of a
sentence that which is in the mind of the speaker at the
moment of utterance or that which is in the mind of the
listener at the moment of audition? Neither, I think.
^ Logicians are sometimes led by philological accident to dispute
this. Thus Joseph, Introduction to Logic, p. 131, says : " ' Intension '
naturally suggests what we intend or mean by a term."
Lady Welby, who for twenty years eloquently exhorted philosophers
and others to concentrate attention on the meaning of meaning, par-
ticularly in her articles on "Sense, Meaning and Interpretation," to
which reference was made above {Mind, 1896, p. 187, etc.), may have
failed to carry conviction by contenting herself with a vague insistence
on Meaning as human intention. The distinctions necessary in this
field are not always such as could be arrived at merely by a refined
Linguistic sense, and neither in her book. What is Meaning ? nor in
the later Signifies and Language (191 1), where the following occurs (p. 9) :
" The one crucial question in all Expression is ts special pro-
perty, first of Sense, that in which it is used, then of Meaning
as the intention of the user, and, most far-reaching and momentous
of all, of implication, of ultimate Significance,"
is the necessary analysis undertaken ; while the issue is further con-
fused by echoes of the phraseology of an earlier religious phase.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 193
Certainly not that which is in the mind of the listener,
for he may utterly misconstrue the speaker's purpose.
But also not that which is in the mind of the speaker,
for he may intentionally veil in his utterance the
thoughts which are in his brain, and this, of course,
he could not do if the meaning of the utterance were
precisely that which he held in his brain. I think the
following formulation will meet the case : The meaning
of any sentence is what the speaker intends to be understood
from it by the listener T ^
* To be understood ' is here a contraction. It stands
for: ia) to be referred X.o-\-(b) to be responded with + (^)
to be felt towards referent + (^) to be felt towards speaker
+ (^) to be supposed that the speaker is referring to +
(/) that the speaker is desiring, etc., etc.
These complexities are mentioned here to show how
vague are most of the terms which are commonly
thought satisfactory in this topic. Such a word as
* understand ' is, unless specially treated, far too vague
to serve except provisionally or at levels of discourse
where a real understanding of the matter (in the reference
sense) is not possible. The multiple functions of speech
will be classified and discussed in the following chapter.
There it will be seen that the expression of the speaker's
intention is one of the five regular language functions.
It should not be stressed unduly, and it should be
remembered that as with the other functions its im-
portance varies immensely from person to person and
from occasion to occasion.
The realization of the multiplicity of the normal
language function is vital to a serious approach to the
problem of meaning. Here it is only desirable to point
out that ^meaning,' in the sense of * that which the
speaker intends the listener to refer to,' and * meaning,'
in the sense of ^ that which the speaker intends the
listener to feel and to do,' etc., are clearly distinguishable.
1 A. Gardiner, Brit. Jour, of Psych., Vol. XII., Part iv., 1922, p.
361.
194 THE MEANING OF MEANING
In many of the more subtle speech situations these
distinctions must be recognized and used.
The first of these is particularly concerned in those
cases of misdirection which we saw in our first chapter
to be so universal. In the case of a successful lie the
person deceived makes the reference which the deceiver
intends he shall, and if we define * meaning ' as * that
which the speaker intends the listener to refer to/ the
victim will have interpreted the speaker aright. He will
have grasped his meaning. But let us consider a more
astute interpreter, who, by applying a further inter-
pretative process (based, say, upon his knowledge of
business methods) arrives either at a mere rejection of
the intended reference or at another reference quite
different from that intended. In the latter case, if he
has hit upon the reference from which the suggested
false reference was designed to divert him, he would
often be said to have understood the speaker, or to have
divined his 'true meaning.' This last meaning, it
should be observed, is non-symbolic. The sagacious
listener merely takes the speaker's behaviour, including
the words he utters, as a set of signs whence to interpret
to an intention and a reference in the speaker which no
words passing on the occasion symbolize. The batsman
who correctly plays a * googly ' is making exactly the
same kind of interpretation. He guesses the * mean-
ing' of the bowler's action by discounting certain of
the signs exhibited.
All cases of 'duplicity,' whether deliberate (inten-
tional) or not, may be analysed in the same manner ; ^
the special instance of self-deception as it concerns
introspective judgments, which are discussed below,
being of most importance for the general theory. Here
great care is required in avoiding any confusion between
the speaker's intended or professed references and his
actual references.
^ On this point Martinak's treatment {Psychologische Untersuchungen
zur Bedeutungslehre, p. 82) of the art of the orator, the diplomat, the
trickster and the liar is instructive.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 195
This particular ambiguity is indeed one of the most
undesirable of those with which we have to deal. Unless
the referential and the affective-volitional aspects of
mental process are clearly distinguished, no discussion
of their relation is possible ; and the confusion of refer-
ence, with one very special form of the latter aspect,
namely 'intending,' is disastrous. To bring the point
out by a play of words, we very often mean what we do
not mean ; z.^., we refer to what we do not intend, and
we are constantly thinking of things which we do not
want to think of. * Mean ' as shorthand for * intend to
refer to,' is, in fact, one of the unluckiest symbolic
devices possible.
The distinction between the two. aspects of mental
process from the standpoint of the context theory may
be briefly and therefore vaguely indicated as follows :
Given the psychological context to which a sign belongs,
then the reference made by the interpretation of the sign
is fixed also. But it is possible for the same sign (or for
signs with very similar characters) to belong to different
psychological contexts. Certain geometrical figures,
that may be seen, more or less * at will,' either as receding
or as extruding from the plane upon which they are
drawn offer well-known and convenient examples. If
now we raise the question. How does the sign come to
belong to the context to which it does belong, or how
does it pass from one context to another? we are raising
questions as to the affective-volitional aspect. The facts,
concerning habit-formation, desire, affective tone, upon
the basis of which these questions must be answered,
are to some extent ascertained ; but pending the dis-
covery of further facts and an hypothesis by which they
can be interpreted and arranged, it remains possible to
speculate upon the matter either in activist or in auto-
matist language. Which kind of language gives
scientifically the most adequate symbolism, or whether
a neutral symbolism is not possible, are matters as to
which it is premature to decide. Meanwhile there is no
196 THE MEANING OF MEANING
excuse for making a confused statement of an unsolved
and difficult problem into a chief instrument of all our
inquiries, which is what we should be doing if we
admitted * meaning ' in the sense here discussed as a
fundamental conception.
As regards VII (b) those who are not clear as to the
scope of the equation, '* His meaning is certain," = *' He
has definite wishes," often find themselves led to the
conclusion that * meaning' = ^ wishes '= Wolition * (a
mental event), i.e.^ is entirely psychological, or as they
are often pleased to say, purely personal.^ The same
linguistic ambiguity often arises again when the Universe
is regarded as showing evidence of a will or design,
and if * meaning ' is substituted for the * intention ' or
* purpose 'of such a will, then the meaning of anything
will be its purpose — as conceived by the speaker qua
interpreter of the divine plan ; or, for biological teleo-
logists with a partiality for the elan vital — its function.
Such a phrase as the Meaning of Life (cf., for example,
Professor Miinsterberg's treatment above) usually implies
such a view, but there is sometimes another possible
interpretation when Meaning is equated with * Signific-
ance ' (VIII). Here the notion of purpose is not always
implied, and the meaning of anything is said to have
been grasped when it has been understood as related
to other things or as having its place in some system as
a whole.
Good examples of both these uses are provided by
Mr Russell, and it is hardly necessary to add that, as
here used by himj both are innocuous and convenient
locutions. At the close of the immortal account by
Mephistopheles of the history of our cosmos, we read :
**Such, in outline, but even more purposeless, more
void of meaning, is the world which Science presents
1 Another mode of introducing the personal touch is to equate ' my
meaning ' with ' my ideas,' whether of, or not of, anything ; as when
a disputant declares that she has expressed her meaning imperfectly,
but claims that ideas are so personal and intangible that they can
never be adequately ' expressed.'
THE MEANING OF MEANING 197
for our belief." And again, in relation to the haphazard
treatment of mathematics in text-books: **The love of
system can find free play in mathematics as nowhere
else. The learner who feels this impulse must -not be
repelled by an array of meaningless examples or dis-
tracted by amusing oddities."^
The kind of system within which the thing, said in
this sense to have ^meaning,' is taken as fitting is not
important. Designs or intentions, human or other,
form one sub-class of such systems, but there are many
others. For example, some people were said to be
slow in grasping the * meaning ' of the declaration of
war ; in other words, they did not easily think of the
consequences of all kinds which were causally linked
with that event. Similarly we may ask what is the
* meaning ' of unemployment.
The theologian will elucidate the * meaning ' of sin
by explaining the circumstances of Adam's fall and
the history and destiny of the soul. Similarly the
* meaning ' of top hats may flash across the mind of a
sociologist when he recognizes them as part of the
phenomena of conspicuous ostentation.
** I doubt," says Mr Stanley Leathes, ** if numerical
dates have any meaning to the majority of children.
I once asked a Sunday school boy : How long ago
Our Lord had lived? He replied: * Forty days.'"'
The complaint is not that the dates do not * suggest '
anything, but presumably that their * significance ' in
the general measurement of time has not been grasped
by the puerile mind. The figures for the distances of
remote stars are similarly said to be without * meaning '
for us all.
But * meaning' in this sense is too vague to be of
much service even to orators. Is the meaning of
unemployment its causes or its effects, its effects taken
sociologically, or as the unemployed individual suffers
^ op. cit., Mysticism and Logic, pp. 47 and 66.
2 What is Education ?, p. 178.
198 THE MEANING OF MEANING
them? Accordingly various restrictions are commonly
introduced by aid of which more specific senses of
* meaning,' as place within some system, are obtained.
Two of them are sufficiently important to rank as
independent definitions of meaning, since each has
been made the keystone of a metaphysical edifice,
namely * meaning' as the practical and as the theoretical
consequences. In both cases the * meaning' is the rest
of the system within which whatever has the ' meaning '
is taken. We shall find another narrower and a more
scientific variety of this * meaning' in use when we
come to consider natural signs.
The account of meaning in terms of Practical
Consequences (IX) is chiefly associated with the
pragmatists. William James himself considers that
**the meaning of any proposition can always be
brought down to some particular consequence in our
future practical experience, whether passive or active,"^
or as he puts it in Pragmatism (p. 201) : ''True ideas
are those that we can assimilate, validate, corroborate,
verify. False ideas are those that we can not. That is
the practical difference it makes to us to have true
ideas ; that, therefore, is the meaning of truth, for it is
all that truth is known as."
Correspondingly there are those who introduce the
word 'means' into their prose as a synonym for
'involves' or 'logically implies' (X). All or any of
the theoretical consequences of a view or statement are
thus included in common philosophic parlance in its
'meaning,' as when we are told [Mind^ 1908, p. 491)
that " while to Spinoza insistence on ends alone means
ignorance of causes, to Prof. Laurie insistence on
causes alone means ignorance of ends."
XI (Emotion) requires little comment. It is a
definite sense of meaning which except amongst men
of letters is not likely to be brought in to confuse other
issues. A separate treatment of the emotional use of
^ W. James, The Meaning of Truth, p. 210.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 199
language will be found in the following chapter, where
what has already been said on this subject receives
application. Some typical instances of the emotional
use of meaning were provided in the preceding chapter.
The word is often purely emotive (cf. * Good ' p. 125),
and on these occasions, if the writer is what is known
as a stylist, will have no substitute nor will a sensible
reader attempt a symbolic definition.
The detailed examination of this sense of meaning
is almost equivalent to an investigation of Values, such
as has been attempted by Professor W. M. Urban in
his formidable treatise on the subject, where * worth-
predicates * appear as * funded affective-volitional
meanings.' *' The words * God,' Move,' Miberty,' have
a real emotional connotation, leave a trail of affective
meaning. . . . We may quite properly speak of the
emotional connotation of such words as the funded
meaning of previous emotional reactions and the
affective abstracts which constitute the psychical
correlates of this meaning as the survivals of former
judgment-feelings."^ It is regrettable that Urban's
taste for the collocation of forbidding technicalities
should have prevented a more general acquaintance
with views for the most part so sound and so carefully
expounded.
Proceeding then to the third group we have first
(XII) the definition which embodies the doctrine of
natural signs. Any one event will, it is generally
assumed, be connected with other events in a variety
of ways. Any one event will be actually related
causally or temporally or in some other way to other
events so that, taking this event as a sign in respect
of some one such relation, there will be another event
which is its meaning, />., the relatum so related.
Thus the effect of the striking of a match is either a
flame, or smoke, or the head falling off, or merely a
scraping noise or an exclamation. In this case the
1 Valuation, p. 133.
200 THE MEANING OF MEANING
actual effect is the meaning of the scrape, if treated as
a sign in this respect, and vice versa.
It is in this sense that the Psycho-analyst often
speaks of the meaning of dreams. When he discovers
the * meaning ' of some mental phenomenon, what he
has found is usually a conspicuous part of the cause,
and he rarely makes any other actual use of the word.
But by introducing theories of unconscious wishes,
* meaning' in the sense of something unconsciously
intended, and by introducing * universal symbols,*
kings, queens, etc., * meaning' in the sense of some
intrinsic property of the symbol, may easily come to be
what he believes himself to be discussing. In other
words, for him as for all natural scientists the causal
sign-relations are those which have the greatest interest.
In passing from this sense of * meaning' to XIII,
which must be carefully distinguished, we have to
recall the account of interpretation given above. All
thinking, all reference, it was maintained, is adaptation
due to psychological contexts which link together
elements in external contexts. However * universal'
or however ^abstract' our adaptation, the general
account of what is happening is the same. In this
fashion we arrive at a clear and definite sense of
* meaning.' According to this the meaning of A is
that to which the mental process interpreting A is
adapted.^ This is the most important sense in which
words have meaning.
In the case of simple interpretations, such as the
recognition of a sound, this adaptation is not difficult
to explain. In more complex interpretations such as
the reader is attempting to carry out at this moment,
a detailed account is more difficult, partly because such
interpretations go by stages, partly because few im-
portant psychological laws have as yet been ascertained
and these but vaguely. To take an analogous case,
before Newton's time scientists were in much doubt
^ Cf. Chapter III., supra, pp. 53, 75.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 201
as to the * meaning' of tidal phenomena, and peculiar
♦sympathy' and * affinity' relations used to be postu-
lated in order to connect them with the phases of the
moon *the ruler of the waters.' Further knowledge of
more general uniformities made it possible to dispense
with such phantom relations. Similarly more accurate
knowledge of psychological laws will enable relations
such as * meaning,' * knowing,' * being the object of,'
* awareness' and * cognition' to be treated as linguistic
phantoms also, their place being taken by observable
correlations.
The most usual objections to such a view as this
derive from undue reliance upon introspection. Intro-
spective judgments like other judgments are interpreta-
tions. Whether we judge * I am thinking of rain,' or,
after looking at the barometer, judge ' It is going to
rain ' ; we are equally engaged in a sign situation. In
both cases we are making a secondary adaptation to a
previous adaptation as sign, or more usually to some
part or concomitant of the adaptation ; such as, for
instance, the words symbolizing the reference about
which we are attempting to judge in introspection, or,
failing words, some non-verbal symbol, or, failing even
that, the obscure feelings accompanying the reference.
It is possible of course to respond directly to our own
responses. We do this constantly in long trains of
habitual and perceptual actions ; but such responses
being themselves non-conscious, i.e., conscious of noth-
ing, do not lead to introspection judgments of the kind
which provide evidence for or against any view as to
the nature of thinking. Such judgments, since they
must appear to rest upon the reflective scrutiny of con-
sciousness itself, are interpretations whose signs are
taken from whatever conscious elements accompany the
references they are about. It is certain that these signs
are unreliable and difficult to interpret ; often they are
no more than dim, vague feelings. We therefore tend
to introduce symbolization, hoping so to gain additional
202 THE MEANING OF MEANING
and clearer signs. When, for instance, we attempt
what is called the analysis of a judgment by direct
introspection our procedure leads as a rule to the pro-
vision of alternative symbols which we endeavour to
convince ourselves symbolize the same reference. We
then say that one symbol is what we mean by the other.
In most modern arguments concerning fundamentals
some positive or negative assertion of this form can be
found as an essential step. It is thus very important
to consider what kind of evidence is available for such
assertions.
The usual answer would be that it is a matter not
of evidence but of immediate conviction. But these
direct certainties notoriously vary from hour to hour
and are different in different persons. They are in fact
feelings, and as such their causes, if they can be
investigated, will be found not irrelevant to the question
of their validity. Now the main cause of any con-
viction as to one symbol being the correct analysis of
another, /.^., as to the identity of the references sym-
bolized by both, is to be found in the similarity of any
other signs of the references in question which may be
obtainable. These, since imagery is admittedly often
irrelevant, will be feelings again : — feelings accompany-
ing the references, feelings of fitness or unfitness, due
to the causal connections of symbols to references, and
feelings due to the mere superficial similarities and
dissimilarities of the symbols. Thus it is this tangled
and obscure network of feelings which is the ground
of our introspective certainties. It is not surprising
that the task of clarifying our opinions by the method
of direct inspection and analysis should be found
difficult, or that the results obtained should give rise
to controversy.
Those who have attempted to decide what precisely
they are judging when they make the commonest judg-
ments, such as M am thinking,' 'That is a chair,'
' This is good ' will not be in haste to dispute this.
THE MEANING OF MEANING 203
It is indeed very likely that we more often make mis-
takes in these secondary judgments than in most others,
for the obvious reason that verification i^ so difficult.
Nobody's certainty as to his reference, his * meaning,*
is of any value in the absence of corroborative^ evidence,
though this kind of self-confidence dies hard.
It is because the non-verbal sensations and images
which accompany references are such unreliable signs
that symbols are so important. We usually take our
symbolization as our guide to our meaning, and the
accompanying sign feelings become indistinguishably
merged in the feelings of our symbols. The fact, how-
ever, that on some occasions all the available symbols
can be felt to be inappropriate to the reference which
they are required to symbolize, shows that other feeling-
signs are attainable. We are thus not completely at the
mercy of our symbols.
None the less, there are obvious reasons for that
prodigious trustfulness in symbols as indications of
what we are meaning which is characteristic of mathe-
matical and other abstract thinkers. Symbols properly
used are for such subjects indispensable substitutes for
feeling accompaniments not so easily distinguished.
The feeling accompanying, for instance, a reference
to 102 apples is not easily distinguishable from that
accompanying a reference to 103, and without the
symbols we should be unable to make either reference
as distinct from the other. In abstract thought as a
rule and for most thinkers, instead of our references
determining our symbols, the linkage and inter-
connection of the symbols determines our reference.
^ The precise kinds of this corroborative evidence and their value,
i.e., the allied signs or the relevant behaviour, are matters for in-
vestigation. Most word-association experiments, for instance, are
conducted on dubious assumptions. The problem of the relation
of non-verbal signs and verbal signs {i.e., symbols) to the judgment
processes of which they are signs, has therefore not often been raised.
Since so much experimental psychology must stand or fall with the
quite uncritical assumptions as to the value of symbolization as evidence
of reference upon which such experiments are conducted, this problem
would seem to be worthy of attention.
204 THE MEANING OF MEANING
We merely watch that no violation of certain rules of
procedure is brought about. Some of these rules are
of no great ^importance, those recorded in the parts of
grammar which deal with literary usage and the con-
ventions of sentence formation. Others however are
of quite a different standing and are due to nothing
less than the nature of things in general. In other
words these rules are logical laws in the sense that any
symbol system which does not obey them must break
down as a means of recording references, no matter to
what the references be made. These fundamental
necessities of a symbol system and the mere rules of
polite speech above mentioned have historically been
subjected to some confusion. We had occasion to
discuss some of the former in Chapter V. ; some of the
latter will receive mention and comment when we come
to deal with Symbol Situations in our final chapter.
Subject to these logical requirements we are able,
largely by means of symbols defined in terms of one
another, to compound references, or, in other words, to
abstract common parts of different references — to dis-
tinguish, to compare and to connect references in, to,
and at, various levels of generality. The compounding
of these diverse m9des of adaptation into a specific
judgment is the process generally alluded to as Think-
ing, this activity being commonly maintained through
any long train by the use of symbols. These, as
substitutes for stimuli not available at any given instant,
as retaining the product of elaborate concatenations of
adjustments, and as affording means for the rearrange-
ment of these adjustments, have become so powerful,
so mechanical and so intricately interconnected as to
conceal from us almost entirely what is taking place.
We come to regard ourselves as related to a variety of
entities, properties, propositions, numbers, functions,
universals and so forth — by the unique relation of know-
ledge. Recognized for what they are, i,e.^ symbolic
devices, these entities may be of great use. The attempt
THE MEANING OF MEANING 205
to investigate them as referents leads, as we have seen,
to Philosophy, and constitutes the unchallenged domain
of philosophers.
It will be noticed that definitions (XII) and (Xlllb)
for the case of true interpretations have the same effect.
The meaning (XI I lb) of a sign adequately interpreted
will be that to which it is actually related by the sign
relation. But for the case of false interpretations the
two * meanings ' will be different; Another point of
interest is that this account removes the necessity for
any ^ Correspondence Theory of Truth ' since an
adequate reference has as its referent not something
which corresponds to the fact or event which is the mean-
ing of a sign by definition (XII) but something which
is identical with it. We may if we please say that a
reference corresponds with its referent, but this would
be merely shorthand for the fuller account of reference
which we have given.
With these considerations before us we can now
understand the peculiarities of Symbols with their two-
fold 'meaning' for speaker and hearer. A symbol as
we have defined it (cf. pp. 11, 12 supra) symbolizes an
act of reference ; that is to say, among its causes in the
speaker, together no doubt with desires to record and
to communicate, and with attitudes assumed towards
hearers, are acts of referring. Thus a symbol becomes
when uttered, in virtue of being so caused, a sign to a
hearer of an act of reference. But this act^ except where
difficulty in understanding occurs, is of little interest
in itself, and the symbol is usually taken as a sign of
what it stands for, namely that to which the reference
which it symbolizes refers. When this interpretation is
successful it follows that the hearer makes a reference
similar in all relevant respects to that made by the
speaker. It is this which gives symbols their peculiarity
as signs. Thus a language transaction or a communica-
tion may be defined as a use of symbols in such a way
that acts of reference occur in a hearer which are similar
2o6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
in all relevant respects to those which are symbolized
by them in the speaker.
From this point of view it is evident that the problem
for the theory of communication is the delimitation and
analysis of psychological contexts, an inductive problem
exactly the same in form as the problems of the other
sciences. Owing, however, to the difficulty of observ-
ing psychological events and the superficial nature of
the uniformities hitherto observed, the methods employed
in testing whether communication has or has not taken
place are indirect. Since we are unable to observe
references directly we have to study them through
signs, either through accompanying feelings or through
symbols. Feelings are plainly insufficient and symbols
afford a far more sensitive indication.^ But symbols
also mislead and some method of control has to be
devised ; hence the importance of definition. Where
there is reason to rely upon the indicative power of
symbols, no doubt a language purged of all alternative
locutions is scientifically desirable. But in most matters
the possible treachery of words can only be controlled
through definitions, and the greater the number of such
alternative locutions available the less is the risk of
discrepancy, provided that we do not suppose symbols
to have * meaning' on their own account, and so people
the worlc| with fictitious entities.
The question of synonyms leads us naturally to the
consideration of (XIV) Good Use. We have already
seen what correctness of symbolization involves. A
symbol is correct when it causes a reference similar to
that which it symbolizes in any suitable interpreter.
Thus for any given group of symbol users there will
arise a certain fixity of something which will be called
^ The extent to which we rely upon symbols to show us what we
are doing, is illustrated by the recently reported case of the Bishop
who mislaid his railway ticket.
" It's quite all right, my lord ! " said the Inspector, who was also
a Churchwarden.
" No, it isn't," replied the Bishop. " How can I know where I am
going to without it ? "
THE MEANING OF MEANING 207
proper meaning or Good Use. This something tends
to be spoken of as the meaning of the words in question.
What is fixed is the reference which any member of this
group will make in interpreting a symbol on any occa-
sion within the relevant universe of discourse. It is
no doubt very important that these meanings should
not vary beyond narrow limits. But we may be
legitimately anxious to maintain uniform standards
of comparison without finding it necessary to suppose
them supernaturally established or in their own nature
immutable. The belief which is so common that
words necessarily mean what they do derives from the
ambiguity of the term * necessary,' which may stand
either for the fact that this is a requisite of communica-
tion or for the supposed possession by words of intrinsic
* meanings.' Thus it has been argued that such a word
as Good has no synonym and is irreplaceable, so that
persons making good use of this word will have an
idea which they cannot otherwise symbolize — from
which it is held to follow that, since the word is
certainly used, there must be a unique and simple
ethical idea, or, as is sometimes said, a unique property
or predicate, whether possessed by anything or not.
In a precisely similar fashion mathematicians are apt
to aver that if nothing whatever existed, there would
yet be the property of ' being 107 in number.'
These fixities in references are for the most part
supported and maintained by the use of Dictionaries,
and for many purposes * dictionary-meaning ' and * good
use ' would be equivalents. But a more refined sense
of dictionary-meaning may be indicated. The dictionary
is a list of substitute symbols. It says in effect : ** This
can be substituted for that in such and such circum-
stances." It can do this because in these circumstances
and for suitable interpreters the references caused by
the two symbols will be sufficiently alike. The Dic-
tionary thus serves to mark the overlaps between the
references of symbols rather than to define their fields.
2o8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
The two remaining definitions of our list (XV.,
XVI.) arise through this difficulty in the control of
symbols as indications of reference. As we have seen,
the reference which the user of a symbol believes him-
self, thanks to his trust in the symbol, to be making
may be quite different from that which he is actually
making ; a fact which careful comparison of locutions
often reveals. Similarly the reference made by a hearer
will often be quite unlike that made by the speaker.
The final case, in which the meaning of a symbol' is
what the hearer believes the speaker to be referring to,
is perhaps the richest of all in opportunities of mis-
understanding.
CHAPTER X
SYMBOL SITUATIONS
For one word a man is often deemed to be wise
and for one word he is often deemed to be foolish.
We ought to be careful indeed what we say. —
Confucius.
Abba Ammon asked Abba Sisoes, saying, " When
I read in the Book my mind wisheth to arrange the
words so that there may be an answer to any ques-
tion." The old man said unto him, " This is unneces-
sary, for only purity of heart is required. From this
it ariseth that a man should speak without over-
much care." — Palladius, " The Book of Paradise."
The context theory of interpretation as applied to the
use of words may now be sketched in outline. Let us
consider first the hearer's side of the matter, returning
later to the more difficult case of the speaker. As a
preliminary to any understanding of words, we neces-
sarily have a very simple kind of interpretation which
may be called sensory discrimination, or sensory recog-
nition. At this level ^ we can be said to be discrimin-
ating between sounds as sounds (the case where what
is discriminated is a movement of the organs of articu-
lation, or an image of this or of a sound, is quite
parallel) ; and thus we are here interpreting an initial
sign. Clearly unless one sound or image be dis-
tinguished, consciously or unconsciously, from another
no use of words is possible. Usually the discrimination
^ One interpretative process is said to be on a higher level than
another when its occurrence requires the preceding occurrence of
that other (cf. Chapter V., apud Canon III.). Whether the level is
said to be higher or lower is immaterial. Here it will be said to be
higher.
210 THE MEANING OF MEANING
is unconscious, our use of words being habitual ; it can,
however, become conscious, as in learning a foreign
tongue. One of the chief distinctions also between
poetry and strict scientific prose is that in poetry we
must consciously attend to the sensory characters of
the words, whereas in prose we need not do so. This
conscious attention to words as sounds does, however,
tend to impede our further interpretations.
The next stage of interpretation takes us from the
mere recognition of the initial sign as sound of a
certain kind to the recognition of it as a word. The
change is due to a change in the psychological context
of the sign. To recognize it as a sound with a dis-
tinctive character we require a context consisting of the
sign and of other past sound sensations more and less
similar. To recognize it as a word requires that it form
a context with further experiences^ other than sounds.
In what precise fashion we first come to know that
there are words, or to take some sounds as words but
not others, is still to be experimentally investigated,
but as infants we do not make this step by guessing
straight off that people are talking to us. Long before
this surmise could become possible we have developed
an extensive private language through the fact that
certain sounds have come into contexts with certain
other experiences in such a way that the occurrence of
the sound is a sign interpreted by a response similar to
that aroused by the other associated experience. This
interpretation also may be conscious or unconscious.
Normally it is unconscious, but again if difficulty
arises it tends to become conscious. When we under-
stand with ease we are as a rule less aware of the words
used than when, through unfamiliarity of diction or the
strangeness of the referent, we are checked in our
interpretation.
These considerations are of importance in education.
1 A general term here used to cover sensations, images, feelings, etc.,
and perhaps unconscious modifications of our mental state.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 211
Many children appear more stupid than they are, not
through misinterpreting words but through failure to
recognize them first as sounds ; and adults also differ
greatly in their ability to distinguish vocal sounds
when spoken rapidly or with an * accent.' This ability
greatly affects the ease with which languages are
acquired.
With the recognition of the sound as a word the
importance of the prior recognition of the sound appears
to be decreased. This cannot actually be the case.
It is true that we can recognize a word whether it be
pronounced high or low, quickly or slowly, with a
rising intonation or a falling and so on. But however
different two utterances of one word may be as sounds,
they must yet have a common character ; ^ otherwise
they could not be recognized as j:he same word. It is
only in virtue of this character that the two sounds are
in similar psychological contexts and so interpreted
alike. We may be unable consciously to detect this
common character, but this need not surprise us. In
general it seems plausible to assume that simpler stages
of interpretation tend to lapse out of consciousness as
more elaborate developments grow out of them, provided
that they are successfully and easily carried out.
Difficulty or failure at any level of interpretation leads
in most cases to the re-emergence of the lower levels
into consciousness and to a kind of preoccupation with
them which is often an adverse condition for the
higher interpretations whose instability has led to their
emergence.
So far we have reached the level of the understand-
ing of simple names and statements, and a considerable
range of reference can be recorded and communicated
by this means alone. A symbol system of this simple
type is adequate for simple referents or aggregates of
simple referents, but it fails at once for complex
^ It should be remembered that such constitutive characters of
contexts may be of the form ' being either A or B or C, etc'
212 THE MEANING OF MEANING
referents, or groups of referents which have a structure
more intricate than mere togetherness. To symbolize
references to such complex referents complex symbols
with specialized structures are required ; although it
does not appear to be necessary that the symbol should
in any very close way reflect or correspond to the
complexity of the referent. Possibly in primitive
languages this correspondence is closer. In highly
developed languages the means by which complex
symbols are formed, by which they receive their
structure as symbols, are very many and various.
Complex symbols with the same referent may be given
alternative forms even when the simple symbols, the
names, contained remain unaltered. The study of these
.forms is a part of grammar, but a more genuine
interest in, and awareness of, psychological problems
than it is usual for grammarians to possess is required
if they are to be fruitfully discussed.
We may now consider a few of the easier cases of
these complex symbols. Let us begin with the contrast
between proper names and descriptive phrases. We
saw above that particular references require contexts of
a much simpler form than general references, and any
descriptive phrase involves for its understanding a con-
text of the more complicated form. To use such a
symbol as the name of an individual — let us call him
Thomas — we need merely that the name shall be in a
context with Thomas-experiences. A few such ex-
periences are usually sufficient to establish this con-
junction ; for every such experience, since we rarely
encounter an acquaintance without realizing that he has
a name and what that name is, will help to form the
context. Contrast with this the understanding of such
a descriptive name as * my relatives.* Here the ex-
periences required will not be in all cases the same.
At one time a grandfather, at another a niece will present
themselves ; but not upon all occasions will their re-
lationship to us be in any degree a dominant feature, nor
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 213
is the relationship which they agree in bearing to their
grandson and uncle respectively an obvious one. Thus
a range of experiences differing very widely one from
another is necessary if the required context is to be
built up.
* Relatives ' is in fact an abstraction, in the sense
that the reference which it symbolizes cannot be formed
simply and directly by one grouping of experience, but
is the result of varied groupings of experiences whose
very difference enables their common elements to sur-
vive in isolation. This process of selection and elimina-
tion is always at work in the acquisition of a vocabulary
and the development of thought. It is rare for words
to be formed into contexts with non-symbolic experience
directly, for as a rule they are Jearnt only through other
words. We early begin to use language in order to
learn language, but since it is no mere matter of the
acquisition of synonyms or alternative locutions, the
same stressing of similarities between references and
elimination of their differences through conflict is re-
quired. By these means we develop references of
greater and greater abstractness, and metaphor, the
primitive symbolization of abstraction, becomes possible
Metaphor, in the most general sense, is the use of one
reference to a group of things between which a given
relation holds, for the purpose of facilitating the dis-
crimination of an analogous relation in another group.^
In the understanding of metaphorical language one
reference borrows part of the context of another in an
abstract form.
There are two ways in which one reference may
appropriate part of the context of another. Thus a
reference to man may be joined with a reference to sea,
the result being a reference to seamen. No metaphor
is involved in this. When, on the other hand, we take
arms against a sea of troubles, that part of the context
^ For other forms of Metaphor, see Principles of Literary Criticism,
Chapter XXXII.
214 THE MEANING OF MEANING
of the reference to sea which is combined with the other
references appears in an abstract form, i,e.^ the relevant
characters of the sea will not include attraction by the
moon or being the resort of fishes. The poetic value of
the metaphor depends in this case chiefly on the way
in which the ceaseless recurrence of the waves accent-
uates the sense of hopelessness already present — as the
Cuchulain legend well shows.
In fact the use of metaphor involves the same kind
of contexts as abstract thought, the important point
being that the members shall only possess the relevant
feature in common, and that irrelevant or accidental
features shall cancel one another. All use of adjectives,
prepositions, verbs, etc., depends on this principle.
The prepositions are particularly interesting, the kinds of
contexts upon which they depend being plainly different
in extent and diversity of members. Mnside' and
* outside,' it would appear, are the least complicated in
context, and consequently, as might be expected, are
easily retained in cases of disturbance of the speech
functions. The metaphorical aspects of the greater part
of language, and the ease with which any word may
be used metaphorically, further indicate the degree to
which, especially for educated persons, words have
gained contexts through other words. Very simple folk
with small and concrete vocabularies do on the other
hand in some degree approximate to the account given
above (p. 211), since the majority of their words have
naturally been acquired in direct connection with
experience. Their language has throughout many of
the characteristics of proper names. Hence in part their
comparative freedom from confusions, but hence also
the naive or magical attitude to words. Such linguists
may perhaps be said to be beneath the level at which
confusion, the penalty we pay for our power of abstraction,
becomes possible.
In what has been said hitherto we have dealt chiefly
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 215
with the listener, who interprets symbols as they are
given to him. We have yet to examine the processes
by which references, as they proceed in a speaker, are
symbolized. This in some respects is the reverse of the
preceding case, but in others what happens is entirely
different. For the listener the word is the sign, and
without it the required reference does not occur. Possibly
for some mental types an exactly similar process occurs
in the speaker, with the sole difference that the words
are not given from without, but arise through some sort
of internal causation. Here there are not two distinct
processes, reference and symbolization, but only one —
reference through symbols; the situation being such
that the reference is governed by the symbol.
With most thinkers, however, the symbol seems to
be less essential. It can be dispensed with, altered
within limits and is subordinate to the reference for
which it is a symbol. For such people, for the normal
case that is to say, the symbol is only occasionally part
of the psychological context required for the reference.
No doubt for us all there are references which we can
only make by the aid of words, 2.^., by contexts of which
words are members, but these are not necessarily the
same for people of different mental types and levels ;
and further, even for one individual a reference which
may be able to dispense with a word on one occasion
may require it, in the sense of being impossible without
it, on another. On different occasions quite different
contexts may be determinative in respect of similar
references. It will be remembered that two references,
which are sufficiently similar in essentials to be regarded
as the same for practical purposes, may yet' differ very
widely in their minor features. The contexts operative
may include additional supernumerary members. But
any one of these minor features may, through a change
in the wider contexts upon which these narrower
contexts depend^ become an essential element instead
of a mere accompaniment. This appears to happen
2i6 THE MEANING OF MEANING
in the change from word-freedom, when the word is not
an essential member of the context of the reference, to
word-dependence, when it is.
The practical consequences of these differences
between individuals, and between occasions for the same
individual, are important. In discussion we have con-
stantly to distinguish between those who are unable to
modify their vocabularies without extensive disorganiza-
tion of their references, and those who are free to vary
their symbolism to suit the occasion. At all levels of
intellectual performance there are persons to be found
to whom any suggestion that they should change their
symbols comes, and must come, as a suggestion that
they should recant their beliefs. For such people to
talk differently is to think differently, because their words
are essential members of the contexts of their references.
To those who are not so tied by their symbolism this
inability to renounce for the moment favourite modes of
expression usually appears as a peculiar localized
stupidity.^ But it need not necessarily betoken a crude
and superstitious view of the relations of words to things,
for we should be ready to recognize that such adherence
to special words as though they had sovereign and
talismanic virtue, may be a symptom that for the speaker
the word is a necessary part of the reference context :
either because it was so when the reference was first
made, or because non-verbal signs alone would be
insufficient to avoid confusion. On the other hand, too
great a readiness to use any and every suggested symbol
^ Not to be confused with the obstinacy of ofi&cial persons and
others which is often displayed in verbal intransigence : as in the darky
anecdote which C. S. Peirce was wont to relate. — " You know, Massa,
that General Washington and General Jackson was great friends, dey
was. Well, one day General Washington he said to General Jackson,
' General, how tall should you think this horse of mine was ? ' 'I don't
know. General,' says General Jackson. ' How tall is he, General
Washington ? ' ' Why,' says General Washington, ' he is sixteen feet
high.' ' Feet, General Washington ? ' says General Jackson, ' feet.
General Washington ? You mean hands, General.' ' Did I say feet,
General Jackson ? ' said General Washington. ' Do you mean to say
that I said that my horse was sixteen feet high ? Very well, then,
Gen'ral Jackson, if I said feet, if I said feet, then I sticks to it.' "
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 217
may also be a symptom of a low power of discrimination
between references ; suggesting to the observer that the
speaker is making no fixed reference whatever.
But the symptomatology of language behaviour is
an intricate matter and little trust can be put in observa-
tions which are not able to be checked by a wide know-
ledge of the general behaviour of the subject. These
instances are here outlined merely to indicate the kind
of work which is still necessary. It is the sort of work
at which many people are by nature very successful ;
they can often readily decide merely from the way in
which words proceed out of the mouth of a speaker, and
quite apart from the particular words, whether he is
worth listening to. A study of the mannerisms of
politicians and preachers is, however, useful as a check
upon too hasty conclusions. In general, the distinction
between those for whom reference governs symbol and
those for whom symbol governs reference, is constantly
required, although as we have already pointed out the
two conditions, word-independence and word-depend-
ence as they may be called, can rarely be found in
isolation, and most speakers alternate from one con-
dition to the other. In spite of this practical difficulty
the distinction between word-dependence and freedom
is one of the starting-points for linguistic investigation,
because the symptoms of nonsense-speech, verbiage,
psittacism or whatever we may elect to call the de-
vastating disease from which so much of the com-
municative activity of man suffers, are quite different
for the two conditions, and, indeed, without the dis-
tinction, are conflicting and ambiguous. Most writers
or speakers will agree from their own experience that
on some occasions their speech proceeds slowly, heavily
and importantly, because, while they are word-depend-
ents, the necessary words without which nothing what-
ever would happen occur slowly and have to be waited
for, whereas on other occasions the words are emitted
in the same fashion because, being word-free for the
2i8 THE MEANING OF MEANING
moment, they are choosing the symbolism most suited
to the reference and to the occasion, with a view to some
finality of statement.
Neither of these speech processes can be dogmati-
cally established as the only right or proper process.
Word-dependence, 'for instance, must on no account be
identified with psittacism, or be regarded as necessarily
tending thereto. Psittacism is the use of words without
reference ; and the fact that a word is necessary to a
reference is, as will easily be seen, in no way an indica-
tion of an absence of reference. None the less if we
consider those other activities, such as eating or
bicycling, which are similar to speech in that they are
subject to a variable degree of control, there is reason
perhaps to decide in favour of a speech procedure which
should be a mingling of the two extremes of word-
dependence and word-freedom. At certain points in
serious utterances, the degree of deliberate control
should be at its maximum, />., the psychological con-
text into which the word fits and to which the reference
is due should contain as many varied members as
possible. The rest of the symbolization should be left
to the guidance of those systems of narrow contexts
which are called verbal habits, speech-mechanisms, or
the linguistic senses.
Considerable light upon the use of symbols is
thrown, as is always the case in psychological investi-
gation, by pathology. Much may be expected from
the work now in progress on aphasia.^ Meanwhile it
1 See in particular Henri Pi^ron, Thought and the Brain {Int.
Lib. Psych., 1926), Part III,, pp. 149-227, and Kinnier Wilson,
Aphasia {Psyche Miniatures, 1926), where both the emotive and
the symbolic aspects are dealt with.
Dr Henry Head distinguished four varieties of speech disorders,
named from " the most salient defect in the use of words," as follows :
(i) Verbal Aphasia. " Essentially a disturbance of word-formation.
... As speech returns, commands given in spoken or written words
can be executed, but orders which necessitate the evocation of some
word or phrase may be carried out badly."
(2) Syntactical Aphasia. The patient " tends to talk jargon ; not
only is the articulation of the word ill-balanced, but the rhythm of
the phrase is defective, and there is want of grammatical coherence.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 219
is interesting to consider some of the difficulties which
occur in the normal use of language. Corresponding
to the hierarchies of interpretations described above we
have as many levels of possible failure. We may fail
to recognize a word qua sound, both when the word is
spoken to us and when we are about to utter it our-
selves. Secondly, although we are successful in this,
the context required for the understanding of a word
may lapse. This disturbance may be due either to
physiological, or, as the psycho-analysts have shown,
to emotional, interference. The failure may occur over
a name, and in such cases there is reason to suspect
emotional influence ; or it may occur over a descriptive
phrase, or indeed any abstract symbol, in which case,
since many delicate adaptations to widely differing
experiences having only a slender common part are
involved, failure to discriminate this part is likely to be
accompanied by failure over the general abstract field.*
. . . Single words can be written correctly but any attempt to convey
a formulated statement is liable to end in confusion."
(3) Nominal Aphasia. " Essentially a defective use of names and
want of comprehension of the nominal meaning of words or other
symbols." In this connection Dr Head remarks that " the separation
of word-formation from naming and its allied functions is an entirely
new feature in the classification of the aphasias." This seems extra-
ordinary.
(4) Semantic Aphasia. " The affection comprises want of recognition
of the full significance or intention of words and phrases." The patient
" has lost the power of appreciating the ultimate or non-verbal meaning
of words and phrases, and fails to recognize the intention or goal of
actions imposed upon him."
Whatever the clinical value of the above classification, it is by no
means satisfying theoretically, and Dr. Head's uses of the word ' mean-
ing ' involve the dangers and obscurities inseparable from such a ter-
minology. As Kinnier Wilson remarks {op. cit., p. 78) : " Until further
advance is made a psychological arrangement has the serious dis-
advantage of losing touch with cerebral function, and this is not com-
pensated for by the greater scientific legitimacy which is claimed
for it."
1 Which kinds of words vanish first has long been a disputed point.
Thus Ribot, in his classic treatment of Memory {Les Maladies de la
Mimoire, Chapter III.), cites a number of authorities to the effect
that " amnesia progresses from the particular to the general. It first
affects proper names "... etc. But the degree of abstractness of a
word is certainly not less important in this connection than its general-
ity ; nor must it be forgotten that there may be a diversity of functional
disturbances which are indifferently described as * amnesia ' and
' aphasia.* As Ribot well says, " the psychologist is helpless until
anatomy and physiology have made further progress." It is, however.
220 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Those periodical moments of stupidity to which we are
all prone, in which all abstract remarks appear pedantic
and incomprehensible, seem very often to be physiologi-
cally determined.
Passing again to a higher level, there may be no
inability to understand those symbols which are com-
ponents of a complex symbol, and yet we may fail to
interpret the whole sentence. In this case we should
be said not to appreciate the logical form of the symbol.
Logical form might here be defined as what is common
to such complex symbols as ** Crusoe landed from the
wreck," and *^ Quixote fell off Rosinante," where the
components^ may be subjected to a one for one sub-
stitution. We have suggested above that the problem
of logical form requires further attention which it is not
likely to receive on current logical, assumptions. It is
fatal to regard it as an ultimate notion, for what is
involved in interpreting a complex symbol is that the
contexts of the component symbols should, together
with the whole symbol, form a context of higher type.
All discursive symbolization involves this weaving
together of contexts into higher contexts, and inter-
pretation of such complex symbols is of the same nature
as that of simple symbols, with the difference only that
the members of these higher contexts are themselves
contexts. The same mechanisms of abstraction, meta-
phor, etc., occur, and the same levels at which failure
is possible repeat themselves. Thus many people are
able to understand such a symbol as **The fire is hot,"
though baffled by predicative facts or if called upon to
consider relational attributes.
The study of the form or structure of complex refer-
also clear that any given word may be at different levels of abstractness
and generality in different speakers. It may be true in general that
" the new is more vulnerable than the old and the complex than the
simple " (cf. Pi^ron, op. cit., Thought and the Brain, p. 165), but which
of these is which can only be decided on any particular occasion by the
aid of some such context theory as that outlined in Chapter III. above.
1 To what degree these particular symbols are of the same logical
form might give rise to subtle discussion.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 221
ences together with the form or structure of their
symbols is fundamental both for Logic and for what
is usually called grammar, which may be regarded
as the Natural History of symbol systems. This
science has, for obvious reasons, occupied the atten-
tion of educationists and students of language, to the
detriment of more far-reaching inquiries. As norma-
tive, grammar tends, to confine itself to a verbal analysis
of How the King Talks, and, though sometimes
suggestive, applies no real critical apparatus. In par-
ticular it is not realized that a Usage is only Good for
a given universe of discourse, and the ordering of these
different classes of occasions on which words may be
used has never been seriously approached.
A science which can justify itself as a discipline
imparting insight into the nature of the language
medium has at present no such status either with
instructors or instructed. The appointment, fashion-
able in philological circles, of Standing Joint Com-
mittees, to deal with the preliminaries of the science,
is an indication that it is still in the state which led
Smart to exclaim in 1831, ** God help the poor children
who are set to learn the definitions in elementary
grammar." But indeed the traditional problems of
grammar, the establishment of usage, the analysis of
sentences, the classification of the parts of speech, are
secondary problems of minor importance. They are
not open to investigation until the primary problem
of the nature of the language medium to which Sym-
bolism addresses itself has been explored. If this
fundamental investigation can be carried a very little
further it is probable that these later problems upon
which grammarians have lavished the treasures of
human industry and acumen, will be seen in some
cases to be purely artificial, in others to be concerned
with points of detail.*
The wider educational problems which concern the
^ See Appendix A.
222 THE MEANING OF MEANING
acquisition of language in infancy have frequently
received attention, and much useful material has been
amassed by Sully, Meumann, O'Shea, and Piaget ;
but psychologists still make assumptions which pre-
vent any advantage accruing from the investigation.
** The Infant begins by imitating spoken words without
understanding them and then understands them," says
Miinsterberg. Fortunate infant to reach the second
stage ! But unluckily the ingenuous little one does
nothing of the kind. Far more accurate is Rousseau's
view in his Thoughts on Education — ** Inattention on
our part to the real way in which words are understood
by children appears to me the cause of their first errors ;
and these, even when removed, have a great influence
on their turn of mind the remainder of their lives."
The whole question of the acquisition and use of
language requires a fresh foundation, and must be
treated concretely with a view to the free development
of the interpretative faculties.
As an example of the kind of procedure which is
desirable, we may instance the ordering of the levels
at which, as we saw in Chapter IV. (p. 86), * chair,'
* wood,' * fibres,' and so forth become correct symbols
for what we are perched upon. It was there pointed
out in what way the set of confusions known as meta-
physics has arisen through lack of this true grammatical
approach, the critical scrutiny of symbolic procedure. In
the same manner our analyses of Beauty and Meaning
are typical instances of what grammar might long ago
have achieved had grammarians only possessed a better
insight into the necessities of intelligent intercourse,
and a livelier sense of the practical importance of their
science. Preoccupied as is natural by the intricate
details of a vast subject-matter, and master of an im-
posing technique and an elaborate semi-philosophic
nomenclature, the grammarian has unwittingly come
to stand somewhat fixedly in the way of those who
wish to approach the questions — How are words used ?
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 223
and, How should they be used ? The grammarian also
is studying questions somewhat similar at first sight,
namely — Which words are used when? and, Which
should be used when ? He resents the suggestion that
his work may be of small importance through his having
mistaken his question. In short, a normative examina-
tion of words cannot be begun without a normative
examination of thinking, and no important question
of verbal usage can be considered without raising
questions as to the rank or level and the truth or falsity
of the actual references which may employ it. Symbols
cannot be studied apart from the references which they
symbolize and, this being admitted, there is no point
at which our examination of these references may stop
with safety, short of the fullest possible investigation.
Returning now to complexities in references and in
their symbols, the attempt to trace correspondence leads
to the adoption of two distinct sets of considerations as
guiding principles. With one of these, with the study
of reference, we have here been throughout concerned.
Symbolic form varies with variation of reference. But
there are other causes for its variation upon which we
have said something above (pp. 148-9). Besides symboliz-
ing a reference, our words also are signs of emotions,
attitudes, moods, the temper, interest or set of the mind
in which the references occur. They are signs in this
fashion because they are grouped with these attitudes
and interests in certain looser and tighter contexts.
Thus, in speaking a sentence we are giving rise Jo, as
in hearing it we are confronted by, at least two sign-
situations. One is interpreted from symbols to refer-
ence and so to referent ; the other is interpreted from
verbal signs to the attitude, mood, interest, purpose,
desire, and so forth of the speaker, and thence to the
situation, circumstances and conditions in which the
utterance is made.
The first of these is a symbol situation as this has
been described above, the second is merely a verbal
224 THE MEANING OF MEANING
sign-situation like the sign-situations involved in all
ordinary perception, weather prediction, etc. Confusion
between the two must be avoided, though they are
often hard to distinguish. Thus we may interpret
from a symbol to a reference and then take this refer-
ence as a sign of an attitude in the speaker, either the
same or not the same as that to which we should
interpret directly from his utterance as a verbal sign.
The ordering of verbal sign-situations is a large
subject in which various branches may be distinguished.
The following seem, together with strict symboliza-
tion, which it will be convenient to number as (i), to
cover the main functions of language as a means of
communication.
(ii) There are the situations which derive from
attitudes, such as amity or hostility, of the speaker to
his audience. In written language many of the most
obvious signs for these attitudes^ are necessarily lost.
Manner and tone of voice have to be replaced by the
various devices, conventional formulae, exaggerations,
under-statements, figures of speech, underlining, and
the rest familiar in the technique of letter-writing.
Word order is plainly of especial importance in this
connection, but, as we shall see, no general literary
device can be appropriated to any one of the functions
of speech, it is sure to be borrowed on occasion by the
others. Thus for this function almost any symbolic
^ Not only attitudes but symbolic and syntactic elements have
vocal tones as signs. Accents in Hebrew are a good example of the
way in which a written language may attempt to preserve the distinc-
tions which in speech are given by pause and intonation. Of the
Distinctive accents there are four main classes corresponding roughly
with English stops. In addition there are eleven Conjunctive accents,
showing that the word to which they are attached is closely connected
in sense with that which follows. Their neglect has been responsible
for a number of mistranslations which have, nevertheless, become classic.
Thus Isaiah 'xl. 3 : " The voice of him that crieth in the wilderness.
Prepare ye the way of the Lord." The voice, as the R.V. notes, is not
in the wilderness, but cries, " Prepare ye in the wilderness the way of
the Lord." And again Gen. iii. 22 : " The Lord God said. Behold the
man is become as one of us to know good and evil," where a proper
accentuation gives, " Behold the man who hath been like one of us, is
come to know good through evil." (Cf. Saulez, The Romance of the
Hebrew Language, p. 99.)
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 225
transformations can be brought in. For instance
telescoped or highly summarized phraseology is often
used, even where on referential grounds it is unsuitable,
as a mark of courtesy or respect to the hearer, or to
avoid the appearance of pedantry or condescension
which an expanded statement might produce. A speaker
will naturally address a large audience in terms different
from those which he employs in familiar conversation ;
his attitude has changed.
(iii) In a similar fashion our attitude to our referent
in part determines the symbols we use. Here again
complicated cases occur in which ijt may be uncertain
whether our attitude rs itself stated, or merely indicated
through verbal signs. -Esthetic judgments in particular
present this difficulty, and often the speaker himself
would be unable to decide which was taking place.
Emphasis, redundance, and all forms of reinforcement
can be, and are commonly, used for these reasons,
though equally they are used for the sake of their
effects upon hearers (iv) ; or as rallying-points, rests or
supports in case of difficulty of reference (v).
(iv) The structure of our symbols is often determined
by our Intention^ the effects which we endeavour to
promote by our utterance. If we desire a hearer to
commit suicide we may, on occasion, make the same
remarks to him whether our reason for desiring such
action is benevolent interest in his career or a dislike of
his personal characteristics. Thus the symbol modifica-
tion due to the effect intended must not be confused
with that due to the attitude assumed towards an inter-
locutor, although often, of course, they will coincide.
(v) Besides their truth, or falsity, references have a
character which may be called, from the accompanying
feelings, Ease or Difficulty. Two references to the
same referent may be true but differ widely in this ease,
a fact which may be reflected in their symbols. The
two symbols, **I seem to remember ascending Mount
Everest," and ** I went up Everest," may^ on occasion,
226 THE MEANING OF MEANING
stand for no difference in reference and thus owe their
dissimilarity solely to degrees of difficulty in recalling
this uncommon experience. On the other hand this
may, of course, be a real symbolic difference which does
not merely indicate difference of difficulty but states it.
This ease or difficulty should not be confused with
certainty or doubt, or degree of belief or disbelief, which
come most naturally under the heading (iii) of attitude
to the referent. Each of these non-symbolic functions
may employ words either in a symbolic capacity, to
attain the required end through the references produced
in the listener, or in a non-symbolic capacity when the
end is gained through the direct effects of the words.
If the reader will experiment with almost any
sentence he will find that the divergence which it shows
from a purely symbolic notation governed solely by
the nature of the reference which it symbolizes, will be
due to disturbing factors from one or more of the above
four groups. Further, what appears to be the same
difference will sometimes be due to one factor, at other
times to another. In other words, the plasticity of
speech material under symbolic conditions is less than
the plasticity of human attitudes, ends and endeavours,
i,e,^ of the affective-volitional system; and therefore the
same modifications in language are required for quite
different reasons and may be due to quite different
causes. Hence the importance of considering the
sentence in the paragraph, the paragraph in the chapter,
and the chapter in the volume, if our interpretations
are not to be misleading, and our analysis arbitrary.
It is somewhat surprising that grammarians should
have paid so little attention to the plurality of functions
which language has to perform. We have discussed
above (p. 152) the half-hearted fashion in which from
time to time they have admitted an affective side to their
problems. But even this recognition is rarely made
prominent. The five functions here enumerated —
(i) Symbolization of reference ;
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 227
(ii) The expression of attitude to listener ;
(iii) The expression of attitude to referent ;
(iv) The promotion of effects intended ;
(v) Support of reference ;
appear to be exhaustive.
It is, of course, not difficult to mention other factors
which modify the form or structure of symbols. A
hiccup, for instance, may do this, or laryngitis or
brachydactyly ; so will the distance of the audience,
and more seriously the character of the occasion ; or if
the speaker is excited or irritated for some extraneous
reason, his diction may show traces of this affect. The
whole past linguistic history both of the individual and
of the race to which he belongs obviously exercise
enormous influence ; the Scot does not naturally talk
Yiddish. But all these influences upon linguistic form,
though the last is of paramount importance to the
comparative linguist, are not language functions in the
sense here considered.^ The state of the diaphragm,
of the throat, or of the fingers, the acoustics of a church
or a parade-ground are no concern of the Theory of
language ; and although Comparative Philology has
often been regarded as in itself comprising the whole
field of the science, it is clear that this study belongs
essentially to history. In saying this we do not
minimize the interest and importance of the data which
1 The means by which writers can attain their ends must not be
confused with the ends themselves. " Surplusage ! The true artist
will dread that," says Walter Pater, " as the runner on his muscles.
For in truth all art does but consist in the removal of surplusage,
from the last l&nish of the gem-engraver blowing away the last particle
of invisible dust, back to the earliest divination of the finished work
to be, lying somewhere, according to Michelangelo's fancy in the rough-
hewn block of stone." Or as Sydney Smith remarked with great
acumen, a prose style may often be improved by striking out every other
word from each sentence when written. Professor Conington, however
{Miscellaneous Writings, Vol. I., p. 197.. Edited by J. A. Symonds,
1872), points out that " there are occasions when a certain amount of
surplusage may sometimes be admitted into harmonious prose for no
better reason than to sustain the balance of clause against clause, and
to bring out the general rhythmical effect " — the question being clearly
one of purpose. In any case, style, balance, rhythm, etc., are not ends
in themselves, but may be employed in connection with any of the
functions.
228 THE MEANING OF MEANING
it provides. The functions we are examining are those
necessarily operative in all communication, the ways in
which the work of speech is performed, the essential
uses which speech serves.
Whether our list is exhaustive or not, it is at any
rate certain these functions cannot be reduced in
number without great loss of clarity and the omission
of considerations in many cases vital to the understand-
ing of the detail of language behaviour.
In translation, for example, the lack of such an
analysis of the ways in which words are used has led to
much confusion. Faced by the unaccountable failure
of apparently accurate renderings, linguists have been
too ready to accept the dicta of philosophers on this
point, as well as their vague vocabulary. Thus, accord-
ing to Sapir, ** all the effects of the literary artist have
been calculated, or intuitively felt, with reference to the
formal * genius ' of his own language ; they cannot be
carried over without loss or modification. Croce is
therefore perfectly right in saying that a work of literary
art can never be translated. Nevertheless, literature
does get itself translated, sometimes with astonishing
adequacy."^ So a problem appears to arise, and as a
solution it is suggested that ** in literature there are
intertwined two distinct kinds or levels of art — a gener-
alized, non-linguistic art, which can be transferred
without loss into an alien linguistic medium, and a
specifically linguistic art that is not transferable. I
believe the distinction is entirely valid, though we
never get the two levels pure in practice. Literature
moves in language as a medium, but that medium
comprises two layers, the latent content of language —
our intuitive record of experience — and the particular
conformation of a given language — the specific how of
our record of experience. Literature that draws its
sustenance mainly — never entirely — from the lower
level, say a play of Shakespeare's, is translatable
1 op. cit., Language, pp. 237-239.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 229
without too great a loss of character. If it moves in
the upper rather than in the lower level — a fair example
is a lyric of Swinburne's — it is as good as untranslat-
able." And to illustrate this distinction, literature is
compared with science ; a scientific truth is said to be
impersonal, *' in its essence untinctured by the linguistic
medium in which it finds expression. . . . Neverthe-
less it must have some expression, and that expression
must needs be a linguistic one. Indeed, the apprehen-
sion of the scientific truth is itself a linguistic process,
for thought is nothing but language denuded of its
outward garb." Literature, on the other hand, is
** personal and concrete. . . . The artist's intuition, to
use Croce's term, is immediately fashioned out of a
generalized human experience. . . . Certain artists
whose spirit moves largely in the non-linguistic (better,
in the generalized linguistic layer), even find a certain
difficulty in getting themselves expressed." Whitman
and others are supposed to be, as it were, '* striving for
a generalized art language, a literary algebra. . . .
Their art expression is frequently strained, it sounds
at times like a translation from an unknown original —
which indeed is precisely what it is."
If we attempt to deal with the difficulties of trans-
lation in terms of the * formal genius ' and * latent
content' of the linguistic medium, and of the 'non-
linguistic layer ' in which ' intuition ' moves, mysteries
are inevitable. But a recognition of the richness of
the means at the disposal of poetry, with which we
shall shortly be concerned, allows us to dispense with
the doubtful assistance of the Neapolitan dialectic.
Translation, in fact, may succeed or fail for several
quite intelligible reasons. Any purely symbolic use of
words can be reproduced if in the two vocabularies
similar symbolic distinctions have been developed.
Otherwise periphrases or new symbols will be required,
and the degree of possible correspondence is a matter
which can be simply investigated. On the other hand.
230 THE MEANING OF MEANING
the more the emotive functions are involved the less
easy will be the task of blending several of these in two
vocabularies. And further, the greater the use made
in the original of the direct effects of words through
rhythm, vowel-quality, etc., the more difficult will it be
to secure similar effects in the same way in a different
sound-medium. Thus some equivalent method has to
be introduced, and this tends to disturb the other
functions so that what is called the * success ' of a trans-
lation is often due chiefly to its own intrinsic merits.
With an understanding both of the functions of
language and of its technical resources the criticism of
translations provides a particularly fascinating and
instructive method of language study.
The view that speech on almost all occasions presents
a multiple, not a single, sign-situation throws a fresh
light upon many problems of traditional grammar. In
particular the treatment of sentence formation and syn-
tax will have to be undertaken afresh. From this point
of view we may note as typical a philologist^ content
with merely a dual language function in his definitions
of the word and the sentence.
A word is an articulate sound symbol in its aspect of
denoting something which is spoken about.
A sentence is an articulate sound symbol in its aspect
of embodying some volitional attitude of the speaker to the
listener,
Dr Gardiner's * volitional attitude ' would appear to
be included in No. IV of our list of functions. It will
be generally agreed that no use of speech can be ad-
mitted to be an attempt at communication unless this
function is concerned.
The utility to grammarians of the terms so defined
is not obvious. What is of importance is the hetero-
geneity which the author rightly insists upon between
the two functions of speech mentioned. The other
^ Dr A. Gardiner in art. cit., The British Journal of Psychology
(General Section), Vol, XII, Part iv., April. 1922. See, however, his
The Theory of Speech and Language, 1932, p. 98.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 231
functions which need to be considered in any compre-
hensive analysis of Language are not less heterogeneous.
The charge is sometimes brought against writers on
psychology that they have neglected the side of the
listener. It is certainly true that preoccupation with
* expression ' as the chi^f function of language ^ has been
disastrous. But this is not so much because of the
neglect of the listener thereby induced as because of the
curiously narcotic effect of the word * expression ' itself.
There are certain terms in scientific discussion which
seem to make any advance impossible. They stupefy
and bewilder, yet in a way satisfy, the inquiring mind,
and though the despair of those who like to know what
they have said, are the delight of all whose main
concern with words is the avoidance of trouble. * Ex-
pression ' is such an one, * embody ' is another, and we
have just been concerned with 'meaning' in detail.
What is wanted is a searching inquiry into the processes
concealed by such terms, and as our analysis shows the
introduction of the listener does little to throw light upon
the matter. Moreover, psychologists and others, when
they have been concerned with the fact that Speech does
imply a listener, have not failed to insist upon the point.
Thus Dittrich, the holder of one of the few recognized
Chairs of the subject, wrote in 1900 : '* For linguistic
science it is fundamental that language is an affair not
merely of expression but also of impression^ that communi-
cation is of its essence, and that in its definition this
must not be overlooked." He accordingly includes in
his own definition the words, ' in so far as understanding
could be attempted by at least one other individual."*
What such additional words contribute to a science
may be doubted ; but it is certain that von Humboldt
went too far in this direction when he said:* **Man
only understands himself when he has experimentally
tested the intelligibility of his words on others."
^ As, for example, Wundt, Volkerpsychologie, 3rd ed., I., p. 43.
2 O. Dittrich, Die Probleme der Sprachpsychologie, pp. 11-12.
* Sprachphilosophische Werke, edited by Steinthal (1884), p. 281.
232 THE MEANING OF MEANING
Steinthal's insistence on the part played by the listener
in the origin and development of language is also well
known ; ^ and de Saussure in his standard treatment of
speech functions which, as we saw in our first chapter,
was otherwise unsatisfactory, goes so far as to draw
pictures of the listener attending to the speaker and so
completing the ^language circuit.'*. A similar circuit
for volitional signs is diagrammatically completed by
Martinak through the fulfilment of the wish by the
listener ; ^ while Baldwin devotes over seventy pages of
the second volume of his Thought and Things to language
as affected by its functions in intercourse, and the
relations of speaker and listener in what he calls
"predication as elucidation" and ** predication as
proposal."*
But the most important practical recognition of the
fact that language has many functions is to be found in
Brunot's massive onslaught on current grammatical
procedure.* Already, in 1903, the doyen of French
scholarship had convinced himself of the necessity of
abandoning the so-called * parts of speech,' either as a
method of approach or in actual teaching; and in 1908,
as Professor at the Sorbonne, he recorded this conviction
with clarity and vigour. For fifteen years, in ten
revisions, he worked over the debated ground : *' After
each revision I returned to the same conclusion — that
no tinkering with the old scheme, no re-grouping of the
facts of language would be satisfactory so long as the
classification by parts of speech was retained. We must
make up our minds to devise methods of language-
study no longer drawn up on the basis of signs but on
the basis of ideas." Unlike the majority of linguists.
Professor Brunot is fully aware that a purely psycho-
logical analysis of the speech situation lies behind this
^ Abriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Vol. I., 2nd ed. (1881), p. 374.
2 Op. cit., Cours de Linguistique GSndrale (191 6), p. 28,
^ Op. cit., Psychologische Untersuchungen zur Bedeutungslehre (1901),
p. 65.
4 Vol. II.. p. 152.
s La Pensde et la langue (1922).
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 233
functional approach to language, and it is interesting to
find that his exhaustive account of French idiom is in
accordance with the fivefold division proposed above.
We may now state the connection of reference to
symbol, subject to these disturbing factors, more
accurately. The reference of a symbol we see now,
is only one of a number of terms which are relevant
to the form of a symbol. It is not even the dominant
factor in most cases, and the more primitive the speech
which we investigate, the less important does it appear
to be. None the less, since, for all our finer dealings
with things not immediately present — /.^., not in very
close and simple contexts with our present experience —
since for all our more complicated or refined references
we need supports and distinguishing marks, this strictly
symbolic function of words easily becomes more im-
portant than any other. It is thus natural in an account
of the functions of words in ordinary usage to begin
with strict symbolization.
In the normal case not one, but a variety of symbol
forms is possible so far as the reference which they have
to accompany is concerned. The reference could be
accompanied let us say by A, or by B, or by C, or by
D ; these being symbols of different forms or structure.
Any one of these is a possible member of the context
upon which the reference depends, in the sense that its
inclusion would not alter the reference. It is this range
of possible forms which enables the symbol to perform
so many different services, to be a sign in so many
distinct though contemporary situations.
Suppose now the speaker, in addition to referring,
assumes some attitude towards his audience, let us say
amity. Then among these symbolic forms A, B, C, D,
there may be one, say D, which is more suitable to the
special shade of this attitude than the others, in the
sense that it is a possible member of the context of the
attitude, one of that group of symbols whose utterance
would not alter the attitude. If this were all that were
234 THE MEANING OF MEANING
involved D would be uttered, since any other suitable
remark would presumably involve some change in the
reference.
Suppose further that the speaker feels, let us say,
disgust, towards his referent. This will lead in similar
fashion to further modification of the symbol. So again
will the speaker's hopes, desires and intentions with
regard to the effects of his remarks. Often the same
modifications will satisfy both these conditions, but
sometimes, when for instance the speaker's own atti-
tude and that which he wishes to promote are for any
reason discrepant, the natural word-attitude contexts
must lapse, and judicious symbolization becomes for
some people more difficult. In a similar fashion the
speaker's own clearness or vagueness in reference has
often to be disguised or to submit to compromise. His
certainty or uncertainty, his doubt or degree of belief
may as we have above remarked, be best ranked with
general attitudes to referents.
Most writing or speech then which is of the mixed
or rhetorical kind as opposed to the pure, or scientific,
or strictly symbolic, use of words, will take its form as
the result of compromise. Only occasionally will a
symbolization be available which, without loss of its
symbolic accuracy,, is also suitable (to the author's atti-
tude to his public), appropriate (to his referent), judicious
(likely to produce the desired effects) and /^r^^^w^/ (indi-
cative of the stability or instability of his references).
The odds are very strongly against there being many
symbols able to do so much. As a consequence in most
speech some of these functions are sacrificed. In ^ good
morning' and 'good-bye' the referential function lapses,
2>., these verbal signs are not symbols, it is enough
if they are suitable. Exclamations and oaths similarly
are not symbols ; they have only to satisfy the condition
of appropriateness, one of the easiest of conditions at
the low-level of subtlety to which these emotional signs
are developed. The only contexts required here would
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 235
seem to be of the simplest order possible in psychology,
as simple as the toothache-groan context. Orders or
commands must satisfy reference and purpose conditions,
but may, indeed often must, avoid both suitability and
appropriateness in the senses used above, as for instance
in many military orders. Threats on the other hand
can easily dispense with reference, i.e,^ be meaningless,
and may be governed only by the purpose intended.
Questions and requests are similar to commands in the
respects above mentioned and differ from them merely
in the means through which the effects desired are
sought.
These instances of the dropping of one or more of
the language functions lead us naturally to the most
remarkable and most discussed "case of such variation,
the distinction, namely, between the prose and the
poetic uses of language. In these terms the distinction
is not happily symbolized, poetry being best defined
for the most general and most important purposes by
relation to the state or states of mind produced by the
* poem ' in suitable readers and without any relation to
the precise verbal means. Instead therefore of an
antithesis of prose and poetry we may substitute that
of symbolic and emotive uses of language. In strict
symbolic language the emotional effects of the words
whether direct or indirect are irrelevant to their employ-
ment. In evocative language on the other hand all
the means by which attitudes, moods, desires, feelings,
emotions can be verbally incited in an audience are
concerned. We have already discussed at some length
(p. 159) the importance of distinguishing between these
two uses of language, and we may here add a few
further considerations dealing with the means by which
evocative languages secure their effects.
These accessory effects of words have often been
described by men of letters, without much having been
done towards their detailed study. Lafcadio Hearn, for
instance, writes that for him ** words have colour, form
236 THE MEANING OF MEANING
character. They have faces, ports, manners, gesticu-
lations : they have moods, humours, eccentricities : they
have tints, tones, personalities. I write for beloved
friends who can see colour in words, can smell the
perfume of syllables in blossom, can be shocked with
the fine elfish eccentricity of words. And in the
eternal order of things, words will eventually have their
rights recognized by the people."
Words or arrangements of words evoke attitudes both
directly as sounds, and less directly in several different
ways through what are called loosely * associations.*
The effects of the words due directly (z.e.y physiologic-
ally) to their sound qualities are probably slight and
only become important through such cumulative and
hypnotic effects as are produced through rhythm and
rhyme. More important are the immediate emotional
accompaniments due to past experience of them in their
typical connections. To get these, there is no need for
the connections themselves to be recalled. Thirdly
there are the effects ordinarily alluded to as the emotions
due to associations, which arise through the recall of
whole situations. So far we have confined our attention
to verbal languages, but the same distinction and the
same diversity of function arise with non-verbal
languages. When we look at a picture, as when we
read a poem, we can take up one or both of two attitudes.
We can submit to it as a stimulus, letting its colour-
qualities and form-qualities work upon us emotionally.
Or with a different attitude we can interpret its forms
and colours (its words). The first of these attitudes
is not an indispensable preliminary to the second.
To suppose so would be to mistake the distinction.
Mr Clive Bell has performed a useful service in point-
ing out that many people are accustomed to pass, in
the case of pictures, to the second of these attitudes,
omitting the first entirely. Such omission, of course,
deprives the picture of its chief part. Professor Saints-
bury has performed a similar service for hasty readers.
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 237
But although the first of these attitudes, submission
to the work of art as a stimulus, is in need of encourage-
ment, the second attitude, that of interpretation, is
equally necessary. At this point both critics become
over zealous for an aspect of the truth. After allowing
pure forms to affect us, we must, in most cases, go on
to interpret if we are to allow the picture or poem to
produce its full result. In so doing, there are two
dangers which good sense will avoid. One is the
danger of personal associations, concerning which
nothing need be said. The other is the danger of con-
fusing the evocation of an attitude towards a situation
with the scientific description of it. The difference
between these very different uses of language is most
clearly apparent in the case of words. But all that we
have said will apply equally to the contrast between
art and photography. It is the difference between the
presentation of an object which makes use of the direct
emotional disturbances produced by certain arrange-
ments, to reinstate the whole situation of seeing, or
hearing, the object, together with the emotions felt
towards it, and on the other hand, a presentation which
is purely scientific, /.^., symbolic. The attitude evoked
need not necessarily be directed towards the objects
stated as means of evoking it, but is often a more
general adjustment. It will make these distinctions
more plain if we consider them in the closely analogous
field of painting, where emotions do not enter in different
ways but only with an increased difference and dis-
tinction between them in accordance with the ways by
which they enter. Exactly as we may distinguish the
direct emotional effects of sound qualities and stresses,
so we can distinguish the similar direct effects of colour
and form. Just as, for instance, vowel and consonantal
quality may conflict with rhythm, so colour may conflict
with form : that is, they may evoke incongruous
emotions. Similarly, it is admitted that colours acquire
emotional eiiects through experience, emotional effects
238 THE MEANING OF MEANING
which are not the emotional effects of their associations.
An Eskimo and a Moor, for instance, are differ-
ently affected by English colouring, because different
selections of it are familiar, quite apart from association.
Emotional effects are naturally disregarded in the
scientific use of language ; it is evident that by includ-
ing them language may be made to serve a double
function. If we wish, for instance, to describe how,
when we are impatient, a clock seems to go slowly, we
may either describe psychologically the peculiarities in
the expansion of our sense of duration, using symbols
for the elements of the situation, and disregarding the
emotional evocations of these symbols, or we may use
symbols for a selection of these elements only, and so
dispose them that they reinstate in the listener the ap-
propriate emotions. We find in practice that these two
methods of using language conflict in most cases,
though not in all ; Professor Mackenzie has urged that
when Shelley wrote
" Hail to thee blithe spirit,
Bird thou never wert,"
he ^*did not really mean to deny that the lark belongs
to the class Aves " ; and conversely a statement ade-
quate symbolically may have little emotional effect.
Exceptions occur, but this conflict is so general that the
usual antithesis between analysis and intuition, between
science and art, between prose and poetry, are justified.
They are due simply to the fact that an arrangement of
symbols which will reinstate a situation by evoking
emotions similar to those originally involved will, as
things happen, very rarely be an adequate symbol for it.
M. Bergson and the analysts are therefore both in the
right, each maintaining the importance of one of the
two functions of language. They are in the wrong
only in not seeing clearly that language must have these
two functions. It is as though a dispute arose whether
the mouth should be for speaking or for eating.
The complexities and ambiguities in the use of
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 239
language for purposes of evocation are admittedly not
less than those from which scientific language suffers.
But when two people differ in what they are in ordinary
usage perfectly correct in calling "their interpretations"
of a poem or a picture, the procedure to be adopted is
quite other than that advisable should they differ in
their interpretations of a physicist's remarks. None the
less, there is, in the two cases, an underlying similarity
due to the fact that both are sign-situations though only
the second is symbolic in the strict sense of the term.
The difference between the two uses may be more
exactly characterized as follows : In symbolic speech
the essential considerations are the correctness of the
symbolization and the truth of the references. In
evocative speech the essential consideration is the
character of the attitude aroused. Symbolic statements
may indeed be used as a means of evoking attitudes,
but when this use is occurring it will be noticed that the
truth or falsity of the statements is of no consequence
provided that they are accepted by the hearer.
The means by which words may evoke feelings and
attitudes are many and offer an alluring field of study
to the literary psychologist. As sounds, and again as
movements of articulation, and also through many
subtle networks of association, the contexts of their
occurrences in the past, they can play very directly upon
the organized impulses of the affective-volitional systems.
But above all these in importance, heightening and
controlling and uniting these subordinate influences, are
the rhythmic and metrical effects of word arrangements.
If, as may reasonably be supposed, rhythms and especi-
ally metres have to a small degree an hypnotic effect,
the very marked difference in evocative power between
words so arranged and words without recurrent system
is readily accounted for. Some degree of hypersesthesia
would be a convenient assumption to explain further
the greater sensitiveness to vowel and consonantal
characters which accompanies metrical reading, and the
240 THE MEANING OF MEANING
flat or tinny effect of the same syllables occurring in
vers Izbres, Emotionality, exaggeration of belief-feelings,
the occulting of the critical faculties, the suppression of
the questioning — * Is this so as a matter of fact?' —
attitude, all these are characteristics of metrical experi-
ences and fit in well with a hypnosis assumption. When
we add to these effects of metre, its powers of indirect
representation (as the words ^swinging', * rolling',
* heavy ', * rushing', * broken ', applied to rhythms
indicate) its powers of directly controlling emotions (as
the words Mulling', ^stirring', ^solemn', * gay ' indicate)
and its powers of unification (as at a low leyel its use as
a mere mnemonic shows), we shall not be surprised to
find it so extensively present in the evocative use of
speech.
The indirect means of arousal which are possible
through words need not be dwelt upon here at length.
Through statement ; through the excitement of imagery
(often effected at low levels of refinement by the use of
metaphor) ; through metaphor itself — used not, as in
strict symbolizing, to bring out or stress a structural
feature in a reference, but rather to provide, often under
cover of a pretence of this elucidation, new sudden and
striking collocations of references for the sake of the
compound effects of contrast, conflict,- harmony, inter-
inanimation and equilibrium which may be so attained,
or used more simply to modify and adjust emotional
tone; through association; through revival; and
through many subtle linkings of mnemic situations,
words are capable of exerting profound influence quite
apart from any assistance from the particular passions,
needs, desires or circumstances of the hearer. With
the further aid of these there is, as has often been illus-
rated in history, no limit to their evocative range.
The characteristic feature of these forms of evocation
which occur in the arts, where severance from such
personal particular circumstances is necessary for the
sake of universality, is the constant mingling of direct
SYMBOL SITUATIONS 241
and indirect means. The neglect or underestimation
of the direct means available in poetry is, however,
common in those who do not use the medium, and has
often led to attempts to exclude poetry from the arts
on the ground that its appeal is indirect only, through
ideas, and not sensory in character. This contention
is due merely to ignorance.
It is unfortunately very necessary to insist upon
the importance of the distinction between these two
functions of speech. Confusion between them leads
to wrangles in which Intellect and Emotion, Reason
and Feeling, Logic and Intuition, are set in artificial
opposition to one another ; though as is easily per-
ceived, these two functions need not in any way trespass
upon one another's provinces.^ None the less, analogous
sets of recording symbols have developed for each use —
a Truth, Reality and Universality for symbolic speech
and a Truth, Reality and Universality for evocative
speech. This formal parallelism is very misleading,
since the words Truth^ and Truth^ are totally distinct
as symbols, the first being defined in terms of reference,
while the second is equivalent to appropriate and
genuine, and does not involve reference. It is un-
fortunate that devotees of literature should so often pass
their whole active mental existence under the impression
that through their antitheses of Intuition and Logic in
this field they are contemplating a fundamental issue.
The chaos to which uncritical reliance upon speech
has reduced this topic, together with so many others
which rightly arouse intense interest, is by itself a
powerful argument for the prosecution of the inquiry
into Symbolism. When we remember the fruitless
questionings and bewilderment caused by the irrelev-
ancies and the intrinsic peculiarities of words, not only
to children but to all who endeavour to pass beyond the
mere exchange of accepted and familiar references, we
1 For a fruitful application of the distinction in the treatment of
disorders of speech, see Kinniej Wilson, op. cii.. Aphasia (1926),
pp. 53-62.
242 THE MEANING OF MEANING
shall not be tempted to think that the proposal seriously
to investigate language must be either a joke or a form
of pedantry — as those do who, having never been
troubled by thought, have never found any difficulty
in expressing it. The view that language gives rise
to no such difficulties can be dispelled for all intelligent
people either by observation or by personal experience.
The opposite view that the difficulties are too formid-
able to be overcome, though more worthy of the human
mind, must be rejected for similar reasons. What
language already does, is the ground for hope that
it may in time be made fully to perform its functions.
To this end the Theory of Signs and Education must
co-operate. No formal apparatus of Canons and Rules,
no demands that abuses of language shall be reformed,
will take effect, unless the habits which will enable
language to be freely used are developed. What is
required is not only strictness of definition and rigidity
of expression, but also plasticity, ease and freedom in
rapid expansion when expansion is needed. These
abilities can only be developed through the training
which at present is devoted to matters for whose
understanding an adequate language is a prerequisite.
A new Science, the Science of Symbolism, is now
ready to emerge, and with it will come a new educa-
tional technique. Language is the most important
instrument we possess. At present we attempt to
acquire and to impart a knowledge of its use by
mimicry, by intuition, or by rule of thumb, in contented
ignorance of its nature. It is not by his own efforts
that the modern child is in so many ways better equipped
than Aristotle; for such improvement must be the result
of co-operative endeavour. Those who are not satisfied
by the solutions of linguistic problems offered in these
pages will, it is to be hoped, discover better. If, how-
ever, our claim to have provided a new orientation is
a just one, the far-reaching practical results which we
have discussed are already capable of attainment.
SUMMARY
At the close of a long discussion involving the
detailed examination of many separate problems,
elaborate examples of the application of method,
historical illustrations and special criticisms of vicious
tendencies, a brief outline of the main topics dealt with
is desirable in order to give a general impression of
the scope and task of the Science of Symbolism. Only
by excluding all allusion to many subjects not less im-
portant than those here mentioned, can we avoid the
loss of perspective inevitably entailed by the list of
Contents to which the reader is referred.
I. — Thoughts^ Words and Things,
The influence of language upon Thought is of the
utmost importance. Symbolism is the study of this
influence, which is as powerful in connection with every-
day life as in the most abstruse speculation.
There are three factors involved when any statement
is made, or interpreted.
1. Mental processes.
2. The symbol.
3. A referent — something which is thought *of.'
The theoretical problem of Symbolism is —
How are these three Related?
The practical problem, since we must use words in
discussion and argument, is —
How far is our discussion itself distorted by
habitual attitudes towards wordsy and lingering
assumptions due to theories no longer openly held but
still allowed to guide our practice ?
The chief of these assumptions derives from the
magical theory of the name as part of the thing, the
theory of an inherent connection between symbols and
243
244 THE MEANING OF MEANING
referents. This legacy leads in practice to the search
for the meaning of words. The eradication of this
habit can only be achieved by a study of Signs in general,
leading up to a referential theory of Definition by which
the phantom problems resulting from such superstitions
may be avoided. When these have been disposed of,
all subjects become more accessible and more interesting.
2. — The Power of Words,
The magic of words has a special place in general
magic. Unless we realize what have been the natural
attitudes towards words until recent years we shall fail
to understand much in the behaviour of logicians and
others among modern mystics, for these same attitudes
still persist in underground and unavowed fashion. At
the same time the theory of signs can throw light upon
the origins of these magical beliefs and their persistence.
3 . — Sign -situations.
In all thinking we are interpreting signs.
In obvious cases this is readily admitted. In the
more complex cases of mathematics and grammar more
complicated forms of the same activity only are involved.
This is hidden from us by an uncritical use of symbols,
favouring analyses of * meaning' and * thinking * which
are mainly occupied with mirages due to * linguistic
refraction.'
We must begin therefore with Interpretation.
Our Interpretation of any sign is our psycho-
logical reaction to it, as determined by our past
experience in similar situations, and by our present
experience.
If this is stated with due care in terms of causal
contexts or correlated groups we get an account of
judgment, belief and interpretation which places the
psychology of thinking on the same level as the other
SUMMARY 245
inductive sciences, and incidentally disposes of the
* Problem of Truth.'
A theory of thinking which discards mystical rela-
tions between the knower and the known and treats
knowledge as a causal affair open to ordinary scientific
investigation, is one which will appeal to common-
sense inquirers.
Sign-situations are always linked in chains and the
simplest case of such a sign-chain is best studied in
Perception.
4. — Signs in Perception,
The certainty of our knowledge of the external
world has suffered much at the hands of philosophers
through the lack of a theory of signs, and through
conundrums made possible by our habit of naming
things in haste without providing methods of identifi-
cation.
The paradoxes of really round pennies which appear
elliptical, and so forth, are due to misuses of symbols ;
principally of the symbol * datum.'
What we * see ' when we look at a table is first,
modifications of our retinas. These are our initial signs.
We interpret them and arrive at fields of vision, bounded
by surfaces of tables and the like. By taking beliefs in
these as second order signs and so on, we can proceed
with our interpretation, reaching as results tables, wood,
fibres, cells, molecules, atoms, electrons, etc. The later
stages of this interpretative effort are physics. Thus
then^ is no study called * philosophy ' which can add to
or correct physics, though symbolism may contribute
to a systematization of the levels of discourse at which
* table ' and ' system of molecules ' are the appropriate
symbols.
The method by which confusions are to be extirpated
in this field is required wherever philosophy has been
246 THE MEANING OF MEANING
applied. It rests partly upon the theory of signs, partly
upon the Rules of Symbolization discussed in the next
chapter.
5. — The Canons of Symbolism,
Underlying all communication, and equally funda-
mental for any account of scientific method, are the
rules or conventions of symbolism.
Some of these are obvious enough when stated, but,
perhaps for this reason, have been generally neglected.
Others have been cursorily stated by logicians, con-
cerned hitherto with a narrow range of traditional
problems. When, however, all are fully set forth in
the forms implied by systematic discourse, the solutions
of many long-standing problems are found to be de facto
provided.
Examples of such problems are those of Truth,
Reality, Universals, Abstractions, Negative Facts,
Virtuous Triangles, Round-squares and so forth.
The rules or postulates in question which most need
formulation are Six in number, and appear as the
Canons of Sj/mbolism, They derive from the nature of
mental processes, but, being required for the control
of symbolization, are stated in terms of symbols and
referents.
The observance of these Canons ensures a clear
prose style, though not necessarily one intelligible to
men of letters.
6. — Definition,
In any discussion or interpretation of symbols we
need a means of identifying referents. The reply to
the question what any word or symbol refers to consists
in the substitution of a symbol or symbols which can
be better understood.
Such substitution is Definition. It involves the
selection of known referents as starting-points, and
SUMMARY 247
the identification of the definiendum by its connection
with these.
The defining routes, the relations most commonly
used for this purpose, are few in number, though
specialists in abstract thought can employ others. In
fact they may be pragmatically generalized under eight
headings. Familiarity with these defining routes not
only conduces to ease of deportment in reasoning and
argument, but offers a means of escape from the maze
of verbal cross-classifications which the great variety
of possible view-points has produced.
7. — The Meaning of Beauty,
The application of this procedure in practice may be
demonstrated by taking one of _the most bewildering
subjects of discussion, namely Esthetics.
Beauty has been very often and very differently
defined — and as often declared to be indefinable. If,
however, we look for the characteristic defining relations,
we find that the definitions hitherto suggested reduce
conveniently to sixteen.
Each of these then provides a distinct range of
referents, and any such range may be studied by those
whom it attracts. If in spite of the disconcerting
ambiguity thu:^ revealed (and all freely-used terms
are liable to similar ambiguity) we elect to continue
to employ the term Beauty as a shorthand substitute
for the definition we favour, we shall do so only on
grounds of ethics and expediency and at the risk of all
the confusions to which such behaviour must give rise.
In addition to its symbolic uses * Beauty ' has also
its emotive uses. These have often been responsible
for the view that Beauty is indefinable, since as an
emotive term it allows of no satisfactory verbal sub-
stitute. Failure to distinguish between the symbolic
and emotive uses is the source of much confusion in
discussion and research.
248 THE MEANING OF MEANING
8. — The Meaning of Philosophers,
Proceeding on the same principles to * Meaning'
itself, we find a widely divergent set of opinions in the
writings of the best philosophers. The recent dis-
cussions in Mind and in Brain show the helplessness
of expert disputants in dealing with the resultant
ambiguities of the term. The procedure of the ablest
and most practical group of American thinkers, the
Critical Realists of 192 1, reveals the same incompet-
ence, while the use made of the word by so influential
an authority as Professor Miinsterberg is equally open
to objection. In fact, a careful study of the practice
of prominent writers of ^11 schools leads to the con-
clusion that in spite of a tacit assumption that the
term is sufficiently understood, no principle governs
its usage, nor does any technique exist whereby
confusion may be avoided.
9. — The Meaning of Meaning,
When, however, the problem is scientifically ap-
proached, we find that no less than sixteen groups of
definitions may be profitably distinguished in a field
where the most rigid accuracy is desirable.
In other cases ambiguity may be fatal to the par-
ticular topic in which it occurs, but here such ambiguity
even renders it doubtful what discussion itself is. For
some view of * meaning ' is presupposed by every
opinion upon anything, and an actual change of view
on this point will for a consistent thinker involve change
in all his views.
The definitions of Meaning niay be dealt with under
three headings. The first comprises Phantoms lin-
guistically generated ; the second groups and dis-
tinguishes Occasional and erratic usages ; the third
covers Sign and Symbol situations generally.
One interesting effect of such an exposition is that
SUMMARY 249
it forces us for the time being to abandon the term
* meaning ' itself, and to substitute either other terms,
such as intention,' * value,' * referent,' * emotion ' for
which it is being used as a synonym, or the expanded
symbol which, contrary to expectation, emerges after
a little trouble.
A careful study of these expansions leaves little
room for doubt that what philosophers and meta-
physicians have long regarded as an abstruse and
ultimate notion, falling entirely within their peculiar
domain and that of such descriptive psychologists as
had agreed to adopt a similar terminology, has been
the subject of detailed study and analysis by various
special sciences for over half a century. During the
last few years advances of biology, and the physiological
investigation of memory and heredity have placed the
* meaning ' of signs in general beyond doubt, and it
is here shown that thought and language are to be
treated in the same manner.
I o. — Symbol Situations,
The first stage of the Development of Symbolism as
a Science is thus complete, and it is seen to be the
essential preliminary to all other sciences. Together
with such portions of grammar and logic as it does
not render superfluous it must provide both what has
been covered by the title Philosophy of Mathematics,
and what has hitherto been regarded as M^/««-physics —
supplementing the work of the scientist at either end
of his inquiry.
All critical interpretation of Symbols requires an
understanding of the Symbol situation, and here the
main distinction is that between the condition in which
reference is made possible only by symbols (Word-
dependence) and that for which a free choice of symbols
can be made (Word-freedom). The examination of
language processes in their perfection or in their
250 THE MEANING OF MEANING
degeneration must also start from this distinction. It
is further important to notice that words have further
functions in addition to that of strict symbolization.
The study of these evocative aspects leads naturally to
an account of the resources of poetical language and
of the means by which it may be distinguished, from
symbolic or scientific statement. Thus the technique
of Symbolism is one of the essential instruments of the
aesthetics of literature.
Its practical importance will be found in its appli-
cation to Education and to Discussion in general ; for
when the Influence of Language upon Thought is
understood, and the Phantoms due to linguistic mis-
conception have been removed, the way is open to
more fruitful methods of Interpretation and to an
Art of Conversation by which the communicants can
enjoy something more than the customary stones and
scorpions.
APPENDIX A
ON GRAMMAR
** Incomprehensible abstractions, pretentious yet for the most
part empty definitions, false rules, indigestible lists of forms,
one has only to turn over a few pages of any text book to find
variegated specimens of these sins against reason, truth and
education." These are strong words in which to condemn
the bulk, of modern grammatical teaching, but, as we have seen
above in Chapter X. (p. 232), Professor Brunot, after fifteen years
of further work on linguistic analysis since their publication,^
found no reason to modify them. Considering the medley of
verbal superstition, obsolete philosophy, and ill-comprehended
logic, which we have found in the course of these pages doing
duty for a theory of verbal function, it is not surprising that the
best-informed philologists should feel that no words can be too
strong for the grammatical fare on which the twentieth-century
child is still nourished.
After giving examples of current grammatical classification,
on which he remarks : " Oh ! ces classifications grammaticales !
Quels modeles pour les autres sciences ! " Brunot continues —
" Le meme verbiage se remarquera dans ranalyse dite
' grammaticale.' Voici un mod die : lis enlev^rent tout ce qui s'y
trouvait.
Tout, adjectif ind^iini, masculin singulier, determine ce (1!) ;
ce, pronom d^monstratif, mis pour : le maiiYiel (!) comple-
ment direct de enlevirent ;
qui, pronom relatif, ayant pour ant6c6dent ce, 3me personne
du singulier, sujet de se trouvait ;
s', mis pour se, pronom personnel (?!), 3me personne du
singulier, complement direct (?!) de trouvait.
[Courrier des examens de 1908, p. 302).
" Que de beaut^s ! Un mot indifini, qui cependant dStermine !
^ U Enseignement de la Langue Frangaise, p. 3.
251
252 APPENDIX A
un pronom ce, qui, n6cessairement, remplace un nom sous-
entendu ! et le pronom de * se trouvait,' devenu personnel, et
complement direct I Ce matiriel, qu'on a imaging, et qui finit par
se trouver lui-meme 1! "
His final comment is : "A profound pity overcomes one in
thinking of the hundreds of thousands of children compelled to
undergo an education composed of such aberrations." ^
It is with a view to the elimination of the most patent of these
absurdities that the various Committees on Grammatical Ter-
minology have been labouring in various countries since the
1906 conferences at the Musee pedagogique in Paris. The
Recommendations of the English Committee were issued in
191 1, and efforts are now being made by the various Language
Associations to have them applied. In such an application,
however, two distinct problems are involved. One is the elim-
ination of outstanding absurdities in a grammatical terminology
for any one language ; and as to the desirability of a reformed
terminology and the value of the work of the Committee in this
respect, as far as it goes, there is little room for controversy. The
other concerns ** the importance of adopting from the first, in
all grammar teaching, a terminology which should be capable of
being employed, with the minimum of variation, for the purposes
of any other language that is subsequently learnt." ^ It is true
that " a uniform terminology brings into relief the principles of
structure common to all allied languages ; needless variation of
terms conceals the substantial unity, "^ but it must be remembered
that insistence on supposed similarities of structure by Indo-
European grammarians has been a chief hindrance to ethnologists
in their study of primitive speech, that most vitally important
branch of their subject. Within such a group of languages as that
to v/hich English belongs it is useful to have a system to mark
similarities,* but there is always the risk that the uniformity
^ Ibid., p. 12.
2 Report of Government Committee on Classics, p. 163.
^ Report of Government Committee on Modern Languages, p. 55.
* Even here the danger of an historical approach is considerable.
" I do not say one word against a uniform terminology," writes Pro-
fessor Jespersen in the controversy to which reference is made at the
end of this Appendix, " but I am strongly against that falsification
of the facts of English grammar which is too often the consequence
of the preoccupation with Latin grammar. . . . The Committee on
Grammatical Terminology makes the five languages treated appear
more similar than they are in reality. They speak of five cases ih
English, though the absurdity of this was seen clearly by Madvig
as early as 184 1. If it was the object of the Committee, as Professor
Sonnenschein says, to simplify grammar, not to make it more com-
plicated, they have here accomplished the very opposite of what they
APPENDIX A 253
thus stressed may come to be regarded as a necessity of all
language, and indeed, of thought itself! It is then natural for
these alleged necessities of expression to appear as reflections of
the actual nature of the things spoken about themselves. .
It is doubtful how far grammarians have explicitly considered
the problem of the correspondence of word-symbols with things,
as raised by Mr Bertrand Russell in his Introduction to Witt-
genstein's Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus . Four problems as
regards language are there enumreated :
'' First, there is the problem what actually occurs in our minds
when we use language with the intention of meaning something
by it ; this problem belongs to psychology. Secondly, there is
the problem as to what is the relation subsisting between
thoughts, words, or sentences, and that which they refer to or
mean ; this problem belongs to epistemology. Thirdly, there is
the problem of using sentences so as to convey truth rather than
falsehood ; this belongs to the special sciences dealing with the
subject-matter of the sentences in question. Fourthly, there is
the question : what relation must one fact (such as a sentence)
have to another in order to be capable of being a symbol for that
other ? This last is a logical question, and is the one with which
Mr Wittgenstein is concerned. He is concerned with the con-
ditions for accurate Symbolism, i.e., for Symbolism in which a
sentence 'means ' something quite definite."
It is with the last of these four questions that we are here con-
cerned and, whether with a full sense of its implications or not,
the procedure of grammarians — in their treatment of subject
and predicate, for instance — has often seemed tacitly to as?ume
Wittgenstein's answer : " To the configuration of the simple
signs in the propositional sign corresponds the configuration of
the objects in the state of affairs." ^ This unplausible conclusion
rests on the arbitrary identification of the indirect relation
* standing for,' discussed in our first chapter, with representation.
" In order to be a picture a fact must have something in common
with what it pictures " runs Prop. 2.16, and further 2.171, ** The
picture can represent eVery reality whose form it has . . .2.182,
Every picture is also a logical picture ... 3, The logical
picture of the facts is the thought ... 3.1, In the proposition
the thought is expressed perceptibly through the senses . . .
3.12, The sign through which we express the thought I call the
aimed at." It is unnecessary to take sides as to the cJassificatory or
pedagogical merits of ' cases ' in order to agree that philological dis-
cussion of the principle of uniformity has not been very profound.
^ Tractatus, Prop. 3.21.
254 APPENDIX A
prepositional sign. 3.2, In propositions thoughts can be so ex-
pressed that to the objects of the thoughts correspond the ele-
ments of the prepositional sign." If every word must here be
understood in a special sense, such an account of a symbol
situation resembles the pronouncements of the Pre-Socratic
aphorists ; yet to call it a * logical ' and not a psychological account
is, on the whole, an unconvincing apologetic.
Two steps are made in this argument. The first purports to
secure a common structure in thoughts and things in order to
explain how a thought can be * of ' a thing. But on a causal
theory this assumption of correspondence in structure is un-
necessary and highly improbable. ^ The second step, the asser-
tion of correspondence between the structure of the prepositional
sign and the structure of the facts is even more bold and baseless.
In a simple case, as when we make diagrams and in such notations
as those of chemistry and music, we can no doubt secure some
degree of correspondence, because, as was pointed out in the
chapter cited, the elements of such mimetic language approximate
to simple signs. In the case of notations, it has been the deliberate
effort of generations of scientists to force ' their symbols into
simple correspondence with the things for which they are to
stand. Again, in any primitive tongue there may come a time
when, through the simplicity of the distinctions made by the
race amongst the things surrounding them, their language will
show an analogous set of distinctions. Here, however, the cor-
respondence is through the correspondence of references to
things and of kinds of words to kinds of references. But it is
plain that such a language cannot keep pace with the additional
distinctions in their thought and with its growing complexity.
New kinds of words and new verbal structures would be desirable
for new aspects and structures which they wish to distinguish.
The old machinery, therefore, has to be strained and recourse is
^ It is hardly less unplausible than the similar belief in a strict corre-
spondence between words and thoughts, which appears frequently in the
writings of the nineteenth-century philologists, and was, perhaps, stated
most emphatically by Donaldson {The New Cratylus, p. 69) : " We find
in the internal mechanism of language the exact counterpart of the
mental phenomena which writers on psychology have so carefully
collected and classified. We find that the structure of human speech
is the perfect reflex or image of what we know of the organization of
the mind : the same description, the same arrangement of particulars,
the same nomenclature would apply to both, and we might turn a
treatise on the philosophy of mind into one on the philosophy of lan-
guage, by merely supposing that everything said in the former of the
thoughts as subjective is said again in the latter of the words as
objective."
APPENDIX A 255
had to fictitious entities, due to linguistic elements and structures
no longer fulfilling their proper function but inadequately serving
purposes for which they were not originally developed. Thus
* Energy ' in modern physics seems to be the wrong kind of word
for the referents concerned, and no other word belonging to any
of the recognized grammatical categories is likely to be better
fitted. Hence some difficulties of the Quantum theory.
The attempt to generalize from the exceptional cases in which
symbols and referents partially correspond, to a necessity for
such correspondence in all communication is invalid. The extent
of the correspondence in any given case can only be settled by an
empirical inquiry ; but the result of such an inquiry is not
doubtful. Such a correspondence may give to scientific symbol
systems vastly increased scope and accuracy, and render them
amenable to deductive processes ; but it can only be imposed
when limited to the simplest and most schematic features, such
as number or spatial relations. Ordinary language, as a rule,
dispenses with it, losing in accuracy but gaining in plasticity,
facility, and convenience. Nor is the loss so great as is sometimes
supposed, for by straining language we are able to make and
communicate references successfully, in spite of the misleading
character of our symbols if taken literally.^ For some, such as
Wittgenstein himself, the possibility of this correspondence and
the impossibility of doing more leads to a dissatisfaction with
language ; and to an anti-metaphysical mysticism. For others,
such as Bergson,2 the alleged impossibility of this correspondence
1 To take a metaphor or hypostatization ' literally ' is to overlook
the fact that a symbol or symbolic accessory is not occurring in its
original use. Cf. Chapter V., apud Canon III.
2 Introduction to Metaphysic, pp. 40-41. " Analysis operates always
on the immobile, whilst intuition places itself in mobility, or, what
comes to the same thing, in duration. There lies the very distinct
line of demarcation between intuition and analysis. The real, the
experienced and the concrete are recognized by the fact that they are
variability itself, the element by the fact that it is invariable. And
the element is invariable by definition, being a diagram, a simplified
reconstruction, often a mere symbol, in any case a motionless view
of the moving reality. . . . The error consists in believing that we
can reconstruct the real with these diagrams."
In connection with these mystical doctrines and their linguistic
justification, it is interesting to recall the scholastic problem : an
Deus nominahilis sit. S. Bonaventura, not content with the dogma
of the Fathers that the Deity could not be ' named,' advanced three
reasons from the nature of language itself for the negative conclusion :
(i) Nomen proportionem et similitudinem aliquam habet ad nominatum
(but God is infinite and language finite) ; (ii) Omne nomen imponitur
a forma aliqua (but God is without form) ; (iii) Omne nomen significat
substantiam cum qualitate (but in God there is mere substance without
quality).
256 APPENDIX A
based upon the assumed nature of reality, leads to a different
kind of dissatisfaction ; and to a mystical metaphysics.
For the grammarian these ultimate issues may appear to be
remote, but none the less he cannot have a view upon the relations
of language with fact, or a basis for the discussion of true lin-
guistic function in the sense defined in Chapter X. (which is, of
course, different from the functions of words in sentence forma-
tion) without raising these issues.
We may consider, as a typical instance, of a language function
which has been supposed to be derived from a fundamental
feature of reality, and to be capable of direct treatment by com-
mon sense without resort to a theory of reference, the problem
of the proposition and the subject-predicate relation. Since
all traditional views on this matter derive from Aristotle it is
worth while to recall the way in which it was first approached.
What is signified for Aristotle by words (whether single or in
combination), says his clearest modern exponent, is some variety
of mental affections ^ "or of the facts which they represent.
But the signification of a term is distinguished in an important
point from the signification of that conjunction of terms which we
call a Proposition. A noun, or a verb, belonging to the aggregate
called a language, is associated with one and the same phantasm
or notion, without any conscious act of conjunction or disjunction,
in the minds of speakers and hearers : when pronounced, it
arrests for a certain time the flow of associated ideas, and deter-
mines the mind to dwell upon that particular group which is
called its meaning. But neither the noun nor the verb, singly
taken, does more than this ; neither one of them affirms, or denies,
or communicates any information true or false. For this last
purpose, we must conjoin the two together in a certain way, and
make , a Proposition. The signification of the Proposition is
thus specifically distinct from that of either of its two component
elements. It communicates what purports to be matter of fact,
which may be either true or false ; in other words, it implies in
the speaker, and raises in the hearer, the state of belief or dis-
belief, which does not attach either to the noun or to the verb
separately. Herein the Proposition is discriminated from other
significant arrangements of words (precative, interrogative,
which convey no truth or falsehood), as well as from its own com-
1 The scholastics in commenting on the De Interpretatione, where
this reference to passiones animcB occurs, characteristically substituted
conceptiones intellectus in the spirit of the Nominalist-Realist con- .
troversy (cf. Duns Scotus D.I., III., § 3).
APPENDIX A 257
ponent parts. Each of these parts, noun and verb, has a signi-
ficance of its own ; but tliese are the ultimate elements of speech,
for the parts of the noun or of the verb have no significance at all."^
In this statement may be found all the uncertainty and hesi-
tation which since Aristotle's time have beset both grammarians
and logicians. Notably the doubt whether words signify * mental
affections ' or the facts which these * represent,* and the confusion
between the assertive character of the proposition (which is here
used as equivalent to sentence) and the states of belief and dis-
belief which may occur in connection with it.
With the first source of confusion we have dealt at length, but
the second demands further attention if it is to be avoided.
Recent psychological research, especially into the nature of sug-
gestion and into the effects of drugs upon the feelings, has done
nothing to invalidate William lames* view as to the relation of
belief to reference. " In its inner nature, belief, or the sense of
reahty, is a sort of feeling more allied to the emotions than to
anything else.** Belief and disbelief as opposed to doubt are
" characterized by repose on the purely intellectual side,** and
" intimately connected with subsequent practical activity.** *
Belief and disbelief, doubt and questioning, seem to be what
nowadays would be called affective-volitional characteristics of
mental states, and thus theoretically separable from the states to
which they attach. The same reference, that is to say, may at one
time be accompanied by belief and at another by disbelief or
doubt. For this reason, so far as language is modified by the
nature of the belief-feelings present, these modifications come
under the heading of expression- of attitude to referent, the third
of the language functions distinguished in Chapter X.
This separation greatly assists a clear analysis of the most
important character of the proposition, namely, the way in which
it seems to symbolize assertion, to stand for a complete object of
thought, a character lacking to the parts of a simple sentence.
A noun by itself or a verb by itself somehow differs from the
whole which is made up when they are suitably juxtaposed,
and this difference has been the pivotal point upon which not
merely grammatical analysis, but logic and philosophy have also
turned ever since Aristotle s time.
The confusion has been further aggravated by the introduction
of the problem of truth in an unsolved condition. Propositions
have been almost universally regarded as the only objects to
1 Grote, Aristotle, Vol. I., p. 157.
2 Principles of Psychology, Vol. II., p. 284.
258 APPENDIX A
which the words * true ' and ' false ' are properly applied ; though
this unanimity . has been somewhat disguised by differences of
view as to whether true propositions are those which express
true beliefs or whether true beliefs are those whose objects are
true propositions. In these controversies the various shifts of
the symbol * proposition ', standing, as it does, at one time for
a sentence, at another for a referent, and yet another for a re-
lational character of a mental act or process, provide a fascinating
field for the Science of Symbolism to explore. But in view of
what has been said above in Chapter III. on the analysis of the
differences which distinguish a complex symbol such as * Snow
chills * from the single symbols such as * snow ' and ' chills *
which compose it, the apparent complications due to the intro-
duction of truth raise no difficulty. They are merely a bewilder-
ing, because imperfectly parallel, re-naming of the problem.
According to the theory of signs all references, no matter how
simple they may be, are either true or false, and no difference in
this respect is to be found between the reference symbolized by
* snow ' and that symbolized by ' snow chills.' This statement
requires to be guarded from over-hasty interpretation. It is
easy to use single words in such a way that they are not symbols,
and so do not stand for anything. When this is done no doubt
some stray images and other mental goings-on may be aroused,
and if we are not careful in our use of ' meaning ' we may then
suppose that non-symbolic words so considered have meaning
just as much and in the same sense as they do when present
symbolically in a proposition. The single word, whether noun
or verb, only has meaning in the sense here required, when taken
in such a way that it enters a reference contest of the normal
kind ; and only so taken is it a symbolic (as distinguished from
an emotive) component of a proposition. Any word so considered
comes to be, qua symbol of a reference to some state of affairs,
capable of truth and falsehood ; and in this respect it differs in
no way from a sentence used symbolically for purposes of state-
ment.
We have yet to see, therefore, m what the marked difference
between single words and sentences consists ; and, as we should
expect from the nature of the symbol situation, we find the
difference to be not one but several, none of which is always or
necessarily present although some may be said to be normally
involved.^ In the first place the references of the symbols will
1 This multiple function of the noun-verb combination is recognized
as an important feature for analysis by Sheffield {Grammar and Thinking,
APPENDIX A 259
often differ structurally. Thus the reference of * larks sing,*
since it has two components, will differ from that of * larks *
just as do ' soaring larks ' or ' lark pie,' being also dual references.
This difference is therefore unessential, though most complex
references do in fact use the propositional form. One reason
for the use of this form is because it is the normal means by
which the togetherness of the component references is symbolized
in cases where ambiguity is possible. Thus the sentence is the
chief, but not the only symbolic device by which the togetherness
of references is made plain. It is this which is usually described
as the ' synthetic ' function of the pro position, ^ an unsatisfactory
term, since verbal arrangements which are not of the propositional
form, such as * lark pie *, or ' this lark pie ' ^ — are equally syn-
thetic. In logic the translation of all propositions into the subject-
copula-predicate form has been a convention to avoid ambiguity,
though modern logicians have found that more elaborate con-
ventions are desirable for relational propositions.
But the sentence also serves emotively in various ways.^ It is
the conventional mode of Address, since listeners expect some
special signal that a reference is occurring before they incline
their ears cognitively. Further, it is the conventional verbal
sign of the presence of Belief, of feelings of acceptance, rejection
or doubt, in the speaker ; and a stimulus to similar feelings in the
p. 34), though his use of the word ' meaning * may have obscured the
vahie of his distinctions for the grammarians whom he criticizes.
^ Cf. e.g.. Baldwin's treatment in Thought and Things, Vol. II.,
Experimental Logic, p. 262.
2 Cf. C. Dickens, Works, Autograph Edition, 1903, Vol. I., p. 16.
' Subject and Predicate reappear at this point in the writings of
the modern Leipzig glotto-psychologists, Professor Dittrich and his
followers. For them the Genet alsubjekt or Protosubjekt seems to corre-
spond in great part with the Referent in our terminology, while the
Generalpfddikat or Protoprddikat is the attitude (assent, doubt, desire,
or any other emotion) adopted towards this state of affairs. The
protosubjekt is a constant (Dittrich, in his Problems, p. 61), the proto-
prddikat a variant. In comparison with these two components, ' sub-
ject ' and ' predicate ' are regarded as secondary in character, ' noun '
and ' verb ' as tertiary. " Fall in Home Rails " is on this view a
sentence, its protosubjekt is ' fall in Home Rails,' its protoprddikat
a feeling of assent. The sentence would thus contain no expressed
subject ; ' fall ' being regarded as an unindexing impersonal prddi-
kativum. The reason why the subject of ' fall ' is not expressed is
said to be because it is not of interest here ; and it must on this view
be sought in all that is capable of falling, in the Aussagegrundlage.
With these elaborations we are not here concerned, and the reader is
referred to Appendix D and the work of Dittrich for the terminology
of Gomperz, on which this system is based. It is sufficient to remark
that this use of the traditional terms ' subject ' and ' predicate ' is
likely to confuse those not well acquainted with the writings of this
school. The new use has little in common with that already familiar.
26o APPENDIX A
hearer. It may, of course, also express intentions, desires, and
so forth, on the part of the speaker that these attitudes shall be
adopted by the hearer.
With this account of the sentence before us we may consider
the traditional view both as to the distinction between noun and
verb and as to the necessity of combining them in all assertion.
There is some reason to suppose that in primitive languages the
separation of verbs and nouns reflected the distinction between the
actions of the speaker and the objects which surrounded him. At
a later stage, by a natural formal analogy, this division in linguistic
material was extensively used to mark the distinction between
things or particulars and the states, qualities, and changes which
* belong ' or * happen * to these particulars. As has been argued,
these supposed entities arc in all cases of linguistic provenance ,
but this did not prevent the antithesis between particular and
universal, thing and property, subject and predicate, substantive
and adjective, noun and verb, confusedly named in all these forms,
from appearing as the most fundamental with which thought could
be concerned.^ For Aristotle neither particular nor universal was
separately conceivable, and it is not too much to see in his doctrine
of the proposition an application of this metaphysic. On his
assumption that words * correspond ' to reality, neither the noun
alone, standing for a particular, nor the verb alone, standing
for a universal could in itself have a complete ' meaning.*
There could be no better instance of the influence both of the
belief that different words and word-arrangements must stand
for different kinds of referents, and of the belief that different
kinds of referents require different kinds of words. Both these
assumptions we have seen to be unfounded.
But even should the truth of the above contentions be granted,
the moral, it may be said, is surely that grammarians should
avoid all commerce with fundamentals and confine themselves
to so-called * common sense ' classifications. It must, however,
be remembered that ' common sense ' in matters of linguistic is
itself only an elaborate and confused theory, some of whose
tenets figure in our second chapter. Moreover, the current
distinctions as well as the terminology which the grammarian
proposes to employ are the legacy not.only of Aristotelian dogma,
^ Thus Sapir is voicing a view very prevalent amongst philologists,
when he writes, as though dealing with some ultimate characteristic
of the universe, " There must be something to talk about and something
must be said about this subject of discourse once it is selected. . . .
The subject of discourse is a noun. . . . No language wholly fails to
distinguish noun and verb" [op. cit., p. 126).
APPENDIX A 261
but of that " Century of metaphysical syntax,*' which, as Pro-
fessor Hale has pointed out,^ followed on the application of the
Kantian theory of Categories to Grammar by Hermann in 1801.
Since, therefore, a searching inquiry into the psychology of
language cannot in any case be avoided, if more is to result
from an ancient and honoured science than the mere standard-
ization of a score or so of convenient names for groups of words,
it is important that the issue should be squarely faced. We would
by no means belittle the serious endeavour of grammarians to
produce a certain order out of the present chaos, or under-
estimate the time and energy which go to achieve this end. The
division of opinion between two of the first authorities in Europe
manifested recently ^ as to the legitimacy of the terms * sub-
junctive-equivalent ' and * future in the past ' (recommended in
the Report of the Committee on Grammatical Terminology ^ pp. 35-6)
in elucidation of the sentence * I should write to him if I knew
his address ', is, however, a good instance of the kind of nomen-
clature which is being evolved. But gFanted that a respectable
nomenclature can be extracted from the litter of scholastic
vocables now in use, what would have been achieved ? We should
not have done more than name the principal forms of speech, and
this clearly would not justify the present restriction of Grammar to
the learning of these names and to the acquisition of respect
for the standard usage of the locutions named. What is wrong
with Grammar is not its defective terminology but the lack of
interest displayed by Grammarians in the less arid and familiar
portions of the field which it professes to cover. It is for this
reason that dissatisfaction with Grammar is so prevalent, and if
as a ' subject ' it is not to disappear from the curriculum, and with
it all theoretical study of language as an instrument of communi-
cation, its reform must not be delayed too long.^
The understanding of the functions of language, of the many
^ St Louis Congress (1904) Proceedings. Cf. the same author's
" The Heritage of Unreason in Syntactical Method " in the Classical
Association's Proceedings, 1907.
2 See Professor Jespersen's letter in controversy with Professor
Sonnenschein [Times Literary Supplement, June 29, 1922, p. 428).
This writer's Philosophy of Grammar (1925) unfortunately fails to dis-
cuss any of the more fundamental problems raised by a psychological
approach to language, and especially the critical aspects of language
reform.
3 A suggestive attempt to avoid the whole apparatus of grammatical
terminology in teaching by the use of diagrams has been made by Miss
Isabel Fry, in A Key to Language (1925). The method might profitably
be extended to the more difficult problems of language analysis here
discussed.
262 APPENDIX A
ways in which words serve us and mislead us, must be an essential
aim of all true education. Through language all our intellectual
and much of our social heritage comes to us. Our whole outlook
on life, our behaviour, our character, are profoundly influenced
by the use we are able to make of this, our chief means of contact
with reality. A loose and insincere use of language leads not
only to intellectual confusion but to the shirking of vital issues or
the acceptance of spurious formulae. Words were never a more
common means than they are to-day of concealing ignorance
and persuading even ourselves that we possess opinions when we
are merely vibrating with verbal reverberations.
How many grammarians still regard their science as holding
the keys of knowledge ? It has become for them too often merely
a technical exercise of strictly limited scope, instead of the inspir-
ing study of the means by which truth is acquired and preserved.
No doubt the founders of the science sufficiently misconceived
the actual powers of language, but they realized its importance.
We have examined in the course of our study the means by which
we may be put on our guard against the pitfalls and illusions due
to words. It should be the task of Grammar to prepare every
user of symbols for the detection of these. Training in trans-
lation (p. 107), and above all in expansion (p. 93) ; in the tech-
nique of substitution (p. 113), and the methods of preventing and
removing misunderstanding at different levels (p. 222) ; in the
discrimination of symbolic from emotive words and locutions
(p. 149) ; and in the recognition of the five main functions of
language (p. 224) — all are amongst the indispensable prelimin-
aries for the right use of language as a means of communication,
and consequently the business of Grammar.
APPENDIX B
ON CONTEXTS
For a simple case of expectation, when both sign and referent
are sensations, the causal theory of reference outlined in Chapter
III., pp. 54 ff. — see especially pp. 56 and 62 — may be stated
as follows : —
Let i be a mental process or occurrence.
If, now, there preceded i a sensation s (e.g.y a sound), such
that :—
s has some character S {e.g., being a harsh sound) which
is a constitutive character of ' Proximity ' contexts (dual
in this case) determinative in respect of their other con-
stitutive character F (being a flaring sensation) and
(denoting members of such contexts hy s^^, f^y s^, f^ - • • )
^l> /l' ^2> A • • • ^» ^'
form in virtue of characters S, F, S, F.
. . . Sy I a. context determinative in respect of /,
then i is said to be an interpretation of s in respect of S, and /
is said to be its character relevant to 5, and s is said to be a
Sign. In this case i is a belief that something will happen
which is a flaring sensation and in proximity with s.
Now if there be anything (say /) which forms with ^ in virtue
of SF a Proximity context determinative in respect of s, then /
is said to be the Referent of i qua interpretation of s in this respect.
It will be noticed that / has by definition the character F and is
in proximity with s.
If there be something having these properties, then i is said
to be a true interpretation of s in respect of S ; but if there be
nothing with the required properties, then / is said to be a false
interpretation in the same respect.
In more informal language, when, as a result of hearing a match
scrape, we expect a flame sensation, our belief is a process which
is a member of a psychological context united by a multiple
mnemic relation, among whose other members are past sensations
264
APPENDIX B
of scrapes and flames, themselves united in dual contexts by the
relation of proximity. If now the scrape is related by this relation
to a flame, our belief is true ; this sensation is the referent of our
belief. If there is no flame to which the scrape is so related our
belief is false. We have discussed (p. 71) what, if anything,
may be said to be the referent in this case.
For those who find diagrams of service in considering compli-
cated matters, the following depiction of the above account is not
misleading and throws some light upon additional complexities
not there included. The central dotted line separates psychological
from external contexts ; brackets and continuous lines indicate
contexts ; s, f, etc., stand for stimuli, 5,/, etc., for corresponding
sensations : —
7 Other psychological
contexts.
It will be noticed that the above account deals merely with
contexts whose members are sensations. In the diagram
* stimulus-sensation * contexts are also included. Any actual
instances of interpretation will naturally be far more complicated
than any account or diagram which can be put on paper. The
bracket including other psychological contexts indicates one
reason for this. There must be some sense in which jone context
can be said to be dependent upon others. To take a concrete
instance, the action of a penny-in-the-slot machine may be
treated as a simple dual context (insertion of penny — appearance
of chocolate) provided that certain vast multiple contexts involving
APPENDIX B 265
the growth of the cocoa-tree, the specific gravity of copper, and
the regular inspection of the contrivance recur uniformly.
Psychology is throughout concerned with similar situations, but
it is less easy to analyse the contexts involved in this fashion.
It is peculiarly difficult, indeed, in Psychology to discover con-
texts whose members are few in number. Even a stimulus-
sensation context, in order to be determinative in respect of the
character of the sensation, must ordinarily include other psy-
chological members, amongst which will be other sensations and
the conditions to which we allude when we use the word
* attention.'
APPENDIX C
AENESIDEMUS' THEORY OF SIGNS
What we know of the views of Aenesidemus is derived chiefly
from brief references in the writings of Sextus Empiricus ; but
the fourth book of his lost work TlvpfnovLuyv Adyot was devoted
to the Theory of Signs. The main arguments are summarized
by Sextus in §§ 97-134 of his Hypotheses, though it is not always
clear how much has been added by Sextus himself.
According to Photius/ Aenesidemus held that invisible things
cannot be revealed by visible signs, and a belief in such signs is an
illusion. This is confirmed by a passage in Sextus, ^ which shows
that the views of the Epicureans are here being attacked. The
argument is thus expounded : — •
" If phenomena appear in the same way to all observers
who are similarly constituted, and if, further, signs are phen-
omena, then the signs must appear in the same way to all
observers similarly constituted. This hypothetical proposition
is self-evident ; if the antecedent be granted the consequent
follows. Now, continues Sextus, (i) phenomena do appear
in the same way to all observers similarly constituted. But
(2) signs do not appear in the same way to all observers similarly
constituted. The truth of proposition (i) rests upon obser-
vation, for though, to the jaundiced or bloodshot eye, white
objects do not appear white, yet to the normal eye, t.e.y to all
observers similarly constituted, white objects invariably do
appear white. For the truth of proposition (2) the art of medi-
cine furnishes decisive instances. The symptoms of fever,
the flush, the moisture of the skin, the high temperature, the
rapid pulse, when observed by doctors of the like mental
constitution, are not mterpreted by them in the same way.
Here Sextus cites some of the conflicting theories maintained
by the authorities of his age. In these symptoms Herophilus
^ Biblioth., 170, p. 12,
2 ^^y Math., VIII. , 215 sqq.
APPENDIX C 267
sees a mark of the good quality of the blood ; for Erasistratus
they are a sign of the passage of the blood from the veins to the
arteries ; for Asclepiades they prove too great tension of
corpuscles in interspaces, although both corpuscles and inter-
spaces, being infinitesimally small, cannot be perceived by
sense but only apprehended by the intellect. Sextus, having
borrowed this argument from Aenesidemus, has developed it
in his own fashion, and is probably himself responsible for the
medical instances which he has selected." ^
Sextus, however, is not content with disproving the Epicurean
account of signs as sensible objects. He goes on to attack the
view of the Stoics, and to show that they cannot be apprehended by
reason or intellect. Aenesidemus himself may not have gone
beyond the demonstration that (in the words of Photius) " there
are no signs, manifest and obvious, of what is obscure and latent,"
and there are those who think it probable that Sextus himself
was chiefly responsible for the distinction familiar to the later
Sceptics between two classes of signs — signs * commemorative *
and signs * demonstrative.' ^ Accoi-ding to this distinction
** there are signs which act, as we should say, by the law of
association, reminding us that in past experience two phenomena
were conjoined, as smoke with fire, a scar with a wound, a stab
to the heart with subsequent death. If afterward one of the two
phenomena is temporarily obscured and passes out of immediate
consciousness, the other, if present, may serve to recall it ; we
are justified in calling the one which is present a sign, and the
other, which is temporarily absent, the thing signified. With the
term * sign,' as thus understood, the sign commemorative or
reminiscent, Sextus has no quarrel. By its aid prediction is
justified ; we can infer fire from smoke, the wound from the scar,
approaching death from the fatal stab, for in all these cases we
proceed upon past experience. Sextus reserves his hostility for
another class of signs which we may call the sign demonstrative.
When one of two phenomena assumed to be the thing signified
never has occurred in actual experience but belongs wholly, by
its own nature, to the region of the unknown, the dogmatists
nevertheless maintained that, if certain conditions were fulfilled,
its existence was indicated and demonstrated by the other phen-
omenon, which they called the sign. For instance, according to
the dogmatists, the movements of the body indicate and demon-
^ R. D. Hicks, Stoic and Epicurean, p. 390.
2 Ibid., p. 391 : the source being Pyrrh. Hyp., II., 100 ; cf. the con-
text, 99-102 ; Adv. Math., VIII., 148-158.
268 APPENDIX C
strate the existence of the soul ; they are its sign. It is ' sign '
then, in this latter sense, the indicative or demonstrative sign,
w^hose existence Sextus disputes and undertakes to refute."
If such an interpretation of their views is correct it is clear
that vi^ith their account of reminiscent signs the Sceptics came
very near to formulating a modern theory of scientific induction,
while their scepticism about demonstrative signs amounts to a
denial of the possibility of inferring to the transcendental. Given
a fact, or as the Stoics called it, a * sign,* we cannot determine a
priori the nature of the thing signified. That the main terms in
which the discussion was conducted suffered from confusions
which still haunt their modern equivalents, is not surprising ;
there can be no signs of things to which we cannot refer, but
things can be referred to which are not experienced.
When the excavation of Herculaneum is accomplished, the
lost treatise of Philodemus on the Epicurean theory of signs and
inference which is likely to become available, together with other
similar documents relative to this remarkable controversy, may
throw more light on the progress which had been made in these
early times towards a rational account of the universe ; and so
enable us to realize something of what a healthy scepticism might
have achieved had theological interests not so completely domin-
ated the next fifteen hundred years.
APPENDIX D
SOME MODERNS
Those unfamiliar with the Hterature of Meaning will find it
difficult to realize how strange and conflicting are the languages
which the most distinguished thinkers have thought fit to adopt
in their attempts to deal with Signs, Symbols, Thoughts and
Things. In our eighth chapter sundry examples were given with
a brevity which, though necessary, may have inclined the fair-
minded to question whether there has not been an occasional
injustice. We therefore append more lengthy examples, which
can be judged on their merits, from the pens of the most eminent
specialists who have dealt with the question in recent years.
It is hoped by this means to justify the assertion made at the out-
set that a fresh approach was necessary.
§1. Husserl
We may begin with what is perhaps the best known modern
attempt to deal comprehensively with the problem of Signs and
Meaning, that of Professor Edmund Husserl. And it is important
for the understanding of Husserl's terminology to realize that
everything he writes is developed out of the '' Phenomenological
Method and Phenomenological Philosophy " which he has been
elaborating since 1910, as Professor of Philosophy, first at Gottin-
gen and later at Freiburg. In June, 1922, in a course of lectures
at London University, he gave an exposition of his system to a
large English audience, and the following sentences are taken
from the explanatory. Syllabus in which he, or his official trans-
lator, endeavoured to indicate both his method and his vocabulary.
'' There has been made possible and is now on foot, a
new a priori science extracted purely from concrete phen-
omenological intuition (Anschauung), the science, namely,
of transcendental phenomenology, which inquires into the
totality of ideal possibilities that fall within the framework
270 APPENDIX D
of phenomenological subjectivity, according to their typical
forms and laws of being.
In the proper line of its explication lies the development
of the originally ' egological ' (referred to the ego of the
philosophizing subject for the time being) phenomenology
into a transcendental sociological phenomenology having
reference to a manifest multiplicity of conscious subjects
communicating with one another. A systematically con-
sistent development of phenomenology leads necessarily
to an all-comprehensive logic concerned with the correlates ;
knowing-act, knowledge-significance, knowledge-objectivity ."
And as one of his conclusions Husserl explains that ** the
transcendental monadism, which necessarily results from the
retrospective reference to absolute subjectivity, carries with it a
peculiar a priori character over against the constituted objec-
tivities, that of the essence-requirements of the individual
monads and of the conditions of possibility for a universe of
* compossible * monads. To this * metaphysical ' inquiry there
thus belongs the essence-necessity of the * harmonious accord *
of the monads through their relation to an objective world mutu-
ally constituted in them, the problems of teleology, of the meaning
of the world and of the world's history, the problem of God."
Such are the formulae through which Husserl desired his
system to be approached, and in the narrower field of Meaning
the selection of essentials has similarly been undertaken by his
disciple, Professor J. Geyser, of the University of Miinster, in
his Neue und alte Wege der Philosophies which is devoted to a
summary of Husserl's main contributions to the theory of know-
ledge in the Logische Untersuchungeriy and Ideen zu einer reinen
Phenomenologie .
According to Husserl, the function of expression is only
directly and immediately adapted to what is usually described as
the meaning (Bedeutung) or the sense (Sinn) of the speech or parts
of speech. Only because the meaning associated with a word-
sound expresses something, is that word-sound called * expres-
sion ' (Ideen y p. 256 f). " Between the meaning and the what is
meant, or what it expresses, there exists an essential relation,
because the meaning is the expression of the meant through its
own content (Gehalt). What is meant (dieses Bedeutete) lies
in the * object ' of the thought or speech. We must therefore
distinguish these three — Word, Meaning, Object." ^
* Geyser, op. cit.,y. 28.
APPENDIX D 271
The object is that about which the expression says something,
the meaning is what it says about it. The statement is therefore
related to the object by means of its meaning. But Husserl main-
tains expHcitly : ** The object never coincides (zusammenfdllt)
with the meaning " (L.l/., II., i., p. 46). He bases this assertion
on the fact " that several expressions can have the same meaning,
but different objects, and again, different meanings, but the same
object '* (Ibid., p. 47). " The two expressions * equiangular and
equilateral triangle ' have for example a different meaning, but
name the same object. Conversely a different object but the
same meaning is signified when Bucephalus and a cart-horse are
described as ' horse.' The meaning of an expression becomes an
object only when an act of thought turns towards it reflectively."^
The sense of the expression * meaning ' which, according to
Geyser (p. 33) is as a rule synonymous with * concept ' (was meist
als Begriff bezeichnet wird), Husserl illustrates by the compari-
son of two cases. In the perception of a white object, we can be
satisfied by perceiving it and eventually distinguishing something
or other in it. For this function, expression and meaning are not
necessary. But we can also pass on to the thought : '* This is
white." The perceiver has now added to the perceiving a mental
act, which expresses, means the thing perceived and the thing
distinguished in what is perceived, that is to say, the objective.
The expression is therefore, to state the rriatter generally, a form
which raises the sense '* into the kingdom of the * Logos ' of the
conceptual and thereby the * general ' " {Ideen, p. 257). The
function of the expression, of this peculiar intention, " exhausts
itself in expressing, and that with this newly entering form of the
conceptual " {Ibid., p. 258). Further, ' expressing ' is an imi-
tative, and not a productive function.
By the words ' expression ' and * meaning,' Husserl describes
in the first place concepts, but also judgments and conclusions :
" Pure logic, wherever it deals with concepts, judgments, con-
clusions, has in fact to do exclusively with these ideal unities,
which we here call meanings " {L.U., II., i., p. 916). In general,
it is " evident that logic must be knowledge of meanings as such,
of their essential kinds and differences, as well as of the laws
purely grounded in them (that is to say ideal). For to these
essential distinctions belong also those between meanings, with
and without objects, true and false. ..." (Ibid., p. 92). All
thought has a certain appropriate range of acts of expressing or
meaning, which are neither identical with the sensory word nor
^ Geyser, op. cit., p. 29.
272 APPENDIX D
with the objects of cognition. " It is not easy to reaUze clearly
that actually after abstraction of the sensory word-sound stratum,
a stratification is found of the kind that we suppose here ; that is
to say in every case — even in that of unclear, empty, and merely
verbal thought — a stratum of expressing meaning and a sub-
stratum of expressed. Still less easy is the understanding of the
essential connections of these strata " {Ideen, p. 259).
Husserl proceeds to distinguish between what he calls * mean-
ing-intentions ' (Bedeutungsintentionen) and * realized meanings *
(erfiillte Bedeutungen) ; between * meaning-conferring * and
* meaning-realizing ' acts (L,U., i., p. 38) ; and between the
psychological and objective-phenomenological treatment of
meaning.^ Phenomenologically, when we ask the meaning of
the expression * prime-number ' we refer to (memen) this expres-
sion in itself and as such, not in its particularity (Besonderheit),
as it is spoken by a given individual in a lecture, or as it is found in
such and such a book written in such and such a way. Rather
we simply ask : What does the expression * Prime-number *
mean ? Similarly we do not ask what at this or that moment was
the meaning of the expression thought and experienced by such
and such a man ; we ask in general about its meaning as such and
in itself. Husserl expresses this state of affairs by saying that in
such questions it is a matter of the expression and the meaning
* in specie,' * as species,' ' as idea,' * as ideal unity ' ; for what is
referred to is one and the same meanings and one and the same
expression, however these may be thought or spoken {L.U., II.,
i., p. 42 f). Hence : Meanings, ideal objects, must have being,
since we predicate truly of them — as when we say that four is
an even number {Ibid., p. 125) ; but their existence does not
depend on their being thought. They have eternal, ideal, exist-
ence.^ " What Meaning is can be given to us as immediately
as colour and tone. It cannot be further defined ; it is a descrip-
tive ultimate. Whenever we complete or understand an expres-
sion, it means something to us and we are actually conscious of
its sense." Distinctions between meanings are also directly given,
and we can classify these in the Phenomenology of meaning, as
* symbolic-empty ' * intuitively realized,' etc. ; such operations
as identification and distinction, relating, and generalizing
abstraction, give us " the fundamental logical concepts, which
are nothing but ideal conceptions of the primitive distinctions ot
meaning " {Ibid., p. 183).
^ Geyser, p. 22,
' 2 iifid., p. 36.
APPENDIX D 273
§2. Bertrand Russell
Mr Russell's best known view (which must now, however,
be read in connection with his more acceptable psychological
account discussed in our third chapter, and with his Monist
articles 19 18- 19 19) is to be found at page 47 of his Principles of
Mathematics. He is there concerned with the connection of his
doctrine of adjectives with certain traditional views on the nature
of propositions, and with the theory of Bradley ^ " that all words
stand for ideas having what he calls meanings and that in every
judgment there is a something, the true subject of the judgment,"
which is not an idea and does not have meaning. " To have mean-
ing," says Mr Russell, " is a notion confusedly compounded of
logical and psychological elements. Words all have meaning,
in the simple sense that they are symbols which stand for some-
thing other than themselves. But a proposition, unless it happens
to be linguistic, does not itself contain words : it contains the en-
tities indicated by words. Thus meaning, in the sense in which
words have meaning, is irrelevant to logic. But such concepts
as a man have meaning in another sense : they are, so to speak,
symbolic in their own logical nature, because they have the pro-
perty which I call denoting. That is to say, when a man occurs
in a proposition {e.g.y' I met a man in the street '), the proposition
is not about the concept a man^ but about something quite
different, some actual biped denoted by the concept. Thus
concepts of this kind have meaning in a non-psychological sense.
And in this sense, when we say ' this is a man ', we are making a
proposition in which a concept is in some sense attached to what
is not a concept. But when meaning is thus understood, the
entity indicated by John does not have meaning, as Mr Bradley
contends ; and even among concepts, it is only those that denote
that have meaning. The confusion is largely due, I believe, to
the notion that words occur in propositions, which in turn is due
to the notion that propositions are essentially mental and are to
be identified with cognitions.'*
§3. Frege
Frege's theory of Meaning is given in his Begriffsschrifty
Grundlagen der Arithmetik and his articles on " Begriff und
Gegenstand," and '' Sinn und Bedeutung." A convenient sum-
mary, which we here follow, is given at p. 502 of his Principles
by Mr Russell, who holds that Frege's work ** abounds in subtle
1 Logic, Book I., Chapter I., §§ 17, i8 (pp. 58-60).
274 APPENDIX D
distinctions, and avoids all the usual fallacies which beset writers
on Logic." The distinction which Frege makes between meaning
(Sinn) and indication (Bedeutung) is roughly, though not exactly,
equivalent to Mr Russell's distinction between a concept as such
and what the concept denotes {Principles, §96). Frege did not
possess this distinction in the first two of the works under con-
sideration ; but it makes its appearance in B.U.G., and is speci-
ally dealt with in SmB, Before making the distinction, he thought
that identity had to do with the names of objects (B^., p. 13) :
" A is identical with B " means, he says, that the sign A and the
sign B have the same signification (Bs., p. 15) — a definition which,
in Mr Russell's view, " verbally at least, suffers from circularity."
But later he explains identity in much the same way as Mr
Russell did in the Principles, §64. " Identity," he says, " calls
for reflection owing to questions which attach to it and are not
quite easy to answer. Is it a relation ? A relation between
Gegenstande or between names or signs of Gegenstande ? "
{S.u.B.y p. 25). We must distinguish, he adds, the meaning, in
which is contained the way of being given, from what is indicated
(from the Bedeutung). Thus * the evening star ' and * the
morning star ' have the same indication, but not the same mean-
ing. A word ordinarily stands for its indication ; if we wish to
speak of its meaning, we must use inverted commas or some
such device. The indication of a proper name is the object which
it indicates ; the presentation which goes with it is quite subjective;
between the two lies the meaning, which is not subjective and yet
is not the object. A proper name expresses its meaning, and
indicates its indication. *
" This theory of indication," adds Mr Russell, " is more
sweeping and general than mine, as appears from the fact that
every proper name is supposed to have the two sides. It seems
to me that only such proper names as are derived from con-
cepts by means of the can be said to have meaning, and that
such words as John merely indicate without meaning. If one
allows, as I do, that concepts can be objects and have proper
names, it seems fairly evident that their proper names, as a
rule, will indicate them without having any distinct meaning ;
but the opposite view, though it leads to an endless regress,
does not appear to be logically impossible."
§4. Gomperz
The view of H. Gomperz is developed in Vol. II. of his
APPENDIX D 275
Weltanschauungslehre (1908), Part I. of which is devoted to
Semasiology. It is adopted by Professor Dittrich in his Pro-
bleme der Sprach-psychologie (19 13), on whose exposition the
following summary is based :—
In every complete statement (Aussage) we can distinguish :
A. The sounds (Aussage-laute), ix.y the verbal form of the state-
ment, or better the phoneHs (Lautung) ; B. The import (Aussage-
inhalt), £.^., the sense (Sinn) of the statement ; C. The foundation
(Aussagegrundlage), i.e.y the actual fact (Tatsache) to which the
statement is related. The relations between these three elements
can be thus characterized : the sounds (phonesis) are the expres-
sion (Ausdruck) of the import, and the designation (Bezeichnung)
of the foundation, while the import is the interpretation (AuflPas-
sung) of the foundation. In so far as the sounds are treated
as the expressions of the import they are grouped with the state-
ment (Aussage). In so far as the foundation is treated as the fact
comprehended by the import, it can be called the stated fact
(ausgesagte Sachverhalt) ; or simply, the fact. The relation sub-
sisting between the statement and the fact expressed is called
Meaning (Bedeutung).^
According to Gomperz the sounds which correspond to a full
statement, such as " This bird is flying," have a fivefold repre-
sentative function. The statement, as sound, can thus be con-
sidered under five headings : —
1. It represents itsdf, qua mere noise, as perceived by anyone
unacquainted with the language.
2. It represents the state of affairs (Tatbestand), * This bird
is flying,' the sense for whose expression it is normally used, the
import of the thought which is thought by everyone who enun-
ciates it or hears it.
3. It further represents the fact, * This bird is flying,' i.e.y every
bit of reaUty which can be comprehended by the thought * This
bird is flying ' and denoted by that sound. (This may be very
various — a starling, or an eagle, or merely * Something is moving ').
4. It represents the proposition, * This bird is flying * as a
significant utterance, wherein the sound, which thus becomes a
linguistic sound, expresses the sense or state of affairs * This bird
is flying,' and together with that sense forms the statement.
5. It represents the fact (Sachverhalt) stated in the proposition,
which is characteristically distinguished both from the foundation
and from the import. " The proposition does not merely state
^ Gomperz, loc> cit., p. 61.
276 APPENDIX D
that a bit of physical reality is present which can be thought of
as the possessing of a property or as a process, as active or passive,
etc. But it states that a physical process is taking place in which
an active object, viz., a bird, an activity (flying), and an immediate
presence of that object denoted by * this,' are to be distinguished.
In other words, what the proposition states is ' the flying of this
bird.' This is equally a bit of physical reality, but one of univocal
articulation. It is not only in general a bit of physical reality,
but more precisely a physical process, and quite specifically a
physical activity : but these are mere predicates which could not
have been stated of the sounds as such. ... In other words,
the foundation can be the same for the three propositions. ' This
bird is flying,' * This is a bird,' and * I see a living creature,'
whereas the fact expressed by these three propositions is different
on each occasion. For in the first what it states is the ' flying of
this bird,' in the second the ' being-a-bird of this^' and in the
third ' the seeing of a living creature by m^.' If, then, the founda-
tion of these propositions can be one and the same, while the
fact stated is not one and the same, the fact cannot possibly
coalesce with the foundation." Nor must the fact be identified
with the import or sense (Inhalt oder Sinn), " which is not some-
thing physical, but a group of logical determinations (Bestim-
mungen)."
From all this, says Dittrich, the peculiarly relational character
of that element of the statement named meaning results. Meaning
cannot be identified with mere designation (Bezeichnung). One
and the same sound, e.g., ' top ' can, he urges, designate very
different foundations ; and if, with Martinak, we confine meaning
to the relation between the sign and what is designated, we
cannot reach a satisfactory definition. Interpretation (Auffas-
sung) may similarly be a many-one relation ; moreover to use
the term meaning for that relation would omit the linguistic
element. Nor can meaning be identified with the relation of
expression (Ausdruck). Finally, Meaning appears as a definite
but complex relation, based on the theory of * total-impressions '
(Totalimpression) and common emotional experiences which
distinguishes the pathempiricists.^ " Any sound whatever can
1 As regards this view, Dr E. H. F. Beck, whose treatise on Die
Impersonalien (1922) is an application of the Gomperz-Dittrich analysis
and to whom we are indebted for certain of the English equivalents
given above, writes to us as follows : " The accent falls on the Gesamt-
eindrucksgefiihl. Speaker and hearer have in common certain
emotional experiences which have a common object and common
reflexes. In every effective communication the reflex — whether
APPENDIX D 277
designate any foundation ; but it can only mean when it becomes
a statement through the constitution of a general-typical import,
and that becomes the foundation (Grundlage) for a fact (Sach-
verhalt)." ^
§5. Baldwin
Professor Baldwin's mode of treating the problem of Meaning
is best studied in his Thought and Things. Vol. II. of this work
deals with what he calls * Experimental Logic,' and Chapter VII.
is devoted to the Development of Logical Meaning. " Our most
promising method of procedure would seem to be to take the
various modes or stages in the development of predication, and
to ask of each in turn as to its structural or recognitive meaning,
its * what ' — that is, what it now means, as an item of contextuated
and socially available information. The * what ' is the subject-
matter of judgment. Having determined this, we may then
inquire into the instrumental use of such a meaning : the * pro-
posal ' that the meaning when considered instrumentally suggests
or intends. This latter we may call the question of the * why '
of a meaning : the for-what-purpose or end, personal or social,
the meaning is available for experimental treatment. If we use
the phrase ' selective thinking,' as we have above, for the entire
process whereby meanings grow in the logical mode — the process
of ' systematic determination ' sketched in the preceding chapter
— then we may say that every given meaning is both predication
as elucidation of a proposal, and predication as 3. proposal for
elucidation. It is as his elucidation that the believer proposes
it to another ; it is as proposal that the questioner brings it to the
hearer for his elucidation. We may then go forward by this
metHbd. ..."
In §10, forty pages later, we " gather up certain conclusions
already reached in statements which take us back to our funda-
mental distinction between Implication and Postulation," as
follows : —
'* Implication was defined as meaning so far fixed and
reduced by processes of judgment that no hypothetical or
problematic intent was left in it. Implication, in other
phonesis, gesture, or written symbol — re-instates the common (typical-
general) emotional experience which is referred back to its foundation.
The sign — which term, on account of its wider range, might replace
phonesis — is therefore the causa cognoscendi proximately of a certain
emotional state and ultimately its foundation."
^ Dittrich, op. cit., p. 52.
278 APPENDIX D
words, is simply meaning by which belief, the attitude of
acknowledgment in judgment is rendered. Under this
heading, we find two sorts of meaning : first, that which is
subject-matter of predication, the content of thought ; and
second, that which is presupposition of judgment, the con-
trol sphere in which the predication holds or is valid. ..."
Later (p. 299) the question arises : " In what sense can a meaning
that is universal as respects community still be singular ? " And
the answer is as follows : " That it does banish singular meaning
from the logical, if by the singular we mean a type of meaning
that lacks community. For when a meaning of singularity is
rendered in a judgment then precisely the marks that served to
make it singular are generalized in one of the modes of community
— as recurring in different experiences either for the same or for
different persons. The intent of singularity which admits of no
generalization has then retreated into the domain of direct
appreciation or immediate experience." This, he says, may be
illustrated without difficulty. " Suppose I submit the statement
* this is the only orange of this colour.' By so doing I give the
orange a meaning in community in two ways. I mean that you
can find it the only one with me, or that I myself can find it the
same one by repeating my experience of it."
Finally (p. 423), in replying to Professor A. W. Moore's
difficulties as regards his terminology, Baldwin explains himself
thus : — *' Our relativisms are contrast-meanings, dualisms,
instrumentalities one to another, and the mediation and abolish-
ing of these contrasts, dualisms, means to ends, removes the
relativities and gives the only tenable * absolute.' This is the
* absolute ' that experience is competent to reach. If you ask
why this does not develop again into new relativities, I anSwer,
in fact it does ; but in meaning it does not. For the meaning is the
universal of all such cases of mediation. If the mediation effected
in the aesthetic is one of typical meaning everywhere in the pro-
gression of mental * dynamic^ then it is just its value that it dis-
counts in advance any new demands for mediation which new
dualisms may make. The aesthetic is absolute then in the only
sense that the term can mean anything : it is universal progression-
wisCy as well as content or relation-wise. It mediates the genetic
dynamogenies as well as the static dualisms.*' And then he turns
to MEANING.
" As to * meaning,' I hold that after meaning arises as
over against mere present content, then the content of neces-
APPENDIX D 279
sity and by contrast also becomes meaning ; since conscious-
ness may then intend or mean both, either, or the difference
between the two. As I put it in Vol. I., with the rise of
meaning there arise meanings (in the plural). To hold a
content to just its bare presence is to make it a meaning —
after consciousness is once able to mean ' that only and not
anything else.' Consequently the use of * meaning ' for
what is had in mind (as in the phrase * I mean so and so ')
supersedes the use of it for that merely which is attached to
a content (as in * it means much '). When I say (in the former
sense) * I mean chickens,' I do not intend to restrict * mean-
ing ' to what the chicken suggests beyond the bare image.
On the contrary, I intend the whole bird.''
It should be added that C. S. Peirce, to whom we now turn,
wrote very highly of Professor Baldwin's terminology.
§6. C. S. Peirce
By far the most elaborate and determined attempt to give an
account of signs and their meaning is that of the American
logician C. S. Pierce, from whom William James took the idea
and the term Pragmatism, and whose Algebra of Dyadic Relations
was developed by Schroeder. Unfortunately his terminology
was so formidable that few have been willing to devote time to
its mastery, and the work was never completed. " I am now
working desperately to get written before I die a book on Logic
that shall attract some minds through whom I may do some real
good," he wrote to Lady Welby in December, 1908, and by the
kindness of Sir Charles Welby such portions of the correspondence
as serve to throw light on his published articles on Signs are here
reproduced.
In a paper dated 1867, May 14th (Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci.
(Boston), VII (1868), 295), Peirce defined logic as the doctrine of
the formal conditions of the truth of symbols ; i.e., of the refer-
ence of symbols to their objects. Later, when he " recognized
that science consists in inquiry not in ' doctrine ' — the history of
words, not their etymology, being the key to their meanings,
especially with a word so saturated with the idea of progress as
science," he came to realize, as he wrote in 1908, that for a long
time those who devoted themselves to discussing " the general
reference of symbols to their objects would be obliged to make
researches into the references to their interpretants, too, as well
as into other characters of symbols, and not of symbols alone
28o APPENDIX D
but of all sorts of signs. So that for the present, the man who
makes researches into the reference of symbols to their objects
will be forced to make original studies into all branches of the
general theory of signs." This theory he called Semeiotic, and
its essentials are developed in an article in the Monist^ 1906,
under the title, *' Prolegomena to an Apology for Pragmaticism."
A sign, it is there stated, ** has an Object and an Inter pretant,
the latter being that which the Sign produces in the Quasi-mind
that is the Interpreter by determining the latter to a feeling, to
an exertion, or to a Sign, which determination is the Interpretant.
But it remains to point out that there are usually two Objects,
and more than two Interpretants. Namely, we have to distin-
guish the Immediate Object^ which is the object as the Sign itself
represents it, and whose Being is thus dependent upon the
Representation of it in the sign, from the Dynamical Object ^
which is the Reality which by some means contrives to deter-
mine the Sign to its Representation. In regard to the Inter-
pretant we have equally to distinguish in the first place, the
Immediate Interpretant^ which is the interpretant as it is revealed
in the right understanding of the Sign itself, and is ordinarily
called the ' meaning ' of the sign ; while, in the second place, we
have to take note of the Dynamical Interpretant^ which is the
actual effect which the Sign, as a Sign, really determines. Finally,
there is what I provisionally term the Final Interpretant^ which
refers to the manner in which the Sign tends to represent itself
to be related to its Object. I confess that my own conception of
this third interpretant is not yet quite free from mist."
Reference is then made to the *' ten divisions of signs which
have seemed to me to call for my special study. Six turn on the
characters of the Interpretant and three on the characters of the
Object. Thus the division into Icons, Indices, and Symbols
depends upon the different possible relations of a Sign to its
Dynamical Object." Only one division is concerned with the
nature of the Sign itself, and to this he proceeds as follows : —
" A common mode of estimating the amount of matter in a
MS. or printed book is to count the number of words. There
will ordinarily be about twenty ' thes ' on a page, and, of course,
they count as twenty words. In another sense of the word
* word,' however, there is but one word ' the ' in the English
language ; and it is impossible that this word should lie visibly
on a page, or be heard in any voice, for the reason that it is not
a Single thing or Single event. It does not exist ; it only
APPENDIX D 281
determines things that do exist. Such a definitely significant
Form, I propose to term a Type. A Single event which happens
once and whose identity is limited to that one happening, or a
Single Object of a thing which is in some single place at any
one instant of time, such an event being significant only as
occurring when and where it does, such as this or that word
on a single line of a single page of a single copy of a book, I
will venture to call a Token. An indefinite significant character
such as the tone of voice, can neither be called a Type nor a
Token. I propose to call a Sign a Tone. In order that a Type
may be used, it has to be embodied in a Token which shall be
a sign of the Type, and thereby of the object the Type signifies.
I propose to call such a Token of a Type an Instance of the
Type. Thus there may be twenty Instances of the Type ' the '
on a page."
The special interest to Peirce of the distinctions thus christened
was their application in explaining and developing a system of
* Existential Graphs,' whereby diagrams are furnished " upon
which to experiment, in the solution of the most difficult problems
of logic." A diagram, he notes, " though it will ordinarily have
Symbolide features, is in the main an Icon of the forms of relations
in the constitution of its Object." And in the same terminology
it could be said that the footprint which Crusoe found in the sand
*' was an Index to him of some creature, while as a Symbol it
called up the idea of a man." In the material here reproduced we
are not concerned with the special applications which its author
made of his theory, but in view of his constant insistence on the
logical nature of his inquiry and his desire to avoid psychology,
a further trichotomy ^ of general interest may here be mentioned.
Logic he defined in an article in the Monist (Vol. VII., 1896-7,
p. 25) as dealing with the problem, ** to what conditions an
assertion must conform in order that it may correspond to the
* reality ' " ; Speculative Grammar was the name given also by
Duns Scotus to " the study of properties of beliefs which belong
to them as beliefs " ; and thirdly, " the study of those general
conditions under which a problem presents itself for solution,
and then under which one question leads on to another," appears
as Universal Rhetoric. In writing to Lady Welby, he remarks that
* Signifies,' the term which she used for the study of Meaning,
** would appear from its name to be that part of Semeiotic which
inquires into the relation of Signs to the Interpretants (for which,
1 " They seem all to be trichotomies which form an attribute to
the essentially triadic nature of the sign."
U
282 APPENDIX D
as limited to Symbols, I proposed in 1867 the name Universal
Rhetoric)." He strongly urges her to make a scientific study of
Semeiotic, as well as of his Graphs ('* I wish you would study
my Existential Graphs ; for in my opinion it quite wonderfully
opens up the true nature and method of logical analysis — that is
to say, of definition ; though how it does so is not easy to make out,
until I shall have written my exposition of that art ") ; and in a
letter written in 1904, shortly before the publication of. his chief
Monist article, he deals with the classification of Signs at some
length.
He prefaces his remarks by insisting that ** a sign has two
Objects^ its object as it is represented and its object in itself. It
has also three Interpretants^ its interpretant as represented or
meant to be understood, its interpretant as it is produced, and its
interpretant in itself." Signs may be divided as to their own
material nature, as to their relations to their objects, and as to
their relations to their interpretants.
" As it is in itself a sign is either of the nature of an appear-
ance, wheri I call it a qualisign ; or secondly, it is an individual
object or event, when I may call it a sinsign (the syllable sin
being the first syllable of Semel, simul, singular, etc.) ; or
thirdly, it is of the nature of a general type, which I call a
legisign. As we use the term * word * in most cases, saying that
* the ' is one * word * and * an * is a second * word,* * word *
is a legisign. But when we say of a page in a book that it has
250 * words * upon it, of which twenty are * the s,' the * word *
is a sinsign. A sinsign so embodying a legisign, I term a
replica of the legisign. The difference between a legisign and
a qualisign, neither of which is an individual thing, is that a
legisign has a definite identity, though usually admitting a
great variety of appearances. Thus &, and^ and the sound are
all one word. The qualisign, on the other hand, has no identity.
It is the mere quality of an appearance, and is not exactly
the same throughout a second. Instead of identity it has
great similarity, and cannot differ much without being called
quite a different qualisign."
With regard to the other main divisions of signs he explains
that " in respect to their relations to their dynamic objects, I
divide signs into Icons ^ Indices and Symbols (a division I gave in
1867). I define an Icon as a sign which is determined by its
dynamic object by virtue of its own internal nature. Such is
any qualisign like a vision, or the sentiment excited by a piece of
APPENDIX D 283
music considered as representing what the composer intended.
Such may be a sinsign Hke an individual diagram ; say a curve
of the distribution of errors. I define an Index as a sign deter-
mined by its dynamic object by virtue of being in a real relation
to it. Such is a Proper Name (a legisign), such is the occurrence
of a symptom of a disease (the symptom itself is a legisign, a
general type of a different character. The occurrence in a par-
ticular case is a sinsign). I define a Symbol as a sign which is
determined by its dynamic object only in the sense that it will be
so interpreted. It thus depends either upon a convention, a
habit ^ or a natural disposition of its interpretant or of the field of
its interpretant (that of which the interpretant is a determination).
Every symbol is necessarily a legisign ; for it is inaccurate to call
a replica of a legisign a symbol."
In respect of its immediate object a*^ign may either be a sign
of quality, of an existent or of a law ; while in regard to its relation
to its signified interpretant, it is said to be either a Rhemey a
Dicenty or an Argument. " This corresponds to the old division
Term, Proposition, and Argument, modified so as to be applicable
to signs generally. A Term is simply a class-name or Proper-
name. I do not regard the common noun as an essentially neces-
sary part 'of speech. Indeed, it is only fully developed as a
separate part of speech in the Aryan languages and the Basque —
possibly in some other out of the way tongues. In the Semitic
languages it is generally in form a verbal aflFair, and usually is so in
substance too. As well as I can make out, such it is in most
languages. In my universal algebra of logic there is no common
noun."
A Rheme is defined as " a sign which is represented in its
signified interpretant as if it were a character or mark (or as being
so)." It is any sign that is neither true nor false, like most single
words except * yes ' and * no,' which are almost peculiar to
modern languages.
A Dicent is defined as ** a sign represented in its signified
interpretant as if it were in a real relation to its object (or as being
so if it is asserted)." A proposition, he was careful to point out
in the Monist (1905, p. 172), is for him not the German SatZy but
" that which is related to any assertion, whether mental and self-
addressed or outwardly expressed, just as any possibility is
related to its actualization." It is here defined as a dicent symbol.
^ In the (1906) Monist article we read : " A symbol incorporates
a habit, and is indispensable to the application of any intellectual
habit at least" (p. 495). And again: "Strictly pure symbols can
signify only things familiar, and these only in so far as they are familiar."
284 APPENDIX D
" A dicent is not an assertion, but a sign capable of being
asserted. But an assertion is a dicent. According to my
present view (I may see more light in future) the act of asser-
tion is not a pure act of signification. It is an exhibition of
the fact that one subjects oneself to the penalties visited on
a liar if the proposition asserted is not true. An act of
judgment is the self-recognition of a belief ; and a belief
consists in the deliberate acceptance of a proposition as a
basis of conduct. But I think this position is open to doubt.
It is simply a question of which view gives the simplest view of
the nature of the proposition. Holding then that a Dicent does
not assert, I naturally hold that the Argument need not be
actually submitted or urged. I therefore define an Argument
as a sign which is represented in its signified interpretant not
as a Sign of that interpretant, the conclusion, but as if it were
a Sign of the Interpretant, or perhaps as if it were a Sign of the
state of the Universe to which it refers in which the premises
are taken for granted."
A sign may appeal to its dynamic interpretant in three ways : —
1. An argument only may be submitted to its interpretant,
as something the reasonableness of which will be acknow-
ledged.
2. An argument or dicent may be urged upon the interpretant
by an act of insistence.
3. Argument or dicent may be, and a rheme can only be,
presented to the interpretant for contemplation.
** Finally, in its relations to its immediate interpretant, I would
divide signs into three classes, as follows : —
1. Those which are interpretable in thoughts or other signs
of the same kind in infinite series.
2. Those which are interpretable in actual experiences.
3. Those which are interpretable in qualities of feelings or
appearances.
The conclusion is that there are ten principal classes of signs : —
I, Qualisigns ; 2, Iconic Sinsigns ; 3, Iconic Legisigns ; 4, Vestiges
or Rhematic Indexical Sinsigns ; 5, Proper Names, or Rhematic
Indexical Legisigns ; 6, Rhematic Symbols ; 7, Dicent sinsigns
(as a portrait with a legend) ; 8, Dicent Indexical Legisigns ;
9, Propositions, or Dicent Symbols ; 10, Arguments."
This treatment of the familiar logical distinction between
Term, Proposition, and Argument is somewhat different from the
APPENDIX D 285
account given in the Monist (1906) article, where it is explained
that" the first two members have to be much widened," and
where we are introduced to Semes, Phemes, and Delomes.
** By a Seme I should mean anything which serves for any
purpose as a substitute for an object of which it is, in some
sense, a representative or Sign. The logical Term, which is a
. class-name is a Seme. Thus the term ' The Mortality of man *
is a Seme. By a Pheme I mean a sign which is equivalent
to a grammatical sentence, whether it be Interrogative, Impera-
tive or Assertory. In any case, such a Sign is intended to have
some sort of compulsive effect on the Interpreter of it. As
the third member of the triplet, I sometimes use the word
Delome (pronounced deeloam, from S?jAtu/xa), though Argument
would answer well enough. It is a sign which has the Form
of tending to act upon the Interpreter through his own self-
control, representing a process of change in thoughts or signs,
as if to induce this change in the Interpreter."
A Graph, he says, is a Pheme, " and in my use hitherto, at
least, a Proposition. An Argument is represented by a series of
Graphs."
There follows a discussion of " the Percept, in the last analysis
the immediate object of all knowledge and all thought."
" This doctrine in nowise conflicts with Pragmaticism, which
holds that the Immediate Interpretant of all thought proper
is Conduct. Nothing is more indispensable to a sound episte-
mology than a crystal-clear discrimination between the object
and the Interpretant of knowledge ; very much as nothing is
more indispensable to sound notions of geography than a crystal-
clear discrimination between north latitude and south latitude ;
and the one discrimination is not more rudimentary than the
other. That we are conscious of our Precepts is a theory which
seems to me to be beyond dispute ; but it is not a fact of Imme-
diate Perception. A fact of Immediate Perception is not a
Percept, nor any part of a Percept ; a Percept is a Seme, while a
fact of Immediate Perception or rather the Perceptual Judgment
of which such fact is the immediate Interpretant is a Pheme
that is the direct Dynamical Interpretant of the Percept, and
of which the Percept is the Dynamical Object, and is with some
considerable difficulty (as the history of psychology shows)
distinguished from the Immediate Object, though the distinc-
tion is highly significant. But not to interrupt our train of
thought, let us go on to note that while the Immediate Object
286 APPENDIX D
of a Percept is excessively vague, yet natural thought makes up
for that lack (as it almost amounts to) as follows : — A late
Dynamical Interpretant of the whole complex of Percepts is
the Seme of a Perpetual Universe that is represented in instinctive
thought as determining the original Immediate Object of every
Percept. Of course, I must be understood as talking not psycho-
logy, but the logic of mental operations. Subsequent Inter-
pretants furnish new Semes of Universes resulting from various
adjunctions to the Perceptual Universe. They are, however, all
of them, Iriterpretants of Percepts.
Finally, and in particular, we get a Seme of that highest of all
Universes which is regarded as the Object of every true
Proposition, and which, if we name it all, we call by the somewhat
misleading title of * The Truth.'
That said, let us go back and ask this question : How is
it that the Percept, which is a Seme, has for its direct dynamical
Interpretant the Perceptual Judgment, which is a Pheme ?
For that is not the usual way with Semes, certainly. All the
examples that happen to occur to me at this moment of such
action of Semes are instances of Percepts, though doubtless there
are others. Since not all Percepts act with equal energy in this
way, the instances may be none the less instructive for being
Percepts, However, Reader, I beg you will think this matter
out for yourself, and then you can see — I wish I could — whether
your independently formed opinion does not fall with mine.
My opinion is that a pure Perceptual Icon — and many really
great psychologists have evidently thought that Perception is
a passing of images before the mind's eye, much as if one were
walking through a picture gallery, — could not have a Pheme for
its direct Dynamical Interpretant. I desire, for more than one
reason, to tell you why I think so, although that you should
to-day appreciate my reasons seems to be out of the question.
Still I wish you to understand me so far as to know that» mistaken
though I be, I am not so sunk in intellectual night as to be
dealing lightly with philosophic Truth when I aver that weighty
reasons have moved me to the adoption of my opinion ; and I am
also anxious that it should be understood that those reasons
have not been psychological at all, but purely logical. My
reason, then, briefly stated and abridged, is that it would be
illogical for a pure Icon to have a Pheme for its Interpretant,
and I hold it to be impossible for thought not subject to self-
control, as a Perceptual Judgment manifestly is not, to be
illogical. I dare say this reason may excite your derision or
APPENDIX D 287
disgust, or both ; and if it does I think none the worse of your
intelHgence."
There is an interesting letter dated March 14, 1909, in which
Lady Welby's own Triad of Interpretation is discussed. " I
confess," he writes, " I had not reaHzed before reading your
Encyclopcedia Bfitannica article, how fundamental your trich-
otomy of Sense, Meaning and Significance really is. It is not to
be expected that concepts of such importance should get perfectly
defined for a long time. ... I now find that my division (of
the three kinds of Interpretant) nearly coincides with yours, as
^t ought to do exactly, if both are correct. I am not in the least
conscious of having been influenced by your book in setting my
trichotomy." He does not believe that there was even an un-
conscious reminiscence, and consequently feels ** some exultation
in finding that my thought and yours nearly agree."
He proceeds to inquire how far there is agreement. " The
greatest discrepancy appears to lie in my Dynamical Interpretant
as compared with your ' Meaning.' If I understand the latter,
it consists in the effect on the mind of the Interpreter that the
utterer (whether vocally or by writing) of the sign intends to
produce. My Dynamical Interpreter consists in direct effect
actually produced by a Sign upon an Interpreter of it. They
agree in being effects of the Sign upon an individual mind, I
think, or upon a number of actual individual minds by indepen-
dent action upon each. My Final Interpretant is, I believe,
exactly the same as your Significance ; namely, the effect the
Sign would produce upon any mind upon which circumstances
should permit it to work out its full effect. My Immediate Inter-
pretant is, I think, very nearly, if not quite, the same as your
* Sense * ; for I understand the former to be the total unanalysed
effect that the Sign is calculated to produce ; and I have been
accustomed to identify this with the efltect the sign first produces
or may produce upon a mind, without any reflection upon it. I
am not aware that you have ever attempted to define your term
* Sense,' but I gather from Teading over what you say that it is
the first effect that a sign would have upon a mind well qualified
to comprehend it. Since you say it is Sensal and has no Volitional
element, I suppose it is of the nature of an * impression.' It is
thus, as far as I can see, exactly my Immediate Interpretant.
You have selected words from vernacular speech to express your
varieties, while I have avoided these and have manufactured terms
suitable, as I think, to serve the uses of Science. I might describe
my Immediate Interpretation as so much of the effect of a Sign
288 APPENDIX D
as would enable a person to say whether or not the Sign was
applicable to anything concerning which that person had sufficient
acquaintance."
As regards Meaning and Intention, he continues : *' My
Interpretant with its three kinds is supposed by me to be some-
thing essentially adding to anything that acts as a Sign. Now
natural Signs and symptoms have no utterer ; and consequently
have no Meaning, if Meaning be defined as the intention of the
utterer. I do not allow myself to speak of the ' purposes of the
Almighty,' since whatever He might desire is done. Intention
seems to me, though I may be mistaken, an interval of time
between the desire and the laying of the train by which the
desire is to be brought about. But it seems to me that desire
can only belong to a finite creature." i\nd he sums up as
follows : —
*' Your ideas of Sense ^ Meaning and Signification seem to me
to have been obtained through a prodigious sensitiveness
of Perception that I cannot rival ; while my three grades
of Interpretant were worked out by reasoning from the
definition of a Sign what sort of thing ought to be noticeable
and then searching for its appearance. My Immediate
Interpretant is implied in the fact that each Sign must have
its own peculiar Interpretability before it gets any interpreter.
My Dynamical Interpretant is that which is experienced in
each act of Interpretation and is different from that of any
other ; and the Final Interpretant is the one Interpretative
result to which every Interpreter is destined to come, if
the Sign is sufficiently considered. The Immediate Inter-
pretant is an abstraction, consisting in a possibility ; the
Dynamical Interpretant is a single actual event ; the Final
Interpretant is that toward which the actual tends."
Peirce's conception of an ' Interpretant ' receives further
elucidation in a letter written at the end of 1908, from which we
have already quoted. He there emphasizes that in all questions
of interpretation it is indispensable to start with an accurate and
broad analysis of the nature of a sign. " I define a Sign as any-
thing which is so determined by something else, called its Object,
and so determines an effect upon a person, which effect I call its
Interpretant, that the latter is thereby mediately determined by
the former. My insertion of ' upon a person ' is a sop to Cerberus,
because I despair of making my own broader conception under-
stood. I recognize three Universes which are distinguished by
APPENDIX D 289
three Modalities of being. One of these Universes embraces
whatever has its Being in itself alone, except that whatever is
in this Universe must be present to one consciousness, or be
capable of being so present to its entire Being." The objects of
this Universe he called Ideas or Possibles, the objects of the second
or actual Universe being Facts, and of the third Necessitants.
The Mode of Being of signs can be ' possible ' {e.g.^ a hexagon
circumscribed in or about a conic) ; or * actual ' (as with a baro-
meter) ; or ' necessitant ' (as the word ' the,' or any other in the
dictionary). A ' possible ' sign he calls, as in the Monist article,
a Tone ("though I am considering replacing this by ' Mark * ") ;
an ' actual ' sign, a Token ; a * necessitant ' sign a Type.
" It is usual and proper to distinguish two Objects of a Sign,
the Mediate without, and the Immediate within the Sign. Its
Interpretant is all that the sign conveys ; acquaintance with its
Object must be gained by collateral experience. The Mediate
Object is the Object outside the Sign ; I call it the Dynamoid
Object. The Sign must indicate it by a hint ; and this hint,
or its substance, is the Immediate Object.''
When the Dynamoid object is ' possible,' the sign will be
Abstractive (as the word Beauty), when it is actual the sign will
be Concretive (any one barometer or a written narrative of any
series of events) ; and thirdly, "for a sign whose Dynamoid
Object is a Necessitant, I have at present no better designation
than a ' Collective,' which is not quite so bad a name as it sounds
to be until one studies the matter ; but for a person like me, who
thinks in quite a different system of symbols to words, it is awk-
ward and often puzzling to translate one's thought into words !
If the Immediate Object is a ' Possible ' (that is, if the Dynamoid
Object is indicated, always more or less vaguely, by means of its
Qualities, etc.) I call the Sign a Descriptive ; if the Immediate is
an Occurrence, I call the Sign a Designative ; and if the Immediate
Object is a Necessitant, I call the Sign a Copulant ; for in that
case the Object has to be so identified by the Interpreter that
the Sign may represent a necessitation."
A Possible can determine nothing but a Possible, and a
Necessitant can be determined by nothing but a Necessitant.
** Hence," he continues, " it follows from the definition of a
Sign that since the Dynamoid Object determines the Immedi-
ate object,
which determines the Sign itself,
which determines the Destinate Interpretant,
290 APPENDIX D
which determines the Effective Interpretant,
which determines the Explicit Interpretant,
the six trichotomies, instead of determining 729 classes of signs,
as they would if they were independent, only yield 28 classes ;
as I strongly opine (not to say almost approve) there are four other
trichotomies of signs of the same order of importance, instead
of making 59,049 classes, these will only come to 66. The addi-
tional 4 trichotomies are undoubtedly first Icons (or Simulacra),
Indices y Symbols , and then three referring to the Interpretants.
One of these I am pretty confident is : Suggestives, Imperatives,
Indicatives, where the Imperatives include Interrogatives. Of
the other two I think that one must be into Signs assuring their
Interpretants by Instinct, Experience, and Form. The other I
suppose to be what (in the Monist (1906) article) I called Semes,
Phemes, and Delomes.'*
* The edition of Peirce's Collected Works, now in course of publication
by the Harvard University Press , has so far brouglit to light nothing which
necessitates a modification or expansion of the above analysis. CJ.
J. Buchler, Charles Peirce's Empiricism, 1939, pp. 4-8, 155-6. and 180-5;
also Psyche, tg2S> PP- 5-7' and Vol. XVIII, 1943, art. cit., "Word Magic."
APPENDIX E
ON NEGATIVE FACTS
We may approach the discussion of Facts from many angles,
but perhaps it is best to begin by considering the controversy
about Negative Facts in which the issues come clearly to a
head. In 19 17 Mr Raphael Demos published in Mind the
results of an interrogatory to which he had subjected his more
intelligent non-philosophical acquaintances — as to whether
they had ever personally encountered a negative fact. All
concurred in the opinion that " every case of knowledge expressed
through a negative proposition was in reality of a positive nature,
in a fashion which they were unable to comprehend."
In his desire not to oppose this verdict of experience without
good reason, the writer ventured to question the orthodox
conclusion that negative facts are an essential constituent of the
universe, and substituted a theory of contrariety between pro-
positions whereby *' John is not in England " is to be construed
as a description of some positive proposition (" John is in Paris ")
incompatible with the positive proposition originally denied
(" John is in England "). So intrigued was the author of Principia
Mathematica by this logical escapade that, in spite of the almost
unquenchable desire to escape the admission of negative facts
which he had noted as implanted in every human breast, he was
constrained to examine the argument minutely and to traverse
it by pointing out that, * incompatible * being identical with
* not compatible,' a negative fact had been illicitly admitted by
the interpretation itself. Should the interpretation be re-
applied to eject this, this application again admits an intruder
and so on.
It is to be noted, however, that in point of time Mr W. E.
Johnson intervened in the pages of Mind with the following
dictum : " We can only say that * incompatible ' means ' in-
compatible with compatible ' — or to put it otherwise incompat-
ible is just as ultimate a positive relation as compatible." Further
291
292 APPENDIX E
moves in the game were to be expected ; some of them, indeed,
are to be found in Professor Eaton's Symbolism and Truth
(1925)-
The Doctrine of SymboHsm allows us, however, quietly to
settle the dispute by turning the attention to what it is about.
We can then apply the Theory of Signs upon which the Doctrine
depends and point out to what the dispute has been due.
It is about the referents of certain complex symbols ; those
containing the term * not ' or an equivalent. It is about whether
the symbol for one of these is ' negative fact ' or ' not a fact,' and
about the supposed consequences of this momentous decision.
We may best explain by returning at this point to the term Fact,
disregarding for the moment the problem of the negative.
The proposition, or complex symbol, ** Charles I. died on the
scaffold," is used to refer to a certain complex referent. Whenever
a form of words has no referent it fails to be a symbol and is
nonsense. In this case the referent is admitted by historians to
belong to the order of referents which they call ' historical
events.'
Similarly, the complex sign, " Alexander VI. became a rat-
catcher," has a referent which historians exclude from the his-
torical order. They will do this on the ground that all the places
into which this referent might fit are filled by other referents.
They say then (if symbolists) that this referent belongs to some
other order ; ^ either the order of Rabelais' infernal events, or
some other order of imaginary events, or events of some
imagination — all ' historical ' in the wider sense of events which
have happened.
When the referent of a given symbol belongs to the order
within which we are looking for it, we commonly say '* the
symbol (* Charles I. died on the scaffold ') expresses a fact," or
" It is a fact that (the symbol) " : more often we say ** (The symbol
— viz., Charles I., etc.) is true." These locutions have the same
referent, the referent more adequately referred to by the complex
symbol : — *' The referent belongs to the order to which it is allocated
{by context or openly) by a reference.^^
1 With regard to the symbols ' place ' and ' referent ' as used here,
see Chapter V., p. 106. When we say that a referent is allocated to
an ' order,' its ' order ' is shorthand for those parts of the reference
by the aid of which we attempt verification. Orders most commonly
used are ' historical,' ' actual,' ' physical,' ' psychological,' ' imaginary,'
' dream.' Some orders raise special little problems, such as the
' dramatic order.'
APPENDIX E 293
When on the other hand the referent belongs to some other
order than that within which we are led to seek it, we are apt to
say, if our knowledge of this order is sufficient : —
(i) That Charles I. died in his bed is contrary to the fact.
(2) (The symbol, viz., 'Charles I., etc.,') does not express a fact.
(3) (The symbol) expresses what is not a fact.
(4) It is not a fact that (the symbol).
(5) It is a fact that (the symbol, with a ' not ' suitably intro-
duced.)
These locutions can be seen to have the same referent. They
illustrate the mutations which signs undergo to serve linguistic
convenience and to torture logicians. No. (i) is the most curious.
It is a telescoped form of an expansion ; and expansion on the
way to Mr Demos' theory, as No. (5) is a transformation in his
opponent's favour. Instead of " is a fact " we may substitute
" is true " or " is a truth," and instead of " is not a fact " we may
substitute ** is false " or ''is not true." How many alternative
locutions are then at our disposal with which to avoid monotony
in our prose, may be computed by philologists with a statistical
penchant. A more adequate complex sign with the referent to
which all these refer is the following : —
The referent of (the symbol) belongs to another order of referents
than that to which it is allocated (contextually or openly).
More correctly, discarding the symbolic accessories ' referent '
or ' order ' : — The reference using (the symbol) has as parts refer-
ences which do not together make up a reference to any event,
A Facty therefore, is a referent which belongs to the order to
which it is allocated. This definition of ' a fact ' solves the ' pro-
blem of negative facts ' with which we began. No other will
solve it. The referent in part of the complex symbol (i) " Charles
I. did not die on the scaffold " is also the referent in part of the
complex symbol (2) " Charles I. died on the scaffold," but with a
different allocation. More clearly stated the expanded form of
(i) is *' The referent of the symbol ' Charles I. died on the scaffold '
belongs to another order than that of historical events.^' The
expanded form of (2) is " The referent of the symbol * Charles died
on the scaffold ' belongs to the historical order.'' Since historians
find the referent of " Charles I. died on the scaffold " in the
historical order we can say that (i) is false and (2) is true ; but
in so doing we are merely using alternative locutions.
The converse case of the symbols (i) " Charles I. did not die
294 APPENDIX E
in his bed " and (2) " Charles I. died in his bed " is treated in the
same fashion, (i) expands to " The referent of * Charles I. died
in his bed ' belongs to another order than that of historical events ^
(2) expands to '^The referent of 'Charles I. died in his bed ' belongs
to the historical order." Historians find the * place ' in the his-
torical order which would be filled by this referent filled by some
other referent. We may therefore say that (i) is true and (2) is
false, or that (i) refers to a fact and (2) does not so refer, or
refers to what is not a fact or to a negative fact ; but in so saying
we shall merely be using rival shorthands, developed for the
sake of linguistic convenience.
A piece of string will tie up the same parcel whether it has a
knot in it or not. There is no further peculiarity about those
parcels which happen to be tied by string containing knots.
They are neither * parcels containing knots ' nor * knotty parcels,*
but just honest parcels. Similarly it should now be obvious
that though propositions containing negative elements differ,
qua propositions, from those devoid of nots, the distinction does
not imply parallel differences in the objects referred to, or a
special class of negative objects. And this is' of course equally
true when a negative element is used merely as an indication of a
relation between Symbols^ as in Peano's Fourth Postulate " o is
not the successor of any number,'' and in the case of objects to
which we happen not to be able to refer by other linguistic
means. When we dispute as to whether a fact is positive or
negative, or whether there are * negative facts,' we are engaged
merely in the criticism of rival prose styles.
The moral of neglecting such considerations is perhaps best
pointed by a little fable concerning Amoeba —
**1Rcall3C thyself. Amoeba dear," said Will: and • Amoeba
realized herself, and there was no Small Change but many
Checks on the Bank wherein the wild Time grew and grew
and grew. And in the latter days Homo appeared. How, he
knew not ; and Homo called the change Progress, and the How he
called God. . . .for speech was ever a Comforter. And when
Homo came to study the parts of speech, he wove himself a noose
of Words, And he hearkened to himself, and bowed his head and
made abstractions, hypostatizing and glorifying. Thus arose
Church and State and Strife upon the Earth ; for oftentimes
Homo caused Hominem to die for Abstractions hypostatized and
glorified : and the children did after the manner of their fathers,
APPENDIX E 295
for so had they been taught. And last of all Homo began also
to eat his words.
Now, after much time, there appeared Reason, which said,
" Wherefore hast thou done this thing } "
And Homo said " Speech bewrayed me."
To whom Reason *' Go to now and seek the Doctrine of Sym-
bolism which showeth that the bee buzzeth not in the Head but
in the Bonnet."
But Homo hearkened not, and his sin was the greater in that
he was proud and obstinate withal. For as Philosopher and
Economist he said — " We will tend to give the matter our careful
consideration." And as Returning Warrior, he asked : " What,
grannie, didst thou say in the Great Wars ? " And as Plain Man
he continued to splash solemnly about in the Vocabulary of
Ambiguity — and all the while the Noose was tightening and Homo
began to grow inarticulate.
Then had Reason compassion on him, and gave him the Lin-
guistic Conscience, and spake again softly : " Go to now, be a
Man, Homo ! Cast away the Noose of Words which thou hast
woven, that it strangle thee not. Behold ! the Doctrine of Sym-
bolism, which illumineth all things. What are the Laws of
Science ? Are they not thine own Conceptual Shorthand ? "
And Man blushed.
And Reason asked again, " What is Number ? Is it not a
class of classes : and are not classes themselves thine own con-
venient Fictions ? Consider the Mountain Top — it Hums not
neither does it Spin. Cease then to listen for the noise of the
humming. Weary not thyself in unravelling the web that hath
never been spun."
And Man replied " Quite."
Then sang Reason and Man the Hymn 1923, " Glory to Man
in the Highest for Man is the Master of Words " — nineteen
hundred and twenty-three.
And the sound of the Hymn ringeth yet in our ear.
Thus the Realization of Amceba ended in the Realization of an
Error.
*' God laughed when he made the Sahara," says an old African
proverb — but Man may yet discover the uses of Dust.
SUPPLEMENT I
THE PROBLEM OF MEANING IN PRIMITIVE
LANGUAGES
By Bronislaw Malinowski, Ph.D., D.Sc.
Late Professor of Anthropology, University of London.
I. The need of a Science of SymboHsm and Meaning, such
as is presented' in this volume by Ogden and Richards.
This need exemphfied by the Ethnographer's difficulties in
dealing with primitive languages .
II. Analysis of a savage utterance, showing the complex pro-
blems of Meaning which lead from mere linguistics into the
study of culture and social psychology. Such a combined
linguistic and ethnological study needs guidance from a
theory of symbols developed on the lines of the present work.
III. The conception of * Context of Situation.' Difference in
the linguistic perspectives which open up before the Phil-
ologist who studies dead, inscribed languages, and before
the Ethnographer who has to deal with a primitive living
tongue, existing only in actual utterance. The study of an
object alive more enlightening than that of its dead remains.
The * Sign-situation ' of the Authors corresponds to the
' Context of Situation ' here introduced.
IV. Language, in its primitive function, to be regarded as a
mode of action, rather than as a countersign of thought.
Analysis of a complex speech-situation among savages.
The essential primitive uses of speech : speech-in-action,
ritual handling of words, the narrative, * phatic communion '
(speech in social intercourse).
V. The problem of Meaning in primitive languages. In-
tellectual formation of Meaning by apperception not
primitive. Biological view of meaning in early non-arti-
296
SUPPLEMENT I 297
culate sound-reactions, which are expressive, significant
and correlated to situation. Meaning in early phases of
articulate speech. Meaning of words rooted in their prag-
matic efficiency. The origins of the magical attitude towards
words. Ethnographic and genetic substantiation of Ogden's
and Richards' views of Meaning and Definition.
VI. The problem of grammatical structure. Where to look
for the prototype of grammatical categories. " Logical *
and * purely grammatical ' explanations rejected. Existence
of Real Categories in the primitive man's pragmatic outlook,
which correspond to the structural categories of language.
Exemplified on the nature of the noun and of other Parts of
Speech.
I
Language, in its developed literary and scientific functions,
is an instrument of thought and of the communication of thought.
The art of properly using this instrument is the most obvious
aim of the study of language. Rhetoric, Grammar and Logic
have been in the past and still are taught under the name of Arts
and studied predominantly from the practical normative point of
view. The laying down of rules, the testing of their validity,
and the attainment of perfection in style are undoubtedly im-
portant and comprehensive objects of study, especially as Lan-
guage grows and develops with the advancement of thought and
culture, and in a certain sense even leads this advancement.
All Art, however, which lives by knowledge and not by inspira-
tion, must finally resolve itself into scientific study, and there is
no doubt that from all points of approach we are driven towards a
scientific theory of language. Indeed, for some time already, we
have had, side by side with the Arts of Language, attempts at
posing and solving various purely theoretical problems of lin-
guistic form and meaning, approached mainly from the psycho-
logical point of view. It is enough to mention the names of
W. von Humboldt, Lazarus and Steinthal, Whitney, Max Miiller,
Misteli, Sweet, Wundt, Paul, Finck, Rozwadowski, Wegener,
Oertel, Marty, Jespersen and others, to show that the Science of
Language is neither new nor unimportant. In all their works,
besides problems of formal grammar, we find attempts at an
analysis of the mental processes which are concerned in Meaning.
But our knowledge of Psychology and of psychological methods
advances, and within the last years has made very rapid progress
298 SUPPLEMENT I
indeed. The other modern Humanistic Sciences, in the first
place Sociology and Anthropology, by giving us a deeper under-
standing of human nature, and culture, bring their share to the
comm.on problem. For the questions of language are indeed the
most important and central subject of all humanistic studies.
Thus, the Science of Language constantly receives contributions
of new^ material and stimulation from nev^^ methods. A most
important impetus w^hich it has thus lately received has come from
the philosophical study of symbols and mathematical data, so
brilliantly carried on in Cambridge by Mr Bertrand Russell and
Dr Whitehead.
In the present book Mr Ogden and Mr Richards carry over
the study of signs into the field of linguistics, where it assumes a
fundamental importance. Indeed, they v^^ork out a new Science of
Symbolism which is sure to yield most valuable criteria for the
criticism of certain errors of Metaphysics and of purely Formal
Logic (cf. Chaps. II, VII, VIII and IX). On the other hand,
the theory has not merely a philosophical bearing, but possesses
practical importance in dealing with the special, purely scientific
problems of Meaning, Grammar, Psychology and Pathology of
Speech. More especially, important researches on Aphasia by
Dr Henry Head, which promise to throw entirely new light on
our conceptions of Meaning, seem to work towards the same Sem-
antic theories as those contained in the present book.^ Dr
A. H. Gardiner, one of the greatest experts in hieroglyphic script
and Egyptian grammar — of which he is preparing a new analysis
— has published some remarkable articles on Meaning, where he
approaches the same problems as those discussed by Mr Ogden
and Mr Richards, and solved by them in such an interesting
manner, and their respective results do noi seem to me to be
incompatible.^ Finally, I myself, at grips with the problem of
primitive languages from Papuo-Melanesia, had been driven
into the field of general Semantics.^ When, however, I had
the privilege of looking through the proofs of the present
book, I was astonished to find how exceedingly well the theories
there presented answered all my problems and solved my diffi-
culties ; and I was gratified to find that the position to which I
1 Sec the preliminary articles in Brain, to which the Authors also
refer in Chapter X.
2 See Dr Gardiner's articles in Man, January 1919, and in The
British Journal of Psychology, April 1922.
^ Cf. my article on " Classificatory Particles in the Language of
Kiriwina," Bulletin of School of Oriental Studies, Vol. II., and Argonauts
of the Western Pacific, chapter on " Words in Magic — Some Linguistic
Data."
SUPPLEMENT I 299
had been led by the study of primitive languages, was not essen-
tially a different one. I was therefore extremely glad when the
Authors offered me an opportunity to state my problems, and to
outline my tentative solutions, side by side with their remarkable
theories. I accepted it the more gladly because I hope to show
how important a light the theories of this book throw on the
problems of primitive languages.
It is remarkable that a number of independent inquirers, Messrs
Ogden and Richards, Dr Head, Dr Gardiner and myself, starting
from definite and concrete, yet quite different problems, should
arrive, if not exactly at the same results stated in the same ter-
minology, at least at the construction of similar Semantic theories
based on psychological considerations.
I have therefore to show how, in my own case, that of an
Ethnographer studying primitive mentality, culture, and language,
I was driven into a linguistic theory very much on lines parallel
to those of the present work. In the course of my Ethnographic
researches among some Melanesian tribes of Eastern New Guinea,
which I conducted exclusively by means of the local language,
I collected a considerable number of texts : magical formulae,
items of folk-lore, narratives, fragments of conversation, and
statements of my informants. When, in working out this lin-
guistic material, I tried to translate my texts into English, and
incidentally to write out the vocabulary and grammar of the
language, I was faced by fundamental difficulties. These diffi-
culties were not removed, but rather increased, when I consulted
the extant grammars and vocabularies of Oceanic languages.
The authors of these, mainly missionaries who wrote for the
practical purpose of facilitating the task of their successors,
proceeded by rule of thumb. For instance, in writing a voca-
bulary they would give the next best approximation in English
to a native word.
But the object of a scientific translation of a word is not to
give its rough equivalent, sufficient for practical purposes,, but
to state exactly whether a native word corresponds to an idea at
least partially existing for English speakers, or whether it covers
an entirely foreign conception. That such foreign conceptions do
exist for native languages and in great number, is clear. All
words which describe the native social order, all expressions
referring to native beliefs, to specific customs, ceremonies, magical
rites — all such words are obviously absent from English as from
any European language. Such words can only be translated into
English, not by giving their imaginary equivalent — a real one
300 SUPPLEMENT I
obviously cannot be found — but by explaining the meaning of
each of them through an exact Ethnographic account of the
sociology, culture and tradition of that native community.
But there is an even more deeply reaching though subtler
difficulty : the whole manner in which a native language is used
is different from our own. In a primitive tongue, the whole
grammatical structure lacks the precision and definiteness of our
own, though it is extremely telling in certain specific ways. Again
some particles, quite untranslatable into English, give a special
flavour to native phraseology. In the structure of sentences,
an extreme simplicity hides a good deal of expressiveness, often
achieved by means of position and context. Returning to the
meaning of isolated words, the use of metaphor, the beginnings of
abstraction, of generalization and a vagueness associated with
extreme concreteness of expression — all these features baffle any
attempt at a simple and direct translation. The ethnographer
has to convey this deep yet subtle difference of language and of
the mental attitude which lies behind it, and is expressed through
it. But this leads more and more into the general psychological
problem of Meaning.
II
This general statement of the linguistic difficulties which beset
an Ethnographer in his field-work, must be illustrated by a
concrete example. Imagine yourself suddenly transported on
to a coral atoll in the Pacific, sitting in a circle of natives and
listening to their conversation. Let us assume further that there
is an ideal interpreter at hand, who, as far as possible, can convey
the meaning of each utterance, word for word, so that the listener
is in possession of all the linguistic data available. Would that
make you understand the conversation or even a single utterance ?
Certainly not.
Let us have a look at such a text, an actual utterance taken down
from a conversation of natives in the Trobriand Islands, N.E. New
Guinea. In analysing it, we shall see quite plainly how helpless
one is in attempting to open up the meaning of a statement by
mere linguistic means ; and we shall also be able to realize what
sort of additional knowledge, besides verbal equivalence, is
necessary in order to make the utterance significant.
I adduce a statement in native, giving under each word its
nearest English equivalent :
Tasakaulo kaymatana yakida ;
We run front-wood ourselves ;
SUPPLEMENT I 301
tawoulo ovanu ; tasivila tagine
we paddle in place ; we turn we see
soda ; isakaulo kauuya
companion ours ; he runs rear-wood
oluvieki similaveta Pilolu
behind their sea-arm Pilolu
The verbatim English translation of this utterance sounds at
first like a riddle or a meaningless jumble of words ; certainly not
like a significant, unambiguous statement. Now if the listener,
whom we suppose acquainted with the language, but unacquainted
with the culture of the natives, were to understand even the
general trend of this statement, he would have first to be informed
about the situation in which these words were spoken. He would
need to have them placed in their proper setting of native culture.
In this case, the utterance refers to an episode in an overseas
trading expedition of these natives, in which several canoes take
part in a competitive spirit. This last-mentioned feature explains
also the emotional nature of the utterance : it is not a mere state-
ment of fact, but a boast, a piece of self-glorification, extremely
characteristic of the Trobrianders* culture in general and of
their ceremonial barter in particular.
Only after a preliminary instruction is it possible to gain some
idea of such technical terms of boasting and emulation as kaymatana
(front- wood) and kauuya (rear-wood). The metaphorical use
of wood for canoe would lead us into another field of language
psychology, but for the present it is enough to emphasize that
* front ' or * leading canoe ' and * rear canoe ' are important
terms for a people whose attention is so highly occupied with
competitive activities for their own sake. To the meaning of such
words is added a specific emotional tinge, comprehensible only
against the background of their tribal psychology in ceremonial
life, commerce and enterprise.
Again, the sentence where the leading sailors are described as
looking back and perceiving their companions lagging behind on
the sea-arm of Pilolu, would require a special discussion of the
geographical feeling of the natives, of their use of imagery as a
linguistic instrument and of a special use of the possessive pronoun
(their sea-arm Pilolu).
All this shows the wide and complex considerations into which
we are led by an attempt to give an adequate analysis of meaning.
Instead of translating, of inserting simply an English word for a
native one, we are faced by a long and not altogether simple pro-
302 SUPPLEMENT I
cess of describing wide fields of custom, of social psychology
and of tribal organization which correspond to one term
or another. We see that linguistic analysis inevitably leads
us into the study of all the subjects covered by Ethnographic
field-work.
Of course the above given comments on the specific terms
(front- wood, rear- wood, their sea-arm Pilolu) are necessarily
short and sketchy. But I have on purpose chosen an utterance
which corresponds to a set of customs, already described quite
fully .^ The reader of that description will be able to understand
thoroughly the adduced text, as well as appreciate the present
argument.
Besides the difficulties encountered in the translation of single
words, difficulties which lead directly into descriptive Ethno-
graphy, there are others, associated with more exclusively lin-
guistic problems, which however can be solved only on the basis
of psychological analysis. Thus it has been suggested that the
characteristically Oceanic distinction of inclusive and exclusive
pronouns requires a deeper explanation than any which would
confine itself to merely grammatical relations.^ Again, the puzz-
ling manner in which some of the obviously correlated sentences
are joined in our text by mere juxtaposition would require much
more than a simple reference, if all its importance and significance
had to be brought out. Those two features are well known and
have been often discussed, though according to my ideas not
quite exhaustively.
There are, however, certain peculiarities of primitive languages,
almost entirely neglected by grammarians, yet opening up very
interesting questions of savage psychology. I shall illustrate this
by a point, lying on the borderland between grammar and lexico-
graphy and well exemplified in the utterance quoted.
In the highly developed Indo-European languages, a sharp
distinction can be drawn between the grammatical and lexical
function of words. The meaning of a root of a word can be
isolated from the modification of meaning due to accidence or
some other grammatical means of determination. Thus in the
word run we distinguish between the meaning of the root — rapid
1 See op. cit., Argonauts of the Western Pacific — An account of Native
Enterprise and Adventure in the Archipelagoes of Melanesian New
Guinea, 1922.
2 See the important Presidential Address by the late Dr W. H. R.
Rivers in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute, Vol. LI I.,
January- June, 1922, p. 21, and his History of Melanesian Society,
Vol. II., p. 486.
SUPPLEMENT I 303
personal displacement — and the modification as to time, tense,
definiteness, etc., expressed by the grammatical form, in which
the word is found in the given context. But in native languages
the distinction is by no means so clear and the functions of
grammar and radical meaning respectively are often confused in
a remarkable manner.
In the Melanesian languages there exist certain grammatical
instruments, used in the flection of verbs, which express somewhat
vaguely relations of time, definiteness and sequence. The most
obvious and easy thing to do for a European who wishes to use
roughly such a language for practical purposes, is to find out what
is the nearest approach to those Melanesian forms in our languages
and then to use the savage form in the European manner. In
the Trobriand language, for instance, from which we have taken
our above example, there is an adverbial particle boge^ which,
put before a modified verb, gives it, in a somewhat vague manner,
the meaning either of a past or of a definite happening. The
verb is moreover modified by a change in the prefixed personal
pronoun. Thus the root ma (come, move hither) if used with
the prefixed pronoun of the third singular i — has the form ima
and means (roughly), he comes. With the modified pronoun ay
— or, more emphatical, lay — it means (roughly) he came or he
has come. The expression boge ayna or boge lay ma can be approxi-
mately translated by he has already come^ the participle boge
making it more definite.
But this equivalence is only approximate, suitable for some
practical purposes, such as trading with the natives, missionary
preaching and translation of Christian literature into native
languages. This last cannot, in my opinion, be carried out with
any degree of accuracy. In the grammars and interpretations of
Melanesian languages, almost all of which have been written by
missionaries for practical purposes, the grammatical modifications
of verbs have been simply set down as equivalent to Indo-European
tenses. When I first began to use the Trobriand language in
my field-work, I was quite unaware that there might be some
snares in taking savage grammar at its face value and followed
the missionary way of using native inflection.
I had soon to learn, however, that this was not correct and I
learnt it by means of a practical mistake, which interfered slightly
with my field-work and forced me to grasp native flection at the
cost of my personal comfort. At one time I was engaged in
making observations on a very interesting transaction which took
place in a lagoon village of the Trobriands between the coastal
304 SUPPLEMENT I
fishermen and the inland gardeners.^ I had to follow some import-
ant preparations in the village and yet I did not want to miss
the arrival of the canoes on the beach. I was busy registering and
photographing the proceedings among the huts, when word went
round, * they have come already * — boge laymayse. I left my
work in the village unfinished to rush some quarter of a mile to
the shore, in order to find, to my disappointment and mortification,
the canoes far away, punting slowly along towards the beach !
Thus I came some ten minutes too soon, just enough to make me
lose my opportunites in the village !
It required some time and a much better general grasp of the
language before I came to understand the nature of my mistake
and the proper use of words and forms to express the subtleties
of temporal sequence. Thus the root ma which means come^
move hither^ does not contain the meaning, covered by our word
arrive » Nor does any grammatical determination give it the
special and temporal definition, which we express by, * they have
come, they have arrived.' The form hoge laymayse^ which I heard
on that memorable morning in the lagoon village, means to a
native ' they have already been moving hither ' and not * they have
already come here.*
In order to achieve the spatial and temporal definition which
we obtain by using the past definite tense, the natives have recourse
to certain concrete and specific expressions. Thus in the case
quoted, the villagers, in order to convey the fact that the canoes
had arrived, would have used the word to anchor, to moor.
* They have already moored their canoes,' hoge aykotasiy would
have meant, what I assumed they had expressed by boge laymayse.
That is, in this case the natives use a diflFerent root instead of a
mere grammatical modification.
Returning to our text, we have another telling example of the
characteristic under discussion. The quaint expression * we
paddle in place ' can only be properly understood by realizing
that the word paddle has here the function, not of describing
what the crew are doing, but of indicating their immediate
proximity to the village of their destination. Exactly as in the
previous example the past tense of the word to come (* they have
come ') which we would have used in our language to convey the
fact of arrival, has another meaning in native and has to be
replaced by another root which expresses the idea ; so here the
native root wa, to move thither , could not have been used in
1 It was a ceremony of the Wasi, a form of exchange of vegetable
food for fish. See op. cit., Argonauts of the Western Pacific, pp. 187-189
and plate xxxvi.
SUPPLEMENT I 305
(approximately) past definite tense to convey the meaning of
* arrive there,' but a special root expressing the concrete act of
paddling is used to mark the spatial and temporal relations of
the leading canoe to the others. The origin of this imagery is
obvious. Whenever the natives arrive near the shore of one of
the overseas villages, they have to fold the sail and to use the
paddles, since there the water is deep, even quite close to the
shore, and punting impossible. So * to paddle ' means ' to
arrive at the overseas village.* It may be added that in this
expression * we paddle in place,' the two remaining words in
and place would have to be retranslated in a free English inter-
pretation by near the village.
With the help of such an analysis as the one just given, this or
any other savage utterance can be made comprehensible. In this
case we may sum up our results and embody them in a free
commentary or paraphrase of the statement :
A number of natives sit together. One of them, who has just
come back from an overseas expedition, gives an account of the
sailing and boasts about the superiority of his canoe. He tells
his audience how, in crossing the sea-arm of Pilolu (between the
Trobriands and the Amphletts), his canoe sailed ahead of all
others. When nearing their destination, the leadi'ng sailors
looked back and saw their comrades far behind, still on the sea-
arm of Pilolu.
Put 'n these terms, the utterance can at least be understood
broadly, though for an exact appreciation of the shades and details
of meaning a full knowledge of the native customs and psychology,
as well as of the general structure of their language, is indis-
pensable.
It is hardly necessary perhaps to point out that all I have said
in this section is only an illustration on a concrete example of the
general principles so brilliantly set forth by Ogden and Richards
in Chapters I, III and IV of their work. What I have tried to
make clear by analysis of a primitive linguistic text is that language
is essentially rooted in the reality of the culture, the tribal life and
customs of a people, and that it cannot be explained without
constant reference to these broader contexts of verbal utterance.
The theories embodied in Ogden 's and Richards' diagram of
Chapter I, in their treatment of the ' sign-situation ' (Chapter
III) and in their analysis of perception (Chapter IV) cover and
generalize all the details of my example.
3o6 SUPPLEMENT I
III
Returning once more to our native utterance, it needs no
special stressing that in a primitive language the meaning of any
single v^^ord is to a very high degree dependent on its context.
The words ' v^^ood ', * paddle ', * place ' had to be retranslated in
the free interpretation in order to show what is their real meaning,
conveyed to a native by the context in which they appear. Again,
it is equally clear that the meaning of the expression ' we arrive
near the village (of our destination) ' literally : ' we paddle in
place ', is determined only by taking it in the context of the whole
utterance. This latter again, becomes only intelligible when it is
placed within its context of situation^ if I may be allowed to coin
an expression which indicates on the one hand that the conception
of context has to be broadened and on the other that the situation
in which words are uttered can never be passed over as irrelevant
to the linguistic expression. We see how the conception of con-
text must be substantially widened, if it is to furnish us with its
full utility. In fact it must burst the bonds of mere linguistics
and be carried over into the analysis of the general conditions
under which a language is spoken. Thus, starting from the wider
idea of context, we arrive once more at the results of the foregoing
section, namely that the study of any language, spoken by a
people who live under conditions different from our own and
possess a different culture, must be carried out in conjunction
with the study of their culture and of their environment.
But the widened conception of context of situation yields more
than that. It makes clear the difference in scope and method
between the linguistics of dead and of living languages. The
material on which almost all our linguistic study has been done
so far belongs to dead languages. It is present in the form of
written documents, naturally isolated, torn out of any context of
situation. In fact, written statements are set down with the pur-
pose of being self-contained and self-explanatory. A mortuary
inscription, a fragment of primeval laws or precepts, a chapter or
statement in a sacred book, or to take a more modern example,
a passage from a Greek or Latin philosopher, historian or poet —
one and all of these were composed with the purpose of bringing
their message to posterity unaided, and they had to contain this
message within their own bounds.
To take the clearest case, that of a modern scientific book, the
writer of it sets out to address every individual reader who will
peruse the book and has the necessary scientific training. He
SUPPLEMENT I 307
tries to influence his reader's mind in certain directions. With
the printed text of the book before him, the reader, at the writer's
bidding, undergoes a series of processes — he reasons, reflects,
remembers, imagines. The book by itself is sufficient to direct
the reader's mind to its meaning ; and we might be tempted to
say metaphorically that the meaning is wholly contained in or
carried by the book.
But when we pass from a modern civilized language, of which
we think mostly in terms of written records, or from a dead one
which survives only in inscription, to a primitive tongue, never
used in writing, where all the material lives only in winged words,
passing from man to man — there it should be clear at once that
the conception of meaning as contained in an utterance is false and
futile. A statement, spoken in real life, is never detached from
the situation in which it has been uttered. For each verbal
statement by a human being has the aim and function of expres-
sing some thought or feeling actual at that moment and in that
situation, and necessary for some reason or other to be made
known to another person or persons — in order either to serve
purposes of common action, or to establish ties of purely social
communion, or else to deliver the speaker of violent feelings or
passions. Without some imperative stimulus of the moment,
there can be no spoken statement. In each case, therefore,
utterance and situation are bound up inextricably with each
other and the context of situation is indispensable for the under-
standing of the words. Exactly as in the reality of spoken or
written languages, a word without linguistic context is a mere
figment and stands for nothing by itself, so in the reality of a
spoken living tongue, the utterance has no meaning except in the
context of situation.
It will be quite clear now that the point of view of the Philo-
logist, who deals only with remnants of dead languages, must
differ from that of the Ethnographer, who, deprived of the ossi-
fied, fixed data of inscriptions, has to rely on the living reality
of spoken language influxu. The former has to reconstruct the
general situation — i.e.^ the culture of a past people — from the
extant statements, the latter can study directly the conditions
and situations characteristic of a culture and interpret the
statements through them. Now I claim that the Ethnographer's
perspective is the one relevant and real for the formation of
fundamental linguistic conceptions and for the study of the life
of languages, whereas the Philologist's point of view is fictitious
and irrelevant. For language in its origins has been merely the
3o8 SUPPLEMENT I
free, spoken sum total of utterances such as we find now in a savage
tongue. All the foundations and fundamental characteristics of
human speech have received their shape and character in the
stage of development proper to Ethnographic study and not in
the Philologist's domain. To define Meaning, to explain the
essential grammatical and lexical characters of language on the
material furnished by the study of dead languages, is nothing
short of preposterous in the light of our argument. Yet it would
be hardly an exaggeration to say that 99 per cent, of all linguistic
work has been inspired by the study of dead languages or at best
of written records torn completely out of any context of situation.
That the Ethnographer's perspective can yield not only general-
ities but positive, concrete conclusions I shall indicate at least in
the following sections.
Here I wish again to compare the standpoint just reached with
the results of Messrs Ogden and Richards. I have written the
above in my own terminology, in order to retrace the steps of my
argument, such as it was before I became acquainted with the
present book. But it is obvious that the context of situation^ on
which such a stress is laid here, is nothing else but the sign-situation
of the Authors. Their contention, which is fundamental to all the
arguments of their book, that no theory of meaning can be given
without the study of the mechanism of reference, is also the main
gist of my reasoning in the foregoing paragraphs. The opening
chapters of their work show how erroneous it is to consider Mean-
ing as a real entity, contained in a word or utterance. The ethno-
graphically and historically interesting data and comments of
Chapter II show up the manifold illusions and errors due to a
false attitude towards words. This attitude in which the word
is regarded as a real entity, containing its meaning as a Soul-box
contains the spiritual part of a person or thing, is shown to be
derived from the primitive, magical uses of language and to
reach right into the most important and influential systems of
metaphysics. Meaning, the real ' essence ' of a word, achieves
thus R^al Existence in Plato's realm of Ideas ; and it becomes the
Universal, actually existing, of mediaeval Realists. The misuse
of words, based always on a false analysis of their Semantic
function, leads to all the ontological morass in philosophy, where
truth is found by spinning out meaning from the word, its assumed
receptacle.
The analysis of meaning in primitive languages affords a
striking confirmation of Messrs Ogden and Richards' theories.
For the clear realization of the intimate connection between lin-
SUPPLEMENT I 309
guistic interpretation and the analysis of the culture to which the
language belongs, shows convincingly that neither a Word nor its
Meaning has an independent and self-sufficient existence. The
Ethnographic view of language proves the principle of Symbolic
Relativity as it might be called, that is that words must be treated
only as symbols and that a psychology of symbolic reference must
serve as the basis for all science of language. Since the whole
world of * things-to-be-expressed ' changes with the level of
culture, with geographical, social and economic conditions, the
consequence is that the meaning of a word must be always
gathered, not from a passive contemplation of this word, but from
an analysis of its functions, with reference to the given culture.
Each primitive or barbarous tribe, as well as each type of civiliza-
tion, has its world of meanings and the whole linguistic apparatus
of this people — their store of words and their type of grammar — can
only be explained in connection with their mental requirements.
In Chapter III of this book the Authors give an analysis of
the psychology of symbolic reference, which together with the
material collected in Chapter II is the most satisfactory treatment
of the subject which I have ever seen. I wish to remark that the
use of the word ' context ' by the Authors is compatible, but not
identical, with my use of this word in the expression ' context of
situation.* I cannot enter here into an attempt to bring our
respective nomenclature into line and must allow the reader to
test the Relativity of Symbolism on this little example.
IV
So far, I have dealt mainly with the simplest problems of
meaning, those associated with the definition of single words
and with the lexicographical task of bringing home to a European
reader the vocabulary of a strange tongue. And the main result
of our analysis was that it is impossible to translate words of a
primitive language or of one widely different from our own,
without giving a detailed account of the culture of its users and
thus providing the common measure necessary for a translation.
But though an Ethnographic background is indispensable for
a scientific treatment of a language, it is by no means sufficient,
and the problem of Meaning needs a special theory of its own.
I shall try to show that, looking at language from the Ethno-
graphic perspective and using our conception of context of situ-
ation, we shall be able to give an outline of a Semantic theory,
310 SUPPLEMENT I
useful in the work on Primitive Linguistics, and throwing some
light on human language in general.
First of all, let us try, from our standpoint, to form a view of
the Nature of language. The lack of a clear and precise view of
Linguistic function and of the nature of Meaning, has been, I be-
lieve, the cause of the relative sterility of much otherwise excellent
linguistic theorizing. The direct manner in which the Authors
face this fundamental problem and the excellent argument by
which they solve it, constitute the permanent value of their work.
The study of the above-quoted native text has demonstrated
that an utterance becomes comprehensive only when we interpret
it by its context of situation. The analysis of this context should
give us a glimpse of a group of savages bound by reciprocal ties
of interests and ambitions, of emotional appeal and response.
There was boastful reference to competitive trading activities,
to ceremonial overseas expeditions, to a complex of sentiments,
ambitions and ideas known to the group of speakers and hearers
through their being steeped in tribal tradition and having been
themselves actors in such events as those described in the nar-
rative. Instead of giving a narrative I could have adduced lin-
guistic samples still more deeply and directly embedded in the
context of situation.
Take for instance language spoken by a group of natives
engaged in one of their fundamental pursuits in search of sub-
sistence— hunting, fishing, tilling the soil ; or else in one of those
activities, in which a savage tribe express some essentially human
forms of energy — war, play or sport, ceremonial performance or
artistic display such as dancing or singing. The actors in any
such scene are all following a purposeful activity, are all set
on a definite aim ; they all have to act in a concerted manner
according to certain rules established by custom and tradition.
In this. Speech is the necessary means of communion ; it is the
one indispensable instrument for creating the ties of the moment
without which unified social action is impossible.
Let us now consider what would be the type of talk passing
between people thus acting, what would be the manner of its
use. To make it quite concrete at first, let us follow up a party of
fishermen on a coral lagoon, spying for a shoal of fish, trying to
imprison them in an enclosure of large nets, and to drive them
into small net-bags — an example which I am choosing also
because of my personal familiarity with the procedure. ^
1 Cf. the writer's article on " Fishing and Fishing Magic in the
Trobriand Islands," Man, 1918.
SUPPLEMENT I 311
The canoes glide slowly and noiselessly, punted by men especi-
ally good at this task and always used for it. Other experts who
know the bottom of the lagoon, with its plant and animal life,
are on the look-out for fish. One of them sights the quarry.
Customary signs, or sounds or words are uttered. Sometimes a
sentence full of technical references to the channels or patches on
the lagoon has to be spoken ; sometimes when the shoal is near
and the task of trapping is simple, a conventional cry is uttered
not too loudly. Then, the whole fleet stops and ranges itself —
every canoe and every man in it performing his appointed task —
according to a customary routine. But, of course, the men, as
they act, utter now and then a sound expressing keenness in the
pursuit or impatience at some technical difficulty, joy of achieve-
ment or disappointment at failure. Again, a word of command
is passed here and there, a technical expression or explanation
which serves to harmonise their behaviour towards other men.
The whole group act in a concerted manner, determined by old
tribal tradition and perfectly familiar to the actors through life-
long experience. Some men in the canoes cast the wide encircling
nets into the water, others plunge, and wading through the shallow
lagoon, drive the fish into the nets. Others again stand by with
the small nets, ready to catch the fish. An animated scene, full
of movement follows, and now that the fish are in their power the
fishermen speak loudly, and give vent to their feelings. Short,
telling exclamations fly about, which might be rendered by such
words as : ' Pull in,' * Let go,' ' Shift further,' * Lift the net '; or again
technical expressions completely untranslatable except by minute
description of the instruments used, and of the mode of action.
All the language used during such a pursuit is full of technical
terms, short references to surroundings, rapid indications of
change — all based on customary types of behaviour, well-known
to the participants from personal experience. Each utterance is
essentially bound up with the context of situation and with the
aim of the pursuit, whether it be the short indications about the
movements of the quarry, or references to statements about the
surroundings, or the expression of feeling and passion inexorably
bound up with behaviour, or words of command, or correlation
of action. The structure of all this linguistic material is in-
extricably mixed up with, and dependent upon, the course of the
activity in which the utterances are embedded. The vocabulary,
the meaning of the particular words used in their characteristic
technicality is not less subordinate to action. For technical
language, in matters of practical pursuit, acquires its meaning
312 SUPPLEMENT I
only through personal participation in this type of pursuit. It
has to be learned, not through reflection but through action.
Had we taken any other example than fishing, we would have
reached similar results. The study of any form of speech used
in connection with vital work would reveal the same grammatical
and lexical peculiarities : the dependence of the meaning of each
word upon practical experience, and of the structure of each
utterance upon the momentary situation in which it is spoken.
Thus the consideration of linguistic uses associated with any
practical pursuit, leads us to the conclusion that language in its
primitive forms ought to be regarded and studied against the
background of human activities and as a mode of human behaviour
in practical matters. We have to realize that language originally,
among primitive, non-civilized peoples was never used as a mere
mirror of reflected thought. The manner in which I am using it
now, in writing these words, the manner in which the author of
a book, or a papyrus or a hewn inscription has to use it, is a very
far-fetched and derivative function of language. In this, language
becomes a condensed piece of reflection, a record of fact or thought.
In its primitive uses, language functions as a link in concerted
human activity, as a piece of human behaviour. It is a mode of
action and not an instrument of reflection.
These conclusions have been reached on an example in which
language is used by people engaged in practical work, in which
utterances are embedded in action. This conclusion might be
questioned by an objection that there are also other linguistic
uses even among primitive peoples who are debarred from writing
or any means of external fixation of linguistic texts. Yet even they,
it might be urged, have fixed texts in their songs, sayings, myths
and legends, and most important, in their ritual and magical
formulae. Are our conclusions about the nature of language
correct, when faced with this use of speech ; can our views
remain unaltered when, from speech in action, we turn our
attention to free narrative or to the use of language in pure social
intercourse ; when the object of talk is not to achieve some aim
but the exchange of words almost as an end in itself ?
Anyone who has followed our analysis of speech in action and
compares it with the discussion of the narrative texts in Section
II, will be convinced that the present conclusions apply to nar-
rative speech as well. When incidents are told or discussed among
a group of listeners, there is, first, the situation of that moment
made up of the respective social, intellectual and emotional
attitudes of those present. Within this situation, the narrative
SUPPLEMENT I 313
creates new bonds and sentiments by the emotional appeal of the
words. In the narrative quoted, the boasting of a man to a mixed
audience of several visitors and strangers produces feelings of
pride or mortification, of triumph or envy. In every case,
narrative speech as found in primitive communities is primarily
a mode of social action rather than a mere reflection of thought.
A narrative is associated also indirectly with one situation to
which it refers — in our text with a performance of competitive
sailing. In this relation, the words of a tale are significant because
of previous experiences of the listeners ; and their meaning depends
on the context of the situation referred to, not to the same degree
but in the same manner as in the speech of action. The difference
in degree is important ; narrative speech is derived in its function,
and it refers to action only indirectly, but the way in which it
acquires its meaning can only be understood from the direct
function of speech in action. To use the terminology of this
work : the referential function of a narrative is subordinate to
its social and emotive function, as classified by the Authors in
Chapter X.
The case of language used in free, aimless, social intercourse
requires special consideration. When a number of people sit
together at a village fire, after all the daily tasks are over, or when
they chat, resting from work, or when they accompany some
mere manual work by gossip quite unconnected with what they
are doing — it is clear that here we have to do with another mode of
using language, with another type of speech function. Language
here is not dependent upon what happens at that moment, it
seems to be even deprived of any context of situation. The
meaning of any utterance cannot be connected with the speaker's
or hearer's behaviour, with the purpose of what they are doing.
A mere phrase of politeness, in use as much among savage
tribes as in a European drawing-room, fulfils a function to
which the meaning of its words is almost completely irrelevant.
Inquiries about health, comments on weather, affirmations of
some supremely obvious state of things — all such are exchanged,
not in order to inform, not in this case to connect people in action,
certainly not in order to express any thought. It would be even
incorrect, I think, to say that such words serve the purpose of
establishing a common sentiment, for this is usually absent from
such current phrases of intercourse ; and where it purports to
exist, as in expressions of sympathy, it is avowedly spurious on
one side. What is the raison d'etre^ therefore, of such phrases as
* How do you do ? * * Ah, here you are,' * Where do you come
314 SUPPLEMENT I
from ? ' * Nice day to-day ' — all of which serve in one society or
another as formulas of greeting or approach ?
I think that, in discussing the function of Speech in mere
sociabilities, we come to one of the bedrock aspects of man's
nature in society. There is in all human beings the well-known
tendency to congregate, to be together, to enjoy each other's
company. Many instincts and innate trends, such as fear or
pugnacity, all the types of social sentiments such as ambition,
vanity, passion for power and wealth, are dependent upon and
associated with the fundamental tendency which makes the mere
presence of others a necessity for man.^
Now speech is the intimate correlate of this tendency, for, to
a natural man, another man's silence is not a reassuring factor,
but, on the contrary, something alarming and dangerous. The
stranger who cannot speak the language is to all savage tribesmen
a natural enemy. To the primitive mind, whether among savages
or our own uneducated classes, taciturnity means not only un-
friendliness but directly a bad character. This no doubt varies
greatly with the national character but remains true as a general
rule. The breaking of silence, the communion of words is the
first act to establish links of fellowship, which is consummated
only by the breaking of bread and the communion of food.
The modern English expression, * Nice day to-day ' or the Mel-
anesian phrase, * Whence comest thou ? ' are needed to get over
the strange and unpleasant tension which men feel when facing
each other in silence.
After the first formula, there comes a flow of language, purpose-
less expressions of preference or aversion, accounts of irrelevant
happenings, comments on what is perfectly obvious. Such
gossip, as found in Primitive Societies, differs only a little from
our own. Always the same emphasis of affirmation and consent,
mixed perhaps with an incidental disagreement which creates
the bonds of antipathy. Or personal accounts of the speaker's
views and life history, to which the hearer listens under some
restraint and with slightly veiled impatience, waiting till his own
turn arrives to speak. For in this use of speech the bonds created
between hearer and speaker are not quite symmetrical, the man
linguistically active receiving the greater share of social pleasure
and self-enhancement. But though the hearing given to such
^ I avoid on purpose the use of the expression Herd-instinct, for
I believe that the tendency in question cannot strictly be called an
instinct. Moreover the term Herd-instinct has been misused in a
recent sociological work which has, however, become sufficiently
popular to establish its views on this subject with the general reader.
SUPPLEMENT I 315
utterances is as a rule not as intense as the speaker's own share,
it is quite essential for his pleasure, and the reciprocity is estab-
lished by the change of roles.
There can be no doubt that we have here a new type of linguistic
use — phatic communion I am tempted to call it, actuated by the
demon of terminological invention — a type of speech in which
ties of union are created by a mere exchange of words. Let us
look at it from the special point of view with which we are here
concerned ; let us ask what light it throws on the function or
nature of language. Are words in Phatic Communion used
primarily to convey meaning, the meaning which is symbolically
theirs } Certainly not ! They fulfil a social function and that
is their principal aim, but they are neither the result of intellectual
reflection, nor do they necessarily arouse reflection in the listener.
Once again we may say that language does not function here as a
means of transmission of thought.
But can we regard it as a mode of action ? And in what relation
does it stand to our crucial conception of context of situation ?
It is obvious that the outer situation does not enter directly into
the technique of speaking. But what can be considered as situation
when a number of people aimlessly gossip together ? It consists
in just this atmosphere of sociability and in the fact of the per-
sonal communion of these people. But this is in fact achieved by
speech, and the situation in all such cases is created by the
exchange of words, by the specific feelings which form convivial
gregariousness, by the give and take of utterances which make up
ordinary gossip. The whole situation consists in what happens
linguistically. Each utterance is an act serving the direct aim of
binding hearer to speaker by a tie of some social sentiment or
other. Once more language appears to us iruthis function not as
an instrument of reflection but as a mode of action.
I should like to add at once that though the examples discussed
were taken from savage life, we could find among ourselves exact
parallels to every type of linguistic use so far discussed. The
binding tissue of words which unites the crew of a ship in bad
weather, the verbal concomitants of a company of soldiers in
action, the technical language running parallel to some practical
work or sporting pursuit — all these resemble essentially the primi-
tive uses of speech by man in action and our discussion could have
been equally well conducted on a modern example. I have chosen
the above from a Savage Community, because I wanted to empha-
size that such and no other is the nature oi primitive speech.
Again in pure sociabilities and gossip we use language exactly
3i6 SUPPLEMENT I
as savages do and our talk becomes the * phatic communion *
analysed above, v^^hich serves to establish bonds of personal
union between people brought together by the mere need of
companionship and does not serve any purpose of communicating
ideas. " Throughout the Western world it is agreed that people
must meet frequently, and that it is not only agreeable to talk,
but that it is a matter of common courtesy to say something even
when there is hardly anything to say " ^ — as the Authors remark.
Indeed there need not or perhaps even there must not be any-
thing to communicate. As long as there are words to exchange,
phatic communion brings savage and civilized alike into the
pleasant atmosphere of polite, social intercourse.
It is only in certain very special uses among a civilized com-
munity and only in its highest uses that language is employed
to frame and express thoughts. In poetic and literary production,
language is made to embody human feelings and passions, to
render in a subtle and convincing manner certain inner states
and processes of mind. In works of science and philosophy,
highly developed types of speech are used to control ideas and to
make them common property of civilized mankind.
Even in this function, however, it is not correct to regard
language as a mere residuum of reflective thought. And the
conception of speech as serving to translate the inner processes of
the speaker to the hearer is one-sided and gives us, even with
regard to the most highly developed and specialized uses of speech,
only a partial and certainly not the most relevant view.
To restate the main position arrived at in this section we can
say that language in its primitive function and original form has
an essentially pragmatic character ; that it is a mode of behaviour,
an indispensable element of concerted human action. And
negatively : that to regard it as a means for the embodiment or
expression of thought is to take a one-sided view of one of its
most derivate and specialized functions.
This view of the nature of language I have tried to establish
by a detailed analysis of examples, by reference to concrete and
actual facts. I trust therefore that the distinction which I have
explained, between * mode of action ' and * means of thinking,'
will not remain an empty phrase, but that it has received its con-
tent from the adduced facts. Nothing, however, establishes the
1 Cited from Chapter I of the present work.
SUPPLEMENT I 317
positive value and empirical nature of a general principle so
completely as when it is shown to work in the solution of definite
problems of a somewhat difficult and puzzling description.
In linguistics we have an intractable subject of this kind in the
Problem of Meaning. It would perhaps be presumptuous for
me to tackle this subject in an abstract and general manner and
with any philosophical ambition, after it has been shown by
Ogden and Richards (Chapters VIII and IX) to be of so highly
dangerous a nature. But I simply want to approach it through
the narrow avenue of Ethnographic empiricism and show how
it looks viewed from the perspective of the pragmatic uses of
primitive speech.
This perspective has allowed us to class human speech with
the active modes of human behaviour, rather than with the
reflective and cognitive ones. But this outside view and whole-
sale conception must be still supplemented by some more detailed,
analytic considerations, if we want to arrive at a clearer idea of
Meaning.
In Chapter III of the present work the Authors discuss the
psychology of Sign-situations and the acquisition of significance
by symbols. I need not repeat or summarize their penetrating
analysis, which to me is extremely convincing and satisfactory
and forms the corner-stone of their linguistic theory. I wish
however to follow up one point in their argument, a point closely
related to our pragmatic conception of language.
The Authors reject, and rightly so, the explanations of meaning
by suggestion, association or apperception, urging that such
explanations are not sufficiently dynamic. Of course new ideas
are formed by apperception and since a new idea constitutes a
new meaning and receives in due course a new name, apper^
ception is a process by which significance is created. But that
happens only in the most highly developed and refined uses of
language for scientific purposes. From our previous discussion
it should be well established that such a type of formulation of
meaning is highly derivative and cannot be taken as the pattern
on which to study and explain significance. And this not only
with reference to savages, but also in our own linguistic life.
For a man who uses his language scientifically has his attitude
towards language already developed by and rooted in the more
elementary forms of word-function. Before he has ever begun
to acquire his scientific vocabulary in a highly artificial manner
by apperception — which, moreover, takes place only to a very
limited degree — he has learnt to use, used and grown up using
3i8 SUPPLEMENT I
words and constructions, the meaning of which has been formed
in his mind in quite a different manner. And this manner is
primary as regards time, for it is derived from eariier uses ; it is
more general, because the vast majority of words thus receive
their meaning ; and it is more fundamental, since it refers to
the most important and prevalent uses of speech — those which we
have indicated above as common to primitive and civilized
humanity.
This manner of formation of meaning we must now proceed
to analyse more in detail, with reference to our pragmatic view of
language. And it will be best done by genetic considerations,
by an analysis of infantile uses of words, of primitive forms, of
significance and of pre-scientific language among ourselves.
Some glimpses of formation of meaning in infancy and childhood
will appear the more important, as modern psychology seems to
be more and more inclined to assign a permanent influence to
early mental habits in the outlook of the adult.
The emission of inarticulate emotional sound and of articulate
speech is a biological arrangement of enormous importance to the
young and adult of the human species, and is rooted deeply in
the instinctive and physiological arrangement of the human
organism. Children, savages and civilized adults alike react with
vocal expression to certain situations — whether these arouse
bodily pain or mental anguish, fear or passion, intense curiosity
or powerful joy. These sound reactions are part of the human
expression of emotions and as such possess, as has been established
by Darwin and others, a survival value or are at least themselves
relics of such values. Anyone in contact with infants and small
children knows that they express without the slightest ambiguity
their mood, their emotion, their need and desire. Concentrating
our attention for the moment on infantile utterances of this
type, it can be said that each sound is the expression of
some emotional state ; that for surrounding people it has a
certain significance ; and that it is correlated with the outer
situation surrounding and comprising the child's organism — a
situation which makes the child hungry or afraid or pleased or
interested.
All this is true of the non-articulate sounds emitted by an
infant, such as gurgling, wailing, squealing, crowing and weeping.
Later on, certain slightly articulated utterances follow, first
syllables — gu^ ma, ba, etc. — repeated indefinitely, mixed up and
blurred by other sounds. These sounds serve in a parallel
manner to express certain psycho-physiological states and to
SUPPLEMENT I 319
expend some of the child's energy. They are a sign of health
and they are a form of indispensable exercise. Emission of sounds
is at the earliest and at the later stage of verbal development,
one of the child's main activities, persistent and passionate, as
every parent knows from pleasant and unpleasant experiences
alike !
How shall we conceive the formation of meaning at these
earliest stages } Here, in this somewhat different approach, the
pragmatic view of language obtrudes itself again. The child acts
by sound at this stage, and acts in a manner which is both adapted
to the outer situation, to the child's mental state and which is
also intelligible to the surrounding adults. Thus the significance
of sound, the meaning of an utterance is here identical with the
active response to surroundings and with the natural expression
of emotions. The meaning of such a sound is derived from one
of the earliest and most important forms of human activity.
When sound begins to articulate, the child's mind develops
in a parallel manner and becomes interested in isolating objects
from its surroundings, though the most relevant elements,
associated with the food and comfort of the infant, have been
already singled out previously. At the same time, the child
becomes aware of the sounds produced by the adults and the
other children of its surroundings, and it develops a tendency to
imitate them. The existence of a social milieu surrounding the
child is a factor of fundamental biological importance in the
upbringing of the human young and it is also an indispensable
element in speech formation. Thus the child who begins to
articulate certain syllables soon finds these syllables repeated by
the adults and this paves the way to a clearer, more articulate
enunciation.
It would be extremely interesting to find out, whether and how
far some of the earliest articulated sounds have a ' natural '
meaning, that is a meaning based on some natural connection
between sound and object. The only fact here relevant I can
quote from personal observation. I have noticed in two children
that at the stage where distinct syllables begin to be formed the
repeated sound, ma^ ma, ma . . . appears when the child is dis-
satisfied generally, when some essential want is not fulfilled or
some general discomfort is oppressing it. The sound attracts the
most important object in its surroundings, the mother, and with
her appearance the painful state of mind is remedied. Can it be
that the entry of the sound mama . . . just at the stage when
articulate speech begins — with its emotional significance and its
320 SUPPLEMENT I
power of bringing the mother to the rescue — has produced in a
great number of human languages the root ma for mother ? ^
However this might be, and whether the child acquires some
of its early vocabulary by a spontaneous process or whether all
its words come to it from the outside, the manner in which the
first items of articulate speech are used is the point which is
really interesting and relevant for us in this connection.
The earliest words — mama^ dada, or papa^ expressions for
food, water, certain toys or animals — are not simply imitated
and used to describe, name, or identify. Like the previous non-
articulate expressions of emotion, these early words also come to
be used under the stress of painful situations or strong emotions,
when the child cries for its parent or rejoices in her sight, when
it clamours for food or repeats with pleasure or excitement the
name of some favourite plaything of its surroundings. Here
the word becomes the significant reaction, adjusted to situation,
expressive of inner state and intelligible to the human milieu.
This latter fact has another very important set of consequences.
The human infant, helpless in itself and unable to cope with the
difficulties and dangers of its early life, is endowed with very
complete arrangements for care and assistance, resulting from the
instinctive attachment of the mother and, to a smaller extent, of
the father. The child's action on the surrounding world is done
through the parents, on whom the child acts again by its appeal,
mainly its verbal appeal. When the child clamours for a person,
it calls and he appears before it. When it wants food or an object
or when it wishes some uncomfortable thing or arrangement to
be removed, its only means of action is to clamour, and a very
efficient means of action this proves to the child.
To the child, words are therefore not only means of expression
but efficient modes of action. The name of a person uttered aloud
in a piteous voice possesses the power of materializing this person.
Food has to be called for and it appears — in the majority of cases.
Thus infantile experience must leave on the child's mind the
deep impression that a name has the power over the person or
thing which it signifies.
^ The correspondence between early natural sounds and the nearest
kinship terms is well known (cf. Westermarck, History of Human
Marriage, Vol. I., pp. 242-245). Here I suggest something more :
namely that the natural emotional tone of one of these sounds, ma,
and its significance for the mother, cause her appearance and thus
by a natural process form the meaning of the mama type of words.
The usual opinion is that meaning is given to them, artificially, by
adults. " The terms which have been derived from the babble of
infants have, of course, been selected, and the use of them has been
fixed, by grown-up persons." (Westermarck, he. cit., p. 245.)
SUPPLEMENT I 321
We find thus that an arrangement biologically essential to the
human race makes the early articulated words sent forth by
children produce the very effect which these words mean. Words
are to a child active forces, they give him an essential hold on
reality, they provide him with the only effective means of moving,
attracting and repulsing outer things and of producing changes
in all that is relevant. This of course is not the statement of a
child's conscious views about language, but it is the attitude
implied in the child's behaviour.
Following the manner in which speech is used into the
later stage of childhood, we find again that everything reinforces
this pragmatic relation to meaning. In all the child's experience,
words meatiy in so far as they act and not in so far as they make the
child understand or apperceive. His joy in using words and in
expressing itself in frequent repetition, or in playing about with
^ word, is relevant in so far as it reveals the active nature of early
linguistic use. And it would be incorrect to say that such a
playful use of words is * meaningless.' It is certainly deprived of
any intellectual purpose, but possesses always an emotional value,
and it is one of the child's favourite actions, in which he approaches
this or that person or object of his surroundings. When a child
greets the approaching person or animal, item of food or toy,
with a volley of the repeated name, he establishes a link of liking
or disliking between himself and that object. And all the time,
up to a fairly advanced age, the name of an object is the first means
recurred to, in order to attract, to materialize this thing.
If we transfer now this analysis to conditions of primitive
mankind, it will be better not to indulge in essentially imaginary
and therefore futile speculations about the beginnings of speech,
but simply to cast a glance at the normal uses of language as we
see them in empirical observations of savages. Returning to the
above examples of a group of natives engaged in a practical
pursuit, we see them using technical words, names of implements,
specific activities. A word, signifying an important utensil, is
used in action, not to comment on its nature or reflect on its
properties, but to make it appear, be handed over to the speaker,
or to direct another man ta its proper use. The meaning of
the thing is made up of experiences of its active uses and not of
intellectual contemplation. Thus, when a savage learns to under-
stand the meaning of a word, this process is not accomplished by
explanations, by a series of acts of apperception, but by learning
to handle it. A word means to a native the proper use of the thing
for which it stands, exactly as an implement means something
322 SUPPLEMENT I
when it can be handled and means nothing when no active
experience of it is at hand. Similarly a verb, a word for an action,
receives its meaning through an active participation in this action.
A word is used when it can produce an action and not to describe
one, still less to translate thoughts. The word therefore has a
power of its own, it is a means of bringing things about, it is a
handle to acts and objects and not a definition of them.
Again, the same view of meaning results from the active uses
of speech among ourselves, even among those of us, who, on
comparatively rare occasions, can use language in a scientific or
literary manner. The innumerable superstitions — the agnostic's
fear of blasphemy or at least reluctance to use it, the active dislike
of obscene language, the power of swearing — all this shows that
in the normal use of words the bond between symbol and referent
is more than a mere convention.
The illiterate members of civilized communities treat and
regard words very much as savages do, that is as being strongly
bound up with the reality of action. And the way in which they
value verbal knowledge — proverbs, sayings, and, nowadays, news
— as the only form of wisdom, gives a definite character to this
implied attitude. But here I encroach on a field amply illustrated
and analysed in this book.
Indeed, on anyone who has read the brilliant chapters of Ogden
and Richards and grasped the main trend of their argument, it
will have dawned before now that all the argument of this Section
is a sort of foot-note to their fundamental contention that the
primitive, magical attitude towards words is responsible for a good
deal in the general use and abuse of language, more especially in
philosophical speculation. By the rich material cited in Chapter
II, and in Word Magic, by the examples of Chapters VII, VIII,
and IX, and by much of what is incidentally said, we are made to
realize how deeply rooted is the belief that a word has some power
over a thing, that it participates of the nature of the thing, that
it is akin or even identical in its contained ' meaning ' with the
thing or with its prototype.
But whence is this magical attitude derived ? Here the study
of the early stages of speech steps in helpfully and the Ethno-
grapher can make himself useful to the Philosopher of Language.
In studying the infantile formation of meaning and the savage
or illiterate meaning, we found this very magical attitude towards
words. The word gives power, allows one to exercise an influence
over an object or an action. The meaning of a word arises out
of familiarity, out of ability to use, out of the faculty of direct
SUPPLEMENT I 323
clamouring as with the infant, or practically directing as with
primitive man. A word is used always in direct active conjunction
with the reality it means. The word acts on the thing and the
thing releases the word in the human mind. This indeed is
nothing more or less than the essence of the theory which under-
lies the use of verbal magic. And this theory we find based on
real psychological experiences in primitive forms of speech.
Before the earliest philosophical speculation sets in, there
emerges the practice and theory of magic, and in this, man's
natural attitude towards words becomes fixed and formulated by
a special lore and tradition. It is through the study of actual
spells and verbal magic as well as by the analysis of savage ideas
on magic that we can best understand this developed traditional
view of the secret power of appropriate words on certain things.
Briefly it may be said that such study simply confirms our theor-
etical analysis of this section. In magical formulae we find a
preponderance of words with high emotional tension, of technical
terms, of strong imperatives, of verbs expressing hope, success,
achievement. So much must suffice here and the reader is referred
for more data to Chapter II of this book, and to the chapters on
* Magic ' and * The Power of Words in Magic * in the above
quoted work of mine.^
It may be of interest to interpret the results of our analysis of
the earliest stages of meaning on the diagram in which the
relations between Symbol, Act of Thought, and Referent are
represented by a triangle at the beginning of Chapter I of this
book. This diagram represents very adequately the said relations
in the developed uses of speech. It is characteristic in this tri-
angle that the base, indicated by a dotted line, represents the
imputed relation which obtains between a Symbol and the thing
it refers to, its Referent as the Authors name it. In developed
functions of speech, such as are, or at least should be, used in
philosophical speculation or scientific language (and it is chiefly
with these functions that the Authors are concerned in this
book) the gulf of Meaning, as it could be called, is bridged over
only by the Act of Thought — the bent line of the two shoulders
of the triangle.
Let us try to represent by analogous diagrams the earlier stages
of Meaning. At the first stage, when the utterance is a mere
sound-reaction, expressive, significant and correlated with the
situation, but not involving any act of thought, the triangle is
reduced to its base, which stands for a real connection — that
^ Argonauts of the Western Pacific.
324
SUPPLEMENT I
between SOUND-REACTION and SITUATION. The
first cannot yet be termed a Symbol nor the latter a Referent.
FIRST STAGE
SOUND-
REACTION
{connected
directly with)
SECOND STAGE
SITU-
ATION
ACTIVE {correlated
SOUND with)
(S?mi-articulated
or articulated)
REFER-
ENT
The beginnings of articulate
speech, when, parallel with its
appearance Referents begin to
emerge out of the Situation, are
still to be represented by a
single solid line of actual cor-
relation (second stage). The
sound is not a real symbol yet,
for it is not used detached from
its Referent.
THIRD STAGE
(A)
Speech in Action.
(B)
Narrative Speech.
ACT OF IMAGERY.
ACTIVE
SYMBOL
{Used to
handle)
REFER-
ENT
SYMBOL
{Indirect
relation)
REFERENT
(C)
Language of Ritual Magic.
RITUAL ACT
{based on traditional belief).
SYMBOL {Mystically referent
assumed relation)
SUPPLEMENT I 325
In the third stage we have to distinguish between the three
fundamental uses of language, active, narrative and ritual. Each
of them is made sufficiently clear by the diagram here given,
which must be taken in conjunction with our previous analysis.
The final stage of developed language is represented by the tri-
angle of Ogden and Richards, and its genetic relation to its
humble predecessors may explain some of its anatomy. First
of all : the possibility of extending the Authors' diagram or push-
ing it backwards into primitive speech-uses affords an additional
proof of its validity and adequacy. Further the solid nature of
almost all the bases of our triangles explains why the dotted line
in the final figure shows such tenacity and why it is capable of so
much mischief. The extreme vitality of the magical attitude to
words is explained in our foot-note to this, the theory of the book,
not only by a reference to the primitive uses of language by
savage and no doubt by prehistoric man, but also by its
perpetual confirmation in infantile uses of language and in the
very mechanism by which meaning is acquired in every in-
dividual life.
Some other corollaries might be drawn from our theory of
primitive meaning. Thus we might find in it an additional
confirmation of the Authors' analysis of definition. It is clear
that they are right when they maintain that * verbal ' and * real *
definition must in the end come to the same thing, and that the
making of this artificial distinction into a fundamental one has
created a false problem. Meaning, as we have seen, does not
come to Primitive Man from contemplation of things, or analysis
of occurrences, but in practical and active acquaintance with
relevant situations. The real knowledge of a word comes through
the practice of appropriately using it within a certain situation.
The word, like any man-made implement, becomes significant
only after it has been used and properly used under all sorts of
conditions. Thus, there can be no definition of a word without
the reality which it means being present. And again, since a
significant symbol is necessary for man to isolate and grasp an
item of reality, there is no defining of a thing without defining a
word at the same time. Definition in its most primitive and
fundamental form is nothing but a sound-reaction, or an articulate
word joined to some relevant aspect of a situation by means of an
appropriate human action. This definition of definition does not,
of course, refer to the same type of linguistic use as the one dis-
cussed by the Authors of this book. It is interesting to see,
however, that their conclusions, which are arrived at by the study
326 SUPPLEMENT I
of higher types of speech, hold good in the domain of primitive
uses of words.
VI
In the course of this essay I have tried to narrow down the
scope of each hnguistic problem discussed. At first it was the
principle that the study of language needs an ethnographic back-
ground of general culture, that linguistics must be a section,
indeed the most important one, of a general science of culture.
Then an attempt was made to show that this general conclusion
leads us to certain more definite views about the nature of lan-
guage, in which we conceived human speech as a mode of action,
rather than as a countersign of thought. We proceeded then to a
discussion of the origins and early forms of Meaning, as it must
have been experienced by Primitive Man. This gave us the
explanation and showed us the roots of the magical attitude of
man to words. Thus we moved by a series of conclusions, each
more concrete and definite than the previous one.
I wish now to touch upon one more problem, still more definite
and concrete than the others, that namely of the structure of
Language.
Every human tongue has a definite structure of its own. We
have types of isolating, agglutinative, polysynthetic, incorporating
and inflectional languages. In every one of them, the means of
linguistic action and expression can be brought under certain
rules, classified according to certain categories. This body of
structural rules with their exceptions and irregularities, the various
classes into which the elements of the language can be ranged, is
what we call ' the grammatical structure ' of a language.
Language is usually, though, as we have seen, incorrectly,
regarded as * the expression of thought by means of Speech
Sounds.' The obvious idea, therefore, is that linguistic structure
is the result of the rules of human thought, that * every gram-
matical category is — or ought to be — the expression of some
logical category.' But it does not require much mental effort
to realize that to hope for such perfect conjugal harmony between
Language and Logic, is far too optimistic : that in actuality
* they often diverge from one another,' in fact that they are con-
stantly at loggerheads and that Language often ill-treats Logic,
till it is deserted by her.^
^ I quote from H. Sweet {Introduction to the History of Language),
because this author is one of the cleverest thinkers on language. Yet
even he sees no alternative but Rule of Logic or Anarchy in language.
SUPPLEMENT I 327
Thus we are faced by a dilemma : either the grammatical
categories are derived from the laws of thought, and we are at a
loss to explain why the two are so ill adapted to each other. Why,
if Language has grown up in the services of Thought, has it been
so little influenced or impressed by its pattern ? Or we can, to
escape these difficulties, run on to the other horn of the dilemma
as most grammarians do. They haughtily turn away from the sour
grapes of any deeper probing or philosophy of Language, and
simply affirm that Grammar rules in its own right, by a sort
of divine grace, no doubt ; that the empire of Grammar must
continue in its splendid isolation, as a power hostile to Thought,
order, system and common sense.
Both views — the one appealing to Logic for help and the
other indicating an autonomous rule for Grammar — are equally
in disagreement with facts and to be rejected. It is nothing
short of absurd to assume, with the rigid grammarian, that
grammar has grown up as a sort of wild weed of human faculties
for no purpose whatever except its own existence. The spon-
taneous generation of meaningless monstrosities in the brain of
Man will not be easily admitted by psychology — unless of course
the brain is that of a rigid scientific specialist. And, general prin-
ciples or predilections apart, all human languages show, in spite
o^ great divergences, a certain fundamental agreement in struc-
ture and means of grammatical expression. It would be both
preposterous and intellectually pusillanimous to give up at the
outset any search for deeper forces which must have produced
these common, universally human features of Language. In
our Theory of Meaning, we have seen that Language serves for
definite purposes, that it functions as an instrument used for
and adapted to a definite aim. This adaptation, this correlation
between language and the uses to which it is put, has left its
traces in linguistic structure. But of course it is clear that we
must not look in the domain of logical thinking and philosophical
speculation for light on the aim and purposes of early human
speech, and so this purely logical view of language is as useless
as the purely grammatical one.
Real categories there are, on which the grammatical divisions
are based and moulded. But these real categories are not derived
from any primitive philosophic system, built up by contemplation
of the surrounding world and by crude speculations, such as
have been imputed to primitive man by certain anthropologists.
Language in its structure mirrors the real categories derived from
practical attitudes of the child and of primitive or natural man
328 SUPPLEMENT I
to the surrounding world. The grammatical categories with all
their peculiarities, exceptions, and refractory insubordination
to rule, are the reflection of the makeshift, unsystematic, practical
outlook imposed by man's struggle for existence in the widest
sense of this word. It would be futile to hope that we might
be able to reconstruct exactly this pragmatic world vision of the
primitive, the savage or the child, or to trace in detail its corre-
lation to grammar. But a broad outline and a general correspond-
ence can be found ; and the realization of this frees us anyhow
from logical shackles and grammatical barrenness.
Of course the more highly developed a language is and the
longer its evolutional history, the more structural strata it will
embody. The several stages of culture — savage, barbarous,
semi-civilized, and civilized ; the various types of use — prag-
matic, narrative, ritual, scholastic, theological — will each have
left its mark. And even the final, powerful, but by no means
omnipotent purification by scientific use, will in no way be able
to obliterate the previous imprints. The various structural
peculiarities of a modern, civilized language carry, as shown by
Ogden and Richards, an enormous dead weight of archaic use,
of magical superstition and of mystical vagueness.
If our theory is right, the fundamental outlines of grammar are
due mainly to the most primitive uses of language. For these
preside over the birth and over the most plastic stages of lin-
guistic development, and leave the strongest mark. The cate-
gories derived from the primitive use will also be identical for
all human languages, in spite of the many superficial diversities.
For man's essential nature is identical and the primitive uses of
language are the same. Not only that, but we have seen that the
pragmatic function of language is carried on into its highest
stages, especially through infantile use and through a backsliding
of adults into unsophisticated modes of thinking and speaking.
Language is little influenced by thought, but Thought, on the
contrary, having to borrow from action its tool — that is, language
— is largely influenced thereby. To sum up, we can say that the
fundamental grammatical categories, universal to all human
languages, can be understood only with reference to the prag-
matic Weltanschauung of primitive man, and that, through the
use of Language, the barbarous primitive categories must have
deeply influenced the later philosophies of mankind.
This must be exemplified by a detailed analysis of one at
least of the concrete problems of grammar ; and I shall choose
for a brief discussion the problem of the Parts of Speech. We
SUPPLEMENT I 329
must turn, therefore, to a stage in the development of tfift in-
dividual or of mankind when the human being is not interested in
reflection or speculation, when he does not classify phenomena
for purposes of knowledge but only in so far as they enter into
his direct dealings with his conditions of existence. The child,
the primitive man, or the unsophisticated individual has to use
Language as an indispensable means of influencing his social
surroundings. In all this, a very definite attitude develops, a
manner of taking notice of certain items of reality, of singling
them out and connecting them — an attitude not framed in any
system of thought, but expressed in behaviour and, in the case
of primitive communities, embodied in the ensemble of cultural
achievements among which Language looms first and foremost.
Let us begin with the relation of a child to its surroundings.
At the earliest stage, its actions and behaviour are governed by the
wants of the organism. It is moved by hunger and thirst, desite
for warmth and a certain cleanliness, proper conditions "for rest
and sleep, a due amount of freedom for movement, and last, not
least, the need of human companionship, and of handling by
adults. At a very early stage the child reacts to general situations
only, and hardly even singles out the nearest persons who minister
to its comfort and supply it with food. But this does not last
long. Even within the first couple of weeks, some phenomena,
some units begin to stand out from the general surroundings.
Human faces are of special interest — the child smiles back and
utters sounds of pleasure. The mother or the nurse is gradually
recognized, as even before that, are objects or vehicles of food.
Undoubtedly the strongest emotional appeal is exercised over
the child by the personality of its mother, and these articles or
vehicles of food. Anyone imbued with Freudian principles
might feel inclined to look here for a direct connection. In the
young of man, as in those of any Mammalian species, the infant
associates with its mother all its emotions about food. Primarily
she is for him a vessel of nourishment. If therefore nutrition is
given by any other means — and it must be remembered that
savage infants are fed with chewed vegetable food almost from
birth, as well as by the breast — the tender feelings by which an
infant responds to maternal cares are probably extended to other
ministrations of food. When one sees the loving attitude of a
modern bottle-fed baby to its bottle, the tender caresses and fond
smiles which it bestows on it, the identity of response to artificial
and natural food-conveyers seems to imply an identical mental
attitude of the infant. If this be so, we gain an insight into a
330 SUPPLEMENT I
very early process of personification of objects, by which relevant
and important things of the surroundings release the same
emotional response as do the revelant persons. However true
may be this suggestion of a direct identification, there is no doubt
that a great similarity exists between the early attitude towards the
nearest persons and objects which satisfy the needs of nutrition.
When the child begins to handle things, play with objects
of its surroundings, an interesting feature can be observed in its
behaviour, also associated with the fundamental nutritive tend-
ency of an infant. It tries to put everything into its mouth.
Hence the child pulls, tries to bend and ply soft or plastic objects,
or it tries to detach parts of rigid ones. Very soon isolated,
detachable things become of much greater interest and value than
such as cannot be handled in their entirety. As the child grows
up and can move things more freely, this tendency to isolate,
to single out physically, develops further. It lies at the bottom of
the well-known destructive tendency of children. This is inter-
esting, in this connection, for it shows how one mental faculty of
singling out relevant factors of the surroundings — persons, nutritive
objects, things — has its parallel in the bodily behaviour of the
child. Here again, in studying this detail of behaviour, we find a
confirmation of our pragmatic view of early mental development.
There can also be found a tendency to personify objects of
special interest. By the term ' personification ' I do not mean here
any theory or view of the child's own. I mean, as in the case of
food items, that we can observe in him a type of behaviour which
does not discriminate essentially between persons and objects.
The child likes and dislikes some of his playthings, gets angry
with them should they become unwieldy ; he hugs, kisses and
shows signs of attachment towards them. Persons, no doubt,
stand out first in time and foremost in importance. But even
from this it results that the relation to them is a sort of pattern
for the child's attitude towards things.
Another important point is the great interest in animals. From
my own observation, I can aflirm that children a few months
old, who did not take any prolonged interest in inanimate things,
would follow a bird in its movements for some time. It was also
one of the first words which a child would understand ; that is,
it would look for the bird when it was named. The interest
shown in animals at later stages of childhood is well known.
In this connection, it is of importance to us, because an animal
and especially a bird with its spontaneous movements, with its
ease of detachment from surroundings, with its unquestionable
SUPPLEMENT I 33i
reminiscence of persons, is just such an object as would arouse
the child's interest, according to our theory.
Analysing the present-day savage in his relation to the sur-
roundings, we find a clear parallel to the attitude just described.
The outer world interests him in so far as it yields things useful.
Utility here of course must be understood in its broadest sense,
including not only what man can consume as food, use for
shelter and implement, but all that stimulates his activities in
play, ritual, war, or artistic production.
All such significant things stand out for the savage as isolated,
detached units against an undifferentiated background. When
moving with savages through any natural milieu — sailing on
the sea, walking on a beach or through the jungle, or glancing
across the starlit sky — I was often impressed by their tendency
to isolate the few objects important to them, and to treat the rest
as mere background. In a forest, a plant or tree would strike me,
but on inquiry I would be informed — * Oh, that is just '* bush." '
An insect or bird which plays no part in the tradition or the larder
would be dismissed ' Mauna wala ' — * merely a flying animal.*
But if, on the contrary, the object happened to be useful in one way
or another, it would be named ; detailed reference to its uses and
properties would be given, and the thing thus would be dis-
tinctly individualized. The same would happen with regard to
stars, landscape features, minerals, fishes and shells. Everywhere
there is the tendency to isolate that which stands in some con-
nection, traditional, ritual, useful to man, and to bundle all the
rest into one indiscriminate heap. But even within this tendency
there is visibly a preference for isolated small, easily handled
objects. Their interest in animals is relatively greater than in
plants ; greater in shells than in minerals, in flying insects than
in crawling ones. That which is easily detached is preferred.
In the landscape, the small details are often named and treated
in tradition, and they arouse interest, while big stretches of land
remain without name and individuality.
The great interest taken by primitive man in animals forms a
curious parallel to the child's attitude ; and the psychological
reasons of both are, I think, similar. In all manifestations of
Totemism, Zoolatry, and of the various animal influences in
primitive folk-lore, belief and ritual, the interest of the savage in
animals finds its expression.
Now let us restate the nature of this general category in which
primitive mind places persons, animals and things. This rough,
332 SUPPLEMENT I
uncouth category is not defined, but strongly felt and well
expressed in human behaviour. It is constructed on selective
criteria of biological utility as v^ell as further psychological and
social uses and values. The prominent position taken up in it by
persons colours it in such a way that things and animals enter
into it with a personified character. All items of this category are
also individualized, isolated, and treated as units. Out of an
undifferentiated background, the practical Weltanschauung of
primitive man isolates a category of persons and personified
things. It is clear at once that this category roughly corresponds
to that of substance — especially to the Aristotelian ousia. But,
of course, it owes nothing whatever to any philosophical specu-
lation, early or late. It is the rough, uncouth matrix out of which
the various conceptions of substance could be evolved. It might
be called crude substance ^ or protousia for those who prefer learned
sounds to simple ones.
As we have seen, parallel with the child's early mental attitudes,
and presumably also with those of man in the first stages of his
development, there comes the evolution of significant, articulate
sound. The category of crude substance so prominent in the
early mental outlook requires and receives articulate sounds to
signify its various items. The class of words used for naming
persons and personified things forms a primitive grammatical
category of noun-substantives. Thus, this part of speech is seen
to be rooted in active modes of behaviour and in active uses of
speech, observable in child and in savage, and assumable in primi-
tive man.
Let us next treat briefly the second important class of words —
the action-words or verbs. The underlying real category appears
later in the child's mental outlook, and it is less preponderant in
that of the savage. To this corresponds the fact that the gram-
matical structure of verbs is less developed in savage tongues.
Indeed, human action centres round objects. The child is and has
to be aware of the food or of the ministering person before it can
or need disentangle the act from the agent or become aware of its
own acts. The bodily states of a child also stand out much less
from the situation than the things which enter into the latter.
Thus only at a subsequent stage of the child's development can
we see that it disentangles the changes in its surroundings from
the objects which change. This happens at a stage when arti-
culate sounds have begun to be used by the infant. Actions such
as eating, drinking, resting, walking ; states of the body, such as
sleep, hunger, rest ; moods, such as like and dislike begin to be
SUPPLEMENT I 333
expressed. Of this real category of action, state and mood, we
can say that it lends itself to command as well as to indication or
description, that it is associated with the element of change, that
is, time, and that it stands in a specially close connection with the
persons of the speaker and hearer. In the outlook of savages, the
same characters could be noticed in this category ; great interest
in all changes referring to the human being, in phases and types
of human action, in states of human body and moods. This
brief indication allows us to state that at the primitive stages of
human speech there must have existed a real category into which
entered all items of change capable of temporal modification,
bearing the character of human mood and of human will, and
bound up with the personal action of man.
When we look at the class of words used to denote items of
this real category, we find a close correspondence between cate-
gory and part of speech. The action- word, or verb, is capable
in all languages of grammatical modifications expressing temporal
relation, moods or modes of utterance, and the verb is also closely
associated with pronouns, a class of words which corresponds
to another real category.
A few words must be said about the pronouns. What is the
real category of primitive human behaviour and primitive speech
habits corresponding to that small but extremely vital class of
words } Speech, as we saw, is one of the principal modes of
human action, hence the actor in speech, the speaker, stands to
the foreground of the pragmatic vision of the world. Again, as
Speech is associated with concerted behaviour, the speaker has
constantly to refer to hearer or hearers. Thus, the speaker and
hearer occupy, so to speak, the two principal corner-sites in the
perspective of linguistic approach. There comes then a very
limited, special class of word corresponding to a real category,
constantly in use, easily associable with action- words, but similar
in its grammatical nature to nouns — the part of speech called
pronoun, including a few words only, but constantly in use ; as
a rule short, easily manageable words, appearing in intimate
association with the verb, but functioning almost as nouns.
This part of speech, it is obvious, corresponds closely to its real
category. The correspondence could be followed into many
more interesting details — the special asymmetric position of the
third pronominal person, the problem of genders and classifi-
catory particles, shown especially in the third person.^
^ Cf. the writer's article on ' Classificatory Particles ' in the Bulletin
of Oriental Studies, Vol. II.
334 SUPPLEMENT I
One point, however, referring to a common characteristic of
nouns and pronouns and deaUng with the declension of the various
cases of the noun, must still be touched upon. The real category
of this latter is derived from personified units of the surroundings.
In the child, the first attitude towards items of this category is
discrimination, based on biological utility and on pleasure in
perceiving them. The infant hails them in significant sounds,
or names them with articulate words on their appearance, and
calls for them in need. Thus these words, the nouns, are sub-
mitted to a definite use, that of naming and appeal. To this
there corresponds a subclass of noun-substantives which could
be called the appellative case, and which is similar to some uses
of the vocative and nominative in the Indo-European declension.
In the more developed uses of Language, this becomes a more
efficient adjunct of action. The thing-word comes into a nearer
association with the action- word. Persons are named, by their
names or by pronominal designations in association with what they
do : * I go,' * thou comest,* * so-and-so drinks,' * animal runs,'
etc. The name of a person or personified thing is thus used in
a difiPerent manner, with a diflferent mode of meaning as an actor,
or technically as the subject of action. This is the use correspond-
ing to the subjective case in which a noun is always put as the
subject of a predication. It may be said that to this case in nouns
corresponds a class of pronouns, the personal pronouns, I, thou, he.
Action is carried out with relation to certain objects. Things
and persons are handled. Their names, when associated with an
action-word in that manner, stand in the objective case, and
pronouns are used in a special form, viz., that called objective
or reflexive.
Since language is rooted in man's practical interest in things
and persons there is another relationship of fundamental import-
ance, that namely in which a person can lay a definite claim to
relation with or possession of, another person or thing. With
regard to the surroundings nearest people, there are the ties of
kinship and friendship. With regard to things, there comes the
economic sentiment of possession. The relation of two nouns,
standing to each other as a thing or person related to or possessed
by another thing or person, can be called the genitival or pos-
sessive relation ; and it is found as a distinct mode of connecting
two nouns in all human languages. To this corresponds also the
genitive case of European languages in its most characteristic
uses. In pronouns again, there is a special class of possessive
pronouns w^hich expresses relationship.
SUPPLEMENT I 335
Finally, one mode of action towards outer things or people
stands out from the others, namely that determined by
spatial conditions. Without going more into detail on this
subject, I suggest that a definite subclass of substantival uses
can be assumed in all languages — that corresponding to a pre-
positional case.
There are still obviously further categories resulting from
man's utilitarian attitude, those of the attributes or qualities of a
thing, characteristics of an action, relations between things,
relations between situations, and it would be possible to show
that adjective, adverb, preposition, conjunction are based on
these real categories. One could proceed also, still dealing on
the one hand with the Semantic Matter-to-be-expressed and on
the other with structural features of Language, to explain these
latter by a reference to real facts of primitive human nature.
This short sketch, however, is sufficient to indicate the method
and the argument, by which such a genetic, primitive Semantics
could be established — a science which, referring to the primitive
attitude of Man towards Reality, would show what is the real
nature of grammatical categories. The results of such primitive
Semantics even in so far as we have indicated them, stand, I
think, in close connection with the results of Ogden and Richards.
Their contention is that a false attitude towards Language and its
functions is one of the main obstacles in the advance of philosophi-
cal thought and scientific investigation, and in the ever-growing
practical uses of language in the press, pamphlet and novel.
Now in this and the previous section, I have tried to show that
such a crude and unsound attitude towards Language and Mean-
ing must exist. I have tried to demonstrate how it has arisen
and why it had to persist ; and I try to trace it even into details of
grammatical structure.
There is one more thing to add. Through later processes of
linguistic use and of thinking, there took place an indiscriminate
and wholesale shifting of roots and meanings from one grammat-
ical category to another. For according to our view of primitive
Semantics, each significant root originally must have had its place,
and one place only, in its proper verbal category. Thus, the roots
meaning * man,' * animal,' ' tree,' * stone,' * water,' are essentially
nominal roots. The meanings ' sleep,' ' eat,' * go,' *come,' * fall,'
are verbal. But as language and thought develop, the constant
action of metaphor, of generalization, analogy and abstraction,
and of similar linguistic uses build up links between the cate-
gories and obliterate the boundary lines, thus allowing words and
336 SUPPLEMENT I
roots to move freely over the whole field of Language. In analytic
languages, like Chinese and English, this ubiquitous nature of
roots is most conspicuous, but it can be found even in very primi-
tive languages.
Now Mr Ogden and Mr Richards have brought out in a
most convincing manner the extreme persistence of the old
realist fallacy that a word vouches for, or contains, the reality
of its own meaning. A peep behind the scenes of primitive
root-formation, of the reality of primitive categories and of their
subsequent, insidious collapse, adds an important document to
the Authors' views. The migration of roots into improper places
has given to the imaginary reality of hypostatized meaning a
special solidity of its own. For, since early experience warrants
the substantival existence of anything found within the category
of Crude Substance or Protousia, and subsequent linguistic
shifts introduce there such roots as * going,' * rest,' * motion,'
etc., the obvious inference is that such abstract entities or ideas
live in a real world of their own. Such harmless adjectives as
* good ' or ' bad,' expressing the savage's half- animal satisfaction
or dissatisfaction in a situation, subsequently intrude into the
enclosure reserved for the clumsy, rough-hewn blocks of primitive
substance, are sublimated into * Goodness ' and * Badness ' and
create whole theological worlds, and systems of Thought and
Religion. It must, of course, be remembered that the theory of
Ogden and Richards, and the view here expressed, maintain
most emphatically that Language, and all Linguistic processes
derive their power only from real processes taking place in man's
relation to his surroundings. I have merely touched upon the
question of linguistic shif tings, and it would be necessary to
account for them by the psychological and sociological processes
of barbarous and semi-civilized communities ; exactly as we
accounted for Primitive Linguistics by analysing the mind of
Primitive Man — and as the Authors of this book account for the
virtues and imperfections of the present-day language by their
masterly analysis of the human mind in general.
SUPPLEMENT II
THE IMPORTANCE OF A THEORY OF SIGNS AND
A CRITIQUE OF LANGUAGE IN THE STUDY OF
MEDICINE
By F. G. Crookshank, M.D., F.R.C.P.
Although the Art of Medicine has been greatly advanced, in
many respects, during the last century : although the Practitioners
of that Art do freely draw upon the vast storehouse of facts called
scientific, to the great benefit of suffering humanity ; and although
all medical men have some acquaintance with certain sciences of
which the province is in part coterminous with that of the Art of
Medicine, there is to-day no longer any Science of Medicine, in
the formal sense.
It is true that observation and thought have led medical men
to form generalizations which have obtained acceptance *,. but
there is no longer any organized or systematized corpus^ or formu-
lated Theory, which can be held to constitute the Science of
Medicine, and (in a now obsolete terminology) to form an integral
part of Natural Philosophy.
I say * no longer ' for, in other days, such a Science of Medicine
(or, of Physic) did exist, however much and justly we may con-
temn the ' facts,' the generalizations, and the Theory, by which,
at dififerent times, it was built up. To-day, however, notwith-
standing the abundance of what are called our accurately observed
facts, and the perfection of our scientific methods, writers and
lecturers on Medicine find it needful to protest loUdly that
Medicine is not, and never will be one of the exact sciences.
Perhaps Professors and Practitioners do not always pause to
consider what an exact science is, and which are the exact
sciences, and why. But the protestation seems a plea for the
exemption of medical writers from the duties of defining their
terms, and stating their premises ; while, by implication, we are
left to accept the inference that the accumulated facts and accepted
generalizations with which doctors are concerned are without
337
338 SUPPLEMENT II
interrelation or interdependence, and so cannot be arranged in
any orderly fashion, or linked together by any general Theory,
as can be those dealt with by astronomers, chemists, and biologists.
The province of Medicine seems, indeed, thus to constitute a
kind of Alsatia, an enclave in the Universe, of v^hich the exploita-
tion is only permitted to the licensed few.
Here for the most part interest is arrested, and it excites
neither resentment nor curiosity that Medicine should not be
amongst the subjects whose pursuit may lead to the Doctorate
of Science, and that there should be a great gulf fixed between
the ' scientific ' and the * medical ' studies of the young physician
and surgeon.
The explanation of this indifference is obscure, and to search
it out were perhaps irrelevant, but the present position of Medi-
cine requires examination.
It may be said, in general terms, that some statement and at-
tempted definition of fundamentals is necessary to the successful
pursuit of any of the recognized sciences, and no systematic
exposition of any of these sciences is ever made without the
adoption of some point de dipart which, as it is implied, agreed,
or perhaps stated, has been determined by earlier examination,
discussion, and decision concerning the nature of things and
knowledge, and our methods of thought and communication.
Certainly, I am in the fullest agreement with the Authors of
this book if they suggest that lately men of science have too often
failed to appreciate that importance of agreement concerning
signs and symbols which was so present to the minds of the Schol-
astics ; and certainly it cannot be said that the points de ddpart
adopted by our men of science are always well chosen. But,
after all, it is better to set out boldly and with intention rather
than to wander round declaring there is neither road nor sign-
post : and, however defective in form and content many of the
first principles and definitions in our scientific text-books,
systematic expositors do at least admit the necessity for, and the
propriety of some discussion of fundamentals. The case of the
doctors is more parlous.
Medicine is to-day an Art or Calling, to whose exercise certain
Sciences are no doubt ancilliary ; but she had forfeited pretension
to be deemed a Science, because her Professors and Doctors
decline to define fundamentals or to state first principles, and
refuse to consider, in express terms, the relations between
Things, Thoughts and Words involved in their communications
to others.
SUPPLEMENT II 339
So true is this that, although our text-books are occupied with
accounts of 'diseases,' and how to recognize, treat and stamp out
such * things,' the late Dr Mercier was perfectly justified when,
in not the least incisive of his valuable papers, he declared that
" doctors have formulated no definition of what is meant by * a
disease V' ^^^ went on to say that the time is now arrived in the
history of Medicine when a definition of her fundamental con-
cepts is required (Science Progress^ 1916-17).
Dr Mercier was perfectly justified in his statements, because
he was writing of the Medicine of to-day. Had he been ac-
quainted with such ' introductory chapters ' as those of Fernel
{1485- 1 557) entitled respectively *' Quo doctrinae atque demon-
strationis ordine ars medica constituenda sit " and " Morbi
definitio, quid affectus, quid affectio," he would not have failed
to insist that, when Medicine was a Science, even though less
* scientific ' than to-day, some definitions were attempted, some
principles were asserted and some distinction was admitted
between Names, Notions, and Happenings.
Nowadays, however, though we accumulate what we call
* facts ' or records of facts without nwmber, in no current text-
book is any attempt made to define what is meant by ' a disease,'
though some kind of definition is sometimes attempted of ' disease*
and of particular diseases. In a word, no attempt is made to
distinguish between what we observe in persons who are ill,
on the one hand, and the general notions we form in respect of
like illnesses in different persons, together with the * linguistic
accessories ' made use of by us for purposes of communication
concerning the same, on the other.
It is true that Sir Clifford Allbutt did never cease to tilt,
though in a somewhat lonely field, at the ' morbid entities '
which some people tell us diseases are, and not the least pungent
of his criticisms may be found in the British Medical Journal^
for 2nd September 1922, on p. 401.
But the hardy and rare few who have sought (though in
language less picked and perhaps less peregrinate) to express the
same truths as Sir Clifford, have had hard measure dealt them.
They have been contemned as traffickers, not in the * concrete
facts ' and indifferent reasoning proper to Medicine of the
Twentieth Century, but in wordy nugce and in something con-
temptuously called Metaphysics. For only ' mad doctors ' may
in these scientific times dabble in Philosophy without loss of
their reputation as practitioners !
And it is perhaps a sign of the times that the admirable essay
340 SUPPLEMENT II
contributed by Sir Clifford AUbutt to the first edition of his
System of Medicine in 1896, in which were discussed, in inimitable
style, such topics as Diagnosis, Diseases, Causes, Types, Nomen-
clature and Terminology, should have disappeared from subse-
quent issues. This essay is now seldom mentioned : perhaps it
is even less frequently read. But, to the present writer, in 1896
a raw diplomate, it came as something of a revelation for which
he has ever since been humbly grateful.
Now it is true that all teachers and professors of Medicine
— save those who, though * qualified ' are empirics, or ' unquali-
fied ' are quacks — are dependent in the communication of their
researches to their fellows and of instruction to their pupils,
upon the use they make of Symbols, and upon their understanding
of the difference between Thoughts and Things : if, that is, they
are not to set up Idols in the Market Place. But, one result of the
desuetude into which has fallen the custom of prefacing our
text-books with such preliminary discussion as may stimulate,
if not satisfy, the thoughtful and intelligent, is that few now
comprehend the distinctions between Words, Thoughts, and
Things, or the relations engaged between them when statements
are communicated.
Common sense, it is true, saves from detection and gross
error those who practise their art empirically : so long, that is, as
they do not seek or obtain publication of their occasional addresses
in our medical Journals, for it is precisely in our most orthodox
periodicals and in the Transactions of our most stately Societies
that the most melancholy examples of confusion and error arising
from a neglect of fundamentals may be seen.
Particularly is this so when any ' new ' experience or idea
comes up for discussion, and consequent assimilation or rejection ;
and it was a very special case of this nature that, in 19 18, turned
the thoughts of the present writer back to what he had learned
from Sir Clifltord AUbutt in 1896, and that has since led him to
very sincere appreciation of the purpose and accomplishment of
the Authors of this book.
It is thought that some useful purpose may be served if some
exposition of this special case is here attempted, and that parti-
cular attention may thereby be drawn toward the present diffi-
culties in medical discussion and statement : but, before any such
exposition is commenced, it is necessary to say something, in
general terms, concerning the confusion that now attends debate
owing to persistent failure to distinguish between what I have
SUPPLEMENT II 341
elsewhere called Names, Notions and Happenings {Influenza :
Essays by Several Authors, Heinemann, 1922), and the Authors of
this book, Words, Thoughts and Things.
Medical men, in the daily practice of their Art, are, in the first
place, concerned with the disorders of health that they observe,
and are called upon to remedy, in respect of different persons.
Disorder of health is recognized by certain manifestations,
usually called symptoms, which are at once appreciated by the
sufferer and often by the observer. There are also others : of
these, some, called ' physical signs,' require to be deliberately
sought by the clinician, and the rest (of inferential or indirect
importance only) involve recourse to the methods and appurten-
ances of the laboratory.
As, however, experience has outrun the limits of individual
opportunity, it has long been convenient, for the purpose of
ready reference and communication, to recognize the fact that,
in different persons, like groups of manifestations of disorder
of health occur and recur, by constructing certain general refer-
ences in respect of these like groups.' These general references
constitute disease-concepts ; or, more simply, diseases, and are
symbolized by Names which are, of course, the Names of Diseases.
But, as time goes on, and the range and complexity of our experi-
ences (or referents) extend, we find it necessary to revise our
references and rearrange our groups of referents. Our symboliz-
ation is then necessarily involved and we have sometimes to
devise a new symbol for a revised reference, while sometimes we
retain an old symbol for what is really a new reference.
These processes are usually described as the discovery of a
new disease, or the elucidation of the true nature of an old one,
and when accurately, adequately, and correctly carried out are
of very great advantage in practice, rendering available to all the
increments in the personal experience of the few. But when, as
so often happens, a name is illegitimately transferred from the
reference it symbolizes to particular referents, confusion in thought
and perhaps in practice is unavoidable.
Lately, it was reported that a distinguished medical man had
declared bacteriologists to have recently shown influenza to be
typhoid fever. What was said was, without doubt, that certain
cases thought to be properly diagnosed as influenza have been
shown, by bacteriological investigation, to be more correctly
diagnosed as typhoid fever. But, in journalistic circles the
pronouncement was at once taken to imply that the disease
" influenza " is really the disease " typhoid fever," and an appro-
342 SUPPLEMENT II
priate paragraph was prepared, trumpeting the discovery much
in the way that it might have been announced that Mr Vincent
Crummies really was a Prussian.
This anecdote illustrates, it is true, confusion prevailing in the
lay mind ; but it is a vulgar medical error to speak, write, and
ultimately to think, as if these diseases we name, these general
references we symbolize, were single things with external existences.
It is not to be thought that any educated medical man really
believes * a disease ' to be a material thing, although the phrase-
ology in current use lends colour to such supposition.
Nevertheless, in hospital jargon, * diseases ' are * morbid
entities,' and medical students fondly believe that these * entities *
somehow exist in rebus Naturce and were discovered by their
teachers much as was America by Columbus.
Teachers of Medicine, on the other hand, seem to share the
implied belief that all known, or knowable, clinical phenomena
are resumable, and to be resumed, under a certain number of
categories or general references, as so many * diseases ' : the true
number of these categories, references, or * diseases ' being
predetermined by the constitution of the universe at any given
moment.
In fact, for these gentlemen, * diseases ' are Platonic realities :
universals ante rem. This unavowed belief, which might be
condoned were it frankly admitted, is an inheritance from Galen,
and carries with it the corollary that our notions concerning this,
that, or the other * disease * are either absolutely right or abso-
lutely wrong, and are not merely matters of mental convenience.
In this way, the diseases supposed to be extant at any one moment
are capable — so it is thought— of such categorical exhaustion as
are the indigenous fauna of the British Isles and the population
of London. That our grouping of like cases as cases of the same
disease is purely a matter of justification and convenience, liable
at any moment to supersession or adjustment, is nowhere ad-
mitted ; and the hope is held out that one day we shall know all
the diseases that there * are,' and all about them that is to be
known.
In the meantime, so prevalent has become the vice or habit
of considering * diseases ' as realities in the vulgar sense of the
word, that no adverse comment was excited when, lately, in an
official document {Forty -eighth Ann. Rep. Local Govt. Board,
1918-19, Med. Supplement, p. 76) it was said that '' in the short
experience of encephalitis lethargica in this country it is already
apparent that its biological properties are altering ..."
SUPPLEMENT II 343
That this attribution of " biological properties " to a disease
was no mere lapsus calami is attested by the fact that the phrase
was somewhat complacently repeated, by the author himself,
in the Annual Report of the Chief Medical Officer of the Ministry
of Healthy 1919-20, on p. 366.
To elaborate any warning against the use, in official publica-
tions, of such absurdly ' realist * forms of expression as this
would seem, in view of what has been so cogently said by Sir
Clifford AUbutt, to be superfluous, at least. Yet warning is
necessary when we find one who has done such yeoman service
as Sir James Mackenzie declaring that " disease is only revealed
by the symptoms it produces." Disease, and diseases, say the
realists, must be * realities ' if they are agents that produce
symptoms. ^ So, Sir James Mackenzie, who has so powerfully
insisted on the importance of investigating symptoms y and who
has so strongly protested against our subordination to the tyranny
of mere names, becomes the unconscious ally of those who engage
in a hunt for a mysterious substantia that has * biological pro-
perties ' and ' produces * symptoms.
In modern Medicine this tyranny of names is no less pernicious
than is the modern form of scholastic realism. Diagnosis, which,
as Mr Bernard Shaw has somewhere declared, should mean the
finding out of all there is wrong with a particular patient and why,
too often means in practice the formal and unctuous pronun-
ciation of a Name that is deemed appropriate and absolves from
the necessity of further investigation. And, in the long run, an
accurate appreciation of a patient's " present state " is often
treated as ignorant because it is incompatible with the sincere use
of one of the few verbal symbols available to us as Proper Names
for Special Diseases.
In this connection allusion may be made to the enforced use
of certain verbal symbols by the Army during the late War.
By the judicious use, under compulsion, and at proper times,
of such linguistic accessories as P.U.O. (pyrexia of unknown
origin) and N.Y.D. (not yet diagnosed) the inconvenient appear-
ance in official reports of unwelcome diagnoses could always be
avoided, and a desirable belief in the absence of certain kinds of
illness could easily be propagated. No doubt, for official pur-
poses, some uniformity of practice in the use of symbols is neces-
sary ; but it should not be forgotten that official statistics, which,
in theory, should reveal to us what happens, or has happened
in the field of clinical experience are, in fact, little more than
analyses of the frequency with which certain forms or usages in
344 SUPPLEMENT II
symbolization have occurred. And this criticism has even more
force when it is remembered that official statistics often bear
reference to symbolization for which no official practice — correct
or arbitrary — has been defined. Thus, the Ministry of Health
has, during the last few years, published statistical tables hailed
as showing the different kinds of prevalence in successive years
and at different seasons, of what is called encephalitis lethargica,
and the diflFerence between these prevalences and those of certain
* analogous diseases.'
Now the true lesson to be drawn from these statistics is not
that the * biological properties * of any of these * diseases ' is
changing, but that medical men are symbolizing various clinical
happenings, in different way at sundry times, and in divers places,
and that the practice of the same doctor, in this respect, has
changed since 191 8 in response to change in his notions concern-
ing the group of ' analogous diseases ' in question.
In a word, medical statistics relate to the usage of symbols
for general references, whether or no the symbolization is correct
and the references adequate, rather than to things, occurrences,
or happenings. They have no necessary value, other than as
analyses of symbol-frequency, unless the relation of the symbols
to the reference and of the reference to the referents be agreed
after that process of discussion, so abhorrent to the medical
mind, and so generally stigmatized as unprofitable word-chopping.
Yet surely, if we desire analyses of notifications of disease to be
accepted as evidence of what has happened in the clinical field,
we must act as good accountants, and compare the records in the
books with the cash in hand and the evidences of actual trans-
actions.
Related to the question of statistical values is that of Research,
v/hen paid for or subsidized by the State, and controlled or directed
by Official Bodies. In principle, such research nearly always
takes the ostensible form of Investigation into Diseases.
Now without doubt, sincere official investigation into the
nature and relation of the general references we call * diseases '
would be productive of some good, but what the public imagine
and desire is inquiry into what happens. It is not suggested that,
in practice, such inquiry is entirely omitted : yet, too often what
takes place, and what reflects the greatest official lustre upon the
investigators, is neither inquiry into diseases nor into happenings^
but something as little useful as would be an investigation into
the Causes of Warfare, by a Committee of Intelligence Officers
devoting themselves to an Examination of Prisoners captured in
SUPPLEMENT II ' 345
the Trenches and a Description of their Arms and Accoutre-
ments.
Something visible, like a bullet, is what brings conviction to
the minds of * practical men ' ; and so, when epidemiologists
discuss certain general references, that they call * epidemic
constitutions,* hard-headed and practical investigators call for
the production of one such, on a plate or charger, like the head
of a John the Baptist (cf. Sir Thomas Horder : Brit. Med. Journal,
1920, i., p. 235).
Over and above all this, the emotive use of language so sways
the intellect that phrases suggesting the * real ' existence of diseases
as single objects of perception lead doctors to think as if these
diseases were to be kept away by barbed-wire entanglements,
or * stamped out ' by physical agencies ruthlessly employed.
And we not merely hypostatize, but personify these abstractions,
going on to speak of the '' fell enemy of the human race which is
attacking our shores " whenever a change in meteorological
conditions lowers the resistance of the population to their normal
parasites, and coughs and colds abound in consequence.
Then there is inevitable reaction, and some perverse sceptic,
without thinking what he means, declares * Influenza ' to be but
a label, whilst another, thinking confusedly, maintains * it ' to be,
not a disease, but a syndrome, or symptom-group.
It thus happens that, in the course of debase (on, for example,
Influenza) by one the name will be treated as a mere flatus vocis,
by another as the name of some general reference^ vague or defined,
and by a third as the name of some object with external and
* real,' if not material, existence.
None of the disputants will discuss the correctness of the sym-
bolization involved, or the adequacy of the reference, whilst
someone is sure to imply that positive or negative facts alleged
in respect of * Influenza ' can be proved or disproved by examina-
tion of two or three ' cases ' known to be * cases ' of Influenza, a
disease which, ex hypothesi, has properties and qualities as definite
as the height of Mount Everest or the weight of a pound of lead,
and only requiring discovery and mensuration by properly
accredited experts.
Any call for definition is met by citation of John Hunter's
dictum that definitions are of all things the most damnable :
any demand for precision in language or in thought, by the assever-
ation that Medicine is not an exact science.
On this point at least, there is general agreement.
But, are we content to leave the matter thus ? Ought we to be
AA
346 SUPPLEMENT II
content so to leave it ? Are we to acquiesce in the implication
that thoughtfulness need be no part of the equipment of the
physician ? Surely, to the thinker, the right use of words is as
essential a part of his technique as is, to the bacteriologist, the
right use of the platinum loop or the pipette ; .and there should
be no need for shame in acknowledging that thought, and the
expression of thought, require an apprenticeship no less severe
than do the cutting of sections and the manipulation of a capillary
tube. Yet, while there are not a few manuals of laboratory
technique, for the use of medical students, there is none (devoted
to the elucidation of the fundamental principles of Medicine,
and of fundamental errors in thought and communication.
Under these circumstances it seemed to the present writer
a year or two ago that some useful end might be served if he
attempted to clear up some of the sources of confusion, already
indicated, by writing in terms of the great scholastic controversy,
pointing out how to-day the Scholastic Nominalist is represented
by the sceptic who says ' Influenza ' is only a name, and the
Scholastic Realist by him who teaches Influenza to be a * morbid
entity.*
One or two essays were therefore written, which have been
since reprinted, wherein it was suggested that safety lay in the
adoption of the Conceptualist position ascribed to William of
Occam in the Encydopcedia Britannica (nth ed., arts. * Occam *
and * Scholasticism.') There (Vol. 24, p. 355) we are told that
" the hypostatizing of abstractions is the error against which
Occam is continually fighting": that for him " the universal is no
more than a mental concept signifying univocally several singu-
lars " and " has no reality beyond that of the mental act by which
it is produced, and that of the singulars of which it is predicated."
Now, for us who are doctors, the universals with which we
are most concerned are those general references that we call special
diseases, and our frequent singulars are the symptoms and
* cases ' that we observe, so that this hypostatizing of abstractions
is the very error against which Sir Cliff^ord AUbutt has ever
fought, while the spirit that inspired Occam — " a spirit which
distrusts abstractions, which makes for direct observation,
for inductive research ' — is the spirit that still informs the work
of all true clinical physicians. This spirit is the spirit of Hippo-
crates himself, who " described symptoms in persons and not
symptoms drawn to correspond with certain ideal forms of disease"
(Adams). But our modern * researchers ' far outstrip in their
unconscious realism the philosophy of their unavowed Master,
SUPPLEMENT II 347
Galen the great Neoplatonist, and describe entities at which even
he would have jibbed, without scruple or misgiving.
However, even if we avoid the fallacies of the realists, we must
none the less avoid contenting ourselves with the mere collecting
of singulars on the one hand, and assenting idly, on the other, to
some of those inconveniences of conceptualist expression that
have been pointed out in this book (vide supra, pp. 99-100). It
may be that some of these latter arise from the lack of expertness
of amateur expositors (amongst whom the present writer would
include himself) rather than from any weakness inherent in
Conceptualism ; but they may be acknowledged, and common
cause may be made with the Authors in their attempt to provide
a more excellent way.
Now, although it is not proposed, in what follows, to express in
the terms of these Authors the difficulties which (to write emotively)
beset the path of the thinking physician, it is hoped, by the
exposition of a special case, to reinforce, from the point of
view of a physician, what has been said by them in their plea
for the general adoption of a Theory of Symbols.
The special case which will now be stated is that which has
been already mentioned as having definitely directed the attention
of the present writer, a few years ago, to the questions discussed
in this book ; and it is felt that, whether or no the views held by
him as to the true solution of the difficulties are valid, the diffi-
culties themselves will not disappear unless the basic issues are
first made plain in the light of a Theory of Signs and a Critique
of the Use of Language.
Some eighty years ago, an orthopaedic surgeon named Heine,
practising near Stuttgart, observed the afflircion of a number
of young children by a form of palsy of one or more limbs, that
came on more or less acutely and that was followed by wasting
and marked disability. This kind of illness had been earlier
recognized by others, but had never been so well described as
by Heine. Heine's account attracting general attention, and his
observations being generally confirmed, a definite general refer-
ence, or ' disease,' became acknowledged, to which, in England,
the name ' Infantile Spinal Paralysis ' was attached, it being
iadmitted that the palsy and wasting were dependent upon lesion
of the spinal cord. Further experience, and the examination
of the spinal cord in cases that died some time after the onset
of the palsy, extended our knowledge of the cases, and the
symptoms were definitely connoted with lesions of what are called
the anterior horns of the grey matter of the cord. The lesions
were regarded as, in the beginning, of the nature of an acute
inflammation, and the extended clinico-pathological concept
was symbolized by the expression ' Acute Anterior Poliomyelitis.'
AA— 1
348 SUPPLEMENT II
Many years later, Medin, a Swede who had made extensive
observations in practice, showed conclusively that cases of the
kind thus indicated occurred in association with each other, or,
epidemically, and also in epidemic association with other cases
whereof the symptoms were cerebral and due to lesions situate
in the brain.
Medin's pupil, Wickman, carried observation still further.
He recognized the epidemic association of cases of the nature
described by Heine and Medin with cases of yet other clinical
types, all manifesting disordered function of some part of the
central nervous system. More than this, he showed that in
different years, or in different epidemics, different types of case
prevailed, though all cases agreed in the general nature of the
lesions found at post-mortem examination.
To the broad general reference that his clinical genius allowed
him to construct, resuming a wide range of cases of different
clinical aspect depending on the different localization of the acute
process in the nervous system, he gave the name of Heine-Medin
Disease.
In later work he broadened the base of even this great synthetic
concept, pointing out that, at the onset cases of Heine-Medin
Disease (as conceived by him) frequently manifested acute
catarrhal (or influenza-like) symptoms and occurred in close
association with other cases of acute catarrhal nature that did
not manifest any signs of nervous disorder. These cases he
regarded as ' abortive ' cases of Heine-Medin Disease.
But Wickman proceeded too fast : for, in England, where
even yet his work, and that of Medin, have been insufficiently
studied, it was said that a case of nervous disorder due to in-
flammation of the brain could not possibly be one of Acute
Anterior Poliomyelitis, which, as all the world knows, is a Disease
affectihg a limited portion only of the spinal cord !
Talk about a new disease, called Heine-Medin 's, was regarded
as a rather unworthy attempt on the part of some foreigners
to detract from the prestige of English observers who had adopted
the views current before Medin and Wickman began their
researches. Clearly, it was said, their cerebral cases must be
cases of quite another disease, one which attacks the brain, and
not the spinal cord. The name Acute Polio-encephalitis was
then devised, to meet the situation, in spite of Striimpell's
earlier warnings against any such unnecessary multiplication of
diseases. The maintenance of this purely artificial distinction
between what may be called the two ends of the Heine-Medin
spectrum was later urged when it was found that the experimental
reproduction of symptoms and lesions in monkeys (as a result
of inoculation of those animals with portions of diseased tissues
from man) was less successful when the inoculated matter was
taken from brains than when from spinal cords. Later still,
the separate notification by practitioners of cases of ' Acute
Poliomyelitis ' and ' Acute Polio-encephalitis ' was required, and
so little was the work of Wickman appreciated even in 191 8,
that Sir Arthur Newsholme, then Chief Medical Officer to the
Local Government Board, wrote of " the many forms of the
disease — or group of diseases — to which nosologists at present
attach the indiscriminate label ' Heine-Medinische Krankheit.' "
SUPPLEMENT II 349
{Report of an Inquiry into an Obscure Disease, Encephalitis
Lethargica : Reports to the Local Government Board on Public
Health and Medical Subjects, New Series, No. 121.)
Even now separate notification of these two ' entities ' is
required, though no guidance is afforded to the practitioner as
to his course of action when, as so frequently happens, symptoms
of involvement of both spinal cord and brain are present at the
same time.
But to turn back. Before the Great War physicians in the
United States began to recognize whole series of cases and
epidemics of the nature so faithfully described by Wickman,
and so ill understood in England. These epidemics culminated
in the vast prevalence in and about New York known as the
great epidemic of 191 6.
All the characteristics resumed by Wickman in his great
general reference, and symbolized by him as Heine-Medin Disease,
were at this time recognized and studied by the American physi-
cians, but, unfortunately, the name ' Acute Poliomyelitis ' was
retained, apparently on the lucus a non lucendo principle, since
lesions were described, not only in the grey but in the white
matter of the brain and spinal cord.
Happily the ridiculous attempt to discriminate between
Poliomyelitis ' and ' Polio-encephalitis ' was not made.
The American physicians, however, except in symbolization,
went even further than did Wickman ; and Dr Draper, perhaps
the ablest of the commentators, in Acute Poliomyelitis defined
his concept as one of a general infectious disease in the course
of which paralysis is an accidental and incidental occurrence,
adding that, though the nervous system is not always involved,
when it is the lesions may affect almost any part thereof (cf.
Ruhrah and Mayer, Poliomyelitis in all its Aspects, 191 7).
Draper's conception, far wider than even that of Wickman,
is, so far as it goes, absolutely justified when the assembled experi-
ences are considered.
The only doubt (and it is one which I know Dr Draper himself
shares with me) is whether a still wider reference, or synthetic con-
cept, is not required if certain observations in the clinical field,
more recent than those of 191 6, are to be adequately dealt with.
However this may be (and the point will be discussed) the
retention by the American physicians of a quite incorrect sym-
bolization was very unfortunate. For we Englishry were, in
1916-17, too busy to think accurately, and, hearing that, in New
York, there was a certain epidemic called poliomyelitis, with
manifestations quite other than those we were accustomed to
identify by that name, we put down many of the accounts received
as due to New World phantasies.
Indeed, in 191 8, one of our most eminent authorities told
me that, from personal experience in New York in 1916, he
could vouch that most of the cases put down as poliomyelitis
(in Draper's sense, that is) were nothing but influenza ! This
statement was made as a sort of reductio ad absurdum, but my
informant did not know that for years Brorstrom abroad, and
Hamer at home, had been maintaining poliomyelitis (in the old
sense) to be a manifestation of the incidence of influenza on the
nervous system.
350 SUPPLEMENT II
Now, late in 191 7, and early in 191 8, the present writer (who
at that moment was enjoying rather unusual opportunity for
the study of disease en masse) began to notice the occurrence of
peculiar cases of nervous and influenza-like nature which led him
to make first the forecast that 1918 was to be a year of pestilence,
and then that we were about to experience an epidemic of
Heine-Medin Disease of the cerebral, or ' polio-encephalitic '
type.
As a matter of fact, shortly afterwards, nearly all the ' types '
of Heine-Medin Disease described by Wickman were to be
identified in London, although the cerebral forms prevailed
(Crookshank, Lancet, 191 8, i., pp. 653, 699, 751).
But, unfortunately, this prevalence as a whole was overlooked,
and attention was focussed upon a relatively small number of
cases with intense symptoms of unfamiliar type, which were at
first thought to be cases of what is called ' botulism ' and (it was
hinted) due to poisoning by food-stuffs sent from Germany with
evil intent. Now the history of the concept symbolized as
* botulism ' is, in itself, fantastic beyond belief, and deserves
examination.
It is possible that it is valid, and adequate, for a certain number
of experiences, or referents : but that is another story. What is
known is that the name ' botulism ' has been repeatedly applied
to cases which, although corresponding clinically to the descrip-
tion given of cases of botulism, yet have nothing to do with
poisoning by the products of the kind of bacillus called B.
hotulinus — the conceptual cause of botulism.
Whether or no such a form of poisoning is ever met with in
the field of experience is here neither affirmed nor denied, but it
is now everywhere admitted that the peculiar cerebral cases of
the spring of 191 8 already alluded to had nothing in the world
to do with this famous bacillus and its products, mythical or
existent. Before, however, the false diagnosis of botulism had
been abandoned, I had expressed the view that these cases fell
within the ambit of the Heine-Medin Disease, or general reference,
and represented as it were an extreme ' type ' of that ' disease.'
This view was adopted by the late Sir William Osier, and also
(though with some degree of reticence) by Dr Draper, who, on
service in France at the time, was asked to report on the subject.
My own ideas, elaborated later in 191 8, when in the Chad wick
lectures I traced the growth of the Heine-Medin concept and
showed its applicability with but little extension to the cases in
question, met with little public support, for the Local Govern-
ment Board, rapidly abandoning the attribution to botulism,
found out that one Von Economo, an Austrian alienist, had
described cases of the same nature a year earlier as cases of a
' new disease ' : encephalitis lethargica. This name had been
chosen because lethargy was a prominent symptom, and an
inflammation of parts of the brain a prominent lesion.
Since the English cases at first called ' botulism ' corresponded
closely to those seen by Von Economo, it was felt that they were
cases of the disease he had described ; in accordance with the
maxim of Pangloss that things cannot be otherwise than as they
are. It was also felt that they could not be cases of poliomyelitis
— for reasons already indicated. Sir Arthur Newsholme's slight-
SUPPLEMENT II 35i
ing references to Heine-Media Disease were balanced by the
suggestion of one of his assistants that many cases thought in
the past to be cases of that malady were really cases of encephalitis
lethargica, although Sir Arthur had also said that the cases in
question did " come within the wide limits of the commonly
accepted definition of the Heine-Medin disease " {Report of an
Inquiry into an Obscure Disease, etc., pp. 2, 36).
Encephalitis lethargica it had to be then, and so that entity
was created, and another notifiable disease added to the list of
' analogous diseases ' headed by Acute Poliomyelitis and PoUo-
encephalitis.
It was wickedly hinted, however, that the only way in which
these ' Protean ' diseases, that so annoy ingly mimicked each
other, could be definitely distinguished was by the different
official forms on which they were to be notified !
Perhaps this gibe was hardly fair, for the official authorities
certainly said that poliomyelitis occurs in the summer, attacks
children, and imphcates the spinal cord, while encephalitis
lethargica occurs in the winter, attacks adults, and involves a
certain portion of the brain ; and this attempt at distinction
seems still to be maintained, though it has been said that " the
arbitrary differentiation of polio-encephalitis as a notifiable disease
has proved a useful measure and has provided a sort of half-way
house for borderland cases " {Report C.M,0. to the Minister of
Health, 1920, p. 64).
It would appear that the general reference ' polio -encephalitis '
is then maintained to provide a half-way house for cases that
will not fit into other categories — surely, an admission of their
inadequacy — in spite of the earlier admission that ' its cause '
is the same as that of poliomyelitis ( Annual Report of C.M.O. to
the Minister of Health, 1919-20, p. 260).
But the practical difficulty that, in spite of official rulings, it
is often quite impossible logically to assign a case to either of the
two categories — poliomyelitis and encephalitis lethargica — for
some spinal cases occur in the winter and sometimes in adults,
while some cerebral cases occur in the summer and not in-
frequently in children — has been resolved with great acceptance
by Dr Netter of Paris, an ardent upholder of belief in separate
* Entities.'
Netter explains away the fact that the cases are less easily
differentiated than are the official descriptions, by averring that
the two diseases mimic each other and that there is a polio-
myelitic form of encephalitis and an encephahtic form of polio-
myelitis ; thus honouring once more the philosophy of Pangloss.
But Netter's solution seems as truly helpful as the classffi-
cation of a heap of playing-cards into ' red court ' and ' black
plain.'
On finding the king of spades, instead of admitting that an
untenable classffication had been set up, one could easily say that
a ' red court ' of the ' black ' type had been found, and would
claim the position to be strengthened by the finding of the two
of diamonds — clearly a ' black plain ' of tne ' red ' type. This is
the logic of Medicine to-day.
It is not to be wondered at that, under the circumstances,
confusion is becoming worse confounded ; that doctors notify
352 SUPPLEMENT II
cases in whatever terms they please, and that the officials of the
Ministry of Health are reduced to explaining the disconcerting
uncertainty of their statistics by alleging a change in the biological
properties of a disease !
More troublesome still, there is the unwelcome task of disposing,
statistically, the cases of ' encephalitis lethargica ' which refuse
to display lethargy !
The really serious aspect, however, of the present state of
uncertainty and confusion arising from the reluctance to face
fundamental questions and to discuss what is meant by ' a disease,'
is this, that observation is hampered, communication is difficult,
discussion useless, and generalization impossible. And, in a
large measure, the blame attaches to official investigators who,
taking charge of affairs in 1918, did not properly set out to in-
vestigate the whole of the relevant circumstances, the whole pack
of cards, but confined their attention to the cases attracting most
attention, the cards that lay uppermost. They should have first
discussed all available referents ; but, as the title of the official
report shows — An Inquiry into an Obscure Disease, Encephalitis
Lethargica — the real question at issue was begged from the first.
It was assumed that there were two existent entities — PoUo-
myelitis and Encephalitis Lethargica — and the investigators then
proceeded to inquire whether or no these* entities were 'the
same,' finally concluding that they were not. No one, of course,
disputes the difference between the two references, but the
official investigators did not discuss the adequacy of the two
references in respect of the referents, or the advantages of main-
taining (as some of us proposed) the single reference symbolized
as Heine-Medin Disease. Had the latter course been followed,
we should have been spared the melancholy spectacle of men of
science distinguishing specffically between three ' entities ' by
regarding each as characterized by a special feature sometimes
present to all (Crookshank, British Medical Journal, 1920, ii.,
916). Yet so it was : and, by a report on the designs of the
queen of clubs and two of hearts we were called upon to know the
characters of the two groups : the ' red court ' and the ' black
plain ' !
And so, those of us who, casting the eye as it were over all
the cases in a prevalence, see order, gradation, and continuity,
as well as the need for cross-referencing amongst all the members
of a series, are treated with as much disdain as if we declared one
end of the spectrum to be the same as the other ! We desire to
bring our experiences under as few general references as are
possible and are compatible ^with practical working in com-
munication : we are told that we are confusing separate entities,
diseases that are analogous but sui generis, and not the same !
Moreover, our offence is the more heinous in that we have come
to see that the physicians of the i6th century were right in
maintaining with Brorstrom and Hamer of to-day, that the
nervous cases brought by Wickman under the Heine-Medin
reference, together with those called ' Encephalitis Lethargica '
by the Ministry of Health, occur epidemically at the times
when the respiratory and gastro-intestinal catarrhs that we call
Influenza abound (Cf. op. cit., Influenza : Essays by Several
Authors).
SUPPLEMENT II 353
It is unthinkable, say in effect the officials, that Influenza,
Poliomyelitis, PoUo-encephalitis and Encephalitis Lethargica,
should all be " the same " ! The cases we call influenza are not
those we call by any of the other names, and we can trace no
relation between the cases we call by these different names except
those of time and space ! (Cf. Rep. C.M.O. to Min. of Health,
1919-20, p. 48.)
It is, however, only fair to state that, in a more recent document
{Min. of Health : Reps, on Pub. Health, etc.. No. 11, Encephalitis
Lethargica) it is no longer suggested that, in 191 8, we were
present at the birth of a new disease : that of a new conception
is spoken of instead. But, is there a difference ? And after all,
scholastic realism comes to the front again, for Prof. Macintosh's
dictum that " encephalitis lethargica is a disease . . . distinct
from analogous affections " is quoted with approval {loc. cit., p. 126),
while the British Medical Journal (1922, ii., p. 654) declares the
report in question to show that encephalitis lethargica and
poliomyelitis have separate identity !
It may be asked, does anyone who writes thus mean only that
the concepts are different ? We admit so much : but w^e question
their validity, or adequacy. Their validity and adequacy appear
even more gravely perilled than before, when the official apologist
goes on to write of certain cases and epidemics in Australia in
191 7-1 8, which some of us would bring under the Heine-Medin
umbrella, but which do not correspond to any one of the favoured
official references. The Ministry of Health's representative,
abandoning for the nonce all talk of Protean characteristics,
changing biological properties, and half-way houses, declares that
the Australian " condition appears to be quite distinct from "
encephalitis lethargica, and (presumably) from all other entities,
separate identities, analogous affections and diseases sui generis.
So that, again unafraid of Occam's razor, once more are entities
multiplied without necessity.
Moreover, the retention of the symbol ' Encephalitis Lethar-
gica ' for a reference which, whatever its constitution for the
moment, has to serve for referents which are frequently not
lethargic and are usually more than encephalitic, is itself admitted
to require justification. The retention of this name, we are told,
is justified by right of primogeniture and the " fortune of illus-
trious parentage " : by its " clothing the concept in the language
which is common to scientists of all countries " ; and " partly,
perhaps, for euphonious reasons " {Ibid., p. i).
Perhaps, when Medicine is again a Science, we shall require
something more than ' euphonious reasons ' from our officials
when discussing the accuracy of symbolizations, but one excellent
example of ' euphonious reasoning ' must here be given. It is
this : that " no reliable evidence is forthcoming in favour of the
identity of influenza and encephalitis lethargica."
Here, though we have not the faintest indication of the sense
in which the official writer uses the words ' influenza ' and
encephalitis lethargica ' — though we know not whether he has
in mind the names (symbols) or the concepts (references) — we
may be in agreement with him. It is unthinkable that there
should be reliable evidence in favour of the identity of different
names, concepts, or happenings.
354 SUPPLEMENT II
I would as soon believe in the identity of the two ends of a
stick. Nevertheless, though I fully and frankly admit that one
end of the stick is not the other ; is in fact distinct from it (even
though ' analogous ' thereto) ; has separate identity, and is an
end sui generis, I know that I shall fail to advance appreciation,
in official quarters, of a point of view which, though possibly
impolitic, is at any rate not intrinsically irrational.
It seems clear then that, under the conditions of discussion
imposed by present habits of thought and expression, debate is
little profitable : at any rate, in Medicine.
Ultimately, no doubt, the pressure of collective experience
will lead to the formation of fairly sound and workable, though
unscientifically constructed and chosen, references and symbols
concerning all the clinical and epidemiological happenings here
alluded to : that is, if common sense be not, as usual, overborne
by pseudo-science and mere jargon.
But there should be, and is, a better and more speedy way : —
namely, to make up our minds at the beginning concerning the
questions treated of in the present volume.
It was with some such purpose as that of the Authors of this
Theory of Signs that, six or seven years ago, the present v/riter,
at a meeting of the Epidemiological Section of the Royal Society
of Medicine, attempted to expound the distinction between
Names, Notions and Happenings, or (as may otherwise be said)
between Words, Thoughts and Things. He met with but scant
applause, and was told by one of our most distinguished medical
administrators that only a Christian Scientist could doubt the
reality of Toothache, for example. He had it at the time of
speaking, he said, and so was quite sure about it. After this, the
debate came to an end, but the paper then read has been reprinted
in the book of essays on Influenza to which reference has been
already made, together with some further attempted elucidation
of the questions at issue.
There can be no doubt of the importance to Medicine, if
Medicine is to resume her place amongst the Sciences, of the
further exploration of these issues by some such way of approach
as that sought by the present writer, and far more ably con-
sidered by Mr Ogden and Mr Richar,ds.
The object of this note will have been attained if, by the
presentation of a living problem of to-day, the necessity to
Medicine of a Theory of Signs, is brought home to her Pro-
fessors and Practitioners, but it is hoped that, in a future
volume in this Library, it may be possible to include a study
SUPPLEMENT II 355
of the whole subject under the title of The Theory of Medical
Diagnosis.
In the meantime, however, Dr Simon Flexner, the celebrated
investigator and authority, of the Rockefeller Institute, nailing
his labels to the mast, declares himself, in the American Journal
of the Medical Sciences for April 1926, " as one holding the view
that epidemic influenza and epidemic encephalitis are distinct
entities,''
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Abidhamma, 38
Abstractions, growth of, 63-4, 113-
14, 213 ff.
Acquaintance, 49
Adaptation, 53-4, 75, 200-1
Adequacy, 11, 102
Adjectives. loi, 188, 214, 273
Affective resonance, 42-3
American Indians, 7
Amnesia, 219
Amoeba, 294-5
Aphasia, 162, 218-19
Apperception, 51
Argonauts of the Western Pacific, 39
Assertion, 112, 257
Associationism, 51
AUM, 39
Beauty, 114, 123-4, I34» ^39 ff»
185-6, 222
Behaviourism, 13-14, 22-3
Being, the World of, 30-2, 49-50, 64,
89. 95-7' 153. 189, 207, 272
Beliefs, 67-71, 226, 257-8
Buddhism, 38
Carapace, 42
Cause, 51, 54-5, 57-8, 62, 75, 105,
119, 254
Children, 20, 28, 40, 61, 64, 66, 81,
150, 210-11, 221-2, 242, 251-2
Chinese, 35
Colour, 75, 80, 82, 104-5, 183, 236-8
Communication, 10, 19, 26, 87, 96,
205, 230
Compounding of references, 67-8,
71-2, 213-14
Concepts, 8, 30, 49, 70, 99-100,
271-3
Connotation^ 89, 92, 111-12, 187-90
Contexts, .52-9, 62-3, 68-9, 105,
App. B.
Conversation, 8-9, 15, 18, 122-3,
126 ff., 225, 316
Correctness, 11, 102, 206
Correspondence between thoughts,
words, and things, 2, 10-12, 96,
212, 253-5
Datum, 80
Definition, 5, 15, 91-2, 109 ff., m,
121-2, 129-30, 142 ff.
Degenerates, 136
Denotation, 187-90
Dictionary meaning, 129-30, 187, 207
Differential equations. 75
Discussion, 10, 15, 90-5, 107-8, 113,
115-16, 120, 121 ff., 139, 146, 151,
192. 196, 206, 216, 241, 243-4, 295
Double language hypothesis, 22
Education, 107, 123, 210-11, 221-2,
242, 250-2, 261-2
Emotive language, 10, 82, 123-6,
147-51, 153-9. 223-7, 231-6, 259-60
Engrams, 52-3
Essence, 51, 167-8, 187-90
Ethnologists, 6-8
Expansion, 84, 93-4, 103, 107, 242
Expectation, 51-4, 62-3
Expression, 196, 231
External world, 20, 57, 62, 79 ff.,
96-7, 254, App. B.
Fairies, 98
Falsity, 62, 66-71, App. B.
Fictiojis, 98-9, 188, 295
Foundations of /Esthetics, The, iv,
143, 156
Functions of language, 10, 123-6,
147-51, 222-7, 230-6, 257, 259-60
Generality, 62, 63-6, 95 ff.
Genus, 93-4, 109-10
Gestalt, 53
Gesture language, 15, 115
Good, 124-5, 146-7, 207
Good use, 129-30, 206-7, 221
Grammar, 7-8, 45, 91, 96-8, loi, iii,
151-3, 204, 212, 221-3, 226, 230-3,
App. A.
Graphomania, 45
Greek, 34 ff., 161
Hebrew, i. 224
Hypostatization, 99, 133-4, 185, 255,
294
358
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Ideas, 7, 20, 70-1, 196
Images, 22-3, 55, 60-2, 66, 174-5,
202
Imputed relations, 116
Indo-European languages, 6, 252
Influenza, 43
Initial signs, 21-2, 80-4, 210
Intension, iii, 192
Intention, 60, 191-6, 225, 272
Interpretation, 15-16, 51, 55-7, 62,
75. 79-81
Introspection, 20, 48, 63, 201-3
Intuition, 153, 157, 241
Irritants, 135
Judgment, 48
Laws of thought, 105-6
Levels of interpretation, 86, 93-4,
128, 209, 219-20, 223
Listener, the, 231-2, 259-60
Logic, 4, 40, 87, 121, 153
Logical form, 68. 70-1, 97, 220
Logos, 31-2
Lying, 17-18, 194
Materialism, 81
Mathematics, 29, 88-90, 92, 104,
121, 153, 203. 207
Meaning of Psychology, The, iv,
xii, 14, 22, 52-3, 66
Medicine, 20- 1, 43, loi. Supplement
Mendicants, 137
Metaphor, 96, 102-3, iii, 213-14,
220, 240, 255
Metaphysics, 14, 26, 41-3, 78, 82,
93» 97. 198, 222, 256, 261
Metre, 239-40
Misdirection, 17-19, 194
Mysticism, 40. 88-9, 153-4, 255-6
Negative facts, 33, 68, App. E
Nomads, 137
Nominal entities, 188
Nominalism, 43, 79, 256
Onomancy, 36
Onomatopoeia, 12, 36
Perception, 22, 49, 77 ff., 121
Phantom problems, 53, 64, 84, 95-
102, 201
Philology, 2-6, 8, 227, 230
Philosophy, 29, 93, 98, 157, 205
Phonetic subterfuge, 133
Physics, 13-14, 84-5, loi, iii, 159,
239, 255
Physiology, 52, 80-2, 163, 219
Places as verbal entities, 13
' Places * of referents, 93, 105-7, 292
Poetry, 148-9, 151, 235-40
Pragmatism, 180, 198
Primitive language, 2, 6-7, 96-7, 212,
252, 254, 260, Supplement I.
Principles of Literary Criticism, iv,
xii, 52, 133, 159, 213
Probability, 59, 73-5
Proper names, 212, 273-4
Propositions, 49, 73-4, 102, 2565.
Prose and poetry, 235, 238
Prose-styles, 108, 234, 303
Psittacism, 217-18
Psycho-analysis, 13, 23, 180, 2<X),
219
Psychology, 8. 13, 55-6, 98, 253,
263-4
Pyrrhonisnl, 39
Pythagoreans, 32 ff.
Realists, 30. 40, 82, 93 ff., 100, 141,
1645.
Reference, 9-1 1, 60, 62-6, 90-1, 115,
149 fif., 194-5. 223, 263, 309
Referent, 9 ff., 62, 71, 105, App. B.
Reflex, conditioned, 66
Refraction, linguistic, 96, 98
Relativity, 13
Representation, 12
Rhythm, 239-40
Scepticism, 47
Science and Poetry, iv, xiii
Semantics, 2-4
Semantic shift, 129-30
Semeiotic, 281-z
Sentences, and words, 258 tf.
Separation, method of, 142-6
Significance, 192, 196, 287
Signification, 187
Signifies, 192, 281
Signs, 19-23, 38-9. 5o» 57. 78-9. 82-6,
201, 223-4, App. C.
Simulative and non-simulative lan-
guage, distinguished, 12, 254
Solipsism, 20
Speaker, 215 ff.
Spiritualists, 82, 98
Subject and predicate, 97, 256, 259*60
Subject-object relation, 48-51
Subsistence, 30, 94-7, 189, 207
Substitution, 5, 92, iio-ii, 207
Sufism, 39
Suggestion, 45, 51
Symbolic accessories, 98
Symbolic devices, 94 ff., 188-9, 204-5,
259 ; see also Verbal shorthand
Symbolization, 11, 14, 203
Symbols, 9-12, 14, 23, 88, 203-7,
223-4
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
359
Synaesthesis, 156
Synonyms, 92, 126, 206
Thinking, 48, 204
Translation of foreign languages,
228-30
Translation of propositions, 107
Triangle of reference, 1 1
Truth, II, 62, 95, 101-2, 151, 205,
257-8
Uniform recurrence, 58-9
Universal language, 44
Universals, 45, 49, 62, 64, 70, 95 £f.
Universe of discourse, 102, iii, 120
Urteil, das, 49
Urtier, das, 99
Utraquistic subterfuge, 134
Verbal shorthand, 12, 14, 74, 95-6,
i47> 205
Verbomania, 40, 45
Word-freedom and word-depend-
ence. 44, 215-18
Word Magic, iv, xii, 38, 40, 44
Yoga system, 39
INDEX OF NAMES
Abbott, E. A., i8
Abbott, Lyman, i6
Adonai/20
Adrian VI., 37
Aenesidemus, 39. 78, App. C.
iEschylus, 36
Alexander, 120, 135, 164
Allah, 28
Allendy, 32-3
Ammonius, 34-6
Andronicus, 35
Anselm, 44
Antisthenes, viii
Aristotle, ix, 20, 32, 34-6, 38, 105,
109, 242, 256-7, 260
Arnold, 137
Augustus, 37
Ausonius, 36
Bacon, 43, 92
Baldwin, ix, 20, 58, 184, 232, 259,
277-9
Baudelaire, 77
Bawden, 180
Bax, 184
Beck, 276
Bell, Clive, 139. 236
Bentham, xiv, 44
Bentley, i
Bergson, 45, 154-6, 238, 255
Berkeley, 42, 44, 83
Boas, 7
Bonaventura, 255
Bosanquet, 135, 139, 166
Bradley, A. C, 148, 183
Bradley, F. H., 162^ 273
Br6al, vi, 2-4
Broad, 177
Brooke, 140-1
Brunot, 232, 251-2
Budge, 27
Butler 179
Byron, 45
Cabot, 181
Caesar, 37
Campbell, 45
Carnap, 153
Carr, 179
Cassirer, 44
Cecil, Lord Hugh, xi
Chaucer, 130
Cicero, 37
Clodd, 26
Coleridge, 148
Conan Doyle. 98
Condillac, 44
Confucius, 28, 209
Conington, 227
Comford, 26, 31-2
Cou6, 39, 45
Couturat, 89, 153
Croce, 135, 139-41, 228-9
Crookshank, 43, loi, Supplement I J.
Cuchulain, 214
Das, Bhagavan, 39
Dasgupta, 39
Delacroix, 6, 153
Delgarno, 44
Demos, 291, 293
De Quincey, 37
De Saussure, 4-6, 232
Dewey, 132-3, 181
Dickens, 259
Dionysius Thrax, ix
Dittrich, 231, 259, 275-7
Donaldson, 254
Drake, 165
Duns Scotus, 109, 256, 281
Eaton, 55, 88, 292
Erdmann, K. O., ix, 42
Eucken, 183
Farrar, 36-7
Florence, P. Sargant, 136
Forsyth, 181
Foucher, 39
Frazer, J. G., 25, 27
Frege, 89, 273-4
Freke, 44
Friend, 28
Fry, Isabel, 261
Callus, Aelius, 38
Gardiner, 193, 230, 298-9
GeDius, 38
Geyser, 270-2
Goethe, 99
361
3^2
INDEX OF NAMES
Gomperz, H., 259, 274-7
Gomperz, T., 34
Gregory of Naz., 39
Grote, G., 257
Guignebert, 40
Haldane, 177
Hale, 261
Harris, I., 183
Hartley, 51
Head, 162, 218-19, 298-9
Hearn, Lafcadio, 235-6
Hegel, 29
Helmholtz, 78-9
Henry VIII., v, 27
Heracleitus, 32
Hermann, 261
Herodotus, 28
Hicks, 39, 267-8
Hobbes, 43, 109
Hoernle, 85
Holt, 54, 167
Hopkins, 28
Hugo, Victor, 24, 136
Humboldt, 231
Hume, xiv, 139
Husserl, ix, 50, 269-72
Ingraham, 46
Jackson, General, 216
Jahweh, 28
James, H., xiv
James, W., 41, 198, 257, 279
Jelliffe, 23
Jespersen, vi, 252, 261
Jesus, 16
Joachim, 162, 166
Johnson, Edward, 160
Johnson, W. E., loi, 189-90, 291
Joseph, 192
Jowett, 29
Julia, 37
Kaiit, 79, 157, 261
Keith, 39
Keynes, J. M., 49, 73. 178
Kiihtmann, 79
Labeo, Antistius, 38
Ladd, 182
Laird, 85, 177
Lange, 51
Lao Tse, i
Laurie, 198
Lawrence, D. H., 159
Leathes, 197
Leibnitz, ix, i, 44, 87, no
Lersch, 38
Lewis, Sir G. C, xiv
Liguori, Alfonso de, 17
Lipps. 49
Lloyd Morgan, 51-3, 180
Locke, ix, xiv, 44, 137, 139
Longinus, 148
Lotze, 182
Lovejoy, 135, 165
Maccoll, 39
Macculloch, 26
McDougall, 180
Mackail, 148
Mackenzie, Sir J., 178
Mackenzie, J. S., xiv, 238
McTaggart, 177
Madvig, 252
Mahaffy, 8
Maier, 35-6
Malinowski, ix, 12, 39. Supple-
ment I.
Margoliouth, 36
Martinak, 194, 232, 276
Marty, ix
Maturin, 185
Mauthner, ix, 35, 44
Meinong, ix, 50
Mervoyer, 37
Meumann, 222
Meyrick, 17
Mill, James, 89
Mill, J. S., xiv, 89, 133. 136. 187,
190
Miller, 51, 180
Montague, 18
Moore, A. W., 278
Moore. G. E., 112, 125, 141, 181
Moore, G. P., 27
Moore, J. S., 173 ff.
Moses, 28
Miiller, Max, ix, 44, 136
Munsterberg, 169 ff., 196, 222, 248
Nansen, 109
Nettleship, 177
Newman, 18
Newton, 200
Nicholson, 39
Nietzsche, xiv, 153
Nunn, 164
Occam, William of, 43, 78
O'Shea, 222
Osiris, 28
Palladius, 209
Parker, 182
Parmenides, 33
Parsons, 162-3
Pater, 227
INDEX OF NAMES
363
Patrick, 98
Paul of Tarsus, 24
Pavlov, 66
Peano, 294
Pear, x
Peirce, ix, i, 44, 216, 279-90
Perry, 167, 182
Philodemus, 268
Photius, 266-7
Pieron, 218, 220
Pike, 27
Pillsbury, 179
Pitkin, 164
Plato, viii, 31 ff.
Plotinus, 37 o
Poincar6, xiv
Powell, 90
Pra9astapada, loi
Prantl, 36
Prasad, Rama, 39
Pratt, 165
Putnam, 180
Ramsey, 97
Read. 134
Reid, 85
Rhys Davids, 38
Ribot, 41-2, 136, 219
Richardson, 182
Rignano, 40-3, 89
Rogers, 166
Rotta, 34
Rougier, 83, no
Rousseau, 222
Royce, 177
Ruskin, 139
Russell, B., ix, 30-1, 50, 54*5, 62,
68, 96, 160-3, 177' 190, 196-7, 253..
273-4, 298
Sachs, 109
Saintsbury, 236
Santayana, 139, 167-8, 187, 189
Sapir, 7-8, loi, 228, 260
Saulez, 224
Schiller, 160-2, 191
Schlesinger, v
Schopenhauer, 132
Schroeder, 279
Schustel^xiv, 87
Scipio, 37
Sell, 28
Sellars, 168-9
Semon, 51-2
Sevenis, 37
Sextus, 39 266-8
Shakespeare, 99, 160
Sheffield, 181, 258
Shelley, 238
Sidgwick. A., 136, 162
Silberer. 44
Sinclair, 16
Smart, 221
Smith, Sydney, 227
Smith, Whately, 98
Sonnenschein, 252. 261
Sophocles, 36
Sorbi^re, 39
South, 24
Spalding, 184
Spencer, xiv, 109
Spiller. 181
Spinoza, 198
Steinthal, ix, 36, 44, 232
Stephen, K., 264-5
Stout ix, 135, 179
Strong, 162, 168, 191
Sulla, 35
Sully, 222
Taine, ix, 44, 89
Taylor, 32
Temple. 183
Thales, 31
Theophrastus, 35, 36
Thucydides, 18 " .
Titchener, 58, 174, 179
Tolstoi, 139
Tooke, Home, ix, 44
Trendelenburg, 34
Urban, 180, 199
Urwick, 150, 179
Vaihinger, 99
Valcknaer, 48
Van Ginneken, 50
Van Gogh, 183
Vendryes, 152-3
Von der Gabelentz, 152
Washington, General, 216
Watson, 22
Weeks, 78
Welby, Sir C, 279
Welby, Lady V., ix, 160, 192, 279,
281, 287-8
Westermarck, 17
Whewell, 34
Whitehead, 5, loi, 121, 298
Whitman, Walt, 24, 229
Whittaker, 37
Wilde, 109
Wilkins, 44
Wilson, Kinnier, 219, 241
Wittgenstein, 89, 253, 255
Wolff, 79
Wolseley, Lord, 17
Wood, James, 143
Wundt. ix. 231
Yeats, 45
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11